JP6537074B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as "pachinko machine") and a drum-type gaming machine (generally referred to as "pachislot machine").

  Conventionally, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to hit based on the game ball entering the starting opening, and when the lottery result is hit, a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state A gaming machine that generates a state is known. As this type of gaming machine, there has been known a gaming machine capable of providing a predetermined gaming profit when the gaming ball passes a specific area in the special gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2013-103091, A

Although the above gaming machine is configured to change the difficulty of entering the gaming ball to the specific area based on the lottery result so as to increase or decrease the expectation for the predetermined gaming profit, some abnormality or fraud occurs and the gaming profit There is a risk that the player or the game arcade operating company may be disadvantaged and distrusted if the mode of granting the condition is different from the assumption . The present invention gives a player or a game arcade operator a sense of disadvantage or disbelief in a gaming machine capable of giving a predetermined gaming profit when the gaming ball passes a specific area in order to solve the problem. It aims at providing a game machine which controls that.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention is
A lottery is performed based on the passage of game media through the start area provided in the gaming area, and if the result of the lottery is a predetermined result, control is made to a special gaming state more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. A gaming machine capable of providing predetermined gaming benefits when gaming media pass through a specific area in the special gaming state,
Special game state control means capable of controlling the special game state in a plurality of modes in which game media may pass through the specific area;
Peripheral control means for performing predetermined effect control;
Equipped with
The special game state control means has a high probability of passing game media through the specific area when controlling the special game state in a difficult-to-pass mode in which game media is unlikely to pass through the specific area. Controlling the special game state in an aspect,
When a lottery based on the game media having passed the first startup area of the startup areas is performed, the lottery based on the game media having passed the second startup area of the startup areas It is more likely that the special gaming state can be controlled in the difficult-to-pass mode by the special gaming state control means than in the case where the special game state is controlled, and the special gaming state can be controlled in the easy passing mode. Is low,
The peripheral control means
When a game medium passes the specific area in the special game state controlled in the difficult passage mode, when a game medium passes the specific area in the special game state controlled in the easy passage mode Abnormal alarm control for notifying passage of the specific area in a predetermined mode that is not performed is started based on satisfaction of a condition for starting notification,
When the lottery based on the game medium having passed through the first start area while performing the abnormality notification control, or the lottery based on the game medium having passed through the second start area is performed It is possible to continue to carry out the anomaly notification control under execution,
Furthermore, even if the special gaming state is newly controlled in the difficult passage mode or the easy passage mode while performing the abnormality notification control, the abnormality notification control in progress may be continuously performed. It is possible, even if the newly controlled special game state is the difficult-to-pass mode and game media passes through the specific area in the newly controlled special game state, it is still being executed. It is characterized in that the abnormality notification control is left without being cleared.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing giving a sense of disadvantage or disbelief.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the back. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state which made the door frame open from the main body frame, and made the main body frame open from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and was seen from back. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at a door frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member, and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of the door frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the saucer unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit into every main member, and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit of a plate unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is the perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation unit into every main member, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation unit into every main member, and was seen from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the mounting base unit of the rendering operation unit, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the mounting base unit and was seen from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the touch unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the touch unit and was seen from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the button unit of the rendering operation unit, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the button unit and was seen from the bottom. It is a top view of a saucer unit. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a rendering operation unit in the AA cross section in FIG. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a rendering operation unit in the BB cross section in FIG. (A) is a front view of the door lower right rendering unit of the plate unit, (b) is a right side view of the door lower right rendering unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the door lower right production unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door lower right production unit from the back. It is CC sectional drawing in the door lower right rendering unit of FIG.34 (b). It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door lower right rendering unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door lower right rendering unit and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotary body internal unit of the door lower right rendering unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotary body internal unit and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of the door lower right rotating body of the door lower right rendering unit facing forward, and (b) is a front view of the door lower right rotating body facing backward. (A) is a perspective view seen from the front in a state where the upper countersinking unit of the countersink unit is attached to the countersink unit base, (b) is from behind with the upper countersink retractor mounted on the countersink unit base It is the seen perspective view. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper countersinking unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper countersinking unit, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower disc ball extraction unit of a disc unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower disc ball extraction unit from the back. It is a front view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked over the game board from the back. It is a front view of center goods etc. in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at center goods etc. from the right front. It is a rear view of center goods etc. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the surface plate from the center product. It is a front view of the center character which removed the surface plate. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the attacker unit from the center goods. It is a front view of the center thing which removed the surface plate and the attacker unit. It is a perspective view of the center thing which removed the surface plate It is a rear view of the center character which removed the attachment unit. It is a perspective view of the center character which removed the attachment unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lost ball | bulb guideway cover from the center product which removed the tacker unit. It is the rear view which removed the lost ball guideway cover from the center character which removed the tacker unit. (A) is a front view of an attacker unit, (b) is a rear view thereof, and (c) is a perspective view thereof. It is an exploded perspective view of an attacker unit. (A) is a front view of an attacker unit base, (b) is a rear view thereof, (c) is a perspective view seen from the front right, and (d) is a perspective view seen from the rear right. (A) is a front view of a taxi way distribution unit, (b) is a rear view thereof, and (c) is a perspective view thereof. (A) is a front view of the right attachment release unit, (b) is a rear view, (c) is a perspective view thereof, and (d) is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the right attachment release unit from the right front The figure, (e) is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the right attachment release unit as viewed from the rear right. The front view of a guideway distribution unit, (b), the AA sectional view taken on the line of (a). The side view of a guideway distribution unit, (b), the BB sectional view taken on the line of (a). It is the perspective view which looked over the game board from the back. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a delivery control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 69 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 68. It is the schematic of the various detection signals input / output to the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board which relays the electrical connection of the delivery control board which comprises a main board, CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 69 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 68. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of peripheral control MPU. It is a block diagram of a sound source built-in VDP periphery in a liquid crystal and sound control part. It is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 74 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 74. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit. FIG. 6 is a circuit diagram showing an interface circuit for communication between the main control substrate and the peripheral control substrate. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit etc. of a payment control part. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit. FIG. 80 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 80. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout motor drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input / output circuit. FIG. 6 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from a main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to a delivery control board from a main control board. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to a periphery control board from a main control board. It is a table showing continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board of FIG. 86 to the peripheral control board. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands from the delivery control board which a main control board receives. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main process in a main control board. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power supply disconnection occurrence. It is a flow chart which shows an example of timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a starting opening prize winning process. It is a flow chart which shows change start processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change pattern setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during change. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit game start processing. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a small hit game start process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit game processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit game processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table structure in the random number memory | storage means for special symbols. It is a table | surface which shows each characteristic for every classification of big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the change pattern table which may be normally selected in an external disadvantageous game state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a submain process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of 16 ms regular processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of decoration symbol variation start processing (Step S1210). It is a flow chart which shows an example of decision processing (Step S1225a) of stop design in the 1st production mode. It is a flow chart which shows an example of decision processing (Step S1225b) of a stop design in the 2nd production mode. (A) is a diagram for explaining the extension effect pattern at the time of the big hit, (b) is a diagram for explaining the extension effect pattern at the time of the small hit, (c) is a challenge bonus effect pattern for the big hit It is a figure for demonstrating, (d) is a figure for demonstrating the challenge bonus presentation pattern at the time of a small hit. It is a time chart which shows an example of the display effect which appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when one of the effect commands “01H” to “04H” is received from the main control MPU 4100 a side. It is a time chart which shows an example of the display effect which appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when one of the effect commands “09H” to “11H” is received from the main control MPU 4100 a side. (A) is a table which shows the big hit expectation degree etc. in the 1st production mode, etc. separately for each production content series, and (b) is the challenge bonus rush expectation degree in the 2nd production mode Etc. are tables showing the presentation content series separately. It is a time chart which shows another example about the display production pattern matched with production command "01H" in the 1st production mode. It is a time chart which shows another example about the display production pattern matched with production command "02H" in the 1st production mode. It is a table showing the kind of big hit by the displayed symbol. It is a table showing the opening mode of the special winning opening. Fig. 118 is a table showing a supplement of Fig. 118. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit game state. It is a time chart near the 11th round in a case where one of the time saving symbol 2 to 6 is displayed. It is a time chart near the 11th round in the case where the time saving symbol 1 is displayed. It is an example of the management table of a parameter. It is a flowchart of a setting process of a parameter. It is a flow chart of game history information information form setting processing. It is a flow chart of game history information information execution processing. It is an example of the form by which the abnormal identification symbol is displayed superimposed on the color background on the screen of the symbol display device. It is an example of alerting | reporting of historical information using the rotatable combination which can be driven. It is an example of a form of a history information list. It is another example of the form of a history information list. It is yet another example of the form of the history information list. It is a flowchart of the alerting | reporting process of a historical information list.

  A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the entire configuration of a pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 9. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the front, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the rear. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front in a state in which the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 9 is a door frame for a pachinko machine, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from back.

  The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, A main unit frame 4 supported so as to be openable and closable, and removably attached to the main unit frame 4 from the front side, is made visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which game balls are hit.

  The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 is, as shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9, etc., an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend laterally, an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 which connect the both ends of 20 and extend vertically are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 have the same front and rear width. Further, the upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in front view The outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the left frame member 30 on the left end side in front view of the curtain plate member 50 are provided. The main frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is attached to a frame-like door frame base unit 100 having a through hole 111 which has a square outer shape in a front view and which penetrates back and forth, and a front lower portion of the door frame base unit 100 A bowl unit 200 having an upper tray 201 and a lower tray 202 capable of storing balls, a top unit 350 attached to the upper front of the door frame base unit 100, and a left side attached to the front left of the door frame base unit 100 The game ball stored through the unit 400, the right side unit 450 attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100, and the dish unit 200 through the front lower right portion of the door frame base unit 100 and stored in the upper plate 201 Handle unit 500 which can be operated by the player to drive the game board 5 into the game area of the game board 5, and the rear face of the door frame base unit 100. And the game cover of the upper tray 201 attached to the lower portion of the rear face of the door frame base unit 100, which receives the game ball which is accidentally dropped into the game area and discharged to the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200. A ball feed unit 540 for feeding to the ball launcher 680, a glass unit 560 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and closing the through hole 111, and a crime prevention cover 580 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 560 ing.

  The main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-like main frame base 600 which is partially insertable into the outer frame 2 and is capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and of the main frame base 600. It is attached to upper and lower ends of the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame A body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the side lower hinge members 150 are rotatably attached, a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the body frame base 600 in a front view, and a body frame base 600 The ball launcher 680 is attached to the lower front of the front and is for hitting a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and is attached to the right side of the main frame base in a front view. , And the door Locking unit 700 for locking between 3 and main body frame 4 and a reverse L-shaped payout attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and left side of main body frame base 600 to pay out the game ball to the player side A unit 800, a base board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main frame base 600, and a rear of the game board 5 attached to the rear of the main frame base 600 openably and closably attached to the main frame base 600 And a back cover 980.

  Dispensing unit 800 of body frame 4 is an inverted L-shaped dispensing unit base 801 attached to the rear side of body frame base 600 and attached to the top of dispensing unit base 801 and extends upward and leftwardly. A ball tank 802 for storing gaming balls supplied from a not-shown island facility in a box shape, and attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802, and the gaming balls in the ball tank 802 are left as viewed from the front A tank guide 803 extending to the left and right, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 at the upper left side in a front view and guiding the gaming ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner; Gaming balls which are detachably mounted on the lower side of the payout unit base 801 and guided by the ball guiding unit 820 A payout device 830 which pays out one by one based on an instruction from the payout control substrate housed in the payout control substrate box 950 and a gaming ball attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout device 830 downward And an upper full tank path unit 850 for releasing gaming balls from either the normal discharge port or the full tank discharge port according to the storage state of the game balls in the upper plate 201 in the plate unit 200; The game ball released from the normal outlet of the upper full tank passage unit 850 attached to the lower end is guided forward to guide the gaming ball forward from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3 and discharged from the full tank outlet. Lower full-tan ball path uni with full-tan taxiway guiding full game ball forward and guiding from the front end to full-tan ball receptacle 530 of door frame 3 Is provided with a door 860, a.

  The board unit 900 of the body frame 4 is attached to the back of the body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 with the board unit base 910 attached to the back side of the body frame base 600 in front view. The speaker unit 920, the power supply substrate box 930 mounted on the right side in front view on the rear side of the substrate unit base 910 and having the power supply substrate housed therein, and the rear side of the speaker unit 920 are interface controlled A payout control board box mounted over the interface control board box 940 in which the boards are housed, the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controlling the payout of gaming balls inside is housed And 950.

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game ball is struck as shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9 etc., and the game ball fired from the ball launcher 680 is the top of the game area 5a. A front component 1000 having a guide rail 1001 for guiding the game, a flat game panel 1100 attached to the rear of the front component 1000 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a, and a rear of the game panel 1100 Main control with a box-shaped substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower part and opened upward, and a main control board attached to the rear side of the substrate holder 1200 to control the game of the pachinko machine 1 A front unit having a substrate box 1300 and a plurality of winning openings that can be installed in the gaming area 5a on the front side of the gaming panel 1100 and can receive gaming balls thrown into the gaming area 5a ( (Not shown) and a back unit (not shown) having a liquid crystal display device attached to the back side of the game panel 1100 above the substrate box 1200 and visible from the player side through the game panel 1100. There is.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle lever 504 in a state where game balls are stored in the upper plate 201, the ball launcher 680 plays the game with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. A ball is driven into the game area 5 a of the game board 5. Then, when the gaming ball driven into the game area 5a is received by the winning opening not shown, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out by the payout device 830 to the upper tray 201 according to the accepted winning opening. . Since the interest of the player can be enhanced by the payout of the game balls, the game balls in the upper tray 201 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. FIG. 10 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, and FIG. 11 is a rear view of the door frame. 12 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front right, FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 16 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear.

  The door frame 3 has a door frame base unit 100 having a frame-like outer shape in a front view, a plate unit 200 attached to the front lower portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a top attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100. The unit 350, the left side unit 400 attached to the front left of the door frame base unit 100, the right side unit 450 attached to the front right of the door frame base unit 100, and the front lower right of the door frame base unit 100 And a handle unit 500 mounted through the pan unit 200.

  Further, the door frame 3 is attached to the rear cover lower surface of the door frame base unit 100, the ball feed unit 540 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. And a crime prevention cover 580 covering a lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 560.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is, as shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, a plate-like door frame base 110 having a vertically long rectangular outer shape and having a through hole 111 penetrating in the front and back direction; A tubular handle attachment member 120 attached to the front lower right corner of the door frame base 110 in front view and for attaching the handle unit 500, and a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110. The door frame side attached to upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left side in the front view and projecting forward and rotatably attached to the body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the body frame lower hinge member 640 of the body frame 4 The upper hinge member 140, the door frame side lower hinge member 150, and a glass that is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 for detachably attaching the glass unit 560. The unit mounting member 160, and a.

  Although the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 is vertically arranged in a row and bulges forward, and can store the game balls; an upper plate 201 and a lower plate 202; A plate unit base 210 attached to the front of the door frame base unit 100 and an upper plate liquid crystal display 244 attached to the plate unit base 210 on the front side of the upper plate 201 and capable of displaying an image; On the right side of the top plate 201 in a front view, the effect operation unit 220 having the touch panel 246 and the top plate effect button 257 operable by the player, the plate unit cover 260 covering the top plate 201 and the bottom plate 202 from the front side A door lower right rendering unit 270 having a door lower right rotating body 270A arranged and rotating according to the gaming state is covered from the front side of the door lower right rendering unit 270 A transparent effect unit cover 300, an upper tray ball removing unit 310 for removing game balls stored in the upper plate 201 into the lower plate 202, and a device for removing gaming balls stored in the lower plate 202 downward. A lower plate ball draining unit 320, and a ball lending operation unit 330 for operating a ball lending machine (not shown, also referred to as a CR unit) disposed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall, A top plate top decoration member 340 attached to the top of the tray unit base 210 and capable of emitting light is mainly provided.

  The top unit 350 of the door frame 3 is, as shown in FIG. 15 and FIG. 16 etc., a unit base 360 partially attached along the upper side of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and a unit base A translucent top decoration member 370 attached to the center of the right and left at the front of the 360 and bulging forward, and a top speaker mounted in the top decoration member 370 and outputting high-pitched sound ( A door frame upper decorative substrate 380 attached to the rear side of the unit base 360 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof is provided.

  The left side unit 400 of the door frame 3 has a flat unit base 410 mounted along the left outer peripheral edge of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, as shown in FIGS. A translucent left side decorative member 420 attached to the front of the base 410 and having its upper end extending to the left end of the top decorative member 370 of the top unit 350, and a front view door frame on the front side of the left side decorative member 420 A left speaker unit 430 attached at a position to be the upper left corner of 3 and having a left speaker (not shown), and a door frame attached to the rear side of the unit base 410 and having a plurality of LEDs attached to the front And a left decorative substrate 440.

  The right side unit 450 of the door frame 3 has a flat unit base 460 attached along the right outer periphery of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, as shown in FIGS. A translucent right side decorative member 470 attached to the front of the base 460 and having its upper end extending to the right end of the top decorative member 370 of the top unit 350, and a front view door frame at the front of the right side decorative member 470 A right speaker unit 480 mounted at a position to be the upper right corner of 3 and having a right speaker (not shown), and mounted between the unit base 460 and the right side decoration member 470 and having a plurality of LEDs on the front And a door frame right decoration substrate (not shown) to which is attached.

  The handle unit 500 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached to the handle main body 502 attached to the handle attachment member 120 of the door frame base unit 100 and the handle main body 502 as shown in FIGS. A handle lever 506 that can be pivoted by the player, and a handle cover 506 attached to the handle main body 502 from the front side of the handle lever 504 and rotatably supporting the handle lever 504 in cooperation with the handle main body 502 And have. Further, although not shown, the handle unit 500 is mounted in the handle body 502 and is operated by a handle operation sensor for detecting the rotation angle of the handle lever 504, and is attached to the handle body 502 and can be operated by the player. A stop button and a touch detection sensor attached to the inside of the handle body 502 for detecting contact between the player and the handle lever 504 are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 15 and FIG. 16 etc., the fal cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 and has a shallow box-like unit body 522 open on the front side, It mainly includes a flat lid member 524 attached to the front. The foul cover unit 520 penetrates back and forth at the upper left corner in a front view, and connects the normal guiding path of the lower full ball passage unit 860 of the main body frame 4 to the upper countersink supply port 210a of the dish unit 200. And 526, a full tank receiving hole 528 that opens rearward at the right side in a front view of the through ball passage 526 and can communicate with the full tank guiding path of the lower full ball unit 860 of the main body frame 4; A ball that opens upward at the right side of the ball socket 528 in a front view and receives a game ball (far ball) that has not been reached into the game area 5a despite being fired by the ball launcher 680 of the main frame 4 The ball receptacle 530 and the bowl unit 200 which is opened forward in the lower right corner in a front view and releases gaming balls received in the full ball receptacle 528 and the far ball receptacle 530. Includes a ball outlet 532 which communicates with the lower tray ball supply port 210c, the.

  The ball feed unit 540 of the door frame 3 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 542 and a box-like unit main body 542 which extends left and right and whose rear side is opened as shown in FIGS. The unit cover 544 removably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 in a box shape with the front side opened and in a front view right side of the fal cover unit 520, A ball entry port 546 to which gaming balls stored in 201 enter, a ball exit port 548 which can release game balls entering the ball entry port 546 and is opened toward the rear, a ball entrance The game ball which has entered into 546 can be discharged, and there is provided a ball discharge port 550 which is open toward the front below the ball entry port 546. Also, although not shown, the ball feeding unit 540 is a ball feeding solenoid for releasing game balls entering from the ball entrance 546 one by one from the ball outlet 548, and the game ball entering from the ball entrance 546 And a switching mechanism for switching either the ball outlet 548 side or the ball outlet 550 side.

  The glass unit 560 of the door frame 3 is attached to a frame-shaped unit frame 562 larger than the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 and to both front and rear sides of the unit frame 562 as shown in FIGS. And a pair of glass plates 564 closing the inside of the frame of the cage unit frame 562.

  The plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 17 to 33. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear. FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the effect operation unit of the pan unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the rendering operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from above, and FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the rendering operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from below. FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting base unit of the rendering operation unit as viewed from above, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting base unit as viewed from below.

  27 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit of the rendering operation unit as viewed from above, and FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit as viewed from below. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from above, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit as viewed from the bottom. 31 is a plan view of the pan unit, FIG. 32 is an enlarged sectional view of a part of the rendering operation unit in the AA section in FIG. 31, and FIG. 33 is a rendering operation in the BB section in FIG. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a unit.

  Further, FIG. 34 (a) is a front view of the lower right effect unit of the plate unit, FIG. 34 (b) is a right view of the lower effect unit of the door, and FIG. FIG. 36 is a perspective view of the door lower right rendering unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 37 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line C-C in the door lower right rendering unit of FIG. 34 (b). FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view of the door lower right rendering unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the door lower right rendering unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the rotating-body internal unit of the door lower right rendering unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the rotating-body internal unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 42 (a) is a front view of the door lower right rotating unit of the door lower right rendering unit facing forward, and FIG. 42 (b) is a front view of the door lower right rotating member facing backward.

  Further, FIG. 43 (a) is a perspective view as viewed from the front when the upper countersinking unit of the dish unit is attached to the dish unit base, and (b) is attached the upper countersinking unit to the dish unit base It is the perspective view seen from the back in the state. FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the upper countersink unit taken apart from the front, and FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the upper countersink unit taken out from the rear. FIG. 46 (a) is a perspective view of the lower bowl ball punching unit of the bowl unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 46 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the lower bowl ball punching unit disassembled and viewed from the front.

  The plate unit 200 bulges forward from the door frame base unit 100. The plate unit 200 is disposed from the upper plate 201 below the upper plate 201 and stores the game balls which are paid out from the payout device 830 and which hold gaming balls for hitting into the game area 5a. And a lower plate 202 capable of storing a ball. Further, the plate unit 200 is attached to the flat plate unit base 210 attached to the door frame base unit 100 and to the upper front of the plate unit base 210, and the left side is greatly expanded forward from the left and right center. And a lower plate main body 214 attached to the left and right center at the lower front of the plate unit base 210 and bulging forward largely to form the lower plate 202. .

  Further, the pan unit 200 covers the front and bottom sides of the rendering operation unit 220 attached to the front side of the upper pan body 212 and the front surface of the pan unit base 210, the upper pan body 212, the lower pan body 214, and the rendering operation unit. A tray unit cover 260 attached to the front of the tray unit base 210, a door lower right rendering unit 270 disposed on the right side of the rendering operation unit 220 and mounted to the front right portion of the tray unit base 210, a door lower right rendering unit A game unit cover 300 attached to the front of the tray unit base 210 covering the front side of the 270 and the gaming ball attached so as to sandwich the tray unit base 210 from the front and back and stored in the upper tray 201 of the upper tray main body 212 And the lower tray body 214 below the lower tray body 214. Mounted includes a lower tray ball vent unit 320 for discharging the game ball that is stored in the lower tray 202 downward, the.

  Furthermore, the bowl unit 200 is attached to the upper surface of the rendering operation unit 220, and a bowl rental operation unit 330 for operating a bowl rental machine arranged adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the gaming hall, It is attached to the upper part of the unit base 210, and it is attached to the light-decorable top tray top decoration member 340 and the front left side of the tray unit base 210 behind the tray unit cover 260 and can emit light forward. The unit is attached to the front right side of the dish unit base 210 behind the dish unit left decoration substrate 345 provided with a plurality of LEDs, behind the effect unit cover 300 and below the door lower right effect unit 270, and facing forward Dish unit right decoration board 346 equipped with a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light, and mounted on the back side of the dish unit base 210 An upper dish front decoration board 233, an upper dish back decoration board 235, an upper dish liquid crystal board 241, an excitation device 242, a touch panel 246, an effect button decoration board 251, an effect button press sensor 258, a door lower right relay board 281, A dish unit left decorative board 345 and a dish unit relay board 347 relaying the connection between the dish unit right decorative board 346 and the peripheral control board (not shown) of the game board 5 are provided.

  The dish unit base 210 of the dish unit 200 extends laterally to the entire width of the door frame base unit 100, as shown in FIGS. The pan unit base 210 penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the upper left corner in a front view, and penetrates back and forth under the upper pan and ball supply port 210a and extends in a cylindrical shape extending backward. A speaker slit 210b having a plurality of elongated holes extending vertically and vertically, a lower circular sphere feed port 210c penetrating longitudinally in the lower part in the left and right center of the front view and cylindrically extending backward, The ball feeding port 210c is provided with an upper flat ball feed port 210d which penetrates forward and backward in a front view upper right side of the ball feed port 210c and extends vertically and whose upper portion is positioned at the right end of the upper flat body 212.

  Further, the plate unit base 210 is a through hole 210e having a square inner periphery penetrating in the front and rear direction on the left side in a front view of the upper plate ball feed port 210d, and a receiving plate projecting forward from the lower side of the through hole 210e. Piece 210f, relief hole 210g penetrating back and forth in front right upper side of upper flat ball feed port 210d, and front and back in front right lower corner of front view and handle attachment member 120 of door frame base unit 100 is inserted Handle insertion port 210h, a cylinder insertion port 210i which is penetrated back and forth near the front right corner and through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted, and a right side front view of a cylindrical lower circular sphere supply port 210c And a notch 210j which is cut away from the rear end to the front in the side surface of the frame.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the upper plate main body 212 of the plate unit 200 has a large container bulging forward on the left side than the center in the front view, and is formed in a container shape opened upward and backward. ing. The upper tray main body 212 is opened only to the left and the rear on the right end side in a front view, and includes a guiding passage portion 212a through which the game ball can flow. In the upper tray main body 212, the bottom surface is inclined so as to lower the right end as a whole. More specifically, with the upper tray body 212 attached to the tray unit base 210, the bottom surface of the upper tray body 212 is from the lower position of the upper bowl ball supply port 210a to the gaming ball from the upper end of the upper bowl ball feed port 210d. It is inclined to be lower towards the position slightly lower than the outer diameter of. Thus, the game balls discharged forward from the upper ball supply port 210a can be received and stored in the upper plate main body 212, and the received game balls are received from the right end side of the guiding passage portion 212a. It can be supplied to the feed port 210d.

  Further, the upper plate main body 212 is provided with a metal ground fitting 212b which extends from the center on the left and right sides to the vicinity of the right end on the rear end side of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the grounding metal 212b is electrically grounded (earthed), and when the gaming balls are in contact, static electricity charged on the gaming balls can be removed.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the lower tray main body 214 of the tray unit 200 is formed in the shape of a container having a trapezoidal shape in which the rear end side is long with respect to the front end side and whose upper and rear are open. The lower bowl body 214 has a ball removal hole 214a which penetrates up and down at the bottom and can be closed by the lower bowl ball removal unit 320, and the bottom is inclined to become lower toward the ball removal hole 214a. doing. The lower dish main body 214 can receive and store gaming balls discharged forward from the lower dish ball supply port 210c of the dish unit base 210, and makes the gaming balls downward of the dish unit 200 from the ball extraction holes 214a. It can be discharged.

  As shown in FIG. 21 to FIG. 24, the rendering operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the attachment base unit 220A attached to the dish unit base 210 and the upper dish main body 212 at the center in the front view and the attachment base unit 220A. Touch unit 220B, a button unit 220C attached to the mounting base unit 220A on the left side in a front view of the touch unit 220B, and a plurality of cylindrical dampers 222 interposed between the touch unit 220B and the mounting base unit 220A The unit cover 224 is attached to the mounting base unit 220A so as to cover the outer periphery of the touch unit 220B and the button unit 220C from the upper side, and the decoration member 226 attached to the right end of the mounting base unit 220A in front view.

  The damper 222 of the effect operation unit 220 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and a groove 222a is formed over the entire periphery at the center in the axial direction on the outer peripheral surface. The damper 222 in the present embodiment is formed of synthetic rubber. The plurality of dampers 222 can reduce the impact (impact) acting on the mounting base unit 220 and the dish unit base 210 side by alleviating the impact when the touch unit 220B is struck, and the touch unit 220B will be described later. It can reduce that the vibration by the vibration excitation apparatus 242 is transmitted to the attachment base unit 220 or the dish unit base 210 side.

  The mounting base unit 220A of the rendering operation unit 220 is, as shown in FIGS. 23 to 26, a shallow box-shaped mounting base 230 mounted on the front of the dish unit base 210 and opened upward, and above the mounting base 230. A shallow box-shaped unit case 231 attached at the front end of the upper tray main body 212 and being open at the upper end capable of accommodating the touch unit 200B from the upper side and a horizontally long upper tray attached to the front end of the unit case 231 A unit cover which covers the front side of the upper plate front lens member 232 and the upper plate front decoration substrate 233 disposed between the front lens member 232, the upper plate front lens member 232 and the unit case 231 and having a plurality of LEDs at the front surface And 240. A translucent upper-dish front decoration member 234 attached to 224.

  The mounting base unit 220A is attached to the rear end of the unit case 231, and is provided with a plurality of LEDs for emitting light upward, and a decoration substrate 235 for upper dish and an upper side of the decoration board 235 for upper dish. Between the upper plate rear decorative member 236 having a light transmitting property disposed on the unit cover 224 and the upper plate rear decorative member 236 and the unit case 231 on the front side of the upper plate rear decoration member 236 And a cylindrical button attachment member 238 attached to the unit cover 224 on the right side in a front view of the upper back decoration member 236, and a button attachment member. And an upper disc ball release button 239 slidably mounted up and down by 238.

  The mounting base 230 is a flat-plate-shaped mounting side receiving portion 230a which is inclined downward from the approximate center of the front to the front, and the mounting side receiving portion 230a penetrates the mounting side receiving portion 230a. And a cylindrical cylindrical receiving portion 230c extending downward from the peripheral edge of the through hole 230b. The through hole 230 b has a rectangular inner periphery. The cylindrical receiving portion 230c is formed in a pyramidal cylindrical shape so as to be narrowed toward the lower side (see FIG. 33). More specifically, in the cylindrical receiving portion 230c, the front inner circumferential wall extends substantially perpendicularly to the surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a, and the rear inner circumferential wall is below the surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a. It inclines and extends forward as it goes to the other side. Further, the cylindrical receiving portion 230c extends so that the inner peripheral walls on the left and right sides are inclined such that the lower ends (tips) are slightly closer to each other with respect to the vertical of the surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a.

  The unit case 231 is opened upward and protrudes forward and backward from the accommodation recess 231a capable of accommodating the touch unit 220B and the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a in the front view from the front to the left and the other in a cylindrical shape. The horizontal support pin 231b, and a pair of front support pins 231c projecting in a cylindrical shape upward from the front end of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a at right and left, and from the left and right center of the bottom of the housing recess 231a It has a central support projection 231d projecting upward, and two receiving projections 231e projecting in a pyramid shape so as to be narrowed downward from the lower side of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a and separated to the left and right. .

  The unit case 231 is vertically and circularly penetrated vertically on the left side of the accommodation recess 231a, and is disposed around the insertion hole 231f through which the lower portion of the button unit 220C is inserted, and the insertion hole 231f on the upper surface. A button unit attachment portion 231g for attaching the button unit 220C, a linear light emitting portion 237b of a linear light emitting lens member 237 extending downward from the upper end and extending laterally from the outer peripheral wall on the rear side of the accommodation recess 231a And a notch portion 231h.

  The housing concave portion 231a of the unit case 231 is formed in a shape in which a shape in plan view is a combination of a square extending in the left and right direction and a trapezoid protruding outward from both left and right sides of the square. Further, the bottom of the square portion of the housing recess 231a is formed lower than the bottom of the trapezoidal portion of the left and right sides. The step on the bottom surface of the housing recess 231 a is formed slightly lower than the height (the length in the axial direction) of the damper 222.

  The four horizontal support pins 231 b protrude upward from the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion of the housing recess 231 a, and are formed so as to be insertable into the cylindrical damper 222. Further, the horizontal support pin 231b is provided with a truncated cone-shaped tapered portion 231i at the upper end side, the diameter of which decreases as going to the upper end side (see FIG. 32). The distance between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231 a and the middle of the tapered portion 231 i is the same as the length of the damper 222, and the entire length of the horizontal support pin 231 b is longer than that of the damper 222. The pair of front support pins 231 c is insertable into the cylindrical damper 222 and is formed to be slightly longer than a half length of the damper 222.

  The upper end of the central support protrusion 231d protrudes to the same height as the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion of the accommodation recess 231a. The receiving protrusion 231 e is formed in a truncated cone shape having a square outer periphery. The two receiving protrusions 231 e are formed at positions corresponding to the two through holes 230 b of the mounting base 230. In the receiving protrusion 231e, the outer peripheral wall on the front side extends substantially perpendicularly to the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a, and the outer peripheral wall on the rear side is inclined forward toward the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a. It extends. Further, the receiving projection 231e is extended so that the outer peripheral walls on the left and right sides are inclined so that the lower ends (tips) are slightly closer to the vertical of the surface of the housing recess 231a. The shape of the outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231 e corresponds to the shape of the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230 c of the mounting base 230. The lower end of the receiving protrusion 231e is inserted into the through hole 230a of the mounting base 231 in the assembled state, and a slight gap is formed between the receiving protrusion 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c.

  The upper front decoration member 234 exposes the front to the outside when the lower unit 200 is assembled. The upper dish and rear decoration substrate 235 includes a plurality of decorative LEDs 235a for emitting and decorating the upper dish and rear decoration member 236, and a plurality of peripheral LEDs 235b for emitting and decorating the linear light emitting lens member 237. .

  The linear light emitting lens member 237 is formed to be longer in the left and right than the upper dish rear decoration member 236, and the light receiving section 237a disposed on the upper side of the plurality of peripheral LEDs 235b of the upper dish rear decoration substrate 235; And a flat linear light emitting portion 237b fitted into the notch portion 231h of the unit case 231 in a continuous manner. In the linear light emitting lens member 237, the front surface of the linear light emitting portion 237a forms a part of the inner peripheral wall of the accommodation recess 231a by fitting the linear light emitting portion 237b into the notch portion 231h of the unit case 231. Further, in the linear light emitting lens member 237, the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b is exposed to the outside in a state where the plate unit 200 is assembled. The linear light emitting lens member 237 can receive the light from the peripheral LED 235b by the light receiving unit 237a, and guides the light received by the light receiving unit 237a to the linear light emitting unit 237b to make the linear light emitting unit 237b The entire top end can be illuminated (linearly).

  The upper disc ball release button 239 is attached slidably in the vertical direction by the button attachment member 238, and includes an extension piece 239a which extends downward from the button attachment member 238. By pressing the upper tray ball removal button 239 downward, the upper plate ball removal unit 310 is operated to discharge the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 from the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202 )be able to.

  The mounting base unit 220A can elastically support the touch unit 220B by the dampers 222 respectively inserted into the four horizontal support pins 231b and the two front support pins 231c. In addition, the outer peripheral surfaces of two receiving protrusions 231e protruding downward of the unit case 231 to which the touch unit 220B is attached, and the mounting base 230 into which the lower end of the receiving protrusion 231e is inserted below the unit case 231. A slight gap is formed between the cylindrical receiving portion and the inner peripheral surface of the receiving portion. As a result, when a force (impact) that causes the unit case 231 to move downward from the touch unit 220 B side acts, the force is not immediately transmitted to the mounting side receiving portion 230 a of the mounting base 230, and the unit case 231 is accommodated. The bottom surface of the recess 231a is bent downward to some extent, and the outer peripheral surface of the lower end of the receiving protrusion 231e abuts on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c, whereby the force is transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. That is, when the force is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230, the unit case 231 bends, so that the force can be attenuated to some extent and transmitted to the mounting base 230 by the bending.

  Further, the receiving projection 231e of the unit case 231 and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230 have an outer peripheral surface and an inner peripheral surface inclined with respect to the surface (the surface parallel to the upper surface of the touch unit 220B) on which they are formed. Because the surface is provided, a part of the force transmitted from the receiving protrusion 231e to the cylindrical receiving portion 230c acts in the direction along the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a provided with the cylindrical receiving portion 230c. Do. As a result, the force from the side of the receiving projection 231e (unit case 231) is dispersed, and it is possible to prevent the large force from acting on the mounting base 230 in one direction, and the mounting base 230 is less likely to be damaged. .

  As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the touch unit 220B of the rendering operation unit 220 includes a shallow box-like lower case 240 whose upper side is opened, and an upper dish liquid crystal substrate 241 attached from the upper side in the lower case 240. The upper case is attached to the lower case 240 while covering the upper sides of a pair of vibration devices 242, the pair of vibration devices 242 and the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 disposed in the lower case 240 outside the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 in the lower case 240 A shallow box-like base member 243, an upper-dish liquid crystal display 244 inserted from the upper side in the base member 243 and capable of displaying an image under control of the upper-dish liquid crystal substrate 241; A frame-shaped earth metal fitting 245 made of a thin metal plate covering the outer periphery, and a transparent touch panel covering the top surface of the earth metal fitting 245 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 And 246, and a frame-shaped upper cover 247 which is attached to the lower case 240, a through covering the base member 243 of the outer periphery of the touch panel 246 from the upper side.

  In the state where the lower case 240, the base member 243 and the upper cover 247 are assembled, the touch unit 220B extends vertically from the lower end of the lower case 240 to the upper end of the upper cover 247 at their rear end surfaces. It has a waterproof sheet-like waterproof seal 248 attached to the rear end surface of the lower case 240, the base member 243, and the upper cover 247 which extends over substantially the entire length of the rear end surface of the case 240 etc. ing.

  The outer case of the lower case 240 corresponds to the inner shape of the accommodation recess 213 a of the unit case 231, and is formed so as to be accommodated in the accommodation recess 213 a. The lower case 240 has a rectangular substrate attachment portion 240 a extending in the left and right direction, a flat plate-like projection 240 b projecting in a trapezoidal shape from both left and right sides of the substrate attachment portion 240 a, and the projection 240 b. And a pair of damper mounting recesses 240c which are vertically penetrated in the same inner shape and which are partially opened to the outside in the left and right direction and spaced apart back and forth and projecting from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c The vibration device mounting portion 240e is disposed between the flange portion 240d and the pair of damper mounting recesses 240c in the projecting portion 240b, and is disposed closer to the substrate mounting portion 240a and to which the vibration generating device 242 is mounted.

  The damper attachment recess 240c of the lower case 240 is formed in a C-shape in a plan view, and the damper 222 can be inserted from the open side of the C-shape. Further, the flange portion 240d is provided substantially at the upper and lower centers of the damper mounting recess 240c over the entire circumference of the C-shaped inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c. The flange portion 240 d is insertable into the groove 222 a of the damper 222.

  The excitation device 242 includes a small excitation drive motor 242 a and a weight 242 b attached with the center of gravity eccentrically attached to the rotation shaft of the excitation drive motor 242 a. The vibration generator 242 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 242 b by the vibration drive motor 242 a.

  The base member 243 includes a liquid crystal mounting recess 243 a formed in a shallow box shape by inserting the upper-tray liquid crystal display device 244 from the upper side, and extending portions 243 b extending outward from both left and right sides of the liquid crystal mounting recess 243 a. A screw hole 243c which penetrates up and down at a position corresponding to the damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 at the tip end of the extending portion 243b and formed on the lower end side of the screw hole 243c And a C-chamfered tapered portion 243d (see FIG. 32) whose diameter increases toward the lower end of the cage.

  The inner diameter of the lower side of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243 allows the distal end side to pass through the tapered portion 231i of the horizontal support pin 231b in the unit case 231, and the proximal end (lower side) than the tapered portion 231i It is formed in the size which can not pass.

  The touch panel 246 is provided with a tempered glass which is resistant to breakage due to impact, a capacitive sensor transparent sensor sheet provided on the upper surface of the tempered glass, and a frame-shaped protective cover covering the outer periphery of the tempered glass and the sensor sheet. ing.

  The damper 222 can be attached to the touch unit 220B by inserting the damper 222 from the open side of the C character into the damper attachment recess 240c provided on the left and right of the lower case 240, respectively. At this time, the flange portion 240 d protruding from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240 c is inserted into the groove 222 a of the damper 222. As a result, axial movement of the damper 222 in the damper mounting recess 240 c is restricted. When the damper 222 is attached to the damper mounting recess 240c, the upper end of the damper 222 abuts on the lower surface of the extending portion 243b of the base member 243, and the lower end of the damper 222 is lower than the lower end (lower surface) of the lower case 240. Stand out.

  Further, in the touch unit 220 B, the excitation drive motor 242 a of the pair of excitation devices 242 is sandwiched between the lower case 240 and the base member 243. The pair of excitation devices 242 can generate vibrations independently of each other.

  In addition, the touch unit 220B can visually recognize the image displayed on the upper-dish liquid crystal display device 244 through the touch panel 246 from the upper side. Then, an image of a button or the like is displayed on the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244, and the player can operate the button of the image by touching the touch panel 246 so as to operate the button of the image.

  Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B has the prevention water seal 248 attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side, when the liquid such as a drink is spilled on the plate unit 200, the liquid may enter the touch unit 220B. Thus, the touch unit 220B can be prevented from being damaged by the infiltration of liquid.

  The button unit 220C of the effect operation unit 220 is, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, a cylindrical unit body 250 attached to the button unit attachment portion 231g of the unit case 231 in the attachment base unit 220A, and a lower portion of the unit body 250. A presentation button decoration substrate 251 disposed on the side and provided with LEDs on the top surface, and a substrate cover 252 covering the bottom side of the presentation button decoration substrate 251 and attached to the bottom side of the unit body 250 are provided.

  The button unit 220C is disposed between the button base 253 and the unit main body 250, with the button base 253 being inserted between the button base 253 and the unit main body 250. A spring member 254 for urging the light guide member 255, a light guide member 255 which is inserted into the button base 253 and can guide light from the LED of the effect button decoration substrate 251 upward, and a plurality of minute members arranged above the light guide member 255 Sheet-like diffusion lens member 256 having a prism, an upper plate effect button 257 having a light transmitting property that covers the upper side of the diffusion lens member 256 and is attached to the button base 253, and is attached to the top surface of the effect button decoration substrate 251 And an effect button press sensor 258 for detecting the movement of the button base 253 to the lower end.

  The unit body 250 extends outward from the lower end of the outer peripheral surface, and has three attachment pieces 250a attached to the button unit attachment portion 231g, and a flange-like shelf 250b extending inward from the lower end of the inner peripheral surface , And a pair of through holes 250c penetrating the shelf 250b along the inner peripheral surface.

  The button base 253 has a cylindrical lower cylindrical portion 253a inserted into the inner periphery of the shelf 250b, a conical cylindrical upper cylindrical portion 253b whose diameter increases in the upward direction from the upper end of the lower cylindrical portion 253a, and an upper portion A claw which extends downward from the upper end of the cylindrical portion 253b and whose lower end is capable of penetrating the through hole 250c of the unit main body 250 and which can be projected outward from the lower end and can be engaged (contacted) with the lower surface of the unit main body 250 A pair of engaging claws 253c having a pair of pins and radially outwardly projecting shorter than the outer diameter of the upper end from the outer peripheral surface of the upper cylindrical portion 253b, and the lower end can contact the upper surface of the shelf 250b of the unit main body 250 A plurality of flat contact pieces 253d, and a detection piece 253e extending outward from the outer peripheral surface of the lower cylindrical portion 253a and the upper cylindrical portion 253b and detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258 There.

  The spring member 254 is a coil spring as shown. The lower end of the spring member 254 is in contact with the upper surface of the shelf 250 b of the unit body 250, and the upper end is supported by the plurality of contact pieces 253 d of the button base 253.

  The light guiding member 255 extends from the lower surface of the main body portion 255a to the vicinity of the lower end of the lower cylindrical portion 253a of the button base 253 from the lower surface of the main body portion 255a. And a plurality of cylindrical light guides 255b. The plurality of light guiding parts 255b are provided to correspond to the LEDs of the effect button decoration substrate 251, and can guide light from the LEDs and emit the light from the entire top surface of the main part 255a.

  In the button unit 220C, the button base 253, the light guide member 255, the diffusion lens member 256, and the upper dish effect button main body are integrally assembled, and they may slide up and down in the unit main body 250 together. it can. In the button base 253 and the like, the upper surface of the upper dish effect button 257 projects upward than the upper end of the unit body 250 by the biasing force of the spring member 254, and the pair of engaging claws 253c of the button base 253 By engaging with the lower surface 250, the further rise is regulated, and the upper dish effect button 257 or the like is positioned at the rising end.

  When the upper dish effect button 257 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the spring member 254, the upper dish effect button 257 etc. is lowered, and the detection piece 253e of the button base 253 is detected by the effect button press sensor 258. A pressing operation of the dish effect button 257 is detected. When the button base 253 is lowered by pressing the upper dish effect button 257, the lower ends of the plurality of contact pieces 253d of the button base 253 are in contact with the upper surface of the shelf 250b of the unit main body 250, and further lowering is restricted. The upper dish effect button 257 or the like is positioned at the lower end.

  Further, the button unit 220C can emit light and decorate the upper dish effect button 257 by causing the LED of the effect button decoration substrate 251 to emit light. The LEDs of the effect button decoration substrate 251 are full color LEDs, and the upper dish effect buttons 257 can be lighted and decorated in various colors.

  In the effect operation unit 220 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 32, the lower end of the damper 222 attached to the damper attachment recess 240c of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B in the assembled state is from the lower surface of the lower case 240 Also, since it protrudes downward, a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a of the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A and the lower surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B. Further, the tip surfaces (upper end surfaces) of the four horizontal support pins 231b of the unit case 231 coincide with the bottom surface of the counterbore of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243, and the touch unit 220B is moved upward relative to the horizontal support pins 231b. The movement is regulated by a flat washer on the head of the screw 227 screwed into the upper end of the lateral support pin 231b. The tapered portion 231i formed on the upper end side of the horizontal support pin 231b and the tapered portion 243d formed on the lower end side of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243 are separated from each other.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 220, as shown in FIG. 33, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted into the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 is slightly smaller than the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a on the side of the horizontal support pin 231b. It projects upward. Further, since a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted into the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 and the lower A gap is also formed between the lower surface of the case 240 and the lower surface of the case 240. A gap is also formed between the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231 d of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240. That is, the touch unit 220B is attached to the mounting base unit 220A with the lower surface floating in the air by the dampers 222 inserted into the lateral support pins 231b on the left and right sides.

  Furthermore, the rendering operation unit 220 tapers downward in the unit case 231 to which the touch unit 220B is attached from the upper side in the pyramidal cylindrical tubular receiving portion 230c that narrows downward in the mounting base 230 of the mounting base unit 220A. The lower end of the whole pyramidal receiving projection 231e is inserted. A slight gap is formed between the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c and the outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231e. Thus, in the normal state, only the outer periphery of the unit case 231 is attached to the mounting base 230 in a state where the inside of the unit case 231 (the center side of the accommodation recess 231a) floats in the air.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 21 etc., in the rendering operation unit 220, the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237 is linear (along the rear side close to the game area 5a in the touch unit 220B). Striped). The length of the upper end of the linear light emitting part 237b is about 2/3 of the length of the rear side of the touch unit 220B. An upper rear decoration member 236 is disposed on the rear side of the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b exposed along the rear side of the touch unit 220B. Further, on the right side in a front view of the upper plate rear decoration member 236, an upper plate ball withdrawal button 239 is disposed. Furthermore, the button unit 220C is disposed on the left side of the touch unit 220B in a front view.

  The effect operation unit 220 can present various effects to the player according to the gaming state which is changed by hitting the game ball into the game area 5a. For example, by displaying an image on the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, an image (effect image) can be presented to the player through the transparent touch panel 246 and enjoyed.

  An image imitating the operation button is displayed as the image displayed on the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244, and the detection of the touch by the sensor sheet 246b of the touch panel 246 can be accepted to allow the player to receive the image. The operation button can be operated, and the effect using the touch panel 246 can be enjoyed. The image displayed on the upper-dish liquid crystal display device 244 at the time of presentation using the touch panel 246 is not limited to the operation button, and various images can be displayed.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 220, since the touch unit 220B is supported by the plurality of dampers 222 in a floating state from the unit case 231, the touch unit 220B is operated by operating the vibration device 242 according to the game state. It can be vibrated. In the effect using the touch panel 246, the vibration of the touch panel 246 (the touch unit 220B) is vibrated by the vibration generator 242 so that the finger of the player who is in contact with the touch panel 246 vibrates the touch panel 246. Even if the player operates the image operation button to the player, the player can be surprised as though the user operates the operation button having a substantial effect, and can be surprised by the touch panel 246 and the effect by the vibration. Can be entertained to the player to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the effect operation unit 220 includes the button unit 220C on the left side of the touch unit 220B in a front view, the player is allowed to press the upper plate effect button 257 in accordance with the game state. You can enjoy the operation. More specifically, the image operation button on the touch panel 246 is a touch only on the touch panel 246, and there is a dislike that it lacks the feeling of operation compared to the actual operation button. Therefore, it is possible to comfortably enjoy the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 without giving a sense of discomfort to the operation of the upper plate effect button 257, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game .

  Since this effect operation unit 220 is disposed at the portion where the upper plate 201 is provided in the plate unit 200 bulging forward, the game is performed even during the effect other than using the touch unit 220B or the button unit 220C. There is a possibility that a person may hit the touch unit 220B or the like from above. On the other hand, in the effect operation unit 220, since the touch unit 220B is supported by the damper 222 in a floating state from the lower unit case 231, even if the touch unit 220B is struck from above, the elasticity of the damper 222 The force can absorb the impact to some extent. More specifically, when the touch unit 220B is hit or the like and an impact (load) is applied from above, the left and right horizontal support pins 231b are transmitted to the inserted dampers 222, and the touch unit 220B is lowered while the dampers 222 are lowered. Is compressed. By compressing the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pin 231b, the impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed.

  Then, when the touch unit 220B is further lowered by the impact, the lower surface of the lower case 240 abuts on the upper end of the damper 222 in which the front support pin 231c is inserted, and the front support pin 231c is moved down as the touch unit 220B is lowered. The supported damper 222 is compressed downward. Thus, the impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by the damper 222 supported by the front support pin 231c in addition to the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pin 231b.

  When the touch unit 220B is further lowered by an impact acting on the touch unit 220B, the lower surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B abuts on the left and right bottom surfaces of the accommodation recess 231a in the unit case 231 and the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231d. As a result, the impact from the touch unit 220B directly acts on the unit case 231 from the touch unit 220B without the intervention of the plurality of dampers 222.

  Furthermore, when the touch unit 220B is lowered, the load from the central support protrusion 231d causes the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a of the unit case 231 to bend so that the center thereof moves downward. The impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by the elastic force due to the bending of the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a. When the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a is bent, the pair of receiving protrusions 231e which project downward from the lower side of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a is lowered. Then, when the receiving protrusion 231e is further lowered by an impact from the touch unit 220B, the lower end side of the outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231e contacts the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230, and the touch unit 220B An impact is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230.

  The outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c are formed in the shape of a pyramid which is respectively narrowed downward, so from the receiving protrusion 231e to the cylindrical receiving portion 230c (mounting base 230 side) The load to be transmitted is distributed and transmitted in the direction along the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230 a of the mounting base 230 and in the direction perpendicular to the bottom surface. As described above, by the number of layers of structures that absorb the impact applied to the touch unit 220B before the impact applied to the touch unit 220B is transmitted to the mounting base 230, the impact applied to the touch unit 220B is sufficiently absorbed. Thus, the touch unit 220B, the unit case 231, the mounting base 230, and the like can be less likely to be damaged by the impact.

  In addition, the rendering operation unit 220 is a linear light emitting portion of the linear light emitting lens member 237 extending along the rear peripheral edge of the touch unit 220B by the peripheral LED 235b of the upper dish rear decorative substrate 235 according to the gaming state The top end of 237 b can emit light linearly. Thereby, the interest of the player can be attracted to the touch unit 220B, and the image displayed on the upper-dish liquid crystal display device 244 in the touch unit 220B, the touch effect using the touch panel 246, etc. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, according to the game state, the decoration light up decoration member 236 which is arranged on the rear side of the touch panel 220B (rear side than the linear light emitting portion 237b) by the decoration LED 235a of the decoration back light board 235 be able to. By making the upper back decoration member 236 emit light and decoration, as with the light emission of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237, the player's interest is attracted to the rendering operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B. It is possible to enjoy the effects presented by the effect operation unit 220 and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, the touch unit 220B including the upper dish liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 is covered by the mounting base 230 and the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A. And a waterproof seal 248 is attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B. As a result, even if water (water droplets) condensed on the surface of the upper plate main body 212 or the game ball by touching the outside air in the upper plate 201 flows downward (on the upper plate lower covering portion 262) of the upper plate 201. Thus, it is possible to prevent the dew condensation water from intruding into the touch unit 220B, and to prevent a malfunction from occurring in the touch unit 220B.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 33, since the upper plate rear decoration substrate 235 for emitting and decorating the upper plate rear decoration member 236 and the linear light emitting lens member 237 is disposed at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201, It is possible to prevent a problem such as short circuit or corrosion from occurring in the upper plate rear decoration substrate 235 without being exposed to the water droplets condensed by the upper plate 201.

  The plate unit cover 260 of the plate unit 200 extends laterally as shown in FIGS. 17 to 20, and the center of the left and right bulges forward and is formed like a shell opened rearward. . The pan unit cover 260 opens forward substantially at the center between the left and right, and has a lower pan opening 261 whose rear end is closed by the pan unit base 210 and a top plate side (upper side) in the inner peripheral wall of the lower pan opening 261 And a lower cover portion 262 covering the lower side of the upper plate main body 212 and the rendering operation unit 220, and a bass of the speaker unit 920 of the main body frame 4 disposed on the left side in front view of the lower plate opening 261 The speaker grill 263 for transmitting the sound from the speakers, the plate unit left decoration member 264 disposed above the speaker grill 263 and illuminated by the plate unit left decoration substrate 345 and disposed on the right side of the lower plate opening 261 in front view And the bottom of the dish unit cover 260 is formed by the handle port 265 through which the rear portion of the handle body 502 of the handle unit 500 passes. A bottom plate portion 266 for covering the lower Rishitasara body 214, and a, a bottom plate opening 267 is closed by the lower tray ball vent unit 320 penetrates the bottom plate portion 266 on the upper and lower left and right of the center.

  The lower plate opening portion 261 is closed by the lower plate main body 214 on the bottom plate side (lower side) of the inner circumferential wall. The speaker grille 263 and the plate unit left decorative member 264 are made of punching metal provided with a plurality of holes in a metal plate.

  The surface of the plate unit cover 260 is formed to have a smooth surface on the left side in a front view, while the surface on the right side is formed to have a rough surface. In addition, the right side in the front view has a light transmitting property substantially entirely.

  The plate unit cover 260 is formed in an assembled state with the plate unit 200 such that an interval between the upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper plate lower covering portion 262 can be held by one hand. Thus, when the player performs touch operation on the touch unit 220B, the finger (hand or arm) to be touched can be stabilized by grasping the upper side of the lower plate opening 261, and touch operation on the touch unit 220B is performed. Can be done easily.

  More specifically, in the assembled state, the thickness between the front end upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper pan lower covering portion 262 is about 25 mm, and the rear end upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the upper pan lower covering portion 262 The thickness between the lower surface and the lower surface is about 50 mm, and the distance between the front end of the lower pan covering part 262 and the rear end of the touch unit 220B is about 60 mm. Further, the upper surface of the touch unit 220B is inclined at about 20 degrees with respect to the horizontal. Thus, the player can grasp between the upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper tray lower covering portion 262 with the hand of the player.

  The door lower right rendering unit 270 of the plate unit 200 is disposed on the upper side of the handle unit 500 and to the right of the rendering operation unit 200 as shown in FIGS. 34 to 42, and rotates according to the gaming state. A spherical door lower right rotating body 270A for emitting light is provided. The door lower right rendering unit 270 is attached to the front of the plate unit base 210 so as to close the relief opening 210g, and is attached to the unit base 271 rotatably supporting the door lower right rotating body 270A and to the unit base 271 A door lower right drive motor 272, a drive gear 273 fixed to the rotation shaft of the door lower right drive motor 272, a driven gear 274 engaged with the drive gear 273 and attached to the door lower right rotary body 270A, a follower And a shaft member 275 rotatably supporting the gear 274 and attached to the unit base 271.

  In addition, the door lower right rendering unit 270 is mounted on the opposite side of the door lower right rotating body 270A to the driven gear 274 and is rotatably supported by the unit base 271. A base-side bearing member 277 rotatably supporting the opposite side of the rotating body 270A with the driven gear 274 in cooperation with the unit base 271 and a rotation of the door lower right-handed rotating body 270A attached to the unit base 271 Two rotation detection sensors 278 that can detect the position, a decoration member 279 attached to the unit base 271 on the left side in a front view of the door lower right rotation body 270A, and a back side of the unit base 271 A door lower right base decoration substrate 280 provided with a plurality of LEDs, and a door lower right drive motor 272 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 271 A detection sensor 278, a door lower right base decorative substrate 280, and a door lower right relay substrate 281 relaying connection between a door lower right rotary substrate decorative substrate 291 described later and a peripheral control substrate (not shown) are provided. .

  The door lower right rotation body 270A constitutes an outer shell, and each is disposed between the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 in a hemispherical shell shape, and the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 And a rotating body internal unit 290. The front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 are respectively formed with semicircular notches 285a and 286a around the rotation axis. The front shell member 285 has a translucent hemispherical shell-like surface, a band decoration 285 b having a metallic luster and extending in the circumferential direction and a heart shape disposed at the center of the band decoration 285 b The heart of the decoration 285c. On the other hand, the rear shell member 286 is provided with a band decoration 286 b having metallic luster and extending in the circumferential direction in a band shape on the translucent hemispherical shell-like surface. When the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 are combined, the band decoration 285 b of the front outer shell member 285 and the band decoration 286 b of the rear outer shell member 286 are connected.

  As shown in FIG. 40 and FIG. 41, the rotating body internal unit 290 is a disk-shaped door right lower rotating body decorative substrate 291 provided with a plurality of LEDs on both sides and the center of the door lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291 A cylindrical first fixed shaft member 292, which is attached to the bottom right side of the door lower right rotation body decorative substrate 291 and whose tip is attached to the shaft member 275, and the first fixed shaft member 292 A cylindrical shape which is attached to the opposite side of the door lower right rotating member decoration substrate 291 and extends perpendicularly to the surface of the door lower right rotating member decoration substrate 291 and whose tip is attached to the unit base 271 and the base side bearing member 277 And a second fixed shaft member 293. Although illustration is omitted, a wiring cord for connecting the door lower right relay substrate 281 and the door lower right rotator decorative substrate 291 is inserted in the second fixed shaft member 293.

  In addition, the rotating body internal unit 290 is a flat, annular transparent reflector base 294 disposed on both sides of the door lower right rotating body decoration substrate 291 and attached to the inside of the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286. And an annular, axially outwardly opened first reflector 295 mounted on the reflector base 294 and a reflector base 294 mounted inside the annular ring of the first reflector 295 to the center and having a hexagonal shape And a second reflector 296 having a through hole 296a. The first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plated layer having a metallic luster on the surface, and can reflect light from the door lower right rotating member decoration substrate 291. Further, the first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plurality of radially extending flat ribs.

  The rotating body internal unit 290 includes a door lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291, a first fixed shaft member 292, a second fixed shaft member 293, a reflector base 294, a first reflector 295, and a second reflector 296, Relatively rotatable, they are separated from each other.

  The unit base 271 has a flat ring shape forward from the front right upper portion with respect to the center of the ring portion 271a on the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a disposed on the rear side of the door lower right rotation body 270A and the ring portion 271a. Of the first projecting piece 271b projecting in the second direction, and a second projecting piece 271c projecting in a plate shape forward from a portion of the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a opposite to the first projecting piece 271b, and And a bearing groove 271d into which the tip end of the second fixed shaft member 293 is inserted in a U-shape toward the rear from the front end.

  The door lower right drive motor 272 is attached to the outer side surface (right side surface) of the first projecting piece 271b in a state where the rotation shaft passes through. The driven gear 274 is formed larger in diameter than the drive gear 273. The shaft member 275 includes an attachment portion 275a attached to the front end of the first projecting piece 271b, and a cylindrical shaft portion 275b which protrudes from the attachment portion 275a in a cylindrical shape. The shaft member 275 can rotatably support the driven gear 274 by the outer periphery of the cylindrical shaft portion 275b, and can rotatably support the tip of the first fixed shaft member 292 by the inner periphery of the cylindrical shaft portion 275b.

  The rotor-side bearing member 276 includes a bearing hole 276a into which the second fixed shaft member 293 is rotatably inserted, and a flat detection piece 276b extending outward. The base bearing member 277 is attached to the front end of the second projecting piece 271 c so as to close the open front end side of the U-shaped bearing groove 271 d of the front end of the second projecting piece 271 c in the unit base 271. The two rotation detection sensors 278 are attached to the second projecting piece 271 c symmetrically with respect to the rotation axis of the door lower right rotation body 270A. The two rotation detection sensors 275 have rotational positions where the heart decoration 285c of the door lower right rotation body 270A faces the front (see FIG. 42A) and rotational positions where the heart decoration 285c faces the rear (FIG. 42B) Can be detected respectively.

  The door lower right rendering unit 270 of this embodiment can rotate the door lower right rotating body 270A by the door lower right drive motor 272 according to the game state, and stops so that the heart decoration 285c faces the front. It is possible to indicate to the player the arrival of a chance or the like depending on whether or not the player is entertained and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the door lower right rotating body decoration substrate 291 inside the door lower right rotating body 270A is non-rotatably attached to the door lower right rendering unit 270, the door right right while the door lower right rotating body 270A rotates When the lower rotary body decorative substrate 291 (of the LED) emits light, the position of light emitted from the door lower right rotary body decorative substrate 291 moves as the door lower right rotary body 270A rotates, and the first reflector 295 or the first reflector 295 Since the direction of the light reflected and induced by the two reflectors 296 changes, the light emitting decoration of the door lower right rotating body 270A is lit as if the light is blinking even if the LED of the door lower right rotating body decoration substrate 291 is not blinked The door lower right rotation body 270A can be made to emit light in a rainbow color by being made to emit light of various colors from the LED, and the player can be entertained.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the effect unit cover 300 of the pan unit 200 includes a hemispherical transparent rotary body cover portion 301 covering the front side of the spherical door lower right rotary body 270A in the door lower right staging unit 270. The decorative portion 302 formed on the outer periphery of the rotary body cover portion 301 and continuous with the decoration on the right side in a front view of the plate unit cover 260 and penetrating in the front and rear in the lower right side of the rotary body cover portion 301 And a cylinder insertion port 303 through which the key cylinder 710 is inserted.

  The entire effect unit cover 300 is translucent in the form of a container whose rear is open. In the effect unit cover 300, the upper side of the rotating body cover portion 301 is decorated with light emission by the door lower right base decoration substrate 280 of the door lower right effect unit 270, and the lower side of the rotating body cover portion 301 is the dish unit right decoration substrate 346 Embellished by

  As shown in FIG. 43 to FIG. 45, the upper countersink removing unit 310 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the front of the dish unit base 210 so as to cover the through hole 210e and the receiving piece 210f of the dish unit base 210 from the front side. A cover 311 having an insertion opening 311a in the upper part of which the extension piece 239a of the upper countersink ball release button 239 can be inserted at the upper part thereof, and a through hole 210e of the tray unit base 210 in the cover 311 A front base member 312 attached at a position on the upper left of the front view, a press transmission member 313 rotatably supported by the front base member 312 and pivoted by pressing of the upper disc ball release button 239, and a press transmission member And 313 a first spring member 314 which biases the upper disc ball release button 239 in the upward direction.

  Further, the upper disc ball removing unit 310 is provided with a rear base member 315 attached to the rear side of the disc unit base 210 so as to close the upper disc ball feed port 210d of the disc unit base 210 from the rear side; An upper disc ball withdrawal slider 316 disposed between the disc unit base 210 and the disc unit base 210 and mounted so as to be vertically movable by the rear base member 315 and in contact with the pressure transmitting member 313 from the upper side; And a second spring member 317 biasing the slider 316 upward.

  The front base member 312 extends in parallel to the front surface of the pan unit base 210, and has a flat base 312a attached to the cover 311, and a pair of extended flats extending forward from the left and right sides of the base 312a. It is provided in the vicinity of the lower end of the front surface of the base portion 312a and the rear end of the first spring member 314 is locked. And a hook-shaped spring locking portion (not shown).

  The pressure transmitting member 313 has a horizontally elongated cylindrical shaft portion 313a whose both ends are rotatably inserted into the pair of shaft support portions 312c of the front base member 312, and a rear extension extending rearward from the shaft portion 313a in a flat plate shape An upper extension piece 313c which extends in a flat plate shape upward from near the left end in the front view on the upper surface of the extension piece 313b and the rear extension piece 313b and can contact the lower end of the extension piece 239c of the upper disc ball release button 239 And a lower extending piece 313d extending downward in a flat plate shape from the right end in the front view on the lower surface of the rear extending piece 313b, and a downward direction from the lower side near the left end in the front view in the shaft portion 313a And a hook-shaped spring locking portion 313e to which the front end of the member 314 is locked. The downward extending piece 313 d is formed in a triangular shape extending downward as it goes rearward, and its lower end can be brought into contact with the upper countersink slider 316.

  The rear base member 315 extends flatly in parallel to the rear surface of the pan unit base 210, and is provided with a base portion 315a attached to the pan unit base 210, and is separately provided on the front surface of the base portion 315a The slider support portion 315b slidably supports the left and right ends of the ball removal slider 316, and the front end of the plate unit base 210 at the upper end of the base portion 315a is opened forward at a position corresponding to the upper portion of the upper bowl ball feed port 210d. It has an upper entrance 315c which opens downward on the rear side of the base part 315a and through which gaming balls can flow.

  In addition, the rear base member 315 extends downward continuously with the upper inlet 315c on the rear side of the base portion 315a and is open rearward and has a lower end curved in the rear direction, and An L-shaped second induction passage 315e which extends downward from the lower side of the first induction passage 315d and extends leftward in a front view and whose left end is opened leftward and the whole is opened rearward; The base portion 315a is moved back and forth so that two sides are surrounded by a flat channel lid 315f closing the rear end side of the left extending portion of the induction path 315e and the L-shaped second induction path 315e. An opening 315g is provided, and a spring locking portion 315h protruding in a boss shape forward from the front surface of the base 315a and to which the upper end of the second spring member 317 is locked.

  The L-shaped second guide path 315e of the rear base member 315 is inclined so that the left-side extending portion becomes lower toward the left. The left end of the second induction passage 315e is, as shown in FIG. 43 (b), inserted into the notch 210j of the cylindrical lower disc ball supply port 210c in the dish unit base 210, and the second induction passage 315e and The lower flat ball supply port 210c is in communication with each other.

  The upper disc ball removal slider 316 is a flat plate having a slider base 316a slidably supported at the left and right ends on the slider support portion 315b of the rear base member 315, and a plate from the left to the front from the front view center at the upper end of the slider base 316a. A transmission piece 316b capable of contacting the lower end of the downward extension piece 313d of the pressure transmission member 313 with the upper surface of the receiving piece 210f extending through the through hole 210e of the unit base 210 and the slider on the lower side of the transmission piece 316b A triangular operation transmitting portion 316c that protrudes rearward as it goes downward from the rear side of the base 316a, and a hook-shaped spring engagement that protrudes from the front surface of the slider base 316a and the lower end of the second spring member 317 is locked. And a stop portion 316d.

  In the upper tray bowling unit 310, when the tray unit 200 is assembled, the upper inlet 315c of the rear base member 315 is opened at the lower end on the right end side of the guide passage portion 212a of the upper tray main body 212. As a result, the gaming balls in the upper tray 201 can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 540 from the upper inlet 315 c via the first guiding portion 315 d on the rear side of the base portion 315 a.

  Further, when the upper disc ball extracting button 239 is pressed downward, the push transmitting member 313 resists the biasing force of the first spring member 314 by the extension piece 239 a of the upper disc ball extracting button 239. Then, the lower end of the downward extending piece 313d pivots in the direction of moving downward about the shaft portion 313a. When the lower end of the downward extending piece 313d moves downward with the rotation of the pressing transmission member 313, the upper flat ball withdrawal slider 316's transmission piece 316b with which the lower end of the downward extending piece 313d abuts. The slider 316 slides downward against the biasing force of the second spring member 317.

  When the upper ball ball removal slider 316 slides downward, the operation transmission unit 316 c operates the switching mechanism of the ball feed unit 540 to switch the flow path in the ball feed unit 540, and the first guide path The 315 d side is in communication with the second guide path 315 e side. As a result, the gaming balls in the upper tray 201 are discharged from the lower tray ball supply port 210c to the lower tray 202 through the upper inlet 315c, the first induction passage 315d, the ball feeding unit 540, and the second induction passage 315e. , The game ball in the upper plate 201 can be pulled out.

  In addition, when the downward pressing of the upper disc ball releasing button 239 is released, the upper disc ball extracting slider 316 and the upper disc ball removing button 239 are raised by the biasing force of the first spring member 314 and the second spring member 317. It is possible to return to the original state.

  The lower countersink removing unit 320 of the tray unit 200 is attached to the lower side of the lower tray main body 214 so as to close the bottom plate opening 267 of the tray unit cover 260 as shown in FIG. A flat-plate-shaped lower-disc spherical-extraction base 321 having an opening 321a coinciding with the extraction hole 214a, and a flat-plate-shaped slide lid 322 which can slide over the lower-disc spherical-extraction base 321 to close the opening 321a. , A knob attached to the front end of the slide lid 322 and exposed from the front of the plate unit cover 260 to the outside, and a spring biasing the slide lid 322 in the direction of closing the opening 321a by the slide lid 322 A member 324, and a holding device 325 for holding the slide lid 322 in a position opening the opening 321a against the biasing force of the spring member 324; It is equipped with a.

  The opening 321a of the lower countersinking base 321 is formed at a position closer to the right from the left and right in the front view. By mounting the lower tray ball removal base 321 to the lower plate main body 212, the slide lid 322 can be slidably supported to the left and right between the lower plate ball removal base 321 and the lower plate main body 212. The slide lid 322 includes a holding protrusion 322 a held by the holding device 325 on the left end side in a front view.

  The holding device 325 is provided with a main body 325a attached to the lower ball ball withdrawal base 321, and a pair of holding claws 325b which can be opened and closed from the main body 325a and can grip the holding projection 322a. The holding device 325 inserts the holding projection 322a between the pair of open holding claws 325a and presses the holding projection 322a toward the main body 325a, thereby closing the pair of holding claws 325b and holding the holding projections 322a. The claws 325b are kept closed. In this state, when the holding projection 322a is moved to the main body 325a side, the pair of holding claws 325a is opened, and the holding of the holding projection 322a is released.

  In the lower tray ball removal unit 320, the slide lid 322 is located between the opening 321a and the lower hole body 214a of the lower plate main body 214 in a state where the picker 323 (slide lid 322) is moved to the right in front view. The gaming balls in the lower tray 202 can be stored in the lower tray 202 without being dropped downward from the ball removal holes 214 a.

  From this state, by operating the knob portion 323 to the left, the slide lid 322 slides to the left, and the opening 321a and the ball removing hole 214a communicate. As a result, the gaming balls in the lower tray 202 come out of the lower portion of the tray unit 200 through the ball holes 214a and the opening 321a, and the gaming balls in the lower tray 202 can be removed. At this time, since the holding projection 322a of the slide lid 322 is held by the pair of holding claws 325b of the holding device 325, the slide lid 322 remains open even if the operation of the knob portion 323 is stopped. You can keep pulling out the game balls inside.

  To close the slide cover 322, slightly operating the knob 323 to the left opens the pair of holding claws 325b and releases the holding projections 322a, and the biasing force of the spring member 324 slides the slide cover 322 to the right. Then, the ball removal hole 214a is closed. As described above, by operating the knob portion 323 of the lower ball ball emptying unit 320, the gaming balls can be stored in the lower plate 202, or the game balls stored in the lower plate 202 can be removed.

  The ball lending operation unit 330 of the plate unit 200 is, as shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, a unit case 331 attached to the upper surface near the right end in the front view of the rendering operation unit 220 and having transparency. A ball lending button 332 exposed on the upper surface of the case 331 and operable by the player, and a return button 333 exposed on the upper surface of the unit case 331 behind the ball lending button 332 and operable by the player; And a display section 334 which can be viewed from the player side through the upper surface of the unit case 331 on the rear side of the return button 333.

  The ball lending operation unit 330 inserts a predetermined number of gaming balls into a bowl unit by inserting cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and pressing the ball lending button 332. 200 can be borrowed (dispensed) into the upper plate 201, and when the return button 333 is pressed, the remaining amount of the rented portion is subtracted and the cash remainder or prepaid card inserted is returned. Further, the display unit 334 displays the number of remaining cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine, an error code when the ball lending machine breaks down, and the like.

  The upper dish top decorative member 340 of the dish unit 200 is, as shown in FIG. 19 and FIG. 20 etc., a translucent upper dish top lens attached to the left and right center at the upper end of the dish unit base 210 and extending in the left and right bands. An upper plate top decorative substrate 340b attached to the lower side of the upper plate top lens 340a and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface thereof.

  The upper dish top decorative member 340 can cause the upper dish top lens 340a to emit light in a band by causing the LEDs of the upper dish top decorative substrate 340b to emit light. Since the upper dish top decorative member 340 is disposed on the rear side of the effect operation unit 200, the upper dish top decorative member is the same as the light emitting decoration such as the upper dish rear decoration member 236 and the linear luminous lens member 237. By making the light emitting decoration 340 possible, the player's interest can be attracted to the rendering operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B, and the effect presented by the rendering operation unit 220 is enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest be able to.

  The dish unit 200 of this embodiment is a game ball within the game area 5a in the touch unit 220B of the effect operation unit 220 on the upper surface of the dish unit 200 having the upper dish 201 for storing the game balls on the lower side of the game area 5a. When displaying an image on the upper-dish liquid crystal display 244 in accordance with the gaming state changing by typing in, the upper dish liquid-crystal display 244 has a strip shape along the outer peripheral edge on the side close to the game area 5a. Since the linear light emitting lens member 237, the upper dish rear decoration member 236, and the upper dish top decoration member 340 can emit light, even if the player's line of sight is concentrated in the game area 5a, the line of sight (view) Light from the outside of the linear luminous lens member 237 etc. entering from the outside, and attracts the line of sight (interest) of the player to the linear luminous lens member 237 etc. Can. Therefore, when presenting effects such as an image according to the game state in the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244, the linear light emission lens member 237 or the like is made to emit light, thereby providing the player with the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244. The presentation of the effect can be noticed, and it is possible to enjoy the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the plate unit 200 is provided with the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 capable of displaying an image according to the game state, when displaying an image suggesting the arrival of a chance, it is arranged outside the gaming area 5a. Since the arrival of a chance is suggested by the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 being played, it is possible for the player to play the game in the game area 5a and the effect by the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 outside the game area 5a. And both can be bothered. Therefore, by giving attention to the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a (upper dish liquid crystal display device 244), it is possible to enjoy a tight game with a sense of speed, and the interest of the player is reduced. Can be suppressed, and when displaying an image indicating the arrival of a chance on the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244, the player can be made to the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 by making the linear light emitting lens member 237 emit light. It is possible to make the player pay attention and to surely recognize the arrival of the chance to entertain the player. In this case, depending on the player, there is a risk that the player will not be able to concentrate on either of the gaming area 5a and the gaming area 5a, and may decrease interest, but the gaming state Since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light according to the arrival), the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like can be concentrated in the game area 5a until the light emission and the game within the game area 5a is enjoyed As the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light, the effect on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed, and the game can be sharpened and tired.

  In addition, since the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 is provided in the dish unit 200 which bulges to the player side below the game area 5a, the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 is disposed at a position close to the player. Become. As a result, the upper tray liquid crystal display 244 can be easily concealed by the player located in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the upper tray liquid crystal display 244 becomes difficult to see from other players behind and behind the player. The effect presented by the upper-dish liquid crystal display 244 can be enjoyed only by the player. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort and decrease in interest by being scolded by another player when enjoying the effects by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and it is also possible to reduce the upper plate liquid crystal display device. The linear luminous lens member 237 or the like emits light at the time of presentation of the effect by 244, making it difficult to miss the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is enjoyed and entertaining Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the linear light emission lens members 237 and the like are made to emit light in a strip shape, the light emission of the linear light emission lens members 237 and the like can be made more noticeable than in the case of emitting light in a dot shape. Can be made to notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 etc. easily, and enjoy the effects of the upper dish liquid crystal display 244 and the touch panel 246 etc. It is possible to suppress the decrease. In addition, since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are made to emit light in a strip shape, the light emission aspect is different from the light emission of the other light emission decorative body etc., and misunderstanding as light emission of the light emission decorative body etc can be reduced. The light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 can be surely noticed.

  In addition, since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are disposed at a position on the rear side close to the game area 5a in the outer peripheral edge of the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244, when the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like The light of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like can be easily entered into the player's field of vision, and the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like can be noticed to enjoy the effect of the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244.

  Further, on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 having the upper plate 201 and the like, there is provided the effect operation unit 200 having the upper plate liquid crystal display 244 and the like, and the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is struck in the game area 5a. The upper dish liquid crystal display 244 and the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are turned when the line of sight is directed to the upper plate 201 since the player for checking the amount of game balls to be closed turns the line of sight at a certain frequency. It becomes easy to notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237. Further, since the player turns the gaze toward the upper tray 201 with a certain frequency, it is easy to direct the gaze from the inside of the game area 5a to the upper tray 201 (upper tray liquid crystal display 244). Therefore, when the light emission from the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like is noticed, the line of sight can be immediately shifted to the upper dish liquid crystal display 244, and the effect presented by the upper dish liquid crystal display 244 is enjoyed and the interest is lowered. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, when the rendering operation unit 200 is disposed below the gaming area 5a, and light from the linear luminous lens member 237 or the like is emitted from the bottom to the player, therefore, it is disposed above the gaming area 5a. Compared to the above, it is easy for the player to easily see the light of the linear light emitting lens member 237 etc., so that it becomes possible to make the upper dish liquid crystal display 244 pay attention to the player reliably. It is possible to enjoy the effect by the operation unit 200 and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the effect operation unit 200 (upper dish liquid crystal display device 244) is disposed at a position corresponding to the center in the horizontal direction of the game area 5a, the center of the line of sight of the player is in any position in the game area 5a. However, it is possible to easily notice the light from the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like, and it is possible to surely make the player pay attention to the upper dish liquid crystal display 244, and enjoy the effect by the effect operation unit 200. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the rendering operation unit 200 is provided with the touch panel 246, in addition to the rendering by the image, it is possible to perform rendering for causing the player to operate the touch panel 246, and it is possible to entertain the player by various renderings. By causing the player to operate the touch panel 246, it is possible to cause the player to participate in the effect, and it is possible to actively enjoy the effect for the player and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, the linear light emitting lens member 237 (linear light emitting unit 237b) disposed along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the touch unit 220B transfers the gaming balls in the upper tray 201 to the ball feeding unit 540 (ball emitting device 680). An upper tray ball extraction button 239 is disposed along the feeding guide passage portion 212a and operates the upper tray ball removal unit 310 with the guide passage portion 212a. That is, the linear luminous lens member 237 is provided in the vicinity of a place where the player confirms the game ball necessary for the game, and the linear luminous lens member 237 is disposed at a position which the player cares during the game. Therefore, the light emission of the linear light emission lens member 237 can be noticed, and the player's interest is drawn to the touch unit 220B and the effect by the touch unit 220B (effect image by the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244, the touch panel 246 It is easy to notice the timing of touch operation etc.).

  Further, the touch unit 220B including the upper dish liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper dish liquid crystal display 244 is mounted on the upper surface of the upper dish lower covering portion 262 of the dish unit cover 260 by the mounting base 230 of the mounting base unit 220A and the unit case 231. Since the waterproof seal 248 is attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B while being disposed at a position higher than that of the touch unit 220B, the outer plate 201 can be exposed to the air on the upper plate main body 212 or the surface of the game ball Even if condensed water (water droplets) flows downward of the upper plate 201 (on the upper plate lower covering portion 262), the condensed water can be prevented from entering the touch unit 220B, and the touch unit 220B Can be prevented from occurring.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 33, since the upper plate rear decoration substrate 235 for emitting and decorating the upper plate rear decoration member 236 and the linear light emitting lens member 237 is disposed at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201, It is possible to prevent a problem such as short circuit or corrosion from occurring in the upper plate rear decoration substrate 235 without being exposed to the water droplets condensed by the upper plate 201.

  Furthermore, when the touch unit 220B including the touch panel 246 and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 is vibrated by the vibrating unit 242 in the effect operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200, a plurality (two) of the touch units 220B are provided. The damper 222 is attached to the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A in a floating state so that the vibration of the touch unit 220B (excitation device 242) is absorbed and attenuated by the damper 222 and transmitted to the mounting base unit 220A. As a result, the vibration of the mounting base unit 220A can be reduced. Therefore, when the touch unit 220B of the touch unit 220B is touch-operated, if the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the vibration device 242, only the touch unit 220B is vibrated. It is possible to sufficiently impart the operation feeling of 246, and it is possible to make the player enjoy the touch operation of the touch panel 246 and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the touch unit 220B can be vibrated by the vibration device 242, in addition to the sense of operation of the touch panel 246 for the player, it is surprising to be surprised by the vibration of the touch unit 220B, or suggested timing for operating the touch panel It is possible to enjoy the operation effects by the touch panel 246 of the touch unit 220B and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B is supported from the lower side by the plurality of dampers 222, even if an impact or load is applied to the touch unit 220B by tapping or strongly pressing the touch unit 220B from the upper side, the damper 222 Since it becomes possible to absorb the impact etc., damage to the touch unit 220B, the mounting base unit 220A etc. due to the impact etc can be reduced, and the game is interrupted by the damage of the touch unit 220B etc. Can prevent the player's interest from being reduced.

  Further, since the touch panel 246 is used as the portion operated by the touch unit 220B, when the player operates, the touch panel 246 is touched for a longer time than when the button is pressed. When the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the vibrating device 242 when touching 246, the vibration can be reliably transmitted to the player's finger (hand). Therefore, the player can feel that the player is operating the touch panel 246 by vibrating the finger of the player, so that a sufficient feeling of operation can be given, and the player can enjoy the operation of the touch panel 246. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

  Further, by changing the image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display 244 of the touch unit 220B, the type of touch operation (button) can be easily changed, and it becomes possible to cope with various effects. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to reduce the interest by the various effects. Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B is provided with the touch panel 246, compared with the conventional pressing button, touch, tap (single tap, double tap), drag, flick, pinch (pinch out, pinch in), swipe, touch and Various operations such as hold can be performed. As a result, it is possible to perform more various operation effects, and it is possible to entertain the player and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, the touch unit 220B is attached to the mounting base unit 220A (unit case 231) immovably upward and movably downward, and the touch unit 220B is moved by the elastic force (biasing force) of the plurality of dampers 222. Is pressed against the upper moving end, the touch unit 220B can be made difficult to move while operating the touch panel 246, and the touch panel 246 can be easily operated properly. In addition, since the touch unit 220B becomes difficult to move, it can make the player think that the touch unit 220B does not move, and the touch unit 220B thought to not move is excited according to the gaming state. By vibrating by the device 242, the player can be surprised, and the player can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the plurality of vibration exciters 242 which are separated from each other, for example, by driving the vibration exciter 242 at a position close to the portion operated by the player in the touch panel 246 Vibration can be transmitted. Therefore, when the touch panel 246 operates a position different from the position to be operated by the player, the vibration transmitted to the player is different, so that the player is notified that the operation is wrong. As a result, the player can be made to perform the correct operation, and the enjoyment of the operation using the touch panel 246 can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since a plurality of vibration exciters 242 which are separated from each other are provided, the resonance phenomenon is generated at an arbitrary position of the touch panel 246 by appropriately controlling the frequency and intensity of the vibration of each vibration exciter 242 and the like. Can. Therefore, by controlling each excitation device 242 so that the resonance phenomenon occurs at an arbitrary position operated by the player, it is possible to impart a further operational feeling or greatly surprise the player. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, when the touch unit 220B is hit or pressed from the upper side and an impact or load acts on the touch unit 220B, both left and right sides of the touch unit 220B are attached to the unit case 231 with the damper 222 interposed therebetween. Therefore, it is possible to absorb (attenuate) an impact or the like from the upper side to some extent and transmit it to the unit case 231 side by the bending of the damper 222 and the touch unit 220B. Further, on the unit case 231 side, the outer edge of the unit case 231 is attached to the lower mounting base 230, so that an impact or load from the touch unit 220 B side via the unit case 231 can be applied to the mounting base 230. It can be distributed widely and transmitted. At this time, of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c into which the receiving protrusion 231e is inserted at the outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231e protruding downward from the lower surface of the unit case 231 and the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230 Since a gap is formed between the inner circumferential wall and the inner peripheral wall, the receiving protrusion 231e and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c abut each other after the unit case 231 is bent downward by an impact or a load from the touch unit 220B. As a result, an impact or the like is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230, and the deflection or the like of the unit case 231 transmits the impact or the like to the mounting base 230 in a state where the impact or the like is further attenuated. Since the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c are narrowed downward, when the receiving projection 231e and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c abut, the receiving projection 231e (unit case 231) impact and load from the side of the mounting base 230 are transmitted in an oblique direction with respect to the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230, along a direction perpendicular to the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230 As a result, the force in the direction (downward) perpendicular to the bottom surface of the mounting base 230 to be bent is reduced and transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. Therefore, even if the touch unit 220B is hit or pressed from the upper side, the shocks and the like can be effectively attenuated by the plurality of dampers 222, the unit case 231, and the mounting base 230, and the touch unit 220B or Damage to the mounting base unit 220A can be suppressed.

  According to the pachinko machine 1, since the touch panel 246 and the upper dish effect button 257 are provided on the upper surface of the dish unit cover 260 of the dish unit 200 bulging forward on the lower side of the game area 5a, the gaming machine 5a The effect (operation effect) using the touch panel 246 and the upper dish effect button 257 is presented to the player according to the game state changed by hitting the ball, and the player is given the touch panel 246 and upper dish effect button 257 during the effect. By operating the button, it is possible to actively cause the player to participate in the effect, and it is possible to entertain the player and to suppress the decrease in interest. The upper and lower thicknesses of the upper side of the lower plate opening 261 (upper plate lower cover 262) in the plate unit cover 260 having the touch panel 246 can be grasped by the player's hand within a range of 15 mm to 50 mm. Since the thickness is set, when the player operates the touch panel 246, the player can operate the touch panel 246 while grasping between the touch panel 246 and the upper tray lower covering portion 262, and the touch panel 246 is operated properly. be able to.

  More specifically, the thickness between the upper surface of the touch panel 246 and the lower surface of the upper plate lower covering portion 262 can be grasped by hand, and the thickness is in the range of 15 mm to 50 mm. When the thumb is positioned on the upper side of the touch panel 246 with the lower plate in contact with the lower surface of the upper dish lower covering portion 262, the touch panel 246 is positioned within the movement range of the thumb, and the touch panel 246 is operated with the thumb. Is possible. In this state, since the finger excluding the thumb is in contact with the lower surface of the upper dish lower covering portion 262, the thumb can be stabilized, and the thumb touches the desired position of the touch panel 246 or the touch panel 246 is touched. The finger can be moved in a desired direction, the operability of the touch panel 246 can be improved, and the touch panel 246 can be accurately operated. In addition, when the thumb is brought into contact with the lower surface of the upper dish lower covering portion 262, the touch panel 246 can be operated with the other finger, and the same function and effect as described above can be exhibited. Therefore, since the touch panel 246 can be easily operated, the touch panel 246 can be accurately operated easily at the time of the presentation using the touch panel 246, and the player can be entertained by the presentation by the operation of the touch panel 246 It is possible to suppress the decrease.

  In addition, the touch panel 246 is provided within a range of 60 mm from the front end of the plate unit cover 260 to the rear, and the touch panel 246 and the upper plate lower covering portion 262 are grasped from the front end side to operate the touch panel 246 Since the touch panel 246 is disposed within the reach of the finger to be touched, it is possible to operate the touch panel 246 in a state where the finger is stabilized, and it is possible to enjoy the effect using the touch panel 246 and to suppress the player's interest can do.

  Furthermore, since the upper surface of the touch panel 246 is inclined to become higher as it goes from the front side to the rear side, the surface of the touch panel 246 faces the player side and the touch panel 246 becomes easy to see. It is possible to improve the quality, and to reliably exert the above-described effects.

  Moreover, since the thickness between the touch panel 246 and the upper pan lower covering portion 262 becomes thicker toward the rear side because the upper surface of the touch panel 246 becomes higher toward the rear side, the pan unit 200 increases toward the rear side. Strength and rigidity of the Therefore, even if the touch panel 246 is hit from the upper side or strongly pressed, the touch panel 246, the plate unit cover 260, and the like can be made hard to break, and the game is interrupted due to the damage of the touch panel 246, etc. Can be reduced.

  Further, since the upper dish liquid crystal display 244 which is made visible from the upper side through the touch panel 246 is provided, when the player operates the touch panel 246, the upper dish liquid crystal display 244 is used to operate the touch panel 246. By displaying a corresponding image, the touch panel 246 can be operated according to the content of the displayed image without the player knowing the operation method of the touch panel 246, and the operability of the touch panel 246 can be improved.

  Further, since the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 is provided, by displaying the effect image according to the game state, the player can be entertained by the effect image in addition to the operation effect of the touch panel 246, It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to reduce the interest in the game.

  Furthermore, since the touch panel 246 is disposed at the center in the left and right, the touch panel 246 can be easily viewed, and the same distance from either side of the player's left and right hands, and the touch panel 246 is operated by the player's easy-to-use side The operability of the touch panel 246 can be improved by operating the touch panel 246 with an easy-to-use hand. Therefore, when an effect using the touch panel 246 is performed, the touch panel 246 can be visually recognized and operated immediately, and the player can be promptly responded to the operation effect, thereby suppressing entertaining and a decrease in interest can do.

  In addition to the touch operation by the touch panel 246, a press operation by the upper dish effect button 257 is performed in the operation effect presented according to the game state, and the upper dish effect button 257 operable by the player is provided. Therefore, various operation effects can be presented to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to reduce the interest in the game.

  In addition, since a part (guide passage 212a) of the upper tray 201 (upper tray main body 212) storing the game balls along the rear side of the touch panel 246 is opened upward, for example, the guide channel of the upper tray 201 The finger except the thumb is locked to the portion 212a, and the thumb can be stabilized by the finger locked to the guidance passage portion 212a by operating the touch panel 246 with the thumb, and the operability of the touch panel 246 is good. Thus, the touch panel 246 can be operated by grasping between the touch panel 246 and the upper pan lower covering portion 262 or locking a finger to the guiding passage portion 212a. Since it is possible to stabilize the finger and enhance the operability, it is possible to select the placement of the hand for stabilizing the finger according to the habit and preference of the player, and a more diverse player It becomes possible corresponding, it may be easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine for a game.

  Subsequently, a configuration example of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 47 and FIG. FIG. 47 is a perspective view of the game board 5 viewed from the front, and FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the game board 5 viewed from the rear. As shown, the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 has an outer rail 6002 and an inner rail 6003 and has a frame-shaped front component 6001 for partitioning the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game balls are driven A game panel 1100 arranged to close the game area 5a on the rear side of 6001, a function display unit 6040 arranged below the front component 6001 outside the game area 5a and to the left of the out port, and the game area A frame-shaped center character 2300 disposed substantially in the center of 5a and supported by the game panel 1100, a back unit 3000 attached to the back of the game panel 1100, a game panel 1100 and a center on the back of the back unit 3000 It is attached so as to be visible from the player side through the frame of the character (framed decorative body) 2300 and can display a predetermined effect image A liquid crystal display device 1400 of the output display means, a mainly provided.

  A logo movable character 6200 imitating a logo is provided on the upper part of the center character 2300 so as to be able to reciprocate in the counterclockwise direction toward the center of the game board centering on the right side in a front view. On the right side, a zombie movable character 6201 imitating a head of a person (zombie) is provided so as to be able to advance and retract linearly from the right side to the center of the game panel 1100 in a front view. The peripheral control board described later controls the movable aspect of the movable part in accordance with the gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 48, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 and mainly supports the liquid crystal display device 1400 at a position spaced rearward from the game panel 1100 by a predetermined distance. And, in the back box 3001, it is provided with a predetermined movable part disposed in front of the liquid crystal display device 1400. Below the back box 3001, a board substrate holder 6023 is fixed. The board substrate holder 6023 is provided with a main control board box 6024 for storing a main control board for controlling the game operation on its back surface. In addition, a peripheral substrate box 6022 in which a peripheral control substrate is accommodated is attached to the back of the back box 3001.

  FIG. 49 is a front view of the center part, FIG. 50 is a perspective view of the center part and the like as viewed from the right front, and FIG. 51 is a rear view of the center part. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the center plate from which the surface plate is disassembled, FIG. 53 is a front view of the center tile from which the surface plate has been removed, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit from the center tile. FIG. 55 is a front view of the center part with the face plate and the attachment unit removed, and FIG. 56 is a perspective view of the center part with the face plate removed. Fig. 57 is a rear view of the center member from which the attachment unit has been removed, Fig. 58 is a perspective view of the center member from which the attachment unit has been removed, and Fig. 59 is a center ball on which the attachment unit has been removed. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled. FIG. 60 is a rear view in which the lost ball guideway cover is removed from the center product from which the attacker unit has been removed. Fig. 61 (a) is a front view of the attacker unit, (b) is a rear view thereof, (c) is a perspective view thereof, and Fig. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit. Fig. 63 (a) is a front view of the attacker unit base, (b) is a rear view thereof, (c) is a perspective view seen from the right front, and (d) is a perspective view seen from the right rear is there. Fig. 64 (a) is a front view of the taxiway distribution unit, (b) is a rear view thereof, and (c) is a perspective view thereof. Fig. 65 (a) is a front view of the right attachment release unit, (b) is a rear view thereof, (c) is a perspective view thereof, and (d) is a main part of the right attachment release unit seen from the right front An exploded perspective view, (e) is an exploded perspective view which looked at an important section of a right attachment release unit from the rear right. 66 (a) is a front view of the taxiway distribution unit, FIG. 66 (b) is a sectional view taken along the line A-A of FIG. 67 (a), FIG. 67 (a) is a side view of the taxiway distribution unit, FIG. ) Is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B-B of (a).

  As shown in FIG. 49, in the pachinko machine 1A, a first starting port 2001 is provided at a substantially central position in the width direction of the disc and at a position slightly lower than the central in the height direction. Further, immediately below the first start port 2001, a second start port 2008 is provided. Furthermore, a lower large winning opening 2003 is provided immediately below the second starting opening 2008. When the game ball enters the first starting opening 2001, the first special symbol is variably displayed, and when the game ball enters the second starting opening 2008, the second special symbol is variably displayed. The first start port 2001 is open at the upper side, and the gaming ball can always be received.

  The second start port 2008 is in a state where the space between the second start port 2008 and the first start port 2001 is closed by a pair of blade-like movable pieces 2008A and 2008B disposed substantially upright on the left and right sides. The pair of wing-shaped movable pieces in the second start opening 2008 is opened, and the game ball can be received by the second start opening 2008. The lower end sides of the pair of movable pieces in the second start opening 2008 are pivotally supported, and the upper end sides are closed in a direction in which the upper end sides approach each other, thereby closing the game ball to the second start opening 2008 It becomes impossible to accept the Thus, the second start opening 2008 is a variable winning opening by the pair of movable pieces.

  The lower large winning opening can be opened and closed by a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing member 2003 which can close the opening. The lower side of the opening / closing member is pivotally supported, and in a substantially vertical state, the lower large winning opening 2003 (the lower large winning opening is "2003" for convenience of explanation) is closed to play the game. The ball can not be received, and when the upper side pivots to move forward, the lower large winning opening 2003 can be opened to allow the game ball to be received. As such, the lower large winning opening 2003 is a variable winning opening. The lower right of the game board is an area of a right attacher unit 6900 (see FIG. 61 etc.) described later. A lower large winning opening solenoid corresponding to the right large winning opening solenoid 6923 is provided for this. The lower large winning opening 2003 can be opened and closed by operating the lower large winning opening solenoid. Depending on the result of the special lottery (big hit lottery) performed by the game ball being accepted (start winning) to the first starting port 2001 or the second starting port 2008 (the result of the special drawing is “big hit” or “small hit The lower large winning opening 2003 or the right large winning opening 7000 is opened and closed by driving the attack solenoid). As described later, in the big hit game, one or more rounds for opening and closing the right large winning opening 7000 are inserted between predetermined rounds of a plurality of rounds in which the lower large winning opening 2003 is opened. If the right large winning opening 7000 is opened and the gaming ball entered into the right large winning opening can enter the specific area properly in accordance with the opening of the specific area (a probability change area 6770 described later), the gaming machine is a big hit After the end of the game, a predetermined gaming profit is generated such as changing the gaming state to the probability fluctuation state until the number of times of fluctuation reaches a predetermined number. The game machine controls the timing of the opening of the big winning opening and the opening of the specific area on the basis of the lottery result of the big hit, the difficulty, frequency, probability, expectation of entering the game ball into the specific area, By changing the possibilities, the gaming benefits given to the player are different.

  The center character 2700 shown in FIG. 49 and FIG. 50 etc. is fixed to the front of the game panel after being inserted from the front with respect to an opening formed to penetrate substantially the center of the panel. is there. The center character 2700 is formed in a frame shape with a size that occupies most of the game area.

  An upper stage 2701 is provided on the upper side of the lower position when the center character 2700 is viewed from the front, and a lower stage 2702 is provided below the upper stage 2701. A game ball guiding groove 2703 is formed at a substantially central position in the width direction of the lower stage 2702. Further, a warp hole 2704 having an opening area through which gaming balls can pass is formed at a position slightly below the approximate center in the height direction of the left side of the center character 2700, and the gaming ball having passed the warp hole 2704 is , And are discharged from the game ball discharge hole 2705. The game balls discharged from the game ball discharge holes 2705 are guided to the lower stage 2702.

  Most of the gaming balls guided to the lower stage 2702 swing the lower stage 2702 in the left-right direction, and fall downward from the gaming ball guiding groove 2703 or the depressions 2703A and 2703B on the left and right thereof. The first starting opening 2001 is disposed below the gaming ball guiding groove 2703, and the gaming ball dropped from the gaming ball guiding groove 2703 has reached the first starting opening 2001 by following another trajectory. The winning of the first starting opening 2001 is more easily made easier.

  The game balls dropped from the left and right depressions 2703A and 2703B of the game ball guiding groove 2703 tend to be harder to win in the first starting opening 2001 than the game balls dropped from the game ball guiding groove 2703 but other It becomes easier to win the first start opening 2001 than the gaming ball that has reached the first start opening 2001 by tracing the track. Therefore, in general, the gaming balls guided through the warp hole 2704 and guided to the lower stage 2702 are made easier to win the first starting opening 2001 than the gaming balls not passing through the lower stage 2702 .

  Furthermore, the game ball splashed by a nail (a so-called jump nail) or the like provided around the first starting port 2001 may reach the upper stage 2701, for example. The game ball splashed by the jump nail may reach the lower stage A3. Also in this case, the game ball dropped from the game ball guiding groove 2703 or the depressions 2703A and 2703B on the right and left thereof is the first starting opening 2001 It is the same as when passing through the warp hole 2704.

  Further, on the right side of the center character 2700, as shown in FIG. 52 and FIG. 53 etc., a game ball guiding path unit 6500 is provided. The gaming ball guiding path unit 6500 is mainly made of a resin part product formed in the form of a hollow tube, and is attached to the gaming panel over the upper and lower sides on the right side of the gaming area.

  The start end 6501 of the game ball guide path unit 6500 is opened slightly lower than the top of the right end of the game area, and the open area 2005b of a smaller area is formed above the start end 6501 (see FIG. 50) are formed. In the open area, a normal gate 2005a is formed. Right-handed and bounced off by the reflector 6010b (see FIG. 47), many of the game balls trying to flow down the right side of the game area enter the open area 2005b, pass through the normal gate 2005a, or pass through the normal gate 2005a The game is guided to the start end 6501 and supplied from the start end 6501 into the gaming ball guide path unit 6500. A straight portion 6502 is formed below the start end 6501 of the gaming ball guiding path unit 6500, and the gaming balls supplied from the start end 6501 are guided to the straight portion 6502.

  As also shown in FIG. 55, the straight portion 6502 is formed in a straight shape having a relatively long width and lowered substantially vertically. A plurality of convex members 6502a having a hemispherical cross-section are provided on the front side of the gaming ball guiding path unit in the linear portion 6502 similarly to the back side, and the rear side is also directed to the front side A projecting convex body 6502 b is provided. Since the convex body 6502a on the front side and the convex body 6502b on the rear side are formed in a zigzag shape, the game balls flowing down in the linear portion 6502 are sequentially arranged in a plurality of convex bodies arranged in a zigzag shape. Since the ball travels while making a short turn back and forth in contact with the ball, the falling speed of the gaming ball is relaxed, and it becomes easy to control the behavior of the gaming ball. The height in the front-rear direction of the convex body is set in a range that does not impair the progression of the gaming balls passing through the gaming ball guiding path unit 6500. In addition, in order to adjust the falling speed of the gaming ball, the width in the advancing direction of the gaming ball of some of the convex bodies may be increased.

  In the lower area of the gaming area of the gaming ball guiding path unit 6500, an attacker unit accommodation area 6600 is formed. A front surface plate 6601 is provided on the front surface of the attacker unit accommodation area 6600, and a space 6602 is formed on the back side of the front surface plate 6601 as shown in FIG. The surface plate 6601 is provided with a lamp member to which a design is applied, and a non-illustrated attachment unit operation substrate for operating the right attachment unit 6900 (FIG. 54) is provided in the space located on the back side.

  A bent portion 6503 following the straight portion 6502 is formed above the attachment unit housing area 6600. The bending portion 6503 is formed such that the guiding path is bent from right to left, and the inclination angle thereof is approximately 30 degrees. Convex bodies similar to the straight portion 6502 are provided at several places on the downstream side. These convex bodies also reduce the moving speed of the gaming ball. Further, in the vicinity of the discharge portion at the left end of the bending portion 6503, the inclination angle is slightly increased.

  As shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, a gently inclined portion 6504 is formed below the discharge portion of the bending portion 6503. The gently inclined portion 6504 has an inclination angle of about 5 °, and is set to an angle that makes it difficult for the gaming balls to stagnate while reducing the speed of the falling gaming balls. The right large winning opening 7000 for the lower large winning opening 2003 is formed in the middle position of the gently inclined portion 6504 and the large winning opening is blocked by the right large winning opening opening / closing member 6933 (FIG. 53) in the right attachment unit 6900. It is done. The right attacker unit 6900 will be further described later.

  A discharge unit 6505 is provided at the left end of the gently inclined portion 6504. The game balls having passed the discharge unit 6505 are discharged toward the lower large winning opening 2003. In the gaming ball guiding path unit 6500, each of the start end 6501, the straight portion 6502, the bending portion 6503, the gentle slope portion 6504, and the discharging portion 6505 has a width slightly larger than the diameter of the gaming ball, and one While the game ball of can pass with a margin, a plurality of game balls can not pass side by side. Therefore, the gaming balls introduced into the gaming ball guiding path unit 6500 from the start end 6501 pass through the gaming ball guiding path unit 6500 in the order of being introduced into the inside thereof.

  Furthermore, in the attacker unit storage area 6600, below the large winning opening in the gently inclined portion 6504, a drop guiding path 6506 which is directed downward from a portion of the lower surface thereof is formed. The game balls having passed through the drop guiding path 6506 are guided to a guiding path distribution member 6923 to be described later. The right large winning opening 7000 consisting of the upper end opening in the fall guiding path 6506 is normally closed by the large winning opening opening / closing member 6933, and the predetermined condition is satisfied, whereby the special winning opening opening / closing member 6933 moves Then, the upper end opening of the drop guiding path 6506 is opened, and the game ball can pass through the drop guiding path 6506, and the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening becomes possible.

  The width of the right large winning opening 7000 is slightly wider than the diameter of the gaming ball, and smaller than twice the diameter of the gaming ball. Therefore, when the game ball enters the right large winning opening 7000, the two game balls are not arranged side by side so that the large winning opening opening / closing member 6933 is opened. The game balls passing through the gently sloping portion 6504 are guided to the right large winning opening 7000 in an orderly manner.

  In addition, a gaming ball passage opening 6604 is formed at a position below the right large winning opening 7000 and at a position corresponding to the lower end portion of the fall guiding path 6506. The game port having passed through the fall guiding path 6506 is guided toward the back of the attacker unit storage area through the game ball passage port 6604.

  On the other hand, an upper out port 6800 is provided at a position extending in the right direction in the gently inclined portion 6504. Since the upper out port 6800 is disposed above the gentle slope portion 6504, the gaming balls are hard to enter the upper out port 6800. Furthermore, a protrusion directed upward from the lower side is provided between the gently inclined portion 6504 and the upper out port 6800, which makes it more difficult for the game ball to enter the upper out port 6800. It is assumed.

  Further, on the back side of the position where the upper out port 6800 is formed in the attachment unit housing area 6600, an out ball guiding path 6801 extending downward as shown in FIGS. 59 and 60 is provided. As shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, a missing ball guiding path cover 6802 is attached to the surface side of the out ball guiding path 6801. The lost ball guideway cover 6802 has a shape along the shape of the out-ball guideway 6801. By covering the out ball guiding path 801 with the lost ball guiding path cover 6802, the gaming ball passing through the out ball guiding path 6801 is prevented from coming out of the out ball guiding path 801, and it is surely guided downward. Be done.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 51 and 54, a right attacking unit 6900 is provided on the back side of the attaching unit housing area 6600. As shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, the right attachment unit 6900 includes an attachment unit base 6910, a taxiway distribution unit 6920, and a right attachment release unit 6930.

  The attacker unit base 6910 is substantially L-shaped when viewed from the front. The horizontal portion of the attacker unit base 6910 has a certain thickness in the height direction, and the vertical portion has a certain thickness in the width direction. Further, a guideway distribution unit 6920 is provided in the horizontal portion of the attacker unit base 6910, and a right attachment release unit 6930 is provided in the vertical portion.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (c), the through-hole 6940 is formed in the upper position of the vertical portion of the attacker unit base 6910. The through hole 6940 has a width slightly wider than the width of the right large winning opening opening and closing member 6933, and the right large winning opening opening closing member 6933 can be inserted and removed. In addition, a game ball introduction port 6950, into which game balls can be introduced, is formed at a position near the boundary between the vertical portion of the attacker unit base 6910 and the horizontal portion. The game balls having passed through the fall guiding path 6506 and the game ball passage port 6604 pass through the game ball introduction port 6950 and are guided to the back side of the attacker unit base 6910.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 63 (b) and (d), a normal area 6960 and a positive variation area 6970 are provided in parallel at the lower end of the attacker unit base 6910. Further, a distribution guiding path 6980 is formed between the gaming ball inlet 6950 and the normal area 6960 or the positive change area 6970 on the back side of the attacker unit base 6910. The gaming balls introduced to the distribution guiding path 6980 are distributed to the normal area 6960 or the probability variation area 6970. A normal area sensor 6991 and a probability area sensor 6992 are provided at the upper end of the normal area 6960 or the probability area 6970, respectively. The gaming ball guided to the normal region 6960 is detected by the normal region sensor 6991, and the gaming ball guided to the probability variation region 6970 is detected by the probability variation region sensor 6992.

  The normal area 6960 and the positive variation area 6970 are disposed on the back side of the attacker unit base 6910, and further, are disposed on the back side of the space 6602 in the attacker unit accommodation area 6600. Also, a normal area sensor 6991 for detecting gaming balls guided to the normal area 6960 and a probability variation area sensor 6992 for detecting gaming balls guided to the probability variation area 6970 are also on the back side of the attacker unit base 6910, furthermore, the attacker unit It is disposed on the back side of the space 6602 in the accommodation area 6600. For this reason, detection members such as the normal area sensor 6991 and the probability change area sensor 6992 are disposed at a position far from the player, specifically, at a position separating the attacker unit accommodation area 6600 and the attacker unit base 6910 in the center character. There is.

  The guideway distribution unit 6920, as shown also in FIG. 64, includes a guideway distribution solenoid housing case 6921 and a guideway distribution solenoid 6922. The guideway distribution solenoid 6922 is disposed on the back side of the guideway distribution unit 6920, and is accommodated in the guideway distribution solenoid accommodating case 6921.

  The taxiway distribution unit 6920 also includes a taxiway distribution member 6923. As shown in FIG. 63, the guiding path distribution member 6923 is disposed in the distribution guiding path 6980 and passes the gaming ball introduction port 6950 and is guided to the back side of the attacker unit base 6910. It distributes to the normal area 6960 or the probability change area 6970.

  The guideway distribution member 6923 is connected to the guideway distribution solenoid 6922 via a link mechanism (not shown), and the position of the guideway distribution member 6923 changes when the guideway distribution solenoid 6922 is operated. . Here, when the guideway distribution member 6923 is in the standing state shown in FIG. 67 (b), the game balls introduced from the game ball introduction port 6950 are distributed to the normal area 6960. Also, when the leading path distribution member 6923 swings to the left from the state shown in FIG. 67 (b) and is in the inclined state closing the normal area 6960, the game introduced from the game ball introduction port 6950 The sphere is assigned to the probability variation area 6970.

  When the guideway distribution member 6923 is in the standing state, it stands up in the area out of the area from the distribution guideway 6980 to the normal area 6960, and when it is in the inclined state, the distribution guideway The game ball is guided to the probability variation area 6970 by entering the area from 6980 to the normal area 6960. For this reason, the guiding path distribution member 6923 in the standing state is disposed at a position where the gaming ball reaching the normal area 6960 passing through the distribution guiding path 6980 does not touch.

  As shown also in FIG. 65, the right attachment release unit 6930 includes a right large winning opening solenoid housing case 6931 and a right large winning opening solenoid 6932. Among them, the right special winning opening solenoid accommodating case 6931 includes the right large winning opening solenoid accommodating case upper portion 6934 and the right large winning opening solenoid accommodating case lower portion 6935. The right special winning opening solenoid 6932 is disposed on the back side of the right attachment release unit 6930, and is accommodated in the right large winning opening solenoid accommodation case 6931.

  In addition, the right attachment release unit 6930 includes a right large winning opening opening / closing member 6933. As shown in FIG. 66, the right large winning opening / closing member 6933 can be protruded to the front side of the right attachment unit 6900 via the through hole 6940. When the right large winning opening opening and closing member 6933 is projected, as shown in FIG. 63 and the like, the right large winning opening opening and closing member 6933 is approximately flush with the lower surface of the gently inclined portion 6504 in the gaming ball guiding path unit 6500. It has been

  Therefore, when the right large winning opening opening and closing member 6933 protrudes and closes the right large winning opening 7000, the gaming ball passing through the gently inclined portion 6504 moves to the discharging portion 6505 as it is. On the other hand, when the right large winning opening opening and closing member 6933 is drawn in and the right large winning opening 7000 is opened, the gaming ball passing through the gently inclined portion 6504 passes the right large winning opening 7000 to the fall guiding path 6506 And move. Here, the gently inclined portion 6504, the discharge portion 6505, and the right large winning opening 7000 are formed to have a width slightly larger than the diameter of the gaming ball. Therefore, the game balls moving in the gently inclined portion 6504 smoothly move in an orderly manner with respect to any of the discharge portion 6505 and the right large winning hole 7000. The game balls discharged from the discharge unit 6505 are discharged toward the second start port 2008. When the gaming state is the short time state, the game ball discharged from the discharge unit 6505 by hitting the gaming ball right is not entered into the first start opening 2001 substantially, and is shorter than the non-short time state It becomes easy to enter the second starting opening 2008 which is opened frequently.

  Further, the right large winning opening opening / closing member 6933 is connected to the right large winning opening solenoid 6932 via a link mechanism (not shown), and by operating the right large winning opening solenoid 6932, the right large winning opening opening / closing member 6933 It is possible to put in and out. Here, when the right large winning opening opening and closing member 6933 is projecting, the large winning opening in the gently inclined portion 6504 is closed, and the gaming ball is guided to the discharging portion 6505. On the other hand, when the right large winning opening opening and closing member 6933 is pulled in, the large winning opening in the gently inclined portion 6504 is opened, the gaming ball is guided to the falling guiding path 6506, and further via the sorting guiding path 6980 It is distributed to the normal area 6960 or the probability change area 6970.

  When the result of the special lottery is "big hit (special hit)", the lower large winning opening 2003 or the right large winning opening receives the game ball to the effective gate 6010 n (see FIG. 55) after the condition device is activated. It is possible to open and close it by driving the attacker solenoid on condition that there is a problem. The effective gate is a special gate for activating the continuous operation device after the condition device has been activated. The effective gate is provided to allow the pachinko machine 1 to have a function capable of delaying the timing at which the continuous product actuating device operates when a big hit is won. The effective gate 6010 n is set near the end of the straight portion 6502. An effect gate 6011 is formed at the beginning of the straight portion 6502. When the game ball passes the effect gate 6011, passage information of the game ball is supplied to the peripheral control board (or main control board), and the peripheral control board is triggered by the passage of the effect gate 6011 of the game ball, and the game ball is hit right In the gaming state to be enabled, predetermined rendering information of the rendering device including the liquid crystal display device 1400 is formed. The game ball passing through the straight portion 6502 can earn time until passing through the effect gate 6011 and passing through the effective gate 6010 n by the drop speed being mitigated. Therefore, the peripheral control board can afford to take time for rendering on a liquid crystal display device or the like, so that effective rendering can be provided to the player.

  Next, control boards for performing various controls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 is a block diagram of the main control board, the payout control board and the peripheral control board, FIG. 69 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 68, and FIG. 70 is a payout control board, CR unit and frequency constituting the main board. FIG. 71 is a schematic view of various detection signals input to and output from the game apparatus connection terminal board for relaying the electric connection with the display board, and FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. FIG. 73 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 73 is a block diagram of the periphery of a sound source built-in VDP in a liquid crystal and sound control unit.

  As shown in FIG. 68, the control configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 mainly includes a main control board 4100, a payout control board 4110, and a peripheral control board 4140, and various controls are shared. First, the main control board will be described, and then the payout control board, the power supply board, and the peripheral control board will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 68, the main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game controls the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time the power is turned on and performs the game operation. The main control MPU 4100a, which is a microprocessor incorporating various control programs such as a main control program to control and ROMs storing various commands and RAM temporarily storing data, and detection signals from various detection switches are input. Main control input circuit 4100b, a main control output circuit 4100c for outputting various signals to an external substrate etc., and a main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d for driving various solenoids for movable part etc. It mainly includes a blackout monitoring circuit 4100e that monitors a voltage blackout or an indication of an instantaneous blackout.

  In addition to the built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and the built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM") in main control MPU 4100a. In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are incorporated.

  In addition, the main control MPU 4100a incorporates a non-volatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code to which a unique code (a code that exists only one in the world) for identifying an individual is attached by a maker who manufactured the main control MPU 4100a is stored in advance. Since this once assigned ID code is stored in the non-volatile RAM, it can not be rewritten even using an external device. The main control MPU 4100a can extract the ID code from the non-volatile RAM and refer to it.

  The main control input circuit 4100 b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various detection switches are input to its various input terminals, and has no reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 4100 b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, since the main control input circuit 4100b does not reset information based on detection signals from various detection switches inputted to its various input terminals by a main control system reset described later, various signals based on the information are variously It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

  The main control output circuit 4100c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate etc. are input to the various input terminals. The main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function is provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the stored information, and the main control output circuit 4100cb without a reset function without a reset terminal is not provided And consists of. The main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca has information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external substrate etc. by being reset by a main control system reset described later. Are constructed as a circuit in which the signals based on are not output at all from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit without reset function 4100 cb is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control output circuit without reset function 4100cb has the information for outputting various signals inputted to its various input terminals to the external substrate etc. not reset by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which a signal based on the signal is output from its various output terminals.

  First start port 2001, second start port 2008 Each start port switch 3022 (collectively referred to as a first start port switch and a second start port switch) for detecting game balls entering the respective first start port 2008, and a general winning port A detection signal from a general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting a game ball entering a ball and a signal from a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e are input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a through the main control input circuit 4100b. ing. In addition, a gate switch 2352 (generally referring to each switch) that detects gaming balls that have passed through the normal gate 2005a and the effective gate 6010n, a count switch that detects gaming balls that entered the lower large winning opening 2003, and the right Count switch (these switches are collectively referred to as 2110) which detects the game ball which entered into large winning a prize mouth 7000, and magnetic detection switch 3024 which is attached to back unit 3000 and detects the cheating using magnet The detection signal from is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a through the panel relay terminal board 4161 attached to the game board 5 and the main control input circuit 4100b. Although not shown in FIG. 68, the same applies to detection signals from the normal area sensor 6991 and the probability variation area sensor 6992.

  The main control MPU 4100a outputs a drive signal to the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca from the output terminal of the predetermined output port based on the detection signal from each of these switches, thereby the main control output circuit with reset function The control signal is output from 4100ca to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, and the start port solenoid (movable piece 2008a, b driving solenoid) 2105 and the attacker solenoid 2108, induction from the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d via the panel relay terminal plate 4161 The drive signal is output to the road distribution solenoid 6922 and the right large winning opening solenoid 6932, or the drive signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function Control output circuit 4 First special symbol display 1185, second special symbol display 1186, first special symbol memory display 1184, second special symbol memory display 1187, from 00ca through panel relay terminal board 4161 and function display board 1191 A drive signal is output to the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol storage indicator 1188, the game state indicator 1183, and the round indicator 1190.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a outputs various information (game information) about the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function By outputting various information (game information) to the substrate 4110 or outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100 ca with reset function, the main control output with reset function A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the circuit 4100 ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100 e.

  In the present embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the starting opening switch 3022, the gate switch 2352, the count switch 2110, etc. Uses a contact-type ON / OFF mechanical switch. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first start port 2001 and the second start port 2008, and the gate passes frequently, so detection of the game ball by the start port switch 3022 and the gate switch 2352 is also frequent Occurs on For this reason, the start port switch 3022 and the gate switch 2352 use proximity switches with a long life. In addition, when the big hit game state which is advantageous for the player occurs, the big winning opening 2003, 7000 is opened and the game ball enters frequently, so the detection of the game ball by the count switch 2110 also frequently occurs. For this reason, the count switch 2110 also uses a proximity switch with a long life. The same applies to the switches of the sensors 6991 and 699. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening switch does not frequently occur in the general winning opening where the gaming ball does not enter frequently. Therefore, a mechanical switch whose life is shorter than that of the proximity switch is used as the general winning opening switch.

  Further, main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands relating to the payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function. Various commands are transmitted to the substrate 4110 as serial data. The payout control board 4110 outputs a signal (payout ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 4100 when normal reception of various commands from the main control board 4100 is completed as serial data. This signal (payment ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a through the main control input circuit 4100b.

  Further, main control MPU 4100a receives various commands relating to the state of pachinko gaming machine 1 from payout control board 4110 as serial data by main control input circuit 4100b, whereby main control input circuit 4100b receives the predetermined serial input port. Receive various commands as serial data at the input terminal. When the main control MPU 4100a completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 4110 as serial data, the main control output with a reset function is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port (a main payment ACK signal) notifying that. The signal is output to the circuit 4100ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit 4100ca having a reset function to the payout control board 4110.

  Also, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function. Thus, various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit without reset function 4100 cb to the peripheral control board 4140.

  Here, the main cycle serial transmission port for transmitting various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 4140 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 4100a is mainly configured of a main control CPU core 4100aa, and in addition to the main control built-in RAM, a main cycle serial transmission port 4100ae etc. which is one of various main control serial I / O ports is connected to the bus 4100ah. It is connected via a circuit (see FIG. 78). The main rotation serial transmission port 4100 ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 as main rotation serial data, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 4100 aea, a transmission buffer register 4100 aeb, and a serial management unit 4100 aec (see FIG. See 78). When the main control CPU core 4100aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec, the serial management unit 4100aec transmits the command set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb from the transmission buffer register 4100aeb The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 4100aea and transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 as main cycle serial data is started. In this embodiment, 32 bytes are provided as the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 4100 aeb. The main control CPU core 4100aa sends a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 4140 continuously by outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec after setting the plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb.

  Power supply substrate 851 for supplying various voltages to main control substrate 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to main control substrate 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off BCO (see FIG. 74). The main control MPU 4100a can store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off by the capacitor BC0. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 860a when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 described later is operated within a predetermined period after power-on. Is output from the payout control board 4110 and input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b, and the main control MPU 4100a causes the main control MPU 4100a to completely erase from the main control built-in RAM. It is supposed to be (cleared).

  As shown in FIG. 69, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout and the like of the gaming balls includes a payout control unit 4120 that performs various controls relating to payout, an operation switch 860a having various functions, and the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 And an error LED indicator 860b for displaying. Further, the operation switch 860a having a function as a RAM clear switch is described as a RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") built in the main control MPU 4100a based on a detection signal outputted by being operated. Outputs a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in ..).

  As shown in FIG. 69, the payout control unit 4120 that performs various controls relating to payout controls the power-on process executed at the time of power on, and the payout of gaming media executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power on. Payment control MPU 4120a, which is a microprocessor that incorporates various control programs including a payout control program that controls the operation and ROMs storing various commands and RAM temporarily storing data, and detection from various detection switches related to payout A payout control input circuit 4120b to which a signal is input, a payout control output circuit 4120c for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like, a payout motor drive circuit 4120d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744, and CR CR unit input / output operation to exchange various signals with unit 6 Is provided with a 4120e, a. In addition to the built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payment control built-in RAM”) and the built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payment control built-in ROM”), the payout control MPU 4120 a In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are incorporated.

  The payout control program controls various types of game information from the main control board 4100 and various commands regarding payout from the main control board 4100 as payout serial data transmission signals via the payout control I / O port 4120b under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. Receive serial data by serial method. Further, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to a first error occurrence command) triggered by the occurrence of an error in the payout operation of the gaming ball, or operates the operation switch 860a as an error release unit. Based on the signal (detection signal), a 16-bit (2-byte) error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the first error cancellation command) is created, and these error generation command and error cancellation navigation command are transmitted to the serial serial data of the customer The signal is output as serial data of the serial system to the reception port of the main control board 4100 via the payout control I / O port 4120b (command transmission means). In addition, the payout control program pays out after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main processing is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is executed and the payout control is started. When an error occurs in the operation, the error is canceled based on the detection signal generated in response to the operation of the operation switch 860a, and the output of the warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

  Further, the payout control program outputs (a first door frame open command) of a door frame open command when a detection signal (a door frame open detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the door frame open switch 618. When a detection signal (body frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the body frame opening switch 619, a body frame opening command (first body frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, the payout control program also receives the door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when the detection signal (the door frame closing detection signal) is input from the door frame opening switch 618 according to the closing operation. While outputting, when the detection signal (main frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the main frame opening switch 619, the main frame closing command (first main frame closing command) is output.

  The payout control input circuit 4120 b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various detection switches are respectively input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 4120 b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, the payout control input circuit 4120 b does not reset information based on detection signals from the various detection switches inputted to the various input terminals by the payout control system reset described later, so that various signals based on the information are variously It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

  The payout control output circuit 4120c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. And a reset function dispensing control output circuit 4120 ca having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the stored information, and a reset function non-dispense control output circuit 4120 cb not having a reset function not provided with a reset terminal And consists of. The payout control output circuit 4120 ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is input. That is, the payout control output circuit 4120 ca with a reset function has information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external substrate etc. by being reset by a payout control system reset described later. Are constructed as a circuit in which the signals based on are not output at all from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the non-resetting function dispensing control output circuit 4120 cb is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a dispensing control system reset described later is not input. That is, since the information for outputting the various signals inputted to the various input terminals to the external substrate etc. is not reset by the later-described payout control system reset, the payment function output control circuit 4120 cb does not have reset function. It is configured as a circuit in which a signal based on the signal is output from its various output terminals.

  The detection signal from the out-of-ball switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of the gaming ball in the supply passage of the winning ball device and the counting switch 751 for detecting the gaming ball flowing down in the winning ball passage of the winning ball device The prize ball case inner substrate is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a through the payout control input circuit 4120b. The detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 for detecting the detection slit formed on the rotation detection board of the prize ball device is firstly the rotation angle switch board 753 of the prize ball device, and the prize ball case inner substrate, and the payout control input It is inputted to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the circuit 4120b.

  Further, a detection signal from a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame to the main body frame and a main frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame to the outer frame is the payout control via the payout control input circuit 4120b. The signal is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the MPU 4120a.

  The detection signal from the full switch 550 is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the handle relay terminal board 192, the power supply substrate 851, and the payout control input circuit 4120b.

  The payout control MPU 4120a receives various commands relating to the payout from the main control board 4100 via the payout control input circuit 4120b at the input terminal of the serial input port in the serial data mode, or detects the operation signal of the operation switch 860a (detection Signal) is output to the main control board 4100 via the payout control input circuit 4120b. Upon completion of normal reception of various commands from the main control board 4100 as serial data, the payout control MPU 4120a outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect, and a payout control output with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting to the circuit 4120 ca, a signal (payout ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit 4120 ca with reset function to the main control board 4100.

  Further, the payout control MPU 4120a transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as serial data to the payout control output circuit 4120 cb as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the control output circuit 4120 cb to the main control board 4100. When the normal control of the various commands from the payout control substrate 4110 is completed as serial data, the main control substrate 4100 outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control substrate 4110. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a through the payout control input circuit 4120b.

  In addition, the payout control MPU 4120a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function, from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function. The drive signal is output to the payout motor drive circuit, and the drive signal is output from the payout motor drive circuit to the payout motor through the prize ball case inner substrate, or the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the pachinko gaming machine 1 By outputting a drive signal for displaying the state on the error LED indicator 860b to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function, the drive signal from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function is output to the error LED indicator 860b Do.

  The error LED display 860b is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The contents that the error LED display 860b displays and notifies include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that "normal" is displayed, and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 4100 Report that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the board with the payout control board 4110, and if the number “1” is displayed, it indicates “ball out” (specifically, the ball is out) Informing that there is no gaming ball in the supply passage of the winning ball device 740 based on the detection signal from the switch 750, and when the number "2" is displayed, it indicates that "the ball is seen" (specifically Is based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 at the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the prize ball device 740, the payout rotor and the gaming ball are engaged near the entrance, making the payout rotor difficult to rotate. Report that it has been When "3" is displayed, it notifies that it is "counting switch error" (specifically, it indicates that the counting switch 751 has a problem based on the detection signal from the counting switch 751), and the numeral " When “5” is displayed, it informs that “retry error” (specifically, the fact that the number of retries for the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit value), and the number “6” is displayed. When it is present, it informs that it is "full" (specifically, it is full on the game ball stored based on the detection signal from full switch 550) and the number "7" is displayed. When it is present, it notifies that it is "CR not connected" (indicating that the electrical connection is cut off anywhere from the dispensing control board 4110 to the CR unit 6), and when the numeral "9" is displayed In stock (with prize balls stock (unpaid coin)) "in the effect that (specifically, yet that the ball number of game balls not payout has reached a predetermined number spheres) are informed.

  Further, the payout control MPU 4120a outputs the number of balls of the gaming ball actually paid out, etc., to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, thereby a payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function The ball number etc. of the game ball actually paid out are outputted to the external terminal board 784 through the resistance which is not shown.

  Further, the payout control board 4110 outputs various information (game information) about the game from the main control board 4100 to the external terminal board via a resistor not shown. The external terminal board is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (including an infrared LED and a photo IC built-in), and the game place (hall) is provided via the plurality of photocouplers. The number of balls and the like of the gaming balls and various information (gaming information, details of an error or an error relating to the payout operation of the gaming balls) are transmitted to the hall computer installed in each of the above. The external terminal board and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the hall computer The main control board 4100 which advances the game from the hall computer via the external terminal board of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the hall computer and the payout control board 4110 which controls the payout etc. are abnormal. Voltage is applied to prevent malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the gaming balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the gaming information of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The ball lending request signal of the game ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return switch 365b are firstly transmitted from the frequency display board 365, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the game ball etc. It is input to the CR unit 6 via 869. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of gaming balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal in a serial system to the payout control board 4110 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and this signal is CR unit The data is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a through the input / output circuit 4120e. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of lent gaming balls, and at the same time, displays a signal for displaying the remaining degree on the remaining number indicator 365c The signal is output to the lending device connection terminal board 869, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365, and this signal is input to the remaining frequency display 365c. In addition, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the remaining frequency indicator 365c is configured such that the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 is input through the game ball connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. There is.

  The power supply substrate 851 for supplying various voltages to the payout control substrate 4110 is provided with a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 74) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control substrate 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. There is. With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 4120a can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The various information stored in the payout control internal RAM, when the operation switch 860a is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the operation signal thereof via the payout control input circuit 4120b, the predetermined of the payout control MPU 4120a The payout control MPU 4120a is input to the input terminal of the input port, and the payout control MPU 4120a determines it as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. It is supposed to be completely erased (cleared). The operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit 4120 cb without reset function, and is also output from the payout control output circuit 4120 cb without reset function to the main control board 4100.

  Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 4120 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display plate 365 will be described based on FIG. The gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control substrate 4110, and also electrically between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display plate 365. The connection is also relayed (precisely, the game ball connection device board 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880, and the CR unit 6 and the game ball Etc. The lending device connection terminal plate 869 is electrically connected, the gaming ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the frequency display plate And 365 are electrically connected). Between the substrate of CR unit 6 and the game device connection terminal plate 869, between the substrate of the game device connection terminal plate 869 and the payout control substrate 4110, the game device connection terminal plate 869 and main door relay Wirings (harnesses) are used to electrically connect between the board with the terminal board 880 and between the game ball and the like, and the board of the lending device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365, respectively. Further, an AC 24 V described later from the power supply substrate 851 is supplied to the CR unit 6 through the game ball and the like lending device connection terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 is generated from the supplied AC 24 V to a predetermined voltage VL (in the embodiment, DC +12 V (DC +12 V, hereinafter referred to as “+12 V”)) by a built-in voltage generation circuit (not shown). The game balls are supplied to the payout control board 4110 through the loan device connection terminal plate 869, while the game balls are supplied to the frequency display plate 365 through the game device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 .

  A switch 365 a and a return switch 365 b are mounted on the frequency display plate 365, and a remaining frequency display 365 c which is a segment display is mounted.

  In the ball lending switch 365 a and the return switch 365 b, the ground LG from the CR unit 6 is electrically connected via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. When the ball lending switch 365a is pressed and operated, the ball lending switch 365a is turned on (ON), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending switch 365a is the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game The input is made to the CR unit 6 through the ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When the return switch 362 is pressed, the return switch 365b is turned on (turned on), and the return operation signal RES from the return switch 365b is connected to the main door relay terminal board 880 and a game ball rental device It is input to the CR unit 6 through the terminal plate 869.

  The remaining power number display 365c is formed by arranging three segment displays in parallel, and among the three-digit segment displays, one digit of the segment displays is sequentially driven. The segment indicator of the is controlled to light. By such lighting control, the remaining frequency display 365 c displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6 or displays an error of the CR unit 6. The remaining frequency display 365c is comprised of digit signals DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for specifying one-digit segment display among three-digit segment displays, and the specified one-digit segment display Segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (a total of seven signals) for specifying the content to be displayed by lighting up, from the CR unit 6 to a game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and a main door relay terminal board When input through 880, the 1-digit segment indicators are sequentially illuminated according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and these 3-digit segment indicators The contents due to the light emission can be viewed through the loan remaining display portion 363.

  A CR unit lamp 365 d is mounted on the frequency display plate 365 adjacent to the remaining frequency indicator 365 c. In the CR unit lamp 365d, a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input via the game ball and the like lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending enable signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on a gaming apparatus such as a gaming ball and the like via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 generates the predetermined voltage VL from AC 24 V supplied from the power supply substrate 851 by the built-in voltage generation circuit, and the ball lending switch 365 a and the return switch 365 b are in the ball lending possible state. Controls the logic of the ball lending enable signal TDL to make the CR unit lamp 365d emit light, and this luminescence can be viewed through the lending residual display unit 363. The segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the remaining number indicator 365c through the current limiting resistor mounted on the game apparatus connection terminal plate 869 such as a game ball.

  In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending switch 365a is input from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the gaming ball etc. lending device connection plate 869. Then, the game ball request signal BRDY is output to the payout control board 4110 (the payout control MPU 4120a) through the gaming ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. And CR unit 6 is a single payout operation start request signal to pay out a predetermined number of balls to be rented (in this embodiment, it is 25 balls and corresponds to 100 yen as the amount of money) in one payout operation. Is output to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. The payout control board 4110 (the payout control MPU 4120a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input is a signal for notifying that one payout operation has been started or ended, the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 , A signal indicating that it is possible or impossible to output to the CR unit 6 or that a payout operation for paying out a rental ball is possible, such as a gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869 to the CR unit 6 or the like. In addition, for example, when a store clerk or the like in the hall sets in advance in the CR unit 6 so that the gaming ball for 200 yen is paid out when the rental ball button 361 is pressed, one payout operation Will be performed twice in a row, and if 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, then 25 balls for 100 yen will be paid out continuously, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen will be paid out Become.

  In the CR unit 6, the return button 362 is pressed and the return operation signal RES from the return switch 365b is input from the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball connection device board 869. And, the prepaid card is discharged from the insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount of money corresponding to the number of game balls paid out as a result of the pressing of the rental ball button 361.

  Next, the power supply substrate 851 will be briefly described. The power supply substrate 851 is supplied with power from the pachinko island facility, and can electrically connect or disconnect the AC 24 V (AC 24 V), and a power control unit 855 that generates various types of power. And a launch control unit for performing launch control by a launch solenoid of a striking launcher and ball feed control by a ball feed solenoid.

  The power supply control unit 855 improves the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectification circuit 855a and the synchronous rectification circuit 855a that rectifies the AC 24 V (AC 24 V) supplied from the pachinko island facility when the power switch 852 is operated. A power factor improving circuit 855b, a smoothing circuit 855c for smoothing power whose power factor is improved by the power factor improving circuit 855b, and various DCs for supplying power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 855c to various substrates And a power supply generation circuit 855d for generating a power supply.

  A launch control unit 857, which performs launch control by a launch solenoid and ball feed control by ball feed, mainly includes a launch control circuit 857a. The launch control circuit 857a detects an operation signal from the potentiometer 512 for electrically adjusting the intensity (launch intensity) to strike the gaming ball toward the gaming area 5a, and a touch switch 516 for detecting whether the palm or finger is touching. And a detection signal from the release stop switch 518 for detecting whether or not the player is forced to stop the launch of the game ball by the intention of the player via the handle relay terminal board 192, It has been input. In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game apparatus connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected to each other, the release control circuit 857a receives a CR connection signal to that effect via the payout control board 4110. .

  The launch control circuit 857a controls the adjustment of the drive current for launching the gaming ball toward the gaming area 1100 based on the operation signal from the potentiometer 512 and outputting it to the launch solenoid 654.

  As shown in FIG. 71, the peripheral control board 4140 performs peripheral control based on various commands from the main control board 4100. The peripheral control unit 4150, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244. While performing drawing control and performing detection control of the touch state of the touch panel 246, a speaker accommodated in a speaker box provided in the main body frame and a liquid crystal performing sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from speakers provided in the door frame A sound control unit 4160, a real time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") control unit 4165 for holding calendar information for specifying a date, and time information for specifying time The volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box and the speaker provided in the door frame is operated to turn the knob portion. And a, and volume adjustment volume adjusted by.

  As shown in FIG. 71, the peripheral control unit 4150 which performs effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor and the power-on process executed at the time of power on, and also after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power on. A peripheral control ROM 4150b that stores various control programs such as sub control programs that are executed and controls rendering operations, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 described later. Various information (for example, schedule data defining the screen to be drawn on the game board liquid crystal display device 1400, emission of various LEDs, etc. continued across peripheral control unit steady processing executed each time a V blank signal is input) Manage schedule data, etc. that define aspects Peripheral control RAM 4150c storing various information (eg, information for managing the history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state), information for managing a special effect flag, etc. And a peripheral control external watchdog timer 4150 e (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external WDT 4150 e”) for monitoring whether or not the peripheral control MPU 4150 a is operating normally. Have. In addition, the peripheral control unit 4150 controls the rendering operation in response to passage information of the game ball by the switch of the rendering gate 6011 and input information of the operation of the rendering operation means such as the rendering button 257.

  The peripheral control RAM 4150c can not hold the stored content only for the time when the instantaneous power failure occurs and the power is restored immediately, and the power is cut off for a long time (when a long time power interruption occurs In the peripheral control SRAM 4150d, the backup power is supplied by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter referred to as "electrolytic capacitor for SRAM") provided on the power supply substrate, while the content of the peripheral control SRAM 4150d is lost. The stored content can be held for about 50 hours. When the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko gaming machine 1 by providing the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM on the power supply substrate, the backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 4150 d, so the peripheral control SRAM 4150 d stores the stored contents. You can not hold it and lose its contents.

  The peripheral control external WDT 4150 e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150 a is out of control, and when the timer is up, the hardware is reset. That is, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a predetermined period (until the timer is up), the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset. Since the peripheral control MPU 4150a can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e when outputting a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period, it does not reset.

  Peripheral control MPU 4150a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports and the like, and upon receiving various commands from main control board 4100, each decoration board of game board 4 based on the various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs etc. provided in the lamp from the lamp drive board serial I / O port through the peripheral control output circuit (not shown) Game board motor drive data for transmitting drive signals to drive boards 4170 and outputting drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 serial for motor drive boards Electrical drive such as a dial drive motor, etc. transmitted from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, or provided on the door frame The door side motor drive data for outputting the drive signal to the frame Frame decoration via the decoration I / O port for the motor drive amplifier board motor through the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board, and the peripheral door relay terminal board Door-side light emission data for transmitting to the drive amplifier board, lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame, etc., flashing signals or gradation lighting signals for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED It is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board through the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board, and the peripheral door relay terminal board from the serial I / O port.

  Various commands from the main control board 4100 are input to the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Further, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotational direction) of the dial operation unit provided in the operation unit 400 and a detection signal from a pressure detection switch for detecting an operation of the pressing operation unit Is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate, and this serialized operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit, peripheral door relay terminal board, frame peripheral relay terminal board And, through the peripheral control input circuit, it is input to the operation unit detecting serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a.

  Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, a photo sensor etc.) for detecting the original position and movable position of various movable bodies (movable roles) provided on the game board 5, and further from the gate switch of the effect gate 6011 Detection signals from the press switch such as effect buttons are serialized by the game board serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180 etc., and the serialized detection data is transmitted to the game board serial transmission The circuit is input to the motor drive board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a from the circuit via the peripheral control input circuit. The peripheral control MPU 4150a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 4140 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the motor drive board serial I / O port.

  Peripheral control MPU 4150a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"), and the system runs away using peripheral control built-in WDT and peripheral control external WDT 4150e in combination. It is diagnosed whether it is

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a which is a microcomputer will be described. As shown in FIG. 72, peripheral control MPU 4150a has peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, peripheral control DMA (abbreviated as Direct Memory Access) controller 4150ac, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, peripheral control various serial I, centering on peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. It comprises an / O port 4150ae, a peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and a peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A / D converter) 4150ak.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150 aa reads and writes various data from / to the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150 ab and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac via the internal bus 4150 ah, while peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150 ae and WDT 4150 af Various data are read / written to / from the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150 aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 4150 b via the internal bus 4150 ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150 ad, and the external bus 4150 h, while the peripheral control RAM 4150 c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150 d. It reads and writes various data via the internal bus 4150 ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150 ad, and the external bus 4150 h.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes storage devices such as peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, peripheral control ROM 4150b, peripheral control RAM 4150c, and peripheral control SRAM 4150d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I DMA0 is a dedicated controller that performs data transfer independently between peripheral devices such as I / O port 4150ag and peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak without using peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. It has four channels of ~ DMA3.

  Specifically, peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac is a storage device of peripheral control built-in RAM 4150 ab incorporated in peripheral control MPU 4150 a, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150 ae incorporated in peripheral control MPU 4150 a, and WDT 4150 af To perform data transfer independently between peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag and input / output devices such as peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak without using peripheral control CPU core 4150aa The peripheral control built-in RAM 4150 ab reads and writes via the internal bus 4150 ah while the peripheral control various serial I / O port 4150 ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150 af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150 g, and the peripheral control A / D converter input and output devices such as 4150Ak, via the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and peripheral bus 4150Ai, reading and writing.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac is a peripheral control various types of serial I / s built in the peripheral control MPU 4150 a and storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 4150 b, the peripheral control RAM 4150 c, and the peripheral control SRAM 4150 d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150 a. Between devices with input / output devices such as O port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak, without using the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa In order to perform data transfer independently, peripheral control bus controller 4150 ad and external bus 4150 h are used for storage devices such as peripheral control ROM 4150 b, peripheral control RAM 4150 c, and peripheral control SRAM 4150 d. And read / write, peripherals for input / output devices such as peripheral control various serial I / O port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak Reading and writing are performed via the control bus controller 4150 ad and the peripheral bus 4150 ai.

  Peripheral control bus controller 4150ad controls internal bus 4150ah, peripheral bus 4150ai, and external bus 4150h to control the central processing unit of peripheral control MPU core 4150aa, peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, peripheral control ROM 4150b, peripheral control RAM 4150c, and peripheral control. Various devices such as storage devices such as SRAM 4150 d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150 ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150 af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150 ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 4150 ak etc It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

  Peripheral control various serial I / O port 4150ae are serial I / O port for lamp drive board, serial I / O port for motor drive board, serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, frame decoration drive amplifier board LED It has a serial I / O port for a frame, a serial I / O port for a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, a serial I / O port for a main control board, and a serial I / O port for acquiring operation unit information.

  Peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 4150af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of peripheral control MPU 4150a is out of control. When this timer is up, it is reset by hardware It has become. That is, the peripheral control CPU core 4150 aa is reset when the watchdog timer is started and the clear signal for clearing the timer is not output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150 af within a predetermined period (until the timer is up). It will take When the peripheral control CPU core 4150 aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150 af within a certain period, the timer count can be restarted, so that the reset does not occur.

  Peripheral control Various parallel I / O port 4150ag outputs various latch signals such as game board side motor drive latch signal, door side motor drive light emission latch signal etc. In addition, it outputs clear signal to peripheral control external WDT 4150 e, The detection signals from the various detection switches for detecting the original position and the movable position of the various movable bodies provided on the board 4 are serialized by the game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. Output a movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the movable body detection data from the game board serial transmission circuit at the serial I / O port for motor drive board of peripheral control MPU 4150a, or the upper decoration in the door frame 5 It outputs the lighting signal of the LED mounted on the upper decoration board of the unit. This LED is a high-intensity white LED, and is a confirmation notification lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state is determined. In this embodiment, the route between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag is shortened by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag are electrically connected directly. The noise measures can be taken for the lighting control of the LED which has the meaning of weight on the game. In addition, about lighting control of LED, it is performed in peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt processing mentioned later, and other LEDs etc. except this LED are performed in peripheral control part steady processing mentioned later It has become.

  The peripheral control A / D converter is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume, and when the knob of the volume adjustment volume is turned, the resistance value is changed, and the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob is divided by The compressed voltage is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into 1024 levels of values from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, the values of 1024 stages are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. Mute is set for substrate volume 0, and maximum volume is set for substrate volume 6, and the volume is set to increase from substrate volume 0 to substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (a sound source built-in VDP 4160a described later) is controlled so that the volume set to the substrate volume 0 to 6 is provided to the speaker and door frame housed in the speaker box provided on the main body frame 3 Music and sound effects are flowing from the speakers. As described above, music and sound effects flow from the speakers housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speakers provided in the door frame by sound volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying a store clerk or the like in the hall of an occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or an injustice against the pachinko gaming machine 1, contents related to game effects, etc. (For example, the screen developed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 may be rendered more powerful, or it may be notified that the player is likely to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player, etc.). Notification sound also flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame 5, but the notification sound and the notification sound completely depend on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. And the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (a sound source built-in VDP 4160a described later) is controlled by a program according to a program. So that the it can be adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from the muffling to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the seven steps described above. Thereby, for example, even when the store clerk or the like in the hall turns the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume to set the volume small, the speaker and door frame housed in the speaker box provided on the main body frame are provided. Although the effect sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 130 is reduced, the loudness (in the present embodiment, the maximum) in the case where a problem occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or when the player is cheating The notification sound set to (volume) can be flowed. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming aware of the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's fraudulent act by the notification sound. Also, based on the current substrate volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced to prevent interference with music and sound effects. There is a possibility to increase the volume to play the music and to add to music and sound effects to render the screen developed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 as more powerful, or to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player. It can also be announced that it is expensive.

  The peripheral control ROM 4150 b stores in advance various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 4150, liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, RTC control unit 4165 and the like, various data, various control data, and various schedule data. Various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the game board liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, music There are sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects and the like, and electric drive source schedule data and the like for generating a drive mode of an electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the configuration of the screen in time series, and the order of the screen drawn on the game board liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is defined. It is done. The light emission aspect generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission aspect of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 described later, and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a Among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source, track numbers are specified for instructing which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects. The electrical drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of an electrical drive source such as a motor or a solenoid in time series, and defines the operation of the electrical drive source such as a motor or a solenoid.

  The various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be read out directly from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and executed, but they may be copied to the various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, which will be described later, when the power is turned on. Some are read and executed. When various data, various control data and various schedule data stored in peripheral control ROM 4150b are also directly read from peripheral control ROM 4150b, when power is turned on to various control data copy areas of peripheral control RAM 4150c described later, etc. In some cases, the copied one is read out.

  Further, the peripheral control ROM 4150 b is used to correct the brightness of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 according to the use time of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program is to correct the decrease in brightness due to the secular change of the game board liquid crystal display device 1400 when the backlight of the game board liquid crystal display device 1400 is equipped with an LED type. The date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is first powered on, the current date and time, the brightness setting information, etc. are acquired from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165 described later, and the acquired brightness setting information is based on the correction information. To correct. The correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150 b. The brightness setting information is, as described later, brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 from 100% to 70% in 5% steps, The brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 which is set is included, for example, the date and time when the game board liquid crystal display device 1400 was first turned on and the current date and time Therefore, when June has already passed from the date when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is first powered on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150 b and the luminance is When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is turned on, the correction information acquired for the 75% is used. To adjust the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness of 80% is further added by 5%. When December has already passed since the date when the liquid crystal display device 1400 was first powered on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150 b, and the LED included in the luminance setting information When the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is turned on at a luminance of 75%, the luminance is set so that the luminance is 85% which is further added by 10% which is correction information acquired with respect to the 75%. Based on the brightness adjustment information included in the information, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is adjusted and lighted.

  As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a is a backup that exclusively stores the information to be backed up among various information updated by execution of various control programs. Management target work area 4150ca, backup first area 4150cb and backup second area 4150cc for exclusive storage of copied various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, and peripheral control ROM 4150b The various control program copy area 4150 cd, which exclusively stores the copied various control programs, and the various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150 b A control data copy area 4150ce that stores the copied data for exclusive use, and a backup non-management target that stores only the information that is not the backup target among the various information updated by the execution of the control program A work area 4150 cf is provided.

  When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on (including a momentary power failure or a power failure due to a power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged object work area 4150 cf and cleared to zero. For the backup management target work area 4150ca, backup first area 4150cb, and backup second area 4150cc, the power on command from the main control board 4100 at the time of power on of the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts RAM clear effect start and respective state effect start (For example, to start the effect when the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 68 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on). Ru.

  The backup management target work area 4150 ca is various information that is updated in peripheral control unit steady processing executed each time a V blank signal from the sound source built-in VDP 4160 a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 described later is input. Bank0 (1fr), which exclusively stores 1fr) as a backup target, and effect information (1ms), which is various information updated in peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing executed each time a 1ms timer interrupt described later occurs It consists of Bank 0 (1 ms), which is exclusively stored as a backup target. Here, the names of Bank 0 (1 fr) and Bank 0 (1 ms) will be briefly described. “Bank” is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various types of information. The following “0” means that the storage area is normally used to store various information updated by execution of various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is taken as the minimum management unit. Then, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4” provided in the area ranging from backup first area 4150 cb to backup second area 4 150 cc to be described later are the same storage areas as “Bank 0”. It means that it has a size. “(1fr)” is, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 4150a when the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source outputs drawing data of one screen (one frame) to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244. The V blank signal is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 4150a to indicate that it is ready to accept the screen data from V. Therefore, each time the V blank signal is input, in other words, one frame (1 frame) Since peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each time, “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4” are additionally described (effect information (1 fr) and effects to be described later) The backup information (1fr) is also used in the same meaning) "(1 ms)" will be described later. As the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, it is added to “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4” respectively. (The effect information (1 ms) and the effect backup information (1 ms) described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Bank 0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150 cab, a reception command storage area 4150 cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 4150 cad, and a schedule data storage area 4150 cae Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 caa, game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 4 In the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, lighting signals, blink signals or gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs etc. provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 5 are set. It is a storage area in which door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set, and the received command storage area 4150 cac receives various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 and receives various received commands. It is a storage area to be set, and an RTC information acquisition storage area 4150 cad includes an RTC control unit 4165 (an RTC 41654 a described later). It is a storage area in which various information acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa) is set, and the schedule data storage area 4150cae corresponds to the received command based on the command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). It is a storage area in which various schedule data are set. In the schedule data storage area 4150 cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 4150 b to various control data copy areas 4150 ce may be read and set, and various schedule data may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150 b. Some are set.

  Bank 0 (1 ms) is provided with frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf, motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag, movable body information acquisition storage area 4150 cah, operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150 cai, etc. It is done. In the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf, door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electrical drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 5 is provided. It is a storage area to be set, for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag. It is a storage area in which the game board motor drive data SM-DAT is set, and in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150 cah, various kinds provided in the game board based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 5 It is a storage area in which various information obtained by acquiring the original position and the movable position of the movable body is set, and the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150 cai The various information (for example, various detections provided in the operation unit) acquired the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit and the operation of the pressing operation unit based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit. This is a storage area in which rotation (rotation direction) history information of the dial operation unit created based on a detection signal from the switch, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) is set.

  The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa of Bank0 (1fr) and the transmission data storage area 4150cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED, and the transmission data storage area 4150caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor of Bank0 (1 ms). The motor drive substrate side transmission data storage area 4150 cag is divided into two areas of a first area and a second area.

  In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, when peripheral control unit steady processing described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board transmission data storage area 4150caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 4150caa, and the peripheral control unit steady state is set. Every time the process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 4150caa. When the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 4150caa in the present peripheral control unit steady processing, When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa.

  In the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the door side emission data STL is stored in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. When the DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the door-side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 4150 cab. The door side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 4150 cab each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Ru. When peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second region of frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage region 4150 cab in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, When the previous peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the process is advanced based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 4150 cab. It has become.

  When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf opens to the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side transmission data storage area 4150 caf. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf. -DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf are opened on the door side. Motor drive data STM-DAT are alternately set. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, for example, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process. When set, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed It is designed to proceed with the process based on it.

  In the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag, when the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board transmission data storage area 4150 cag. When the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag, Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of motor drive substrate side transmission data storage area 4150 cag in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing At the time, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the processing proceeds based on the game board motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag. It is supposed to be.

  Next, a backup first area 4150 cb and a backup second area 4150 cc will be described, which exclusively stores the copy of the effect information which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150 ca. In the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc, two pairs of two banks as one pair are managed as one page. The effect information (1 fr), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (1 fr), which is a storage area normally used, is used as effect backup information (1 fr) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed every one frame (1 frame) The effect information (1 ms) which is the content to be copied to the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc at a high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac and to be stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) which is a storage area normally used. Each time the 1 ms timer interrupt is generated as effect backup information (1 ms), the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 41 is operated to the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc. It is copied to the high speed by 0ac. The consistency of one page is determined depending on whether or not the contents of the two banks making up the page match.

  Specifically, backup 1st area 4150cb manages Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair and Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) as one pair, and a total of 2 pairs are managed as one page. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, are peripheral control DMAs in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The memory copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in the normally used storage area Bank 0 (1 ms) is stored each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The page is copied at high speed to Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac, and the consistency of this page is performed depending on whether the contents of Bank 1 (1 fr) and Bank 2 (1 fr) match or not. Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  Also, in the backup second area 4150 cc, Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) form one pair, and Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) form one pair, and a total of 2 pairs are managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, are peripheral control DMAs in Bank 3 (1fr) and Bank 4 (1fr) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The memory copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in the normally used storage area Bank 0 (1 ms) is stored each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The data is copied at high speed to Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac, and the consistency of this page is performed depending on whether the contents of Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) match or not. Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 4150 cb has a total of two pairs of the Bank 1 (1 fr) and the Bank 2 (1 fr) as one pair, and the Bank 1 (1 ms) and the Bank 2 (1 ms) as one pair. It is an area for managing as a page, and backup 2nd area 4150cc makes Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) as one pair, Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) as one pair in total It is an area for managing as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and the end of each page, that is, at the beginning and the end of the first backup area 4150 cb and the second backup area 4150 cc.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, is used as effect backup information (1fr) for each peripheral control unit for each frame (1 frame) Contents that are copied at high speed to the backup first area 4150 cb and backup second area 4150 cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac and stored in Bank 0 (1 ms), which is a storage area normally used, every time steady-state processing is executed The effect information (1 ms) is the effect backup information (1 ms), and every time the 1 ms timer interrupt is generated, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc Peripheral control Although designed to be copied at a high speed by the MA controller 4150Ac, a program for executing a fast copy from these peripheral control DMA controller 4150Ac are common. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1 fr) and the effect information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

  The peripheral control SRAM 4150 d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150 a includes a backup management target work area 4150 da for exclusive storage of information to be backed up among various information updated by execution of various control programs; A first backup area 4150 db and a second backup area 4150 dc are provided, which exclusively store the copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150 da. The content stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150 d is that the power on command from the main control board 4100 starts RAM clear effect start when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on (including the momentary power failure due to a momentary power failure or power failure). When an instruction to start the state effect is given (for example, the start of effect is instructed when the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 68 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on) Is also not cleared to zero. This point is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cb, and the backup second area 4150cc of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described above are cleared to zero. In addition, after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, when the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 It is supposed to be By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the screen of the setting mode, for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150 d (for example, history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state etc.) The contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 4150 c are not displayed at all, and can not be cleared in the setting mode, while they can be cleared. Also in this point, the peripheral control RAM 4150 c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150 d are completely different.

  The backup management target work area 4150 da is effect information (SRAM) which is various information continued across the day (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state, and for managing a special effect flag It is comprised from Bank0 (SRAM) which memorize | stores information etc. for backup object exclusively. Here, to briefly describe the name of Bank 0 (SRAM), “Bank” is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information, as described above, and “Bank” The following “0” means that the storage area is normally used to store various information updated by execution of various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is taken as the minimum management unit. Then, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4”, which are provided in an area ranging from backup first area 4150 db to backup second area 4 150 dc described later, are the same storage areas as “Bank 0”. It means that it has a size. The “(SRAM)” is backed up by various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150 d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150 a, so “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3” And “Bank 4” respectively (the same applies to the effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM) described later).

  Next, a backup first area 4150 db and a backup second area 4150 dc will be described, which exclusively stores the copy of effect information (SRAM) which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150 da. The backup first area 4150 db and the backup second area 4150 dc are managed as one page, in which two banks form one pair. The effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, is used as effect backup information (SRAM) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The data is copied at a high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac to the backup first area 4150 db and the backup second area 4150 dc. The consistency of one page is determined depending on whether or not the contents of the two banks making up the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area 4150 db, one pair of Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) is managed, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are peripheral control DMAs to Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The copy is performed at high speed by the controller 4150 ac, and the consistency of the page is performed depending on whether the contents of Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) match.

  Further, in the backup second area 4150 dc, one pair is made up of Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM), and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are peripheral control DMAs to Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The copy is performed at high speed by the controller 4150 ac, and the consistency of the page is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) match.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 4150 db is an area for managing one pair as one page, in which Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) form one pair, and a backup second area An area 4150 dc is an area for managing one pair as one page, in which Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) form one pair. Different ID codes are stored at the head and the end of each page, that is, at the head and the end of the backup first area 4150 db and the backup second area 4150 dc.

  The drawing control of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244 and the sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the speakers housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speakers provided in the door frame The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, as shown in FIG. 71, has a built-in sound source (hereinafter referred to as "built-in sound source") for performing sound control of music, sound effects, etc. A sound source built-in VDP (abbreviation for Video Display Processor) 4160a for performing drawing control of the display device 1400 and the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244, and a screen displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244 Liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b for storing various sound data such as music and sound effects in addition to various character data, and serialized sound And an audio data transmission IC 4160 c for transmitting the comfort and sound effects to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 as audio data. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b displays, for example, ring image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display (ring display) as sprite data used for displaying a screen or an image described later, and an operation menu background image described later. Operation menu background image data to be used, selection display object image data to be used to display at least one selection display object to be described later, tonal adjustment background image data to be used to display a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale to be described later In addition to the sound volume setting icon image data and the like used for display, the display of the main body frame rear surface image data and the service mode screen used for displaying the main body frame rear surface image where the position of each part can be viewed from the player Mode screen image data used for the break, break used to display the break timer setting screen Timer setting screen image data, and, during breaks screen image data used for displaying the break in the screen is stored. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160 b also stores suggestion display object image data used for displaying a suggestion display for prompting that the pressing operation unit (operation unit) of the operation unit should be operated.

  Peripheral control MPU 4150a of peripheral control unit 4150 extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from main control board 4100 from various control data copy areas 4150ce of peripheral control ROM 4150b of peripheral control unit 4150 or peripheral control RAM 4150c. The start screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, various types of peripheral control ROM 4150b or peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control unit 4150 After extracted from the control data copy area 4150ce and output to the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source, schedule data is triggered by the input of a V blank signal described later. The next screen data following the top screen data is extracted from the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the peripheral control RAM 4150c according to the screen generation schedule data set in the storage area 4150cae Output to VDP4160a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the V blank signal every time the screen data arranged in time series in the screen generation schedule data is input according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cae. The VDP 4160a with built-in sound source is output one by one from the top screen data.

  In addition, peripheral control MPU 4150a starts the sound command data of the top of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from main control board 4100 from various control data copy areas 4150ce of peripheral control ROM 4150b of peripheral control unit 4150 or peripheral control RAM 4150c. The sound command data of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150 c and extracted in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150 c is extracted with the peripheral control ROM 4150 b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or peripheral After being extracted from the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the control RAM 4150c and output to the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source, the schedule data is recorded in response to the V blank signal being input. The next sound command data following the first sound command data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the area 4150 cae is extracted from the various control data copy areas 4150 ce of the peripheral control ROM 4150 b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the peripheral control RAM 4150 c Output to the built-in VDP4160a. Thus, according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cae, the peripheral control MPU 4150 a receives the V blank signal as the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data. Each time, the sound command data at the head is output to the built-in VDP 4160a one by one.

  The sound source built-in VDP 4160a receives the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a in addition to the above-mentioned built-in sound source, as shown in FIG. 73, based on the input screen data, from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b to the game board Extraction of side character data and upper dish character data to create sprite data, and drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on game board liquid crystal display device 1400 and upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 The VRAM for this purpose is also built-in (hereinafter referred to as "built-in VRAM"). Among the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a outputs image data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and By outputting the image data from the channel CH2 to the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244, synchronization between the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244 is achieved. The sound source built-in VDP 4160a receives a detection signal according to the touch state of the touch surface of the touch panel 246, and when the detection signal is received, outputs the result to the peripheral control MPU 4150a. It is possible to grasp the contact state of Thus, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs screen data of one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a Character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data, sprite data is created, and one screen is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244 (1 The drawing data of the frame) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and among the generated drawing data, the image data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and Image data for the liquid crystal display 244 is from channel CH2 And outputs to the side the liquid crystal display device 244. In other words, “screen data for one screen (one frame)” is a built-in VRAM of drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244. It is the data to generate above.

  In addition, the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board liquid crystal display device 1400, and the image data for the upper plate liquid crystal display 244 from the channel CH2. When output to the plate side liquid crystal display device 244, a V blank signal is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 4150a to indicate that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be received. In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244 is set to approximately 30 fps, a V blank signal is output. The interval is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 4150a is configured to execute peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing to be described later in response to the input of the V blank signal. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244. Also, in a manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 4140 on which the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change somewhat.

  The sound source built-in VDP 4160a adopts a frame buffer method. In this "frame buffer method", drawing data of one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is held in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM) The drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244.

  Further, when the sound command data described above is input from peripheral control MPU 4150a based on a command from main control board 4100, sound source built-in VDP 4160a stores the music stored in liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b, as shown in FIG. And sound data such as sound effects are extracted and the built-in sound source is controlled to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and used according to the output channel number It sets output channels and serializes music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, and outputs it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. .

  Note that the sound command data also includes sub-volume values for adjusting the volume of the track into which the sound data is to be incorporated, and the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a include effects such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume, the sound data and the volume of the notification sound for notifying the store clerk or the like in the hall of the occurrence of malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 Subvolume values are incorporated to adjust the Specifically, for the effect sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a described above is set as the sub volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as a sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 4140a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be shifted to a setting mode to be described later and operated by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400.

  The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the channel to be output, and a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a include a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated into the used track and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated into the track used are synthesized, and the volume of this synthesized effect sound is Actually, it amplifies up to the master volume value which becomes the volume which flows from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, and amplifies the amplified effect sound as audio data as audio data. The data transmission IC 4160 c is designed to output the data.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a fixed value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is at the maximum volume, the master volume value is amplified to be accommodated in the speaker box provided on the main body frame. It is set so that the volume which flows from the speaker provided and the speaker provided in the door frame may become the allowable maximum volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, as a sub volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated into the used track and the sound data of the effect incorporated into the used track among a plurality of tracks The knob portion of the set volume adjustment volume 4140a is rotated to adjust the adjusted substrate volume, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is actually accommodated in the speaker box provided on the main body frame. To the master volume value that is the volume flowing from the speakers provided in the speaker and the door frame, serialize this amplified effect sound, and output it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c, and use it for the notification sound The sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track and the sub for adjusting the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the used track It does not depend on the volume adjustment at all based on the rotation operation of the knob part of the volume adjustment volume 4140a set as the volume value, and the maximum volume is synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually set to the body frame. It amplifies up to the master volume value which becomes the volume flowed from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box provided and the speaker provided in the door frame, serializes this amplified alerting sound, and outputs it to the audio data transmission IC 4160c as audio data.

  Here, when the effect sound flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame, the occurrence of a defect in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the illegal act against the pachinko gaming machine 1 In order to inform the store clerk or the like, the control of sending a notification sound will be briefly described. First, the subvolume value of the track in which the effect sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and the sound of the track in which this effect sound is incorporated The combined effect sound is produced by combining the data, the sub-volume value set for the mute, the sound data of the track incorporating the notification sound, and the sub-volume value for which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume The volume of the sound of the speaker and the volume of the notification sound are, in fact, a volume that flows from the speakers provided in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speakers provided in the door frame Amplified to over volume value, and outputs the amplified effect sound and alarm sound in the audio data transmission IC4160c as audio data serialization.

  That is, only the notification sound of the maximum volume flows from the speakers housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speakers provided in the door frame in practice. At this time, since the effect sound is muffled, although it does not flow from the speakers housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speakers provided in the door frame, the effect sound proceeds according to the above-described sound generation schedule data doing. In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and when this predetermined period passes, The volume of the effect sound proceeding according to the sound generation schedule data forcibly set to mute so far, the substrate volume adjusted by turning the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a is adjusted again as the sub volume value (In this case, when the mode is shifted to the setting mode and adjusted by operating the dial operation unit or the pressing operation unit of the operation unit, the sub volume value of the adjusted effect sound is set), It flows from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame.

  As described above, when the effect sound flows from the speaker provided in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame, occurrence of a defect in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko gaming machine 1 When the notification sound flows to notify store clerks in the hall, etc., the volume of the effect sound is muted and the notification sound flows from the speaker provided in the speaker box provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame, Since the effect sound that has become muffled proceeds according to the sound generation schedule data, the notification sound flows from the speakers provided in the speaker box and the door frame housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame after a predetermined period of time. When there is no sound, the effect sound does not start to flow again from the point where the notification sound starts to flow, but until the point when the notification sound starts to flow and a predetermined period has elapsed So that the start flowing again from where it proceeds according to schedule data for growth.

  As shown in FIG. 73, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160 b draws game board character data for drawing in the display area of the game board liquid crystal display device 1400 and for drawing in the display area of the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244. While upper character character data is stored in advance, various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

  When serialized audio data is input from the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source, the audio data transmission IC 4160c transmits it to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data of the difference system in which the right audio data is a plus signal and a minus signal. At the same time, the left-hand audio data is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board as serial data of the difference system in which the plus signal and the minus signal are used. Thus, music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects are reproduced in stereo from the speakers accommodated in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speakers provided in the door frame.

  Note that the audio data transmission IC 4160 c outputs audio data as serial data of the difference system between the left and right, respectively, between the substrates ranging from the peripheral control substrate 4140 to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194, for example, When the noise component on the plus signal and the noise component on the minus signal are combined by the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate into one left audio data even when the minus signal is affected by noise Since the noise components are canceled by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

  As shown in FIG. 71, the RTC control unit 4165, which holds calendar information for specifying a date and time information for specifying hours, minutes, and seconds, is mainly configured with an RTC 4165a. In this RTC 4165a, a RAM 4165aa in which calendar information and time information are held is built in (hereinafter, described as "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa"). The RTC 4165a is configured to be supplied with power from a battery 4165b (in the present embodiment, a button battery is adopted) as a driving power supply and a backup power supply of the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1) without any supply of power from the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1). Thereby, even if the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and hold calendar information and time information by the power supply from the battery 4165b.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a and sets it in the above-mentioned RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. The effect based on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244 can be expanded. As such an effect, for example, the screen of the Christmas tree or the reindeer is unfolded by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 if December 25 or the New Year countdown if it is New Year's Eve. The screen to be executed may be expanded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

  In addition to calendar information and time information, when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is of LED type, the brightness setting information of the LED is stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. There is. When the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is equipped with an LED type, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires luminance setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and performs the luminance adjustment of the backlight by PWM control. . The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 from 100% to 70% in steps of 5%, and the currently set game. The brightness of the LEDs that are the backlights of the panel-side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper-dish-side liquid crystal display device 244 is included.

  In addition to calendar information, time information and brightness setting information, calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information are first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa as date and time information of the hour, minutes, and seconds. Input date and time information is also stored.

  When the backlights of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244 are mounted with a cold cathode tube type, the peripheral control MPU 4150a performs ON / OFF control or ON only of the backlight. It is supposed to

  Various types of information such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date and time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa are set in the manufacturing line of the gaming machine maker. In the production line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as display tests of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, the year when the input date and time information is inputted in the production line as the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device It is set to the date of manufacture, which is the date of the month and the hour, minute, and second.

  As described above, in addition to calendar information and time information, brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is mounted on the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, input date information, etc. , It is possible to store and hold information that needs to be maintained independently of the model information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the probability of occurrence of a big hit gaming state with low probability or high probability).

  In addition, the brightness setting information and the like stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa is too bright in the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 set as the manufacturing date depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. Or it may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit and the pressing operation unit of the operation unit, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. After the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, if the dial operation unit or the press operation unit of the operation unit is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, When the dial operation unit or the pressing operation unit of the operation unit is operated in a waiting period for a demonstration by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, the screen for performing the setting mode is the game board side liquid crystal It is displayed on the display device 1400. Calendar information and time information are reset by operating the dial operation unit and the press operation unit of the operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, or the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is set to a desired brightness. It can be adjusted. The adjusted desired brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is overwritten (updated and stored) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

  In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the above-described brightness correction program, and thus, when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is of the LED type, the game board side liquid crystal is mounted. The decrease in luminance due to the secular change of the display device 1400 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, identifies the date and time when the gaming board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is first powered on, and specifies calendar information for identifying the date. Acquire the time information that specifies minutes and seconds, specify the current date, and adjust the range of the brightness of the LED of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 from 100% to 70% in 5% steps The luminance setting information having luminance adjustment information for setting the luminance and the luminance of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 currently set is acquired. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on the correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b.

  For example, if June has already passed from the date when the gaming board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is first powered on from the date and time when the gaming board side liquid crystal display device 1400 was first powered on and the current date and time, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is lit with the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information being 75%, this 75% The brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness of 80% is obtained by adding 5% to the correction information acquired for the image. If it is already 12 months since the date when the gaming board side liquid crystal display device 1400 was first turned on, the peripheral control ROM 41 has been turned on. When acquiring the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) from 0b and when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is turned on, compared to 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness of 85% is further added by 10% which is correction information acquired Light.

  The current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring calendar information for specifying the date and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150 cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150 c and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 in the current time information acquisition processing of the control unit power-on processing The current date and time may be specified by acquiring current time information set in the information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140.

  As described above, the volume adjustment volume adjusts the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the speakers housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speakers provided in the door frame, by turning the knob portion. It can be done. As described above, the volume adjustment volume is such that the resistance value can be varied by turning the knob portion, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak rotates the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the position is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted into 1024 steps of values from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the values of 1024 steps are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. Mute is set for substrate volume 0, and maximum volume is set for substrate volume 6, and the volume is set to increase from substrate volume 0 to substrate volume 6. Control the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (with built-in sound source VDP 4160a) so that the volume set to the substrate volume 0 to 6 is set, and the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame And sound effects are flowing.

  As described above, music and sound effects flow from the speakers housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame and the speakers provided in the door frame by sound volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sound for notifying a store clerk or the like in the hall of an occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko gaming machine 1; It announces the contents about the game effect etc. (For example, it is highly probable that the screen developed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is rendered more powerful, or the possibility of transition to a game state advantageous to the player is high. However, the notification sound for the speaker etc. flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame, but the notification sound and the notification sound are adjusted in volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion. The system controls the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (with built-in sound source VDP 4160a) according to the program by controlling the volume from the mute to the maximum volume. Thereby making it possible to adjust it.

  The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from the muffling to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the seven steps described above. Thereby, for example, even when the store clerk or the like in the hall turns the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume to set the volume small, the speaker and door frame housed in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame Although the effect sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the provided speaker is reduced, the loudness (when the player is performing an illegal activity) or a malfunction occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (in this embodiment, the maximum The notification sound set to (volume) can be flowed. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming aware of the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's fraudulent act by the notification sound.

  Also, based on the current substrate volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced to prevent interference with music and sound effects. To increase the volume of the sound, to add to music and sound effects, and to render the screen developed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244 as more powerful or advantageous for the player It can also be notified that there is a high possibility of transition to the gaming state.

  In this embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by turning the knob of the volume adjustment volume, the dial operation unit and the pressing operation unit of the operation unit It is possible to shift to the setting mode by adjusting the volume of music and sound effects. After the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, if the dial operation unit or the press operation unit of the operation unit is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, When the dial operation unit or the pressing operation unit of the operation unit is operated in a waiting period for a demonstration by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, the screen for performing the setting mode is the game board side liquid crystal It is displayed on the display device 1400. By operating the dial operation unit or the press operation unit of the operation unit in accordance with the screen of the setting mode, the volume of music or sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 4150akZ converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume from an analog value to a digital value, and the converted value is obtained. The value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting the predetermined value in accordance with the operation of the dial operation unit or the pressing operation unit of the operation unit. The adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track incorporating sound data of a rendering sound such as music or sound among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source, and the rendering sound Although it is reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the above, it is not reflected in the adjustment in the volume of the notification sound and the notification sound described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of music or sound effects is adjusted by directly turning the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume, and according to the operation of the dial operation unit or the pressing operation unit of the operation unit. There are two methods of adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by adding or subtracting a predetermined value to increase or decrease the value of the substrate volume. Since the volume control volume 4140a is mounted on the peripheral control board 4140, it is necessary to make the main body frame always open from the outer frame. Then, it becomes a store clerk in the hall who can turn the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume. However, at the volume adjusted by the store clerk in the hall, the player may feel small and may not be able to hear music and sound effects, or the player may feel large and feel loud music and sound effects. Therefore, after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the dial operation unit or the press operation unit of the operation unit is operated within a predetermined time, or a customer waiting state is performed, and a demonstration is performed by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400. When the dial operation unit or the press operation unit of the operation unit is operated within the period, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, and the operation is performed according to the screen of the setting mode The volume of music or sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume by operating the dial operation unit or the pressing operation unit of the unit. As a result, the player can adjust the volume of music and sound effects to a desired volume, so if it is difficult for the store clerk in the hall to feel the volume adjusted by the clerk in the hall and hear the music and sound effects, the dial of the operation unit The volume can be increased to a desired volume by operating the operation unit or the pressing operation unit, or when the volume or volume adjusted by the store clerk in the hall is felt loudly and the music or sound effect is felt loudly, the dial operation unit of the operation unit or The volume can be reduced to a desired level by operating the pressing operation unit.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not in a state where a game is not performed is continued for a predetermined time, and it becomes a customer waiting state and the demonstration by the gaming board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times ), The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and was playing a game last time is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In this volume initialization, the volume adjusted by the store clerk in the hall, that is, the volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume by the store clerk in the hall directly. As a result, when it is difficult for the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to feel the volume adjusted by the player adjusting the volume so small that it is difficult to hear music or sound effects, this time on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 A player who sits down and plays a game can operate the dial operation unit and the pressing operation unit of the operation unit to increase the volume to a desired volume, and the last time a player sits down on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to play a game If the player adjusts the volume adjusted by the player and feels loud with music and sound effects, the player who is seated on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and plays a game this time operates the dial operation unit or the pressing operation unit of the operation unit To reduce the volume to a desired level.

  Next, the power supply system of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. FIG. 74 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. First, the power supply substrate will be described, and then the power supply supplied to each control substrate etc. will be described. Note that the grounds (GND) of various substrates and the grounds (GND) of various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 851, and are the same ground (GND).

  The power supply board is electrically connected to the power supply cord, and the plug of the power supply cord is plugged into the power outlet of the pachinko facility. When the power switch is operated, the power supplied from the pachinko facility is supplied to the power supply substrate, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 74, the power supply substrate includes a power control unit 855 and a emission control unit 857. The power control unit 855 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from AC 24 volts (AC 24 V) supplied from the pachinko island facility, and supplies backup power to the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. The part is a circuit for controlling the drive of the launch solenoid of the ball striking launcher and the ball feeding unit ball feeding solenoid.

  The power control unit 855 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 855a, a power factor correction circuit 855b, a smoothing circuit 855c, a power generation circuit 855d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC 24 V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the power supply substrate 851, and is also supplied to the synchronous rectification circuit 855a. The synchronous rectification circuit 855a rectifies 24 volts AC (AC 24 V) supplied from the pachinko island facility and supplies it to the power factor correction circuit 855b. The power factor improvement circuit 855b improves the power factor of the rectified power, creates DC +37 V (DC +37 V, hereinafter referred to as "+37 V"), and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 855 c. The smoothing circuit 855 c removes the supplied +37 V ripple to smooth +37 V and supplies the smoothed signal to the launch control circuit 857 a and the power generation circuit 855 d of the launch control unit 857.

  Capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in main control MPU 4100a of main control board 4100, and capacitor BC1 is built in payout control MPU 4120a of payout control unit 4120 in payout control board 4110 It supplies backup power to the RAM (payout control built-in RAM).

  The launch control circuit 857a of the launch control unit 857 uses the +37 V supplied from the smoothing circuit 855c as a drive power source to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area 5a with a launch intensity (launch intensity) that matches the rotational position of the rotary handle body. The control of adjusting the driving current for (projecting) and outputting to the firing solenoid is performed, while the constant current is output to the ball feeding solenoid of the ball feeding unit, and the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit The game ball stored in the control unit is controlled to receive one game ball and to transmit the game ball received by the ball transport member to the hit ball launcher side.

  The power supply generation circuit 855d is supplied from the smoothing circuit 855c to +37 V to DC +5 V (DC +5 V, hereinafter referred to as "+5 V"), DC +12 V (DC +12 V, hereinafter referred to as "+12 V"), and DC. +24 V (DC + 24 V, hereinafter, described as “+24 V”) are respectively created and supplied to the payout control board 4110 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively. The power supply system supplied with +5 V is a +5 V power supply line, the power supply system supplied with +12 V is a +12 V power supply line, and the power supply system supplied with +24 V is a +24 V power supply line.

  The +5 V generated by the power supply generation circuit 855 d is supplied to the payout control board 4110 as described later. The +5 V supplied to the payout control board 4110 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a through the payout control filter circuit 4110a, and is also applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control internal RAM through the diode PD0. ing. The +12 V generated by the power supply generation circuit 855 d is supplied to the +5 V generation circuit 4100 g of the main control substrate 4100 through the payout control substrate 4110. The +5 V production circuit 4100 g produces +5 V which is a control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100 a from +12 V from the payout control substrate 4110. The +5 V created by the +5 V creation circuit 4100 g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100 a via the main control filter circuit 4100 h and is also supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. ing.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control substrate 4110. The cathode terminal of the diode PD 0 of the substrate 4110 is also electrically connected. That is, +5 V created by the power supply creation circuit of the power supply substrate flows current toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM in the forward direction by the diode PD0 and the plus terminal of the capacitor BC1. The current flows in the direction of As described above, the capacitor BC1 is supplied with +5 V by an electrical connection method in which +5 V generated by the power supply generation circuit of the power supply substrate is returned from the payout control substrate 4110 to the power supply substrate again. Can be charged. As a result, when +5 V created by the power supply creation circuit is not supplied to the payout control substrate 4110, the charge stored in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control substrate 4110 as the payout VBB. Although the current is blocked by the diode PD0 to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control MPU 4120a does not operate, the stored contents are held by supplying the payout VBB to the power terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. It is supposed to be.

  The negative terminal of capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate is grounded to ground (GND), while the positive terminal of capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power control terminal of the main control built-in RAM of main control substrate 4100 via discharge control substrate 4110. While being connected, the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control substrate 4100 is also electrically connected. That is, +5 V created by +5 V creation circuit 4100 g causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of main control MPU 4100 a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM being in the forward direction by diode MD0 and the plus terminal of capacitor BC0 Current flows toward the Thus, the capacitor BC0 is charged by being supplied with +5 V by the electrical connection method in which +5 V created by the +5 V creation circuit 4100 g is supplied from the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 to the power supply board. It can be done. As a result, +12 V created by the power supply creation circuit of the power supply substrate 851 is not supplied to the +5 V creation circuit 4100 g of the main control substrate 4100 via the payout control substrate 4110, and the +5 V creation circuit 4100 g can not create +5 V In this case, since the charge stored in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control substrate 4100 as the main VBB via the payout control substrate 4110, the diode MD0 is connected to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a. As a result, although the current is blocked and does not flow and the main control MPU 4100a does not operate, the main VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM so that the stored contents are held.

  Next, an outline of the voltages supplied to the control boards and the like will be described, and subsequently, the voltages supplied mainly to the payout control board and the voltages supplied to the main control board will be described.

  Three types of voltages of +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V created by the power source generation circuit of the power source board are supplied to the payout control board 4110 as shown in FIG. 74, and of these three types of voltages, +12 V and +24 V The two types of voltages are supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. Also, three types of voltages of +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V created by the power source creation circuit of the power source board are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal board, and the peripheral control board 4140 and the peripheral control board 4140 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board The peripheral door relay terminal boards are respectively supplied.

  Three types of voltages of +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 are, as shown in FIG. 75 (a), the drive source drive circuit of the lamp drive circuit 4170 a of the lamp drive board 4170 It is supplied to 4180a respectively. The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 outputs various signals such as lighting signals, blinking signals and gradation lighting signals to various decoration boards of the game board 4, and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180 The drive signal is output to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid of the board.

  The peripheral control board 4140 includes a +3.3 V creation circuit 4140 b for creating +5 V to 3.3 V DC (DC +3.3 V, hereinafter referred to as “+3.3 V”) supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal plate There is. The +3.3 V created by the +3.3 V creation circuit 4140 b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1900 a of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, the liquid crystal module 470 a of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 and the touch panel module 480 a of the touch panel 246. . Further, +12 V supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 is supplied to the backlight power supply 1900 b of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the backride power supply 470 b of the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244.

  On the other hand, three kinds of voltages of +5 V, +12 V and +24 V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal boards are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 as shown in FIG. 75 (b). The frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 includes a +9 V creation circuit 194 a that creates +12 V to +9 V DC (DC +9 V, hereinafter referred to as “+9 V”) supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. A total of four voltages of +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to various decoration substrates of the door frame 5 together with +9 V generated by the +9 V forming circuit 194 a.

  As shown in FIG. 74, the payout control board 4110 includes a payout control filter circuit 4110 a and the like in addition to the payout control MPU 4120 a and the like. The payout control filter circuit 4110 a is supplied with +5 V from the power supply substrate 851 and removes noise from the +5 V. The +5 V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 851 via the diode PD0, and is further supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120. For example, +12 V from the power supply substrate 851 is supplied to the payout control input circuit 4120 b and the like of the payout control unit 4120 and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784 a of the external terminal board 784 through the payout control substrate 4110. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 outputs a signal for transmitting the number of balls of the gaming balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1, gaming information of the pachinko gaming machine 1, etc. to the hall computer installed in the gaming field (hall). Circuit. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the gaming ball paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the gaming information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a. . Note that +24 from the power supply substrate 851 is supplied to the main control substrate 4100 via the payout control substrate 4110 without being used in the payout control substrate 4110 at all.

  As shown in FIG. 74, the main control board 4100 includes a +5 V creation circuit 4100 g, a main control filter circuit 4100 h, a power failure monitoring circuit 4100 e and the like in addition to the main control MPU 4100 a and the like. The +5 V creation circuit 4100 g is supplied with +12 V from the power supply substrate 851 via the payout control substrate 4110, and creates +5 V which is a control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100 a from this +12 V. In the main control board 4100, a power supply system to which +5 V generated by the +5 V generation circuit 4100 g is applied and supplied is a +5 V power supply line. In this embodiment, the +5 V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 855 d of the power supply substrate 851 and the +5 V power supply line created by the +5 V creation circuit 4100 g of the main control board 4100 are not electrically connected. The +5 V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 855 d of the power supply substrate 851 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control substrate 4100, and the +5 V of the main control substrate 4100 is configured. The +5 V power supply line created by the creation circuit 4100 g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards except the main control board 4100.

  The main control filter circuit 4100 h is supplied with +5 V created by the +5 V creation circuit 4100 g and removes noise from this +5 V. The +5 V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 851 via the diode MD0 and, for example, to the main control MPU 4100a. For example, +12 V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to the main control input circuit 4100 b and the like, and +24 V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to the main control solenoid driving circuit 4100 d and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e is supplied with +12 V and +24 V from the power supply substrate 851 via the payout control substrate 4110, and monitors the signs of the +12 V and +24 V power failure or short interruption. When the blackout monitoring circuit 4100e detects the signs of blackouts or instantaneous blackouts of + 12V and + 24V, it outputs a blackout notice signal to the main control MPU 4100a as a blackout notice. The power failure notice signal is input to the payout control MPU 4120 a through the main control substrate 4100 and the payout control input circuit 4120 b of the payout control substrate 4110. Further, the power failure notice signal is input to the peripheral control board 4140 via the main control board 4100. Also, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), the blackout notice signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 through the peripheral control board 4140, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. At the same time, they are respectively input to the decoration substrate of the door frame and the like through the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194.

  In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100 e applies the voltage to one of the +12 V power line or the +24 V power line by monitoring the voltages applied to the two power lines of the +12 V and +24 V power lines. As compared with the case where the voltage to be monitored is monitored, it is possible to more accurately grasp the symptom of the power failure such as a power failure or a momentary power failure.

  Next, the circuit etc. of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 68 will be described with reference to FIG. 76 to FIG. 76 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board, FIG. 77 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 78 is a circuit showing an interface circuit for communication between the main control board and the peripheral control board FIG. First, the main control filter circuit 4100h shown in FIG. 74 will be described, and then the power supply created by the main control board 4100, main control system reset, main control crystal oscillator, main control input circuit, power failure monitoring circuit, main control MPU Various input / output signals to and from, and an interface circuit for communication between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 will be described.

  The main control board 4100 includes the main control MPU 4100a, the main control input circuit 4100b, the main control output circuit 4100c, the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e, the + 5V creation circuit 4100g, and the main control board 4100 shown in FIGS. In addition to the control filter circuit 4100h, as a peripheral circuit, as shown in FIG. 76, a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal, and a main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (in this embodiment, 24 megahertz (MHz ) Is mainly composed.

  As shown in FIG. 76, the main control filter circuit 4100 h mainly includes a main control three-terminal filter MIC0. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit and is excellent in attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded by ferrite. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 has its first terminal applied with +5 V created by the +5 V creation circuit 4100 g, its second terminal grounded to ground (GND), and its noise component removed from its third terminal +5 V is output. The +5 V applied to the first terminal is electrically connected at one end to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC0 so that the ripple (AC component folded in voltage) is first removed. Are smoothed out.

  The +5 V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in the present embodiment, electrostatic capacity: 470 microfarads (μF)) whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The ripple is further removed and smoothed by being connected to. The smoothed +5 V is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, and the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a.

  The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC3 grounded, and the +5 V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing the ripple. The VSS terminal which is a ground terminal of the main control MPU 4100a is grounded to the ground (GND).

  Further, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. A cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to a VBB terminal which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 4100a, and a capacitor MC4 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND) It is electrically connected to the other end of the The VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, and via the resistor MR0, the plus of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 851 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, +5 V smoothed by removing noise components by the main control filter circuit 4100h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and via the diode MD0, the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0 Is applied to the plus terminal of the As a result, as described above, +12 V generated by the power generation circuit 855 d of the power supply substrate 851 shown in FIG. 73 is not supplied to the +5 V generation circuit 4100 g of the main control substrate 4100 via the payout control substrate 4110, and +5 V is generated. When the circuit 4100 g can not generate +5 V, the charge stored in the capacitor BC 0 is supplied to the main control substrate 4100 as the main VBB, and therefore, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100 a Although the current is blocked by the diode MD0 and does not flow and the main control MPU 4100a does not operate, the main VBB is applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM so that the stored contents are held.

  As shown in FIG. 76, +5 V smoothed by removing noise components by the main control filter circuit 4100 h is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1. The main control system reset MIC1 is for resetting the main control MPU 4100a and the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC5 connected to ground, and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of the capacitor MC5 It can be done. Specifically, when +5 V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold (eg, 4.25 V), the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time has elapsed.

  The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal, which is a reset terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line, and one end is a capacitor connected to ground (GND) It is electrically connected to the other end of MC6. Ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is higher than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI. This logic corresponds to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the main control output with reset function The logic becomes LOW when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold while being input to the reset terminal of the circuit 4100ca, and this logic corresponds to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. Respectively input to the reset terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold, the main control MPU 4100a and the reset function The main control output circuit 4100 ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC7 whose one end is grounded, and +5 V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing the ripple. The ground terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

  As shown in FIG. 76, +5 V smoothed by removing noise components by the main control filter circuit 4100 h is applied to the VDD terminal which is a power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0. The VDD terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC8 whose one end is grounded, and +5 V input to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples. In addition to the VDD terminal, the smoothed +5 V is also applied to the A terminal, the B terminal, the C terminal, and the ST terminal which are output frequency selection terminals. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a 24 MHz clock signal from the F terminal which is an output terminal by applying +5 V to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal and ST terminal respectively.

  The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and a 24 MHz clock signal is input. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to the ground (GND), and the D terminal for outputting the divided frequency of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is not electrically connected to the outside It is in the state.

  In addition to the detection signals from the general winning opening switch 3020, the start opening switch 3022, the magnetic detection switch 304, the count switch 2110, and the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. 68, the main control input circuit 4100b pays out as shown in FIG. It is a circuit to which an operation signal (RAM clear signal) or the like from an operation switch provided on the control board 4110 is input. The circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, so here, the circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch is input will be described.

  First, as described above, the operation switch is the RAM (dispense control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control board 4110 within a predetermined period from the time of power on, and the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 It is operated when clearing the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the computer, or when it is notified of an error after the power is turned on, it is operated in order to cancel the error. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from the time of turning on, and an error release after turning on the power (after a period of playing the function as a RAM clear, ie, after a predetermined period from turning on the power) And the functions to be performed. Since the main control board 4100 does not have the function of canceling the error that the payout control board 4110 has, when the operation signal from the operation switch is input within a predetermined period from the time of power on, the main control built-in is included. It judges as a RAM clear signal for clearing the RAM and performs processing to clear the main control built-in RAM.

  When the operation switch is not operated, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 4100 from the payout control board 4110, while when the operation switch is operated, the logic is HI from the payout control board 4110 The operation signal that has become is input from the payout control board 4110 (a detailed description of this point will be described later).

  As shown in FIG. 76, the transmission line for transmitting the operation signal from the operation switch provided on the payout control substrate 4110 within a predetermined period from the time of power on has a pull-up resistor whose one end is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of MR2 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3. The base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the resistor MR3, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor MR4 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR5 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line and is a non-inverting buffer ICMIC 10 (non-inverted buffer ICMIC 10 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC 10 A).) Main control It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 4100a.

  The circuit for outputting the operation signal from the operation switch in the payout control board 4110 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the transmission line for transmitting the operation signal from the operation switch is Pulled up to +12 V by pull-up resistance. In the main control board 4100, when the operation switch is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 4110 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic is input as LOW, while the operation switch is operated. At the same time, the operation signal from the payout control board 4110 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor, and the logic is input as HI.

  The circuit constituted by the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit which is turned on / off by an operation signal from the operation switch 860a.

  When the operation switch is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, whereby the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR5, and the operation signal from the operation switch whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. Ru. When the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch input to input terminal PA0 is HI, main control MPU 4100a determines that it does not instruct to perform the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control internal RAM. Do.

  On the other hand, when the operation switch is operated, an operation signal pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor and whose logic is HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, and the transistor MTR0 is turned ON, and the switch circuit is also switched. It will turn on. Thereby, an operation signal from the operation switch whose voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. Ru. When the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU 4100a instructs to perform the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control internal RAM. to decide.

  The operation signal from the operation switch is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch is input through the payout control board 4110. That is, between the substrates of the main control substrate 4100 and the delivery control substrate 4110, in order to suppress the influence of noise intruding into the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the substrates, the voltage is higher than +5 V which is the control reference voltage. The voltage of +12 V is used to increase the signal reliability. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening switch 3020 and the starting opening switch 3022 directly input to the main control board 4100 are pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor, while the panel shown in FIG. The detection signals from the magnetic detection switch 3024, the count switch 2110, the general winning opening switch 3020, the gate switch of the effective gate, and the gate switch serving as a trigger for the normal lottery, which are input through the relay terminal plate 4161, are main control Since it is not directly input to the substrate 4100, it is pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor, similarly to the operation signal from the operation switch.

  As shown in FIG. 74, the main control board 4100 is supplied with two voltages of +12 V and +24 V from the power supply board 851 via the payout control board 4110, and +12 V and +24 V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e. ing. The blackout monitoring circuit 4100e monitors + 12V and + 24V blackouts or indications of a blackout, and detects a blackout or blackout as a blackout notice as a blackout notice, in addition to the main control MPU 4100a, a payout control board. It is output to the payout control MPU 4120 a of 4110 and the peripheral control board 4140. Here, first, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described, and then, monitoring of a +24 V power failure or a momentary power failure, monitoring of a +12 V power failure or a momentary power failure, and output of a power failure notification signal will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 77, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e mainly includes a shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D-type flip flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

  The REF terminal which is a reference voltage input terminal of the shunt stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 and the K terminal which is a cathode terminal are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line +5 V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (in this embodiment, 2.495 V is set), which is a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC20 grounded at one end, and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled by the capacitor MC20 AC component is removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The comparator MIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare the monitor voltage V1 of +24 V with the reference voltage Vref, and the remaining one (MIC21B) is used. , And used to compare the monitor voltage V2 of +12 V with the reference voltage Vref. The monitor voltage V1 of +24 V is applied to the third terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21A, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the second terminal which is the minus terminal of the MIC 21A. The monitor voltage V2 of +12 V is applied to the fifth terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21B, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the sixth terminal which is the minus terminal of the MIC 21B. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip flop MIC22. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in the present embodiment. The Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC21, which is grounded. The +5 V applied to the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, is Ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21 is grounded to the ground (GND).

  As described above, the monitoring of the +24 V blackout or instantaneous blackout is performed by the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC 21 comparing the +24 V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 77, the third terminal, which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitor voltage V1 of +24 V is applied, is the other end of the resistor MR21 whose one end is electrically connected to the +24 V power supply line and one end Is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR22 which is grounded to the ground (GND), and the other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the other end of the capacitor MC23 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND) Are electrically connected. The +24 V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the third terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21 A of the comparator MIC 21 is divided by +24 V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR 21 and MR 22, and the capacitor MC 23 removes the ripple and smoothes it. . The values of the resistances MR21 and MR22 become a power failure detection voltage V1 pf (in this embodiment, set to 21.40 V) which is set in advance when the +24 V fails or momentarily stops, and the voltage starts dropping from +24 V. At this time, the monitor voltage V1 of +24 V is set to be equal to the reference voltage Vref.

  The first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 21 A of the comparator MIC 21, is an open collector output, and one end thereof is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR 23 electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line, One end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC24, and is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC22. The capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low pass filter.

  When the voltage of +24 V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1 pf, the monitor voltage V1 of +24 V becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21, is +5 V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal which is pulled to the side and the logic becomes HI is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the voltage of +24 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitor voltage V1 of +24 V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 is ground (GND) The signal pulled down to the side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  As described above, the monitoring of the +12 V blackout or instantaneous blackout is performed by the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC 21 comparing the +12 V monitoring voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 77, the fifth terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21 B of the comparator MIC 21 to which the monitor voltage V 2 of +12 V is applied has one end and the other end of the resistor electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line and one end. The other end of the resistor MR25 grounded to the ground (GND), the other end of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the other end of the capacitor MC25 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND) It is electrically connected. The +12 V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the fifth terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21 B of the comparator MIC 21 is +12 V divided by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR 24 and MR 25 and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC 25 and smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 become a power failure detection voltage V2pf (in this embodiment, set to 10.47 V) which is set in advance when the +12 V causes a power failure or a momentary power failure and the voltage starts dropping from the +12 V. At this time, the monitor voltage V2 of +12 V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The seventh terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 21 B of the comparator MIC 21, is an open-collector output, and is electrically connected to the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 21 A described above. Of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 connected at one end and electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC24 connected to ground. It is electrically connected to the terminal PR. As described above, the capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low pass filter.

  When the +12 V voltage is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2 pf, the +12 V monitoring voltage V2 becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the seventh terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 21 B of the comparator MIC 21, is +5 V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal which is pulled to the side and the logic becomes HI is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the voltage of +12 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitor voltage V2 of +12 V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the seventh terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC 21 is ground (GND) The signal pulled down to the side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  The D-type flip flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the D input terminal 1D terminal by the change of the edge of the clock signal input to the clock input terminal 1CK terminal, and this stored value While outputting (logic) from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal, a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from a negative logic 1Q terminal which is an output terminal. In addition, when a signal whose logic is LOW is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal, the D type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latch state and the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal is The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal (at this time, the same as the logic of the signal inverted from the logic of the signal output from 1Q, that is, the signal input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal. When the signal whose logic has become HI is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal, the latch state is set. Also, when the D type flip-flop MIC22 is configured to input a signal whose logic is HI to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal to set the latch state, the logic is LOW to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. When the signal that is input is input, the state in which the signal whose logic is HI is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal is maintained (at this time, the signal obtained by inverting the logic of the signal output from 1Q is negative logic 1) Maintain the output state from the Q terminal).

  In this embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is grounded at the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, and the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, to the ground (GND). The circuit is configured so that there is no change in the edge of the input clock signal, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal that is the D input terminal is stored and not output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal. ing. As described above, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a signal from the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 that monitors a +24 V power failure or a momentary power failure, as described above Alternatively, a signal from the seventh terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors a momentary power failure, is input, and a signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, based on these signals. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC22, which is grounded, and is applied to the Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Ripple is removed by capacitor MC22 and +5 V is smoothed, and the GND terminal which is the ground terminal is grounded with the ground (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal which inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal is the external It is in an unconnected state.

  In the D type flip-flop MIC22, in the present embodiment, a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 4100a is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal through the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function. The power failure clear signal is started to be output and stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed in the main control side power-on process to be described later performed by the main control MPU 4100a. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 4100a is input to the CLR terminal as its logic becomes LOW via the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function. The D type flip flop MIC22 is configured to release the latch state when the power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, and at this time, the logic input to the PR terminal as the preset terminal is inverted to output the output terminal. Output from the 1Q terminal.

  On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 4100a is stopped, the logic thereof becomes HI via the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function, and is input to the CLR terminal. When the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip flop MIC22 sets the latch state, and the logic becomes LOW at the PR terminal to latch the input state.

  The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to input terminal PA1 of input port PA of main control MPU 4100a through main control input circuit 4100b, and is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22 A signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a as a power failure advance notification signal. Further, the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of D type flip flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 4100 cb without reset function, and the signal outputted from the 1 Q terminal which is the output terminal of D type flip flop MIC22 is reset The non-function main control output circuit 4100cb outputs it as a payout blackout notice signal to the payout control board 4110, and outputs it as a peripheral blackout notice signal to the peripheral control board 4140.

  The main control input circuit 4100b electrically connecting the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a is, as shown in FIG. The 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 22 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR27. It is connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor MR27, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor MR28 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29 electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line at one end and also non-inverting buffer ICMIC 23 (non-inverted buffer ICMIC 23 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC 23A).) Main control It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 4100a.

  The circuit constituted by the resistors MR27 and MR28 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit which is turned on / off by a signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor MTR20 turns off. The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to +5 V side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned on. The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is preset by the D type flip flop MIC22 Since the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC22, is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 because the logic thereof is LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR29, and the power failure notice signal whose logic becomes HI via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a It is input to PA1.

  On the other hand, when either of the conditions that the voltage of +24 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the signal whose logic is LOW is D The signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 as its logic becomes HI because it is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip flop MIC22. As a result, the transistor MTR20 is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure notice signal whose logic becomes LOW via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC 23 is the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. It is input to PA1.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 77, the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function for outputting a signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 to the payout control board 4110 as a payout blackout notification signal The output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 4100b described above, and the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is connected via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. The base terminal of the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR30, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor MR31 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage via the resistor MR33. The base terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR33, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor MR34 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC26 grounded. It is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via the (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is electrically connected to the payout control substrate 4110 through the wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 4120 shown in FIG. 69 in the payout control substrate 4110. In circuit 4120b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line, and the input terminal of the predetermined input port of payout control MPU 4120a shown in FIG. Connected.

  The circuit formed of the resistors MR30 and MR31 and the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is a switch circuit of the former stage, and the circuit formed of the resistors MR33 and MR34 and the transistor MTR22 of the latter stage is a switch circuit of the latter stage. It is turned on / off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the MIC 22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor of the previous stage The MTR 21 is turned off, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned off, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, As a result, the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the rear stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is pulled up to +5 V side, and the transistor MTR21 is turned on. The switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, is lowered to the ground (GND) side. The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is preset by the D type flip flop MIC22 The signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage because its logic becomes LOW because the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal. Transistor MTR21 turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage, thereby turning on the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control substrate 4110 via the wiring (harness), and the payout blackout notification signal whose logic is LOW is dispensed It is input to the control board 4110.

  On the other hand, when either of the conditions that the voltage of +24 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the signal whose logic is LOW is D The signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, and the logic thereof becomes HI to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage. The transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is turned ON by being input. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage is lowered to the ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage, thereby turning off the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control substrate 4110 via the wiring (harness). A payout blackout notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 4110.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 77, the main control output circuit without reset function 4100 cb which outputs a signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC 22 to the peripheral control board 4140 as a peripheral power failure notice signal is open. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 4100b described above, and the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35 And are electrically connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor MR35, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor MR36 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 4140 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to peripheral control board 4140 via a wiring (harness), a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of peripheral control unit 4150 in peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. At one end electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line, and electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. Connected

  The circuit constituted by the resistors MR35 and MR36 and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit which is turned on / off by a signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor MTR23 turns off. The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to +5 V side, and the transistor MTR23 turns on The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is preset by the D type flip flop MIC22 Since the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 because its logic is LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140 via the wiring (harness). The peripheral power failure notice signal is input to the peripheral control board 4140.

  On the other hand, when either of the conditions that the voltage of +24 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the signal whose logic is LOW is D The signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 as its logic becomes HI because it is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip flop MIC22. As a result, the transistor MTR23 is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 4140 via the wiring (harness), and the peripheral power failure notification signal whose logic is LOW is the peripheral control board. It is input to 4140.

  Thus, the main control input circuit 4100b which transmits the signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 to the main control MPU 4100a as a power failure notice signal, and the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 The reset control-free main control output circuit 4100cb outputs the signal output from the peripheral control board 4140 as a peripheral power failure notice signal, and there is one transistor in each, and the power failure notice signal input to the main control MPU 4100a and the peripheral While the logic with the peripheral power failure notice signal input to the control board 4140 is the same logic, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC22 is dispensed to the payout control board 4110 No reset function to output as a power failure notice signal Main There are two transistors in the control output circuit 4100cb at the former and latter stages, and the logic of the payout blackout notice signal is the logic of the blackout notice signal input to the main control MPU 4100a and the peripheral blackout notice input to the peripheral control board 4140 It is a logic obtained by inverting the logic of the signal, and is different from the logic of the power failure notification signal and the logic of the peripheral power failure notification signal.

  The collector terminal of transistor MTR20 of main control input circuit 4100b is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line, and main control MPU 4100a via non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the rear stage of the main control output circuit 4100cb without the reset function is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the second embodiment via the wiring (harness). In the dispensing control input circuit 4120b of the dispensing control unit 4120 in 4110, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line, and the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is Wiring through a (harness), the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140, which is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to one end of which is connected + 12V power supply line and electrically. This is because the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 4100b and the main control MPU 4100a are connected between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 4100b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. Since it is mounted on the 4100, the main control board 4100 and the payout control board are used to make a blackout notice by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the blackout notice signal using +5 V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a. In order to suppress the influence of noise intruding into the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the substrates between the substrates with the substrate 4110 and between the substrates of the main control substrate 4100 and the peripheral control substrate 4140, the main control MPU 4100a, Payout control MPU 4120a and peripheral control MPU 4150a Is performed blackout notice by the logic of a control reference voltage + 5V is at a higher voltage than the + with 12V power failure warning signal (ON / OFF signal).

  Next, various input / output signals to / from main control MPU 4100a will be described with reference to FIG. The serial data input terminal of the serial control port of the main control MPU 4100a receives serial data from the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 68 as a payment serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 4100b. . On the other hand, the TXA terminal and TXB terminal which are serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 4100a do not have the reset function as the main payment serial data transmission signal and transmit the main data to the payout control board 4110 from the TXA terminal. No reset function transmitted to the circuit 4100cb The main control output circuit 4100cb transmits a main payment serial data transmission signal to the payout control board 4110, and the TXB terminal mainly transmits serial data to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. A main circuit serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function as a peripheral serial data transmission signal to the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function to the peripheral control board 4140.

  In addition to the operation signal (RAM clear signal) described above being input to each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a, for example, a payout that indicates the normal reception completion of the main payment serial data reception signal A payer ACK signal from control board 4110 is input through main control input circuit 4100b, and detection signals from various switches such as start port switch 3022 shown in FIG. 68 are input through main control input circuit 4100b, respectively. And so on.

  On the other hand, from each output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a, for example, a main payment ACK signal notifying the completion of normal reception of the above-described payee serial data reception signal is output to the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function The main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function outputs a main payment ACK signal to the payout control board 4110, or the drive signal to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function for the start port solenoid 2105 shown in FIG. The main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca outputs a drive signal to the start port solenoid 2105 through the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, and various displays such as the first special symbol display 1185 shown in FIG. To the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca Equally and outputs a drive signal respectively to various display output to the reset function main control output circuit 4100ca the issue.

  Next, a communication interface circuit between the main control substrate 4100 and the peripheral control substrate 4140 will be described with reference to FIG. The main control board 4100 is supplied with +12 V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 74 via the payout control board 4110, and the +5 V creation circuit 4100 g creates +5 V which is a control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a from this +12 V. ing. The main cycle serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is affected by noise intruding into the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140. In order to suppress this, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting using +12 V which is a voltage higher than +5 V which is a control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100 a.

  Specifically, the main control board 4100 causes the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly includes the resistor MR50, the resistors MR51 and MR52, and the transistor MTR50. It is done. On the other hand, in the peripheral control substrate 4140, as a communication interface circuit, a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (in the present embodiment, electrostatic capacity: 47 μF), and a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC) are incorporated. Is mainly configured.).

  The +12 V supplied from the power supply substrate 851 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control substrate 4100 via the payout control substrate 4110, and the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 (in the present embodiment, the capacitance: 220 microfarads (.mu.F)). The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and electrically connected to the anode terminal (No. 1 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control substrate 4140 via a wiring (harness). It is connected to the. Thereby, for example, when the power from power supply substrate 851 is not supplied to main control substrate 4100 via discharge control substrate 4110 due to a power failure or a momentary stop, the charge stored in electrolytic capacitor MC50 is generated. The voltage can be continuously applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC 10 of the peripheral control substrate 4140 from the main control substrate 4100 as + 12V.

  As described above, when a power failure or momentary stoppage occurs in the power supply terminal VDD of the main control MPU 4100a, the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in the present embodiment, the electrostatic capacitance: 470 μF) shown in FIG. 76 is charged. The main charge serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a at least serial-controls the command set by the main control CPU core 4100aa in its transmission buffer register 4100aeb. The data can be transferred to the transmission shift register 41 aea by the unit 4100 aec and transmission complete as main cycle serial data from the transmission shift register 4100 aea.

  The main cycle serial data transmission signal sent from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is, as described above, to the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140. In order to suppress the influence of intruding noise, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting using +12 V which is a voltage higher than +5 V which is a control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100 a.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or a momentary interruption occurs, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as +12 V from the main control substrate 4100 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control substrate 4140. Because the main control MPU 4100a is incorporated in the main control MPU 4100a, the serial management unit 4100 aec transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 4100 aa in the transmission buffer register 4100 aeb to the transmission shift register 41 aea for transmission When transmission is performed from the shift register 4100aea as main cycle serial data, a main cycle serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI can be transmitted from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 at +12 V.

  In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 4100 aeb of the main transmission serial transmission port 4100 ae incorporated in the main control MPU 4100 a has 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data of 10 packets at maximum is stored in the transmission buffer register 4100 aeb. Further, in this embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a is set to 19200 bps.

  The cathode terminal (third terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 of the main control board 4100 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). The resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 4140 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

  The TXB terminal for outputting the main cycle serial data transmission signal from main control MPU 4100a shown in FIG. 76 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR50 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line and resistance MR51 It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 through the same. The base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the resistor MR51, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor MR52 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The circuit formed of resistors MR51 and MR52 and transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit, and when the logic of the main cycle serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR50 is on the ground (GND) side. When pulled down, the transistor MTR50 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, no current flows in the forward direction to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control substrate 4140, so the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main cycle serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR50, the transistor MTR50 is turned ON, and the switch circuit is also turned ON. . As a result, a forward current flows in the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control substrate 4140, so the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON.

  The +5 V supplied from the power supply substrate 851 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control substrate 4140 through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10 to be grounded. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (the sixth terminal) which is a power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (No. 4 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal (No. 5 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to the +5 V side by the AR 11 and electrically connected to the input terminal of the serial control I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 4150 a. When the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is used as a main cycle serial data transmission signal, and the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a Is input to the input terminal of.

  Thereby, as described above, for example, when +5 V supplied from the power supply substrate 851 is not supplied to the peripheral control substrate 4140 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 by a power failure or a momentary power failure, The charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied as the +5 V to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The main cycle serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 is applied to the main control MPU 4100a when +5 V is applied from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 when a power or momentary interruption occurs. The data set in the transmission buffer register 4100 aeb of the built-in main cycle serial transmission port 4100 ae can be transmitted completely, and the main cycle serial data transmission signal in the middle of transmission, that is, the main cycle serial data is cut off The peripheral control board 4140 is reliably received without being lost or being dropped.

  When the logic of the main cycle serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of main control MPU 4100a to peripheral control substrate 4140 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR50 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off when the MTR 50 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor AR11 and the logic becomes HI. Logic of the main cycle serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 while the serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a When is LOW Is applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 because the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR50 and the transistor MTR50 is turned ON to turn on the photocoupler AIC10. The main voltage serial data transmission signal whose voltage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Thus, the logic of the main cycle serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main cycle serial data transmission signal transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a. It is the logic of

  As described above, in this embodiment, the +5 V power supply line to which +5 V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a is applied, and the +12 V power supply line to which +12 V which is the communication voltage applied via the diode MD50 is applied. However, measures are taken when the control reference voltage and the communication voltage drop due to the occurrence of a power failure or an instantaneous power failure. That is, for the main cycle serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a, the +5 V power supply line, and the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 4100h as the first auxiliary power, Are electrically connected in parallel, and even if a power failure or a momentary interruption occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the +5 V power supply line decreases, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 4100h which is the first auxiliary power supply By applying the control reference voltage from the plus terminal of MC2, the state in which the control reference voltage is applied can be maintained, and is configured from resistance MR50, resistance MR51, MR52, and transistor MTR50. Reset function to function as a communication interface circuit For the output circuit 4100 cb, +12 V applied to the +12 V power supply line is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 as a communication voltage, and the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 and the plus of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 which is the second auxiliary power supply Even if a voltage for communication applied from the +12 V power supply line via the diode MD 50 drops due to a power failure or a momentary interruption due to the parallel connection of the terminal and the circuit, the second auxiliary power supply By applying the communication voltage from the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, the state in which the communication voltage is applied can be maintained. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the disconnection of the command being transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 and to prevent the dropout, so the peripheral control board 4140 reliably receives the command being transmitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the dropout of the command immediately after the occurrence of the power failure or at the momentary power failure.

  Further, a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100 aeb of the main transmission serial transmission port 4100 ae incorporated in the main control MPU 4100 a are all constituted of the resistance MR50, the resistances MR51 and MR52, and the transistor MTR50 470 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 4100h so that transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 can be completed via the reset function-free main control output circuit 4100cb that functions as a communication interface circuit. And 220 μF is set as the electrostatic capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50. As a result, even if a power failure or momentary stoppage occurs during transmission from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140, all the commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb are functioned as interface circuits as main cycle serial data. Since the transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 can be completed via the function-free main control output circuit 4100 cb, the peripheral control board 4140 may drop without dropping or disconnecting a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100 aeb. Can be received reliably.

  Next, the circuit and the like of the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 69 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 79 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit etc. of the payout control unit, FIG. 80 is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit, FIG. 81 is a circuit diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 80, and FIG. FIG. 83 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit, FIG. 83 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input / output circuit, and FIG. 84 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board It is. First, the payout control filter circuit will be described, and then the circuit of the payout control unit, various input / output signals with the main control board, and various output signals to the external terminal board will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 79, the payout control filter circuit 4110a mainly includes a payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit and is excellent in attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded by ferrite. The first terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is applied with +5 V from the power supply substrate 851 shown in FIG. 84, and one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC0 grounded. The capacitor PC0 removes +5 V from the power supply substrate 851 first to remove ripple (AC component folded to voltage) and smoothes the voltage. The second terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is grounded with the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 outputs +5 V from which the noise component is removed.

  The third terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 has one end connected to ground (GND), the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the other end of the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (in the present embodiment, electrostatic capacity: 180 microfarads (μF)) By being electrically connected to each other, ripples are further removed from +5 V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 and smoothed. The smoothed +5 V is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, the VCC terminal as the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, and the VDD terminal as the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, which will be described later. .

  The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded, and +5 V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples by the capacitor PC3. ing. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. A cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to a VBB terminal which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (a discharge control built-in RAM) built in the discharge control MPU 4120a, and a capacitor PC4 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND) It is electrically connected to the other end of the The VBB terminal of the discharge control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, and via the resistor PR0, the plus of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 851 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, +5 V smoothed by removing noise components by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and the VBB terminal of the payout control internal RAM and the capacitor BC1 via the diode PD0. Is applied to the plus terminal of the Thus, as described above, when +5 V generated by the power generation circuit 855d of the power supply substrate 851 shown in FIG. 74 is not supplied to the payout control substrate 4110, the charge stored in the capacitor BC1 is paid off. Because it is supplied to the payout control board 4110 as a current, the diode PD0 blocks the current to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control MPU 4120a does not operate, but the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM The stored contents are kept by applying a payment VBB.

  The payout control unit 4120 is reset as a peripheral circuit as shown in FIG. 79 in addition to the payout control MPU 4120a, the payout control input circuit 4120b, the payout control output circuit 4120c, the payout motor drive circuit 4120d and the CR unit input / output circuit 4120e. A payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 (8 MHz in this embodiment) that outputs a clock signal are mainly configured. Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, and then the payout control crystal oscillator, the payout control input circuit, the payout motor drive circuit, the CR unit input / output circuit, and various input / output signals to the payout control MPU will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 79, +5 V smoothed by removing noise components by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1. The payout control system reset PIC1 is for resetting the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function, and has a built-in delay circuit. One end of the delay capacitance terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC5. It can be done. Specifically, when +5 V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold (for example, 4.25 V), the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time has elapsed.

  The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal, which is a reset terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and one end thereof is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor PR1 electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line, and one end is a capacitor connected to ground (GND) It is electrically connected to the other end of the PC 6. The capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is higher than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR1 and the logic becomes HI. This logic corresponds to the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control output with reset function The logic becomes LOW when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold while being input to the reset terminal of the circuit 4120ca, and this logic corresponds to the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function. Respectively input to the reset terminal. Because the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, the payout control MPU 4120a and the reset function are operated when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold. A reset is applied to the attached payout control output circuit 4120 ca. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC7, and +5 V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing the ripple. The ground terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

  As shown in FIG. 79, +5 V smoothed by removing noise components by the payout control filter circuit 4110 a is input to the VCC terminal which is a power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The VCC terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC8 at one end, and +5 V input to the VCC terminal is smoothed by removing ripples further. In addition to the VCC terminal, the smoothed +5 V is also applied to the OE terminal which is an output enable terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs a clock signal of 8 MHz from an OUT terminal which is an output terminal by applying +5 V to its OE terminal.

  The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal which is a clock terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and a clock signal of 8 MHz is input to the payout control MPU 4120a. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded with the ground (GND).

  The payout control input circuit 4120b receives the payout blackout notice signal from the blackout monitoring circuit 4100e provided in the door frame open switch 618, the main body frame open switch 619 shown in FIG. 79, and the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. They are a circuit, a handle relay terminal board shown in FIG. 69, a circuit to which a detection signal from the full switch 550 is input through the power supply substrate 851, a circuit to which an operation signal from the operation switch 860a is input. First, the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input will be described, and subsequently, the circuit to which the detection signal from the body frame opening switch is input, and the circuit to which the payout blackout notification signal from the blackout monitoring circuit is input, A circuit to which a detection signal from a full switch is input and a circuit to which an operation signal from an operation switch is input will be described. In addition, since various detection switches such as a full tank switch, a ball disconnection switch 750, a count switch 751, and a rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. 69 have open collector output types as output terminals, various detection switches The circuit configuration to which the detection signal is input is almost the same, so here, a circuit to which the detection signal from the full switch is input will be described.

  The door frame open switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is ON (conductive) in a state where the door frame is opened from the main body frame, and the door frame is closed to the main body frame Switch is turned off (disconnected). The second terminal of the door frame open switch 618 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame open switch 618 is other than the pull-up resistor PR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR21, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR22 which is grounded. Further, the first terminal of the door frame open switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC20 which is grounded. . The emitter terminal of transistor PTR20 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC 20 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 20 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of the (PIC 20 A)) payout control It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 4120a. When the transistor PTR20 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 changes, and the signal is input as the door open signal to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  Further, the first terminal of the door frame open switch 618 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and on the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24. The base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the resistor PR24, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR25 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line, not shown. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR21 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as an outer end frame door open information output signal.

  Further, the first terminal of the door frame open switch 618 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and on the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 through the resistor PR24, and is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 through the resistor PR26. ing. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor PR26, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR27 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 68 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to main control substrate 4100 via a wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 4100b of main control substrate 4100 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the line. As the transistor PTR22 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 4100 as a main frame door open signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR20 and the capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generating circuit, and when the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 or when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, The contact constituting the door frame opening switch 618 is configured as a circuit also having a function of absorbing the fluctuation of the voltage from the door frame opening switch 618 due to the fluttering phenomenon of repeating ON / OFF for a short time.

  A circuit composed of resistors PR21 and PR22 and transistor PTR20, a circuit composed of resistors PR24 and PR25 and transistor PTR21, and a circuit composed of resistors PR26 and PR27 and transistor PTR22 It is a switch circuit which is turned on / off by a detection signal from 618.

  In the state where the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, since the door frame open switch 618 is ON, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. It turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, a voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR23, and a door frame open signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. Ru. Further, in a state where the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, the door frame open switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. The PTR 21 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. Thus, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is HI Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, in a state where the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, the door frame open switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. The PTR 22 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistance of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 4100.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is closed from the main body frame 3, the door frame open switch 618 is off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR20. Thus, the transistor PTR20 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the door frame open signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. Further, in a state where the door frame 5 is closed from the main body frame 3, since the door frame open switch 618 is off, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to +5 V side to turn on the transistor PTR21. And the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW, and the outer end frame door open information output signal is input to the external terminal plate 784. Further, in a state where the door frame 5 is closed from the main body frame 3, since the door frame open switch 618 is off, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to +5 V side to turn on the transistor PTR22. And the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the main frame door open signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the main control board 4100.

  As described above, when the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, the door frame open switch 618 is turned on, whereby the door frame open signal whose logic is HI is the input terminal of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120 a. An outer end frame door open information output signal input to PA0 and having logic HI is input to the external terminal board 784, and a main frame door open signal having logic HI is input to the main control board 4100, In the state where the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, the door frame open switch 618 is turned off, and a door frame open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA 0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120 a An outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and a main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 4100.

  The main frame opening switch 619 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is ON (conductive) in a state where the main frame is open from the outer frame, and the main frame is closed to the outer frame Switch is turned off (disconnected). The second terminal of the main frame opening switch 619 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the main frame opening switch 619 is the other of the pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 through the resistor PR29. The base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor PR29, and one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR30 which is grounded. The first terminal of the body frame open switch 619 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC21 which is grounded. . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 described above, and connected with the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness). It is electrically connected. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 through a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line, and not shown. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. As the transistor PTR23 turns ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as an outer end frame door open information output signal.

  The No. 1 terminal of the body frame open switch 619 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR28 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 through the resistor PR29, and on the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31. The base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the resistor PR31, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR32 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above and is shown in FIG. 68 via a wiring (harness). It is electrically connected to the main control board 4100. When the collector terminal of transistor PTR 24 is electrically connected to main control substrate 4100 via a wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 4100 b of main control substrate 4100 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the line. When the transistor PTR24 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 4100 as a main frame door open signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR28 and the capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generating circuit, and when the body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, or when the body frame 3 is closed to the outer frame 2, The contact constituting the main body frame open switch 619 is configured as a circuit also having a function of absorbing the fluctuation of the voltage from the main body frame open switch 619 due to the fluttering phenomenon of repeating ON / OFF for a short time.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR 29 and PR 30 and the transistor PTR 23 and the circuit composed of the resistors PR 31 and PR 32 and the transistor PTR 24 are switch circuits that are turned on / off by a detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619.

  When the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2, the main body frame open switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. It turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. Thus, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is HI Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, the main body frame open switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. The PTR 24 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistance of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 4100.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 3 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main body frame open switch 619 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR28 Thus, the transistor PTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the external terminal plate 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is LOW is It is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the main body frame 3 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main body frame open switch 619 is off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 can be pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR28. Thus, the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is the main control board It is input to 4100.

  As described above, when the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, when the main body frame open switch 619 is turned on, the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784 The main frame door open signal whose logic has become HI is input to the main control board 4100, while the main body frame 3 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main body frame open switch 619 is turned OFF to The outer end frame door open information output signal with the LOW being input is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal with the logic set to LOW is input to the main control board 4100.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, one or both of the state in which the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3 and the state in which the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2. Even in this case, since the main frame door open signal is input to the main control board 4100, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. Although it can not be determined whether the door frame 5 is open from the main body frame 3 or the main body frame 3 is open from the outer frame 2 on the basis of the door frame 5 and / or It can be determined that a state in which the player does not occur during normal game that the main body frame 3 is open is generated, and the external terminal frame 784 has an outer end frame door open information output signal. This outer end is designed to be input The door open information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer through the external terminal board 784, and the hall computer is in a state where the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 based on the outer end frame door open information output signal, Or although it can not be determined whether the main body frame 3 is in the state of being released from the outer frame 2, there is a state where the player that the door frame 5 and / or the main body frame 3 is open does not occur during the normal game. It can be determined that it is occurring.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 are normally closed switches, so that the door frame opening switch 618 is shorted for some reason and the switch is turned on ( Even in the state of conduction, the door frame 5 is opened from the body frame 3, and the body frame open switch 619 is shorted for some reason and the switch is turned on (conduction), the body frame 3 is in a state of being released from the outer frame 2. As described above, by adopting the door frame open switch 618 and the main body frame open switch 619 as a normally closed switch, the main frame door open signal can be output to the main control board 4100 even at the time of a short circuit, and the outer end A frame door open information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

  When the door frame opening switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619 are replaced with a normally closed switch (normally open (NO)) switch (door frame opening switch 618 'and body frame opening switch 619') The door frame opening switch 618 'is turned on (conductive) in a state where the door frame 5 is closed from the main body frame 3, and is turned off (disconnected) in a state where the door frame 5 is opened to the main body frame 3. . When the main body frame 3 is closed from the outer frame 2, the switch is turned on (conductive) and when the main body frame 3 is opened to the outer frame 2, the switch is turned off (disconnected). Then, even if the door frame opening switch 618 'is broken for some reason and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the door frame 5 is kept open from the main body frame 3, and the main body for some reason Even when the frame opening switch 619 'is disconnected and the switch is turned OFF (disconnected), the main frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2. As described above, even when the door frame opening switch 618 'and the body frame opening switch 619' are normally open switches, the main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 4100 even at the time of disconnection. The outer end frame door open information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

  The transmission line for transmitting the delivery blackout notice signal from the blackout monitoring circuit 4100e included in the main control board 4100 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR40 electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line at one end and It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 through the PR41. The base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the resistor PR41, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR42 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of transistor PTR40 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC 40 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of the (PIC 40 A)). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 4120a. When the transistor PTR40 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 changes, and the signal is input as the payout failure notification signal to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  A circuit configured of the resistors PR41 and PR42 and the transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by a payout blackout notification signal from the blackout monitoring circuit 4100e included in the main control board 4100.

  As described above, the blackout monitoring circuit 4100e monitors the signs of blackouts or instantaneous blackouts of two voltages of +12 V and + 24V from the power supply substrate 851, and detects no signs of blackouts or instantaneous blackouts, and does not have a reset function. A payout blackout notice signal is output to the payout control board 4110 as a blackout notice via the main control output circuit 4100 cb. The blackout monitoring circuit 4100e monitors the signs of blackouts or instantaneous blackouts of the + 12V and + 24V voltages, and as described above, the condition that the + 24V voltage is larger than the blackout detection voltage V1pf, and the + 12V voltage is higher than the blackout detection voltage V2pf When both conditions of large condition are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control substrate 4110 through the wiring (harness), and the logic is LOW. While the paid out blackout notification signal is input to the payout control board 4110, one of the conditions that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the blackout detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the blackout detection voltage V2pf When the condition is met, the transistor MTR22 Payout power failure warning signal of the voltage applied to the collector terminal wiring logic by via (harness) is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 described above it becomes HI is input to the payout control board 4110.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the detection failure voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage + 12V is larger than the detection failure voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of a blackout or a momentary loss of voltage of + 12V and + 24V. At the same time, since the payout blackout notification signal whose logic has become LOW is input to the payout control substrate 4110, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor PTR40 is turned OFF. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the +5 V side by the resistor PR43. As a result, the payout blackout notification signal whose logic has become HI from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  On the other hand, when one of the conditions that the voltage of +24 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, that is, +12 V and / or +24 V When there is a sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure, a payout blackout notification signal whose logic has become HI is input to the payout control board 4110, and is thus applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 by the payout blackout notification signal from the blackout monitoring circuit 4100e. Is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor PR40, the transistor PTR40 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the payout blackout notification signal in which the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 40 becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA 1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120 a.

  Thus, when there is a sign of a power failure or a momentary loss of voltage of +12 V and / or +24 V, a payout blackout notification signal whose logic has become HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a, When there is no sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure of the voltages of +12 V and +24 V, a payout blackout notification signal whose logic has become LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. This is because, as described above, when there is a sign of a power failure or a momentary loss of voltage of +12 V and / or +24 V, a power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to input terminal PA1 of input port PA of main control MPU 4100a. On the other hand, when there is no indication of a power failure or a momentary loss of voltage of +12 V and +24 V, a power failure notification signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. The logic of the payout blackout notification signal input to the payout control MPU 4120a and the logic of the blackout notification signal input to the main control MPU 4100a are the same logic.

  A detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is input to the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay terminal board and the power supply board 851. The output terminal of the full tank switch 550 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and one end of the payout control substrate 4110 is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a and to the first terminal of the full switch 3-terminal filter PIC50. The full switch three-terminal filter PIC50 is a T-type filter circuit, and is excellent in attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded by ferrite.

  The second terminal of the full tank switch 3-terminal filter PIC50 is grounded with the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the full tank switch 3-terminal filter PIC50 is connected through the resistor PR44b to the full tank switch 3-terminal filter PIC50 And the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via the resistor PR45. As a result, the detection signal of the full tank switch 550 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 41 after the noise component is removed in the full switch three-terminal filter PIC 50. The base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46 whose one end is connected to the ground (GND) in addition to the electrical connection to the resistor PR45, and one end is connected to the ground (GND) It is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC40 which is electrically connected. The capacitor PC40 plays a role as a low pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR47 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line and also a non-inverting buffer ICPIC 40 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 40 B).) Payout control It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the MPU 4120a. As the transistor PTR41 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input as the full signal to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  The circuit constituted by the resistors PR45 and PR46 and the transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit which is turned on / off by a detection signal from the full switch 550.

  As described above, the full tank switch 550 detects whether or not the storage space in the second ball passage of the far cover unit 540 is full with the stored gaming balls. In the present embodiment, when the storage space is not filled with gaming balls stored, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full switch 550 is the payout control via the handle relay terminal board and the power supply substrate 851. A signal whose logic is raised to +12 V by pull-up resistor 44a on substrate 4110 is input to payout control substrate 4110, and when the storage space is full with the stored gaming balls, it is full. A signal in which the voltage applied to the output terminal of the tongue switch 550 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control substrate 4110 via the handle relay terminal board and the power supply substrate 851 is the payout control substrate It is input to 4110.

  When the storage space is not full with the gaming balls stored, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full switch 550 is pulled at the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay terminal board 192 and the power supply board 851. The signal that is pulled up to +12 V by the up resistor 44 a and whose logic is HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 41 described above, so that the transistor PTR 41 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW, the full signal is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  On the other hand, when the storage space is full with the gaming balls stored, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full switch 550 is applied to the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay terminal board and the power supply board 851. When the signal pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 41 described above, the transistor PTR 41 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor PR47, and a full signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  In this embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is input to the switch circuit configured of the resistor PR45, the resistor PR46, and the transistor PTR41 through the full tank switch 3-terminal filter PIC50. However, detection signals from various detection switches such as the ball disconnection switch 750, the counting switch 751, and the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. 69 are T-shaped filter circuits such as a full switch 3-terminal filter PIC50. The circuit configuration is to be directly input to each switch circuit without an intervening. Since the full tank switch 550 is provided in the far cover unit attached to the door frame, it is compared with the ball out switch 750, the counting switch 751, the rotation angle switch 752 and the like provided in the prize ball device attached to the main body frame 3. Also, the path for transmitting the detection signal becomes extremely long and extremely susceptible to noise.

  The full tank switch 550 is for detecting whether or not the storage space in the second ball passage of the far cover unit is full with the gaming balls stored therein, and the payout control MPU 4120 a is from the full tank switch 550. If it is judged based on the detection signal that the gaming space is full of storage space, the drive control of the payout motor 7 is forcibly stopped to perform control to stop the payout of the gaming ball by the payout rotating body It is supposed to be. That is, when noise intrudes into the transmission path (transmission line) for transmitting the detection signal from the full tank switch 550, the payout control MPU 4120a drives the payout motor 744 even though the storage space is neither full nor full. There is a case that the control is forcibly stopped and the payout of the game balls by the payout rotating body is stopped, and the drive control of the payout motor 744 is performed regardless of whether the storage space is full with the stored game balls. When the game ball is filled up to the upstream side of the above-mentioned winning ball passage by rotating the payout rotary body and continuing the payout of the gaming ball, the payout rotary body itself can not rotate and the payout motor 744 is The load is abnormally applied and the dispensing motor is overloaded and abnormally heated to cause failure, or the mechanism for transmitting the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor to the rotational movement of the dispensing rotating member or the like is faulty Sometimes referred to or. Therefore, in order to prevent such a problem, a circuit configuration is adopted so that noise components are removed from the detection signal from the full switch 550 in the full switch three-terminal filter PIC 50 first.

  The 1st and 2nd terminals which are the output terminals of the operation switch 860a are grounded to the ground (GND), and the 3rd and 4th terminals which are the output terminals of the operation switch 860a are on the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 of the previous stage through the resistor PR49. The base terminal of the previous-stage transistor PTR42 is electrically connected to the resistor PR49, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR50 whose ground is grounded. The fourth terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 860a, is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC41 whose ground is grounded. ing. The emitter terminal of transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR51 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the rear stage via the resistor PR52. The base terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the resistor PR52, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR53 whose ground is grounded. The emitter terminal of the rear stage transistor PTR43 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR54 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line And the non-inversion buffer ICPIC 40 (the non-inversion buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inversion buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one (PIC 40 C) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. The logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the rear stage is changed by turning on / off the transistors PTR42 and PTR43 in the front and rear stages, and the signal becomes an RWMCLR signal as the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. Is input to

  The third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 860a, are pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage via the resistor PR49. It is pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 through the resistor PR55. The base terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the resistor PR55, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR56 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR 44 is electrically connected to main control substrate 4100 via a wiring (harness), one end of main control input circuit 4100 b of main control substrate 4100 shown in FIG. 76 has +12 V. It is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR2 electrically connected to the power supply line. As the transistor PTR 44 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 44 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA 0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100 a as a RAM clear signal.

  The circuit formed of the pull-up resistor PR48 and the capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generating circuit, and when the operation switch 860a is pressed, the contact constituting the operation switch 860a repeats the ON / OFF for a short time. The circuit is also configured as a circuit having a function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the operation switch 860a.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR49 and PR50 and the transistor PTR42 is a switch circuit at the former stage, and the circuit composed of the resistors PR52 and PR53 and the transistor PTR43 is a switch circuit at the latter stage, and the resistors PR55 and PR56 and the transistor PTR44 Is a switch circuit, which is turned on / off by an operation signal from the operation switch 860a.

  As described above, the operation switch 860a is connected to the RAM (dispense control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control board 4110 within a predetermined period from the time of power on and the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100. It is operated when clearing the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), or when it is notified of an error after the power is turned on, it is operated to clear the error. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from time to time, and an error release after the power is turned on (after a period of playing the function as a RAM clear, that is, after a predetermined period has passed from the time of power on) It has a function. The operation signal from the operation switch 860a becomes a RAM clear signal in the function of clearing the RAM within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, while after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has passed since the power was turned on) In the function to perform the error cancellation in the above, it becomes an error cancellation signal.

  When the operation switch 860a is not operated, the third and fourth terminals which are the output terminals of the operation switch 860a are pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the operation signal whose logic is HI is the transistor of the previous stage The transistor PTR42 of the previous stage is turned ON while the switch circuit of the previous stage is also turned ON, and is applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 of the previous stage, which is a voltage applied to the base of the transistor PTR43 of the subsequent stage. When the voltage is lowered to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR 43 in the rear stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the rear stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor PR54 and the RWMCLR signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. The payout control MPU 4120a performs the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the payout control internal RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. It is determined that the instruction is not to be issued, and the error is canceled when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI after power on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from the time of power on). Judge not to indicate.

  In addition, when the operation switch 860a is not operated, the operation signal with the logic HI which is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR48 is the transistor PTR44. The transistor PTR 44 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness) and the logic becomes LOW is transmitted to the main control board 4100. It is input. When the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input within a predetermined period from the time of power on, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, as described above, this logic is LOW as described above. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR5 and the logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, the main control MPU 4100a determines that it does not instruct to perform the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control internal RAM.

  On the other hand, when the operation switch 860a is operated, the third and fourth terminals which are the output terminals of the operation switch 860a are pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the operation signal whose logic is LOW becomes the transistor of the previous stage. The transistor PTR42 at the front stage is turned off and the switch circuit at the front stage is also turned off when input to the base terminal of the PTR42, and is applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR42 at the front stage. Is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor PR51, so that the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on. As a result, the RWMCLR signal whose voltage is lowered to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. The payout control MPU 4120a performs the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the payout control internal RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. It is determined that the command is to be issued, and the error is canceled when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from the time of power on). Judge that it is something to indicate.

  In addition, when the operation switch 860a is operated, the operation becomes logic LOW by the third and fourth terminals which are the output terminals of the operation switch 860a being pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48. A signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, the transistor PTR44 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. Thus, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A clear signal is input to the main control board 4100. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives the logic HI shown in FIG. 76 as described above when the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input within a predetermined period from the time of power on. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU 4100a determines that it instructs to clear the RAM stored in the main control internal RAM.

  Next, a payout motor drive circuit 4120 d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor will be described. As shown in FIG. 82, the payout motor drive circuit 4120 d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 4120 da and a drive IC PIC 60. The power supply input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 4120 da are electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line and the +5 V power supply line, respectively, and +12 and +5 V are applied respectively. The ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120 da is connected to the ground (GND) It is grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120 da. The voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, and is output from the reset control with payout control output circuit 4120ca to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120da. It is supposed to be The power supply output terminal of voltage switching circuit 4120 da is electrically connected to the third and tenth terminals which are the cathode terminals of drive IC PIC 60 via Zener diode PZD 60, and electrically connected to the power supply terminal of payout motor 744. No. 3 which is the cathode terminal of the drive IC PIC 60 via the Zener diode PZD60 with +12 V or +5 V as the motor drive voltage based on the voltage switching signal connected to the voltage switching circuit 4120 da. While supplying to a terminal and a 10th terminal, it supplies to the payout motor 744.

  The drive IC PIC 60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In the present embodiment, the sixth and seventh terminals, which are the emitter terminals of the drive IC PIC 60, are grounded to ground (GND) and are the base terminals of the drive IC PIC 60. A payout motor drive signal is input to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal via the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The second, fourth, ninth, and eleventh terminals of the drive IC PIC 60, which are collector terminals, are the first, fifth, eighth, and twelfth terminals of the drive IC PIC 60, respectively. When the payout motor drive signal is input to the 1st terminal, the 5th terminal, the 8th terminal and the 12th terminal which are the base terminals of the drive IC PIC 60 respectively via the resistors PR60 to PR63, the excitation signal is used. A certain drive pulse is output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) corresponding to the dispensing motor 744. The payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120 a to the payout control output circuit 4120 ca with a reset function, and from the payout control output circuit 4120 ca with a reset function via the resistors PR60 to PR63 of the drive ICPIC60 It is outputted to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal and the twelfth terminal which are base terminals respectively. These drive pulses are performed by switching the excitation current flowing in each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the dispensing motor 744 to rotate the dispensing motor 744. In addition, when the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is interrupted | blocked by this switching, counter electromotive force generate | occur | produces. If this back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive IC PIC 60, the drive IC PIC 60 is damaged. Therefore, as protection, the zener diode PZD0 described above is electrically connected to the third stage and the tenth stage of the cathode terminal of the drive IC PIC 60. Adopted the circuit configuration.

  Next, a CR unit input / output circuit 4120e for inputting / outputting various signals to / from CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 70 will be described. As described above, the payout control board 4110 receives the game ball request signal BRDY from the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the payout operation start request signal BRQ. , And the predetermined voltage VL (+12 V) and the ground LG prepared from the AC 24 V supplied from the power supply substrate 851 shown in FIG. 70 are supplied, while the payout control substrate 4110 is connected to a lending device such as a game ball Through terminal plate 869, an EXS signal indicating that a single dispensing operation has been started or ended, and a PRDY signal indicating that a dispensing operation for paying out a rental ball is possible or impossible And output. As shown in FIG. 83, the input / output circuit that inputs / outputs these various signals and the like mainly includes photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (in which an infrared LED and a phototransistor are built in).

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 turns ON, but the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 Sometimes, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via the resistor PR71, and also via the resistor PR72 It is electrically connected to the base terminal of PTR71. The collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71, and also electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR73 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line.

  The base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR74 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR75 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line and a non-inverting buffer FIG. 79 through ICPIC80 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of the (PIC80A)). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a shown in FIG. As the transistor PTR70 turns ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 changes, and the signal is input as the CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the resistor PR72, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR76 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply substrate 851 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to power supply substrate 851 via a wiring (harness), one end of power supply substrate 851 is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line, and not shown. Electrically connected to the other end of the As the transistor PTR71 turns ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply substrate 851 as a CR connection signal.

  The circuit configured of the resistors PR71 and PR74 and the transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR73, thereby turning on the transistor PTR70 and switching circuit It will turn on. Thereby, the CR connection signal 1 in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned ON, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side As a result, the transistor PTR70 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. Thus, the CR connection signal 1 in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PTR75 and the logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a. Ru.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR72 and PR76 and the transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR73, thereby turning on the transistor PTR71 and switching circuit It will turn on. As a result, the CR connection signal whose logic is LOW is pulled down to the power supply substrate 851 when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply substrate 851 via the wiring (harness). Ru.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned ON, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side As a result, the transistor PTR 71 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor of the power supply substrate 851 through the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the power supply substrate 851 Be done.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77 in addition to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 turns ON, When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC 71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC 71 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR78 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line And the non-inversion buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inversion buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inversion buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of the (PIC80 B) without inverting). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a. When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input as the BRDY signal to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  Since the photocoupler PIC71 turns ON when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, The BRDY signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC 71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120 a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. The BRDY signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR78 and the logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a. Thus, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is the same logic as the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79 in addition to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photo coupler PIC 72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photo coupler PIC 72 is turned on, while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC 72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC 72 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is connected to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR80 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line And the non-inversion buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inversion buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inversion buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one (PIC80C) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a. When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  Since the photocoupler PIC72 turns ON when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, The BRQ signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC 72 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120 a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. The BRQ signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR80 and the logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a. Thus, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is the same logic as the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6.

  An EXS signal indicating that a single dispensing operation has been started or ended from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 4120a is output to the dispensing control output circuit 4120cb without the reset function, and the payout control output circuit without the resetting function. 4120 cb is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC 73 via the resistor PR 81. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR82 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line. The resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, EXS is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a without the reset function via the payout control output circuit 4120cb When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 turns ON, and +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a The photocoupler PIC73 is turned off when the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the output terminal via the reset function-free output control circuit 4120cb is HI. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is connected to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 by the pull-up resistor PR83. At a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as EXS.

  When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, EXS is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a without the reset function via the payout control output circuit 4120cb When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 turns ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic goes LOW. 6 is input to the built-in control device. On the other hand, when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a without the reset function via the payout control output circuit 4120cb. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83 and the logic is HI The EXS is input to the built-in control unit of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 4120cb It is the same logic.

  The PRDY signal which indicates that the dispensing operation for dispensing the lent ball from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 4120a is possible or impossible is the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR84. Has been entered. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR85 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line. The resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, PRDY output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 4120cb When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON, and +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a The photocoupler PIC74 is turned off when the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the signal output via the output control terminal without the reset function 4120cb is HI. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded with the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is connected to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 by the pull-up resistor PR86. At a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC74 turns ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as PRDY.

  When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, PRDY output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 4120cb When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 turns ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic goes LOW. 6 is input to the built-in control device. On the other hand, when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, it is outputted from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 4120cb. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned off, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86 and the logic is HI PRDY is input to the built-in control unit of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 74 is the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120 a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 4120 cb It is the same logic.

  Next, various input / output signals input / output from input / output terminals of various input / output ports of the payout control MPU 4120a will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 79, the RXD terminal as the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 4120a receives the serial data from the main control board 4100 as the main payout serial data reception signal through the payout control input circuit 4120b. Be done. On the other hand, serial data to be transmitted to the main control board 4100 is transmitted as a payment serial data transmission signal to the payout control output circuit 4120cb having no reset function from the TXD terminal which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU 4120a. A reset function-free delivery control output circuit 4120 cb transmits a payment serial data transmission signal to the main control board 4100.

  The RWMCLR signal, the payout blackout notification signal, the door open signal, the full signal, the various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection) are connected to the input terminals of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a. In addition to the signal 1 etc.) being input, for example, the main payment ACK signal from the main control board 4100 for notifying the completion of the normal reception of the above-described payee serial data reception signal is output via the payout control input circuit 4120b. The detection signals from the out-of-ball switch 750, the count switch 751, the rotation angle switch 752, etc. shown in FIG. 69 are respectively input via the payout control input circuit 4120b.

  On the other hand, the EXS signal and the PRDY signal described above are respectively output from the output terminals of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to the non-refundable payout control output circuit 4120cb, and the EXS signal from the non-refundable payout control output circuit 4120cb The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input / output circuit 4120e, or the voltage switching signal described above is output to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function, and the voltage switching signal is output from the reset control payout control output circuit 4120ca to the voltage switching circuit 4120da. Output the payout motor drive signal to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, and output the payout motor drive signal from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function to the payout motor 744 through the payout motor drive circuit 4120d. In addition to the above, for example, a payer ACK signal notifying the completion of normal reception of the main pay serial data reception signal described above is output to the pay out control output circuit 4120 ca with a reset function and paid out from the pay out control output circuit 4120 ca with a reset function. The main ACK signal is output to the main control substrate 4100, or the drive signal of the error LED indicator 860b shown in FIG. 69 is output to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function, and the drive signal from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function. Are output to the error LED indicator 860b or the like.

  Next, various input / output signals between the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100 and various output signals from the payout control board 4110 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The payout control board 4110 exchanges various input / output signals with the main control board 4100. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 84 (a), the payout control board 4110 includes the above-described payee serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, etc. Are output to the main control board 4100. These output signals are pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 4100 b of the main control board 4100.

  On the other hand, in addition to the main payment serial data reception signal, the main payment ACK signal, and the operation signal (RAM clear signal), the payout control board 4110 has 15 round big hit information output signals, 2 round big hit information output signals, etc. Big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation in-progress information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time information output signal in the short time, starting opening winning information output signal etc A signal or the like is input from the main control board 4100. These input signals are pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistance of the payout control input circuit 4120 b of the payout control unit 4120 of the payout control substrate 4110.

  The payout control board 4110 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 84 (b), in addition to the above-mentioned outer end frame door opening information output signal, an award ball number information output signal indicating the number of gaming balls actually paid out by the payout motor; In addition to the big hit information output signal such as 15 round big hit information output signal and 2 round big hit information output signal from the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, the probability fluctuation in-progress information output signal, the special symbol display information output signal A game information signal such as an ordinary symbol display information output signal, a time information output signal, and a starting opening winning information output signal is output to the external terminal board 784. These output signals are pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistance of the external terminal plate 784.

  A signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game hall (not shown), and the hall computer monitors the player's game or the like. In addition, for example, when outputting 15 round big hit information output signals or 2 round big hit information output signals to the hole computer as one big hit information output signal, the hole computer counts the number of big hits when the round becomes 2 times (2 The sum of the number of round big hit occurrences) and the number of big hits (15 round big hit occurrences) when the round has reached 15 times is the number of big hits of the pachinko gaming machine 1. For this reason, since the hole computer can not grasp the number of occurrences of the 2 round big hit and the number of occurrences of the 15 land big hit from the summed number of big hits, the number of big hits actually generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is large However, it can not be grasped whether it is 2 round big hit or 15 round big hit. Further, a data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko gaming machine 1 and, among the players, whether or not to play a game with reference to the number of occurrences of the big hit gaming state etc. displayed on this data counter. Some people choose.

  However, since the number of occurrences of the big hit gaming state displayed on the data counter may actually be biased to the number of occurrences of the 2 round big hit, even if the player starts the game, only the 2 round big hit occurs. There are times when the 15 round big hit does not occur easily. As described above, although the number of occurrences of the big hit gaming state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, the player's irritability may be more than necessary.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the hall computer generates two rounds of big hit occurrences by separately outputting 15 round big hit information output signals and two round big hit information output signals to the hole computer as big hit information output signals. It has become possible to accurately grasp the number of occurrences of the 15 round big hit. Therefore, the hole computer can grasp whether the number of big hits that actually occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the 2 round big hit or the 15 round big hit, and the data counter is 15 Since the number of round big hit occurrences and the number of two round big hit occurrences can be displayed separately or only the number of occurrences of the 15 round big hit can be displayed as the number of big hit gaming state occurrences, the player's cunning feeling is more than necessary Nor.

  In the present embodiment, the 2-round big hit information output signal is output to the hall computer in the period until the 2 round big hit occurs and ends, and the 15 round big hit information output signal is also 15 round big hits. It is in the state of being output to the hall computer in the period from the generation to the end. As in the present embodiment, in addition to the method of outputting the 2 round big hit information output signal and the 15 round big hit information output signal to the hall computer, for example, when 2 round big hit occurs, the 2 round big hit information output signal is only for a predetermined period. Such a two round big hit information output signal and 15 round big hit information such that the 15 round big hit information output signal is output to the hole computer for a predetermined period when it is output to the hole computer and 15 round big hit occurs There is also a method of outputting an output signal to the hall computer for the same predetermined period.

  Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 84 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 86 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board 86 is a table showing continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 86, and FIG. 88 is a table showing one example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, the prize ball command which is a command related to the payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board will be described, and subsequently, various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board will be described, and the main control board receives The various commands from the payout control board will be described.

  When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives detection signals from various winning switches such as the general winning opening switch, the starting opening switch 3022, and the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. 68, these are used as detection signals. Based on the game, a prize ball command for delivering a game ball of a predetermined number of balls as a prize ball is transmitted to the payout control board. The prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (in communication with the pachinko gaming machine 1 to drive the payout motor of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (prize ball device 740) to be a storage tray are game balls as rental balls When a device for paying out is electrically connected (such a pachinko gaming machine is referred to as a "CR machine"), as shown in FIG. 85 (a), a payout control board from the main control board 4100. Commands 10H to 1EH ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared for the prize ball command transmitted to 4110. One prize ball is designated in the command 10H, and two prize balls are designated in the command 11H. Is designated by the command 1 EH: 15 payout balls are designated by the command 1 EH The payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor to pay out the gaming balls by the designated number of winning balls. .

  In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the ball lending machine are installed adjacent to the game arcade (hall), and the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected (such Is referred to as a “general machine.” As shown in FIG. Then, one prize ball is designated, two prize balls are designated in the command 21H,..., And fifteen prize balls are designated in the command 2EH. The payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 to payout the gaming balls by the designated number of winning balls.

  As shown in FIG. 85 (c), a command 30H is prepared as a command common to the CR machine and the general machine, and a self check is designated in this command 30H. The transmitting side transmits the command 30H and checks whether or not the ACK signal is input, when the ACK signal to be output as acknowledgment of reception of the command is not input from the receiving side for a predetermined period after the command transmission. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in the present embodiment, the payout control board 4110 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

  Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIG. 86 and FIG. And a mode indicating a variation of the effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

  Various commands, as shown in FIG. 86 and FIG. 87, are special figure 1 tuning effect related, special figure 2 tuning effect related, jackpot related, power on, flat figure tuning effect related, general electric circuit board production related, notification display, status It is classified into the display and others.

  The special figure 1 tuning effect relation is based on the detection signal from the start port switch 3022 shown in FIG. 68, and as its classification, as shown in FIG. 86, the second part of the function display substrate 1191 shown in FIG. A special symbol display start, special symbol 1 specification, special figure 1 synchronization effect end, and a command with the name of fluctuation state specification are provided for one special symbol display 1185. These various commands are assigned "A * H" as the status and "** H" ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The special figure 1 tuning effect start command is an instruction to start special figure tuning effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special symbol 1 designation command is for designating a specific jackpot, a non-specified jackpot, and the like The special figure 1 tuning effect end command is for instructing the special figure 1 tuning effect end, and the fluctuation state specifying command is for specifying the probability and the time saving state.

  As transmission timing of these various commands, special figure 1 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the time of special symbol 1 fluctuation start, special symbol 1 designated command is sent immediately after special figure 1 tuning effect start, special figure 1 tuning The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 fluctuation time elapses (when the special symbol 1 is determined), and the fluctuation state state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol falling information designation. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

  The special figure 2 tuning effect related is based on the detection signal from the switch of the second start port 2008, and the division thereof is, as shown in FIG. 86, the second special of the function display substrate 1191 shown in FIG. It is comprised from the command of the name of special figure 2 tuning effect start, special symbol 2 specification, and special figure 2 tuning effect end regarding the symbol display 1186. For these various commands, "B * H" is assigned as the status, and "** H" ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The special figure 2 tuning effect start command is an instruction to start special figure tuning effect with the effect pattern designated in the mode, and the special symbol 2 designation command is for designating disapproval, specific big hit, non specific big hit The special figure 2 tuning effect end indicates the special figure 2 tuning effect end.

  As transmission timing of these various commands, special figure 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the time of special symbol 2 fluctuation start, special symbol 2 designated command is sent immediately after special figure 2 tuning effect start, special figure 2 tuning The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 fluctuation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is determined). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control timer interrupt process.

  In the category of big hit related, as shown in FIG. 86, big hit opening, big winning opening 1 open N-th display, big winning opening 1 closed indication, big winning opening 1 count indication, big hit ending, big hit symbol display, small hit opening , A small hit open indication, a small hit count indication, and a command named small hit ending. For these various commands, "C * H" is assigned as the status, and "** H" ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The big hit opening command instructs the big hit opening start, and the big winning opening 1 opening Nth display command is starting during the 1 to 16 round big winning opening 1 opening (the lower big winning opening 2003 or the right big winning opening During the opening of the Nth round of 7000 or instructing to start opening, the special winning opening 1 closing display command starts during the closing of special winning opening 1 between rounds (lower large winning opening 2003 or right large winning opening) It is instructed that closing between 7,000 rounds or start of closing), and the large winning opening 1 count display command indicates that it has counted 0 to 10 counts (detected by the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. 68, It is to convey the number of balls of the game ball entered in the lower large winning opening 2003 or the right large winning opening 7000, and the big hit ending command is a big hit Is intended to indicate the ending start, big hit symbol display command is for instructing the big hit symbol information display.

  Also, the small hit opening command instructs the small hit opening start, and the small hit open display command is started during the small hit open (at the time of the small hit, the opening of the lower large winning opening 2003 or the right large winning opening 7000 The small hit count display command is a game ball having entered a small hit middle large winning opening winning combination (in the small hit, the lower large winning opening 2003 or the right large winning opening 7000) Is an instruction when the count switch 2110 detects it, and the small hit ending command is an instruction to start small hit ending.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is sent at the beginning of the big hit opening, the big winning opening 1 open Nth display command is 1 to 16 round of big winning opening 1 open time (lower large winning opening 2003 Or it is transmitted to the opening of the Nth round of the right big winning opening 7000), the big winning opening 1 closing indication command is the closing time of the big winning opening 1 closing (the closing opening of the lower large winning opening 2003 or the right winning opening 7000) The special winning opening 1 count display command is sent to the special winning opening 1 open and when the count changes to the special winning opening 1 (when the lower large winning opening 2003 or the right special winning opening 7000 is opened, and the lower large winning combination Is sent to the game ball when the game ball entered the mouth 2003 or the right large winning opening 7000 is detected by the count switch 2110), and the big hit ending command Sent at jackpot ending start, big hit symbol display command is sent during the special winning opening open (when opening the 7000 inferior vena winning opening 2003 or the right special winning hole).

  Also, the small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command is sent at the small hit opening (at the time of the small hit, the lower large winning opening 2003 or the right large winning opening 7000). The small hit count display command is when the small hit middle large winning opening winnings (when the game ball entered the lower large winning opening 2003 or the right large winning opening 7000 during the small hit is detected by the count switch 2110) And the small hit ending command is transmitted at the start of the small hit ending. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control timer interrupt process.

  The division of power on includes various commands named power on as shown in FIG. In this power on command, "D * H" is assigned as a status, and "** H" ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The power on command instructs start of RAM clear effect start and respective state effect start (for example, start of effect when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated at the time of power on shown in FIG. 69) To direct).

  As the transmission timing of the power-on command, it is transmitted at the time other than the RAM clear and the RAM clear at the time of main control board power on. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, it returns from a power failure or a momentary power outage, and when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated, the main control side power on processing described later Is executed, and a power-on command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control timer interrupt process.

  The common tuning effect related is based on the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. 68, and in that section, as shown in FIG. 86, the common tuning display of the function display substrate is common tuning. It consists of commands with the names of start of production, common symbol designation, common drawing synchronization effect end, and variable state specification. These various commands are assigned status "E * H" and mode "** H" ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The popular drawing tuning effect start command instructs the starting of the common pattern tuning effect in the rendering pattern specified in the mode, and the common symbol designation command is for designating a specific jackpot, a non-specified jackpot, and The figure tuning effect end command is for instructing the end of the common figure tuning effect, and the variation state designation command is for instructing the probability and the time saving state.

  As transmission timings of these various commands, a common figure synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the time of normal symbol 1 fluctuation start, a common pattern designation command is transmitted immediately after the common figure synchronization effect start, and a common pattern synchronization effect end command is Usually, it is transmitted when the symbol fluctuation time has elapsed (when the symbol is decided normally), and the fluctuation state specification command is transmitted immediately after the common map win information specification. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control timer interrupt process.

  The regular electric rendition related to the movable pieces relates to the movable pieces 2008a and 2008b opened and closed by the drive of the starting port solenoid 2105 shown in FIG. 68, and the division thereof is as shown in FIG. It is composed of a command called "open" and "end" per drawing. These various commands are assigned status "F * H" and mode "** H" ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The opening command per common drawing instructs the opening start per common drawing, and the common power release display command instructs the start during normal power open (the movable piece is opened by the operation of the start port solenoid). The ending command per common drawing indicates the start of ending per common drawing.

  As transmission timings of these various commands, the opening command per common drawing is transmitted at the start of opening per common drawing, and the common power release display command is used when the common power is released (when the movable piece is expanded by the drive of the starting port solenoid) And a per-diagram ending command is transmitted at the beginning of the per-diagram ending. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control timer interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 87, in the classification of the notification display, a winning abnormality display, a connection abnormality display, a disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, a magnetic detection switch abnormality display, a door frame opening, a door frame closing, a main body frame opening, and a main body frame closing It consists of the command named. These various commands are assigned status "6 * H" and mode "** H" ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  In the prize abnormality display command, when a prize is won in the big prize port other than during the big hit (during the condition device operation) (even though it is not the big hit, the game ball enters the lower big prize port 2003 lower big prize port 2003 and the game When the count switch 2110 detects a ball, the command to start notification of a winning abnormality is issued. The connection error display command is, for example, an electrical signal along a path between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. If there is an abnormal connection error, the start of connection error notification is instructed. For example, the disconnection / short circuit error display command is an electrical connection between the main control board 4100 and the start port switch 3022, count switch 2110, etc. Command to start the indication of the disconnection / short circuit abnormality, and the command of the magnetic detection switch fault display is shown in FIG. If the abnormality detecting switch 3024 has occurred it is an indication of the start of magnetic detection switch abnormality notification.

  Further, based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 which is input via the payout control substrate 4110 shown in FIG. When the door frame is closed, the door frame closing command instructs the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618. When it is in the closed state, it instructs the end of the door open notification. On the other hand, the main body frame open command is released to the outer frame based on the detection signal (open signal) from the main body frame open switch 619 which is input via the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 69. When the main frame is closed, the main frame closing command instructs the main frame to be closed with respect to the outer frame based on a detection signal from the main frame opening switch 619. When it is in the state, it instructs the end of the main body frame open notification.

  As a transmission timing of these various commands, a winning abnormality display command is transmitted when winning in the special winning opening other than during a big hit (during operating condition device), and a connection abnormal display command is outputted from the main control board 4100 as a payout control board 4110. Is sent when there is no ACK response (ACK signal) from the payout control board 4110 at the time of command transmission, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command is either the start port switch 3022 or the count switch 2110 etc. The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is detected. Further, the door frame open command is transmitted when the door open is detected (when the door frame 5 is open to the main body frame 3 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618), The door frame closing command is transmitted when door closing is detected (when the door frame is closed with respect to the main body frame based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The main body frame open command is transmitted when the main body frame open is detected (when the main body frame is opened to the outer frame based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619), and the main body frame is closed. The command is transmitted when the body frame closing is detected (when the body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control timer interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the status display section comprises a frame status 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command), an error release navi command (corresponding to an error release command), and a command named frame status 2 command. There is. These various commands are assigned status "7 * H" and mode "** H" ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The frame state 1 command, the error cancellation navi command and the frame state 2 command are commands each having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 4110, and the detailed description thereof will be described later. . When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives the frame state 1 command, the error cancel navi command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. 87, “7 * H” While setting as a status, the received command is set as it is as a mode. That is, when the main control MPU 4100a receives the frame state 1 command, the error cancel navi command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, it adds “7 * H” which is additional information to these received commands. According to the above, it is formatted into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

  The frame status 1 command, which has been shaped, is sent at power recovery, when the frame status changes, and at error release navigation, the error release navigation command is sent at error release navigation, and the frame status 2 command is at power recovery , And when the frame status changes. The frame state 1 command, the error cancellation navi command, and the frame state 2 command, which are shaped, are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control timer interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the test related category is composed of various commands named test. In this test command, “8 * H” is assigned as the status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number) And is determined in advance by the contents of specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 4140 (for example, the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and the frame shown in FIG. Inspection of various substrates such as the decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 etc.).

  As a transmission timing of a test command, it is transmitted at the time other than RAM clear and RAM clear at the time of main control board power-on. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, it returns from a power failure or a momentary power outage, and when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated, the main control side power on processing described later Is executed, and a test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control timer interrupt process.

  In the other categories, as shown in FIG. 87, starting opening winning, variation shortening operation termination designation, high probability termination designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, ordinary symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory prefetching effect, and It is comprised from the command of the name of special symbol 2 memory pre-reading effect. These various commands are assigned status "9 * H" and mode "** H" ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The starting opening winning combination command is for instructing the start opening starting winning effect start, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2008 based on the detection signal from the starting opening switch 3022 The start of the effect is instructed respectively, and the fluctuation shortening operation termination designation command is for instructing the state transition from the fluctuation shortening operation state to the fluctuation shortening inoperative state, and the high probability termination designation command is high The special symbol 1 memory command is to instruct the state transition from the probability state to the low probability state, and the special symbol 1 memory command is a special symbol 1 hold 0 to 4 (a game ball enters the first starting port 2001 and the function display board The first special symbol display is to convey the number of balls (number of reservations) not yet used for the variable display of the special symbol, and the special symbol 2 memory command is the special symbol 2 hold 0 to 4 (second start) The game ball enters the ball in 2008, and the second special symbol indicator of the function display board is to convey the number of balls (number of reservations) not yet used for the variable display of the special symbol, and the normal symbol memory command is Ordinary symbol 1 hold 0 to 4 (a game ball passes through the normal gate section 2005a and conveys the number of balls not yet used for the variable display of the normal symbol on the ordinary symbol display of the function display board) The special symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect command is based on the special symbol 1 hold before read before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the variable symbol display of the special symbol in the first special symbol display of the function display board The first special symbol display indicates a preview effect start to notify the notice of the display result, and the special symbol 2 memory pre-reading effect command is special symbol 2 hold special with the second special symbol display of the function display board Figure Before being used to display the change, it is an indication of the prefetch effect initiation of notifying the advance notice of the display result of the second special symbol indicator based on the special symbol 2 pending read ahead.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2001 based on the detection signal from the first opening opening when the starting opening winning a prize command (starting opening winning combination), the second starting When the game ball enters the second starting opening 2008 based on the detection signal from the mouth switch), the speaker mainly provided in the speaker box provided on the main body frame and the speaker provided on the door frame mainly make a voice Transmitted to notify the effect, and the fluctuation shortening operation termination designation command is transmitted at the termination of the stop period (after the lapse of the suspension termination period) after the fluctuation is determined after settling the fluctuation shortening of the specified number of times, and the high probability termination designation command is , It is sent at the end of the stop period (after the lapse of the stop stop period) after the fluctuation is determined that has digested the high probability frequency in the case of "high probability N times" (special symbol 1 memory command is special symbol 1 operation pending) At the time of number change (in the state where the game ball enters the first starting opening 2001 and there is a reserved number not yet used in the variation display of the special symbol in the first special symbol indicator of the function display board, the second starting further When the game ball enters the mouth 2008 and the number of reservations increases, or when the number of reservations decreases by using the second special symbol display from the number of reservations and when the number of reservations decreases, Special symbol 2 memory command, when special symbol 2 operation pending ball number change (The game ball enters the second starting opening 2008, it is still used for fluctuation indication of the special symbol with the second special symbol indicator of the function indication baseplate In the state where there is not the number of reservations, when the game ball enters the second starting opening 2008 further and the number of reservations increases, it is used for the fluctuation display of the special symbol with the second special symbol indicator from the number of reservations (When the number of The symbol memory command is normal when the number of operating symbol balls is changed (the game ball passes through the gate section 2005a and the normal symbol display on the function display board has the number of reserved symbols not used for fluctuation display of normal symbols) In addition, when the game ball passes the gate part further and the number of reservations increases, or when the number of reservations decreases from the number of reservations used for variation display of a normal symbol indicator normal symbol) The symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 operation holding ball number increases (when the game ball enters the first starting port 2001 and the number of holding increases), the special symbol 2 memory pre-reading effect command is It is transmitted when the special symbol 2 operation holding ball number increases (when the game ball enters the second starting opening 2008 and the number of holding increases). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control timer interrupt process.

  By the way, as described above, the starting opening winning command is mainly transmitted by voice at the starting opening winning from the speakers housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speakers provided in the door frame. However, how the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 71 uses the starting opening winning command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in addition to voice notification from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame, also for monitoring the presence or absence of fraudulent activity. It is a specification of using. On the other hand, in other pachinko gaming machines, just by the peripheral control board 4140 simply receiving the starting opening winning command, the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame are voiced Some specifications do not notify.

  Next, various commands from the payout control board 4110 received by the main control board 4100 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the various commands from the payout control board 4110 are composed of a frame status 1, an error release navigation, and a command named frame status 2, and the frame status 1, error release navigation, and so on. The priority is set in the order of the frame state 2.

  In the frame status 1 command (corresponds to the error generation command), out of sphere, full, in 50 or more stocks, connection abnormality and CR non-connection are prepared, and in out of sphere bit 0 (B0, "B" Represents a bit)), the value 1 is set to bit 1 (B1) if full, bit 2 (B2) is set to 1 in more than 50 stocks, and A value 1 is set to bit 3 (B3), and a value 1 is set to bit 4 (B4) when CR is not connected. In the bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command, the value 1 is set to B5, the value 0 to B6, and the value 0 to B7.

  In the error cancellation navi command (corresponding to the error cancellation command), a ball is found, and a counting switch error and a retry error are prepared. If the ball is set to bit 2 (B2), the value 1 is set. The value 1 is set to bit 3 (B3), and the value 1 is set to bit 4 (B4) in a retry error. Here, “counting switch error” indicates whether or not the malfunction of the counting switch 751 shown in FIG. 69 has occurred. The "retry error" indicates that the payout of the inconsistent game ball due to the retry operation is repeated. In the error cancellation navi command bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7), B0 is the value 0, B1 is the value, B5 is the value, B5 is the value, B6 is the value 1, And the value 0 is set to B7.

  In the frame state 2 command, the ball removal is prepared, and during the ball removal, the value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0). The bit 1 (B1) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 2 command has the value 0 for B1, 0 for B2, 0 for B3, 0 for B4, 0 for B4, 1 for B5 and 1 for B6. The value 0 is set to B7.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted at the time of power recovery, change of the frame state, and error release navigation, and the error release navigation command is transmitted at error release navigation, frame state 2 command Is sent when power is restored and when the frame status changes. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process described later.

  Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 4100 (in particular, the main control MPU 4100a) will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 101. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing in the main control board. FIG. 90 is a flow chart showing an example of power-off occurrence processing. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing an example of the timer interrupt process. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of the special control process. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the starting hole winning process. FIG. 94 is a flowchart of the fluctuation start process. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process. FIG. 96 is a flowchart of an example of the process during variation.

  Further, reference numeral 97 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game start process. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing an example of the small hit game start process. FIG. 99 is a flow chart showing an example of the big hit game process. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing an example of the small hit game process. The timer interrupt process is executed by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 at a predetermined timing (every 4 ms in the present embodiment). FIG. 101 is an explanatory view showing a table configuration in the special symbol random number storage means.

  In the main process, as shown in FIG. 89, when the supply of power to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the main control MPU 4100a executes a power-on process (step S1). In this power-on process, it is determined whether the backup data stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is normal (is it a set value at the time of a power failure) or not. For example, it executes processing (return processing at power failure) to return to the state at the time of power failure according to the backup data stored in RAM, clears the RAM if backup data is abnormal, and performs device setting around CPU (normal initialization , Setting of interrupt timing, etc.).

  When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped during the game, the current gaming state is stored as backup data in the RAM. Further, if the RAM clear switch for instructing the clearing of the backup data stored in the RAM in the power-on process is on, the RAM is cleared and the normal initialization is performed. Further, in the power-on process, when the backup data is not stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a), the RAM is cleared and the normal initialization is performed.

  Further, in the power-on process, a process of setting a power-on command indicating that the main control board 4100 has been activated to a transmittable state on the peripheral control board 4140 when normal initialization is performed is also executed. The power on command notifies the peripheral control board 4140 that the main control board 4100 has been activated. The backup data is stored in the RAM even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed is closed or the like, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is stored again. When the supply is started, the power-on process is performed.

  When the power-on process ends, the main control MPU 4100a starts a loop process that repeatedly executes each game process. At the start of the loop processing, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether a power failure advance signal is detected (step S2). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used by the pachinko machine 1 is generated by the power supply substrate. That is, since the plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate with different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied to the pachinko machine 1 from the external power supply is converted to a predetermined power supply voltage by the power supply substrate. It is supplied to the device. Therefore, when a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply substrate falls below a predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure notice signal indicating that the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply substrate to the main control substrate 4100 is stopped. Will be sent. Then, when the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 detects a power failure notification signal in step S2, the power off occurrence processing is executed (step S4).

  In the power-off process, when the power supply voltage (24 V in this embodiment) supplied to the power substrate after power failure is restored (hereinafter referred to as power recovery), the operation of the gaming machine is in a state before power failure. In order to start from the above, the state at the time of the occurrence of a power failure is stored as backup data in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). Although the process contents will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the power-off process is not an interrupt process but a branch process executed immediately after the start of the loop according to the detection of the power failure notice signal. It is incorporated in the main processing (main control processing).

  By the way, when the power failure notice signal is not detected in step S2, that is, when the power from the external power supply is normally supplied, the random number updating process 2 for updating various random numbers used in the game is performed (step S3). The random numbers updated in the random number update process 2 will be described later.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 90, the power-off occurrence process is a process that is executed when a power failure advance signal is detected in the main process. First, the main control MPU 4100a performs interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt processing is not executed (step S4a). Then, the checksum of the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S4b). This checksum is used to check whether or not the content of the RAM before the power failure is held at the time of power recovery.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a sets, in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM, a specified value indicating that the processing upon power failure has been performed (step S4c). When the above process is completed, the main control MPU 4100a prohibits access to the RAM (step S4d), enters an infinite loop, and prepares to stop power supply. It should be noted that in this process, in the case where the process at the time of a power failure has been started by the power supply voltage becoming unstable due to a power failure or the like for a very short time (hereinafter referred to as "instant power failure") Since the power supply voltage is not stopped, in the above process, there is a possibility that it can not return from the infinite loop. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the main control MPU 4100a of the present embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is periodically updated while the processing is being performed normally, but the processing upon power failure occurs and the update is not performed. As a result, even when the power failure occurs, processing is initiated by a momentary power failure, and even if an infinite loop is entered, a reset is applied after a predetermined period has elapsed, and the main control MPU 4100a is activated in the same process as when the power is turned on.

  Next, in the timer interrupt process, the timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 while the main process is being executed, as shown in FIG. 91. After executing the register save process (step S10), the control MPU 4100a executes the process from step S11 to step S18. In the switch input process of step S11, a process of monitoring a detection signal of the above-described switch (gate switch, start port sensor, count sensor, general winning switch, etc.) is executed. In the random number updating process 1 of step S12, a process of updating various random numbers used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated in the random number update process 1 is different from the random number updated in the random number update process 2 described above. The random number will be described later, but the random number updated in the random number update process 2 may be updated in the random number update process 1 as well. In the payout operation process of step S13, a payout command instructing payout of a game ball is set on the payout control board 4110 based on the signal detected in the switch input process (step S11).

  Also, in the normal control process of step S14, the normal symbol is varied based on the progressing state of the game, and at the same time the ordinary motorized role pieces (movable pieces 2008a, 2008b) are controlled to change the open / close state of the second starting opening 2008 Execute the process to In the special control process of step S15, the first special symbol (first identification symbol) and the second special symbol (second identification symbol) are variably displayed by the special symbol indicators 641 and 642 based on the progress of the game. Processing to control the special motorized part (ie, the lower large winning opening 2003, the opening and closing member for opening and closing the right large winning opening, and the opening and closing member for opening the right large winning opening) Run.

  In the output data setting process of the subsequent step S16, a process of outputting a state signal indicating the gaming state to the outside (for example, a management computer etc.) of the pachinko machine 1, a drive signal is output to a special view start storage indicator (not shown) To perform the process, etc. In the command transmission process of step S17, a process of transmitting a rendering command to the peripheral control board 4140 is executed. Also, in the command transmission process, a process of transmitting the power on command set in the power on process (step S1) to the peripheral control board 4140 when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started is also performed. When the processes from step S11 to step S17 are executed, the register restoration process (step S18) is executed, and the process is ended.

  Here, various random numbers updated by the main control MPU 4100 a of the main control board 4100 in the above-described random number update process 1 (step S12) and the random number update process 2 (step S3) will be described. In this embodiment, as the various random numbers used in the game, the jackpot determination random number used for the determination (whether it is a jackpot determination or a jackpot lottery) to determine whether to generate a jackpot gaming state A big hit symbol random number used to determine the stop symbol of a special symbol (a symbol associated with a big hit type (such as a probability variation big hit or the number of rounds)) when determined to be generated Reach judgment random number used for judgment (reach judgment) as to whether or not to perform high expectation production such as reach production when it is judged that neither big hit nor small hit (loss) is judged, special symbol indicator 641, Variable display pattern random number used for determining the variable display pattern (such as the fluctuation time) of the special symbol displayed on the 642 ) Average per determining random number used for determining whether to control the movable piece in an open state to open and close the second start hole 2008 (ordinary lottery per determination), and the like.

  As will be described later, the jackpot judging random number according to this embodiment is also used for judgment as to whether or not a specific condition to be performed when it is judged that the jackpot has been dropped (lost) in the jackpot. Be done. In addition, the jackpot symbol random number is the type of jackpot that is performed when it is determined that the jackpot was won (whether or not to operate the probability variation function or time saving function, the lower prize in the jackpot game (special bonus game) It is also used for the judgment concerning the type of the jackpot 2003, the opening mode of the right large winning prize port 7000, and the like.

  Among these random numbers, in random number update processing 1, a big hit determination random number related to the occurrence of a big hit gaming state, a big hit symbol random number, and a normal hit per pattern decision regarding whether or not to control movable pieces 2008a and 2008 b. Update the random number for That is, the random number used for determination regarding whether or not the movable pieces 2008a and 2008b are controlled to be open is updated every 4 ms as a predetermined timing. By doing this, the probability in a predetermined period with each random number (probability of determining that a big hit gaming state is to be generated, probability of determining that a movable piece is controlled to be open) can be made constant. Can be prevented from becoming an adverse condition. On the other hand, in the random number updating process 2, the occurrence of the big hit gaming state, and the reach determination random number regardless of the regular lottery, and the variable display pattern random number and the like are updated.

  Next, special control processing will be described based on FIG. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of the special control process.

  In the special control process, first, first and second starting opening winning process (step S110) is performed. In the first and second starting hole winning processes, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won in the first starting hole 2001 and the second starting hole 2008, for example. Then, after the first and second starting-opening winning process (step S110) is performed, the process according to the state of the processing flag is selectively selected among the plurality of processes (step S120 to step S230) shown in the figure. Will do.

  More specifically, when the first and second starting hole winning (entering ball) processing (step S110) is finished, it is first determined whether the processing flag is 0 (step S120), and the processing flag is 0 If it is (YES in step S120), the variation start process (step S130) is executed. In this variation start process (step S130), after the setting for starting the variation display of the special symbol and the like are performed based on the result of the big hit lottery, the processing flag is updated to "1".

  On the other hand, if the process flag is not 0 (NO in step S120), it is determined whether the process flag is 1 (step S140). As a result, if the process flag is 1 (YES in step S140), the variation pattern setting process (step S150) is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator (either the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator The processing flag is updated to "2" after the fluctuation time of the special symbol (identification symbol) is started after the fluctuation display of the special symbol (identification symbol) is determined, etc.).

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 1 (NO in step S140), it is determined whether the processing flag is 2 (step S170). As a result, if the processing flag is 2 (YES in step S170), the processing during variation (step S180) is executed. In this processing during fluctuation, the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation pattern setting processing (step S150) is monitored by a timer, and based on having timed out, the special symbol in the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display Stop the fluctuation display. After that, when it is determined that the big hit has been won in the change start process (step S130), the process selection flag is updated to "3". On the other hand, the processing selection flag is updated to "4" when it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied (the small hit has been won) although the big hit has been lost. However, the process selection flag is updated to “0” when the jackpot is missed and the specific condition is not satisfied (pure loss). That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the variation start process (step S130) is performed again.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 2 (NO in step S170), it is determined whether the processing flag is 3 (step S190). As a result, if the processing flag is 3 (YES in step S190), the jackpot game start processing (step S200) is executed. In this big hit game start processing, the type of the big hit is judged, the lower large winning a prize mouth 2003 according to the type, the opening feature (the number of rounds, opening time and the winning a prize limited number of game balls etc) in the right large winning a prize mouth is set. After being processed, the processing flag is updated to "5".

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 (NO in step S190), it is determined whether the processing flag is 4 (step S210). As a result, if the processing flag is 4 (YES in step S210), small hit game start processing (step S220) is executed. In this small hitting game start process, after the opening mode (the number of times of opening and opening time for controlling the opening operation of the opening and closing member, etc.) in the lower large winning opening 2003 or the right large winning opening 7000 according to the small hitting is set , And the processing flag is updated to "6".

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 4 (NO in step S210), it is determined whether the processing flag is 5 (step S230). As a result, if the processing flag is 5 (YES in step S230), the big hit game processing (step S240) is executed. In this big hit game processing, the open / close operation on the open / close member is controlled based on the opening mode of the lower large winning opening 2003 or the right large winning opening 7000 set in the large hit gaming start process (step S200). In addition, when the big hit game ends, the processing flag is updated to “0” after it is determined whether to operate the probability variation function or the time saving function. That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the variation start process (step S130) is performed again.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 5 (NO in step S230), the small hitting game processing (step S250) is executed, assuming that the processing flag is 6. In this small hitting game processing (step S250), the opening / closing operation concerning the opening / closing member 2006 is controlled based on the opening mode in the lower large winning opening 2003 or the right large winning opening 7000 set in the small hitting gaming start process (step S220). Be done. In addition, when the small hitting game processing ends, the processing flag is updated to “0”, that is, in this case, in the next interruption processing, the variation start processing (step S130) is performed again.

  Thus, when any of the processes of step S130, step S150, step S180, step S200, step S220, step S240, and step S250 is selectively executed based on the state of the process flag, the special control process is performed. Is terminated.

  Next, the first and second starting opening winning process (the process of step S110) will be described based on FIG. FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing an example of the first and second starting opening winning process.

  In the first and second starting hole winning process (step S110), the process mainly depends on the determination as to whether or not the game ball is won in the first starting port 2001 and the second starting port 2008, and the winning On the condition that it is determined that there has been a process of updating the holding status of the corresponding special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is performed.

  Therefore, main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the detection signal is output from the second start port sensor. As a result, when it is determined that the detection signal is output from the second starting opening sensor (switch), it is determined that the game ball has been won in the second starting opening 2008 (YES in step S201), Next, the process of step S202 is performed. In the process of step S202, various random numbers for the second big hit lottery (such as a big hit determination random number, a big hit symbol random number, etc.) are acquired, and the second hold provided in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) A determination is made as to whether the value of the number counter is less than 4, which is the upper limit value. As a result, if the second hold number counter is less than 4, the second start hold storage process (step S203) and the hold history update process (step S204) are sequentially performed.

  That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a first performs various data (big hit determination random numbers, big hit symbols) obtained by the game ball winning in the second start port 2008 as the second start pending storage process (step S203). The random numbers and the like are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM) while being associated with the types of special symbols and the order of holding. Next, 1 is added to the counter value of the second hold number counter provided in the RAM as a hold history update process (step S204).

  In the processing of step 203, a winning notice command is set to indicate that the game ball has been won in the second starting opening 2008 (more precisely, the type of special symbol, the order of holding, etc.), and thus The set prize notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the above-described command transmission process (step S17). In such a configuration, when the liquid crystal display device 1400 or the like displays a hold display on the second start port 2008 side through control by the peripheral control substrate 4140, this can be quickly updated.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S201, when it is determined that the detection signal from the second starting port sensor is not output, or in the process of step S202, the value of the second hold number counter becomes the upper limit 4 If it is determined that the first start opening sensor is detected, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is output from the first starting opening sensor. As a result, when it is determined that the detection signal is output from the first starting opening sensor, it is determined that there is a winning of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 2001 (YES in step S205). The process of step S206 is performed. In the process of step S206, various random numbers for the first big hit lottery (such as a big hit determination random number, a big hit symbol random number) are acquired, and the value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is the upper limit A determination is made as to whether the value is less than four. As a result, if the first hold number counter is less than 4, the first start hold storage process (step S207) and the hold history update process (step S208) are sequentially performed.

  That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a first performs various data (big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number) acquired by the game ball having won the first start opening 2001 as the first start pending storage process (step S207). Etc.) are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM) while being associated with the types of special symbols and the order of holding. Next, 1 is added to the counter value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM as a hold history update process (step S208).

  Also in the processing of step 207, a winning notice command indicating that there is a winning of the gaming ball to the first starting port 2001 (more precisely, the kind of special symbol, the holding order, etc.) is set, and thus The set prize notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the above-described command transmission process (step S17). In such a configuration, even when the liquid crystal display device 1400 or the like displays a hold display on the first start port 2001 side through control by the peripheral control substrate 4140, this can be updated promptly.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S205 that there is no winning of the game ball in the first starting opening 2001, or in the process of step S206, the counter value of the first hold number counter becomes the upper limit value. If it is determined that 4 has been reached, the first and second starting opening winning processes are ended at this time.

  In this embodiment, after the winning process (steps S201 to S204) for the second starting port 2008 is performed, the winning process for the first starting port 2001 (steps S205 to S208) is performed. There is. However, instead of this, after the winning process on the first starting port 2001 is performed, the winning process on the second starting port 2008 may be executed.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a may execute an advance determination process based on the acquired various random numbers, and may transmit a command indicating the result of the advance determination process to the peripheral control board 4140 as a prize notification command. The advance determination process is performed prior to a lottery using random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 (for example, determination of a big hit lottery, a small hit lottery, and a variable display pattern described later), and the lottery result is determined in advance It is a process. The advance determination process is performed using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 and the advance determination table. The preceding determination table is a table similar to or similar to the table used for the lottery using the random number. In the precedent determination processing, the lottery result when the lottery using the random number is performed by comparing the random number with the prior determination table (big hit or small hit, type of big hit, variation display pattern, etc. Thus, the determination performed prior to the lottery is also referred to as "pre-reading determination". The peripheral control board 4140 may realize an effect reflecting the received winning notification command (preceding determination result) before a lottery using the random number is performed (such an effect is “preread”. Also referred to as

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the content of the advance determination table is the same as the content of the table used for the lottery. However, at least a part of the content of the preceding determination table may be different from the content of the table used for the lottery.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits a winning notice command representing the result of the prior determination processing only when the gaming state satisfies the specific condition, and when the specific condition is not met, the main determination MPU A prize notification command that does not represent the result may be sent. For example, when the variable display resulting from the winning of the first starting port 2001 is suspended without being started immediately after the winning, the main control MPU 4100a selects a winning notification command representing the result of the preceding determination process regarding the winning. It may be sent. Here, in the big hit gaming state and the time saving game state, the main control MPU 4100a transmits a winning notification command not representing the result of the preceding determination processing without transmitting a winning notification command representing the result of the preceding determination processing. You may The specific conditions for the second starting port 2008 may be similar.

  In the variation start process (step S130) executed when the process flag is "0", the main control MPU 4100a first determines the values of the two pending number counters corresponding to the special symbol displays 641 and 642 (first start memory It is determined whether the number and the second start memory number) are both "0" (step S301). Here, the values in the two suspension number counters corresponding to the special symbol displays 641 and 642 indicate the storage areas (the special symbol random number storage means 4515, 4532 (see FIG. 94) concerning the first start storage and the second start storage. Therefore, if the value of the number-of-holds counter is “0” at this step S301 (YES), the first jackpot lottery and the second jackpot lottery will be performed. It is determined that none of the start conditions is satisfied, and the variation start process is ended when the processing flag is updated to “1” in the process of step S318.

  On the other hand, if neither the first starting memory number nor the second starting memory number is "0" (NO in step S301), the special symbol is used to update the order of execution of the big hit lottery held on hold. The shift process is performed in the random number storage means 451, 4532 (steps S302 to S310).

  Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 101 (a), the first special symbol random number storage means 4515 is provided with four storage areas (storage area [1] 4515a to storage area [4] 4515d), Those storage areas are respectively associated with the values of the first starting memory numbers (“1” to “4”). Also, as shown in FIG. 101 (b), four storage areas (storage area [1] 4532a to storage area [4] 4532d) are also provided in the second special symbol random number storage means 4532, The storage areas are respectively associated with the values of the second start storage numbers (“1” to “4”). In each storage area 4515a to 4515d, 4532a to 4532d, a big hit determination random number storage area 4580 for storing a big hit determination random number, a big hit symbol random number, a reach determination random number, a fluctuation display pattern random number, etc. are stored. A big hit symbol random number storage area 4581 is provided.

  That is, when the special symbol changes, the main control MPU 4100a appropriately operates the random numbers stored in the storage means 4515 4532 as shift processing (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area. As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the big hit is won in the first special symbol side lottery process and when the big hit is won in the second special symbol side lottery process The profit given to the player (the expected value for the probability fluctuation after the big hit game) is made higher in the second special symbol side lottery.

  In this point, in the shift process (step S302 to step S310) in the random number storage area, the execution of the lottery of the first special symbol is delayed, and the lottery based on the winning of the second starting port 2008 (lottery of the second special symbol The random numbers stored in the storage means 4515 4532 are manipulated so as to be stored earlier. Thereby, in the gaming state in which the time saving function is activated, the above-mentioned drawing trigger of the lottery (variation) is performed so as not to interrupt the holding state of the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol which is the side to be digested first Since control is performed to increase the frequency of changing the game ball to the second start port 2008 in an easy-to-play state, the player can continuously execute only the second special symbol side lottery (variation). The game can be continued in a state where the degree of expectation for the predetermined profit is high.

  Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 93 and 101, in the shift process (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area, first, the second special symbol that is preferentially digested as the process of step S302 A random number is stored in the storage area [1] 4532a of the second special symbol random number storage means 4532 whether or not the value of the number-of-holds counter (second start storage number) corresponding to the display 642 is "0". To determine if As a result, when it is judged that the random number is stored in the storage area [1] 4532a of the second special symbol random number storage means 4532 (NO in step S302), the second storage area from the storage area [1] 4532a The random number regarding the special symbol is read out and acquired (step S303). That is, as will be described later, the random number read in this way (random number for big hit judgment, big hit symbol random number, reach judgment random number, fluctuation display pattern random number) Processing for setting the opening / closing mode of the special winning opening, processing for setting the opening / closing mode of the special winning opening, processing for setting the gaming state, etc. The second starting game can be advanced with the ball winning.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a updates each of the n-th (n is a natural number of 2 or more) storage areas (storage area [2] 4532b to storage areas to update the digestion order for the second special symbol-side lottery (variation). [4] Various random numbers stored in 4532 d) are shifted to the (n-1) -th storage area (storage area [1] 4532 a to storage area [3] 4532 c) (step S304). As a result, at least the storage area [4] 4532 d becomes vacant, and new start information (pending) on the second special symbol can be stored in the storage area [4] 4532 d.

  Then, after that, the main control MPU 4100a sets the special symbol variation flag to "1" to indicate that the second special symbol side game (the second starting game) is in a progressing state (step S305). ). Furthermore, the pending number counter corresponding to the second special symbol is decremented by “1” in order to update the pending number for the second special symbol side lottery (variation) (step S306). At this time, drive control for lighting the lamp is performed so that the number of reservations for the second special symbol side lottery (variation) updated in this way is also reflected in the lighting mode of the second special symbol memory display 644 It will be. The special symbol variation flag thus set to "1" is reset when the processing flag is updated to "0", for example, after the variation start process is completed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 94 and 101, in the process of step S302, it is determined that the random number is not stored in the storage area [1] 4532a of the second special symbol random number storage means 4532 (YES in step S302), the random number relating to the first special symbol is read out from the storage area [1] 4515a of the first special symbol random number storage means 4515 and acquired (step S307). That is, as will be described later, the random number read out in this way, the process concerning the setting of the variation pattern of the special symbol, the process concerning the setting of the opening / closing mode of the opening / closing member 2006, the setting of the game state As a result of being provided to such processing, etc., the first start game can be advanced, which is triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first start port 2001.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a updates each of the n-th (n is a natural number of 2 or more) storage areas (storage area [2] 4515b to storage area to update the digesting order of the first special symbol side lottery (variation) [4] Various random numbers stored in 4515 d) are shifted to the (n-1) -th storage area (storage area [1] 4515 a to storage area [3] 4515 c) (step S308). As a result, at least the storage area [4] 4515 d is freed, and new storage information (pending) of the first special symbol can be stored in the storage area [4] 4515 d.

  Then, after that, the main control MPU 4100a sets "2" to the special symbol variation flag so that it is shown that the game on the first special symbol side (the first starting game) is in progress (step S309) ). Furthermore, the pending number counter corresponding to the first special symbol is decremented by “1” to update the pending number for the first special symbol side lottery (variation) (step S310). At this time, drive control for lighting the lamp 643 so that the number of reservations for the lottery (variation) on the first special symbol side updated in this way is also reflected in the lighting mode of the first special symbol memory display 643. Is done. In addition, similarly, for the special symbol variation flag set to "2" in this way, after the variation start processing is completed, for example, the special symbol variation flag is reset when the processing flag is updated to "0".

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is in operation, that is, whether it is a probability variation state with high probability (step S312), and if it is not a probability variation state (NO in step S312) Of the big hit judgment table, that is, the table in which the probability of becoming a big hit is set low, while in the case of a probability fluctuation state (YES in step S312), the table at the time of probability fluctuation operation, ie, a probability of becoming a big hit Select the table set high. Depending on the type of gaming machine, for example, in a so-called max type gaming machine having a low jackpot probability, the probability of becoming a jackpot is approximately 1/400, for example, when probability fluctuation is not in operation (that is, normal time). The probability of becoming a big hit is set to about 10/400 when the probability fluctuation operation (ie, high probability) is set.

  After any table is selected in the process of step S313 or step S314, the jackpot determination random number for any special symbol acquired in the process of step S303 or step S307 based on the table is a big hit. It is determined whether or not it is a random number (big hit value) corresponding to (step S315 (big hit lottery)). Then, if it is a big hit value (YES in step S315), the type of big hit is determined based on the big hit symbol random number for any special symbol similarly acquired in the process of step S303 or step S307. (Step S316). Thereafter, the flag corresponding to the type of the big hit is turned on (set) (step S317), and the process proceeds to step S318.

  On the other hand, if the obtained random number is a loss that is not a big hit value (NO in step S315), it is determined whether the random number is a random number (small hit value) corresponding to a small hit (step S319). If the value is a small hit value (YES in step S319), the small hit flag is set to "ON" (step S320) on the assumption that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied (step S320), and the process proceeds to step S318. However, if the value is not a small hit value (NO in step S319), it is determined that the predetermined specific condition is not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S318 without passing through step S320. In step S318, the process flag is updated to "1", and the variation start process is ended. For example, the probability of becoming a small hit is set to 3/400 regardless of the gaming state.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regardless of which lottery the first special symbol and the second special symbol are, random numbers generated as random symbols for big hit symbols, for example, random numbers from 0 to 99 A numerical value is prepared, and in the process of step S303 or step S307, one of these random numbers is acquired as the value of the jackpot symbol random number. Then, the acquired random number value is to be subjected to the processing of determining the type of the big hit in the process of step S316, and for example, if the same random number value is 0 to 52, it is determined as a big hit A. If it is 53 to 57, it is judged as a big hit B, if it is 58 to 63, it is judged as a big hit C, if it is 64 to 81, it is judged as a big hit D, if it is 82 to 99, it is judged as a big hit E Be done. The jackpots A to D are classified according to the degree of expectation for the passage of the game ball random variation area 6970.

  By the way, when a small hit (a hit that does not accompany the operation of the condition device) is won for such a big hit (a hit with the operation of the condition device), the opening and closing of the big winning opening is a small number in the small time opening and closing pattern The small open repetition game (small hit game) is repeated only twice (in this embodiment), and the same is performed before the small open game (small hit game) is performed. There is no such thing as the gaming state being different. In addition, with the small time opening and closing pattern, after changing the big winning opening from the closing state to the opening state, a predetermined small time has elapsed, or a predetermined small number of gaming balls are won in the lower large winning opening 2003 or the right large winning opening 7000 When any one of the conditions is satisfied, the opening / closing member is returned to the closed state. In the small open winning game (small hitting game), a small amount of winning balls can be obtained by the player as a bonus.

  In the process of step S317, the big hit flag corresponding to the type of big hit is turned on (set).

  Next, a variation pattern setting process in which the variation pattern of the special symbol is set based on the result of the big hit lottery (step S315) and the like will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process.

  As shown in the figure, in the variation pattern setting process (step S150) executed when the process flag is "1", the main control MPU 4100a first sets the big hit flag "ON" as the process of step S401. Determine if there is. As a result, when it is determined that the big hit flag is "ON" (YES in step S401), a big hit variation pattern table setting process described later is performed to set a variation pattern when winning a big hit. The operation is performed (step S402).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S401 that the big hit flag is not "ON", it is next determined whether the small hit flag is "ON" as the process of step S403. As a result, when it is determined that the small hit flag is "ON" (YES in step S403), the small hit is won because it is determined that the specific condition of the lost one is satisfied. A small hit variation pattern table setting process described later is performed in order to set the variation pattern at the time (step S404).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S403 that the small hit flag is not "ON", next, the process of step S405 is a high expectation effect (for example, reach effect etc.) with high expectation of winning to the big hit. Decide if you should do In the process of step S405, for example, it is determined that high expectation effect is to be performed when the random number for reach determination acquired in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 95) is a predetermined hit value, and the acquired reach When the determination random number is not the predetermined hit value, it is determined that the high expectation effect is not performed. As a result, when it is determined that high expectation production should be performed (YES in step S405), high expectation loss change pattern table setting processing described later is performed to set a fluctuation pattern when high expectation production is performed. The operation is performed (step S406).

  In addition, about the number of the predetermined hit value prepared for the random number for reach determination, in the current gaming state, usually the external disadvantage gaming state (probability change function, time saving function is non-operation), the normal external advantageous gaming state It may be possible to distinguish different gaming states of (time-shortening function only), probability external disadvantage gaming state (only probability changing function only), and probability changing external advantage gaming state (both probability changing function and time-shorting function activated). For example, in the normal external disadvantage game state, the probability that it is determined that high expectation effect should be performed based on the reach determination random number being the predetermined hit value is “1/12”, the normal external advantageous game state And in the odd change external advantageous gaming state, it is determined that high expectation effect should be performed with a lower probability so that the degree of expectation at the time of reaching is further enhanced (or efficient detention is performed). You may Also, conversely, in the probability variation external disadvantage gaming state, in order to be able to be made to be more likely to be aware of the possibility of being a big hit, so that it is judged that high expectation presentation should be performed with a higher probability It is also good.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S405, if it is determined that high expectation performance with high expectation of winning to a big hit should not be performed (NO in step S405), the lost fluctuation pattern when high expectation performance is not performed In order to set (normal loss variation pattern), low expected loss variation pattern table setting processing is performed (step S407).

  Here, the table set in the low expectation loss variation pattern table setting process is prepared in a form corresponding to each of a plurality of gaming states, for example, in the normal gaming state, the number of reservations is a predetermined value When it is above, shortening variation is performed.

  In the gaming state in which the time saving function is activated, the fluctuation time is set such that the number of reservations for the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side is unlikely to be interrupted. More specifically, when the number of reservations on the second special symbol side is equal to or less than the predetermined value, the shortening variation is not adopted despite the gaming state in which the time saving function is activated, and the shortening variation is adopted in the normal gaming state Only the fluctuation time (a fluctuation time longer than the shortening fluctuation in the normal gaming state) having a length equal to or more than the fluctuation time when not being selected is selected. In addition, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol side does not adopt shortening fluctuation regardless of the number of reservations, only fluctuation time having a length equal to or more than fluctuation time when shortening fluctuation is not adopted in normal gaming state Is to be selected. As a result, when in the gaming state in which the time saving function is activated, it is suppressed that the suspension of the first special symbol side where the small hit can be won is digested, and thus the small pachinko machine 1 is hit with the small hit. It becomes possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the player is loaded.

  As will be described later, as shown in FIG. 95, when the selection table relating to the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of any of steps S402, S404, S406 and S407, the main control MPU 4100a Next, in the process of step S410, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the set selection table. Next, as the process of step S411, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol determined in this way is set as the effect command, and the winning information is based on the state of the big hit flag (step S317) or the small hit flag (step S320). Set a command (a command to indicate the winning category, including a hit or a small hit).

  Furthermore, the value of the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined above is set in the timer (step S412), and the special view LED operation flag is set to ON (step S413). When the special view LED operation flag is set to ON, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display is based on the value of the special symbol variation flag set in the process of step S305 or step S309. The variable display of the lighting patterns of the plurality of LEDs as the device is started. After that, the processing flag is updated to "2" (step S414), and the fluctuation pattern setting processing is ended.

  By the way, the variation pattern set in the variation pattern setting process is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 91 as a rendering command set in the process of step S411. . As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the result of the big hit lottery is shown based on the fluctuation pattern indicated by the effect command and the information indicated by the win information command through control described later by the peripheral control substrate 4140 side. As such, the display effect will be performed.

  However, although described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is set as described above when the result of the big hit lottery is a hit (small hit) without operation of the condition device. The first special symbol display is extended to the period after the stop of the fluctuation display concerning the lighting pattern of the plurality of LEDs as the second special symbol display without ending within the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern (rendering time And may be executed so as to indicate that it has been dropped to a hit (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the condition device (extended play pattern in FIG. 111 (b)). That is, in this case, after the stop of the special symbol, when the small opening is executed, the display effect such as winning the winning ball is not shown, but it is shown relatively early that it is indicated that the big hit is lost. It will be possible to shift to the next change (the special symbol retention and digestion), and while it is possible to give some expectation as an effect until the opening and closing member of the big winning opening operates, extension is also suitably avoided Become so.

  Moreover, although this is also mentioned later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display effect (extension loss effect) at the time of the above-mentioned small hit shown to be a big hit after stopping the special symbol is special A display effect (extended jackpot effect) is also provided that indicates that the jackpot has been won after stopping the symbol. That is, when the result of the big hit lottery is a hit (big hit) involving the operation of the condition device, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is not terminated within the variation time of the set variation pattern, and the first special After being extended to the period after the stop of the fluctuation display concerning the lighting pattern of a plurality of LEDs as the symbol display or the second special symbol display, it was won by the hit (big hit) with the operation of the condition device To be implemented as shown in FIG. 111 (b).

  That is, in this case, the above-mentioned display effect at the time of a small hit will be positioned as a mere loss effect (high expected loss fluctuation pattern) appearing at the time of a big hit. As a result, it becomes difficult to notice that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a hit (small hit) that does not involve the operation of the condition device, and as a result, the game is entertained by the opening and closing member 2006 operating in response to the win of the small hit. Can be controlled.

  However, as the function display unit of the pachinko machine 1, eight LED groups that do not form a specific symbol may be adopted instead of the seven-segment LED. In this example, the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display configured by seven-segment LEDs are each configured by eight LED groups. Further, the first special symbol memory display and the second special symbol memory display are constituted by four LED groups respectively, and the ordinary symbol memory display is constituted by two LEDs.

  In addition to the same function and effect as described above, this function display unit is configured to include the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display with eight LED groups that do not have any symbols. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to remember the special symbol displayed to the player, as compared with the case of using the 7-segment LED having the meaning by the number symbol. Therefore, since the content displayed on the function display unit is hard to understand, it is possible to suppress the display of the function display unit from being concerned during the game and making it difficult to concentrate on the game, and the movement of the game ball, movable effect It is possible to make the game more enjoyable by concentrating on the effect images and the like.

  And when adopting such a function display unit, with regard to the lighting mode (during stop of the special symbol) of the plurality of LEDs (special symbol) at the time of winning the small hit, the plurality of LEDs at the time of winning the big hit (special It is desirable to control to appear as an approximation aspect, such as being different only in whether or not one LED is lit from the lighting aspect (at the time of stopping of the special symbol) of the symbol). That is, in this case, when the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is extended to the period after the stop of the special symbol, it is immediately apparent which result (even after the effect extension) even if looking at the same symbol (a plurality of LEDs) It will be difficult to grasp) until a short time until a fall is clearly stated. Therefore, the extension to the period after the stop of the special symbol is extended by the fact that the interest for the special symbol (multiple LEDs) is reduced as well as being able to concentrate on the extended display effect (extension effect). It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the displayed effect has been made. As a result, it is suppressed that the small hit is assumed to be mounted on the pachinko machine 1 by the speciality when the extension effect appears, and accordingly, according to the small hit winning. It is possible to suppress a decrease in game interest caused by the operation of the opening / closing member 2006.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern determination process at the time of big hit will be described based on FIG. FIG. 103 is a chart showing one example of the normal big hit variation pattern table T1, the normal small hit variation pattern table T2, and the normal high expected loss variation pattern table T3. In the same column of FIG. 103, ○ means big hit, △ means establishment of specific condition at the time of losing (small hitting), × indicates failure of specific condition at losing (pure loss) means.

  As described above, if it is determined that the big hit flag is ON in the process of step S401 (see FIG. 95), the main control MPU 4100a is won the big hit as the process of step S402 (see FIG. 95). In order to set the fluctuation pattern when the game is in progress, the jackpot fluctuation pattern table setting process is performed.

  In this big hit variation pattern table setting process, first, usually the external disadvantage gaming state (probability change function, time saving function is non-operation), the normal external advantage gaming state (time reducing function only operation), the probability variation external disadvantage playing state (probability change function only It is determined which of the game states of "operation" and "probability change external advantage game state" ("probability change function" and "time reduction function are all operated"). That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, different big hit fluctuation pattern tables (not shown) are prepared separately for each gaming state, and normally the external disadvantageous gaming state (both the probability change function and the time saving function are non When it is determined that the operation is in (operation), the normal jackpot fluctuation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 103 is selected regardless of the type of jackpot.

  Then, as described above, when the normal big hit variation pattern table T1 is selected in this way, the main control MPU 4100a is acquired in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 94) with reference to the selected table T1. The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the variation display pattern random number (step S410). Here, the stop (lighting) mode of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display (LED) is also determined.

  Here, if it is assumed that values from "0" to "99" can be acquired as the variable display pattern random number of the special symbol, in the normal big hit fluctuation pattern table T1, the values from "0" to "99" Among them, nine specific values are assigned to variation number 1 (variation time Ta1) (selectivity at big hit 9%), and 20 particular values are assigned to variation number 5 (variation time Tb1). (Selectivity 20% at big hit) and 30 specific values are assigned to change number 9 (change time Tc1) (selectivity 30% at big hit) and 40 specific values are It is assigned to variation number 12 (variation time Td1) (selectivity at big hit 40%), and one specific value is assigned to variation number 15 (variation time Te) (selectivity 1 at big hit) %). As described above, with the exception of the variation number 15 of the jackpot determination, as the variation number increases, the number to which a specific value (big hit value) is allocated tends to increase.

  Although it will be described later, when the change number 1 (the change time Ta1) is selected, it is shown that the jackpot has been won while the effect content “a (or a ′)” appears in the liquid crystal display device 1400. To be displayed, and when variation number 5 (variation time Tb1) is selected, the jackpot is won on the liquid crystal display device 1400 with the presentation "b (or b ')" appearing Is displayed and when the change number 9 (the change time Tc1) is selected, the jackpot is won on the liquid crystal display device 1400 while the effect content “c (or c ′)” appears. When a display effect is displayed and the change number 12 (the change time Td1) is selected, the effect content “d (or d ′)” appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the display effect indicating that the jackpot has been won is performed and the change number 15 (the change time Te1) is selected, the effect content “e” appears in the liquid crystal display device 1400. A display effect is displayed indicating that the jackpot has been won. By the way, the effect content a, the effect content a ', the effect content b, the effect content b', the effect content c, the effect content c ', the effect content d, the effect content d' and the effect content e Different types of display effects that appear (for example, types of reach effects and types of story effects).

  Although this will be described later, the fluctuation time Tb1 is longer than the fluctuation time Ta1, and the fluctuation time Tc1 is longer than the fluctuation time Tb1, and the fluctuation time is longer than the fluctuation time Tc1. Also, the fluctuation time Td1 is longer, and the fluctuation time Te is longer than the fluctuation time Td1.

  Then, as described above, in such a normal big hit variation pattern table T1, when the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the variation display pattern random number acquired in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 94). The effect command associated with the determined fluctuation pattern (for example, the command “01H” in the case of the fluctuation number 1) and the winning information command (including winnings and small hits depending on the winning type) And the command shown) are set (step S411). Furthermore, the value of fluctuation time associated with the determined fluctuation pattern (for example, fluctuation time Ta1 if fluctuation number 1) is set in the timer (step S412), and the special view LED operation flag is turned ON. The setting is made (step S413), and the processing flag is updated to "2" (step S414).

  On the other hand, when performing the big hit variation pattern table setting process, when it is determined that it is another gaming state different from the normal external disadvantage gaming state, select the big hit variation pattern table corresponding to the determined gaming state Then, the variation pattern is determined based on the selected table, and various commands according to the determined variation pattern are set, but this description will be omitted.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the normal external disadvantageous gaming state, whether the big hit was won by the lottery (variation) on the first special symbol side or the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side We decided to select the big hit fluctuation pattern table T1 at normal time regardless of, but when the first special symbol side lottery (variation) is performed and when the second special symbol side lottery (variation) is performed The display effects of different contents may be made to appear by selecting the big hit fluctuation pattern table made different contents.

  In addition, when it is determined that the normal external disadvantage game state (provisional change function, time saving function is non-operational), the big hit fluctuation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 103 is selected regardless of the type of the big hit. However, based on the state of the jackpot flag according to the type of jackpot, any of the normal jackpot fluctuation pattern tables prepared for each jackpot type may be selectively used.

  That is, in this case, it becomes possible to make the selectivity of the variation pattern different according to the type of the big hit, and when a particular variation pattern appears, it is possible to give bias such as increasing the probability of being a big hit of a particular type It will be. Also, even if the fluctuation time is the same, the fluctuation number (rendering command) can be changed according to the type of the big hit, and in this case, the fluctuation pattern is originally obtained only by confirming the rendering command. , Will be able to grasp the type of the big hit. Therefore, the reliability of communication with the main control board 4100 can be improved if the peripheral control board 4140 side compares the effect command and the winning information command to determine the appropriateness thereof. Will be able to

  Next, the variation pattern determination process at the time of a small hit will be described based on FIG.

  As described above, if it is determined that the small hit flag is ON in the process of step S403 (see FIG. 95), the main control MPU 4100a performs a small hit as the process of step S404 (see FIG. 95). A small hit variation pattern table setting process is performed to set a variation pattern when winning.

  In this small hitting variation pattern table setting process, first, usually the external disadvantage gaming state (probability change function, time saving function is non-operation), the normal external advantage gaming state (time reducing function only operation), the probability variation external disadvantage playing state (probability function It is determined which of the two game states: only operation), and the probability change external advantageous game state (the probability change function and the time saving function are all activated). That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, small hit variation pattern tables (not shown) different for each gaming state are prepared, and normally the external disadvantaged gaming state (probability changing function, time saving function are both available) When it is determined that the camera is in the non-operation state, the normal small hit variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 103 is selected.

  Then, as described above, when the small hitting variation pattern table T2 at the normal time is selected in this way, the main control MPU 4100a acquires it in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 94) with reference to the selected table T2. The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the selected variation display pattern random number (step S410). Here, the stop (lighting) mode of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display (LED) is also determined.

  Here, assuming that values from "0" to "99" can be acquired as the variable display pattern random number of the special symbol, in the small hitting variation pattern table T2 at the normal time, the values from "0" to "99" Among the values, 35 specific values are allocated to fluctuation number 2 (variation time Ta2) (selectivity 35% at small hit), and 30 specific values are fluctuation number 6 (variation time Tb2) Of 30 specific values are assigned to fluctuation number 10 (variation time Tc2) (20% selectivity for small hit), and A specific value is assigned to variation number 13 (variation time Td2) (5% selectivity for small hit). In this way, as the change number becomes larger, the allocated number of specific values (small hit values) tends to decrease.

  Although it will be described later, when variation number 2 (variation time Ta2) is selected, a display showing the result of the jackpot lottery while the effect content “a (or a ′)” appears on liquid crystal display device 1400 When the effect is performed, and the change number 6 (the change time Tb2) is selected, the display showing the result of the big hit lottery while the effect content "b (or b ')" appears in the liquid crystal display device 1400 When the effect is performed, and the change number 10 (the change time Tc2) is selected, the liquid crystal display device 1400 displays the result of the jackpot lottery while the effect content "c (or c ')" appears. When the effect is performed, and the change number 13 (the change time Td2) is selected, the liquid crystal display device 1400 makes a big hit while the effect "d (or d ')" appears Display performance the result of the lottery is shown is carried out. Incidentally, as such a display effect in which the result of the big hit lottery is shown, for example, it moves to the game state where it is possible to obtain the prize ball by the display effect in which it is shown that it was dropped by the big hit and the operation of the opening and closing member 2006 A display effect (a display effect that appears even when a big hit is shown) or the like to be shown is appropriately adopted.

  Also, although this will be described later, as the length of the fluctuation time, the fluctuation time Ta2 is set as a time (the same or approximate time) having a length matched to the fluctuation time Ta1 as a reference. When time Ta1 (variation number 1) or fluctuation time Ta2 (variation number 2) is selected, any result is obtained as a big hit lottery, with presentation content "a (or a ')" appearing. A pairing rendition of what was done appears. In addition, the fluctuation time Tb2 is set as a time (the same or similar time) having a length matched to the fluctuation time Tb1 as a reference, and the fluctuation time Tb1 (variation number 5) or the fluctuation time Tb2 (variation time When the number 6) is selected, the effect contents "b (or b ')" appear in all cases, and a pair effect concerning what kind of result is obtained as a big hit lottery appears. In addition, the fluctuation time Tc2 is set as a time (identical or approximate time) having a length matched to the fluctuation time Tc1 as a reference, and fluctuation time Tc1 (variation number 9), fluctuation time Tc2 (variation time When the number 10) is selected, a pair effect of what kind of result is obtained as a big hit lottery appears while the effect content "c (or c ')" appears. In addition, the fluctuation time Td2 is set as a time (the same or similar time) having a length matched to the fluctuation time Td1 as a reference, and the fluctuation time Td1 (variation number 12) or the fluctuation time Td2 (variation time When the number 13) is selected, the effect contents "d (or d ')" appear, and a pair effect of what kind of result is obtained as a big hit lottery appears.

  Then, as described above, in such a small hitting variation pattern table T2 at such a normal time, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the variation display pattern random number acquired in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 94). The effect command associated with the determined fluctuation pattern (for example, the command “02H” in the case of the fluctuation number 2) and the winning information Are set (step S411). Furthermore, the value of the fluctuation time associated with the determined fluctuation pattern (for example, fluctuation time Ta2 for fluctuation number 2) is set in the timer (step S412), and the special view LED operation flag is turned ON. The setting is made (step S413), and the processing flag is updated to "2" (step S414).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that in the small hitting variation pattern table setting process, it is determined that it is another gaming state different from the normal external disadvantage gaming state, the small hitting variation pattern table corresponding to the determined gaming state Is selected, the variation pattern is determined based on the selected table, and various commands are set according to the determined variation pattern, but this explanation will be omitted. However, when a small hit is won in the gaming state (external advantageous gaming state) in which the time saving function is activated, a single variation pattern is determined, and display processing (for example, pure loss) without giving a sense of expectation It is desirable to make it the same display process as the low expectation effect at the time).

  Next, fluctuation pattern determination processing at the time of high expectation presentation is described based on FIG.

  As described above, if it is determined that high expectation effect should be performed in the process of step S405 (see FIG. 95), the main control MPU 4100a is expected to have high expectation as the process of step S406 (see FIG. 95). In order to set a variation pattern when performing an effect, high expectation loss variation pattern table setting processing is performed (step S406).

  Also in this high expectation error variation pattern table setting process, first, usually the external disadvantage game state (probability change function, time saving function is non-operation), the normal external advantage game state (time reducing function only operation), the probability change external disadvantage playing state ( It is determined whether the game mode is in the probability change function only) and the probability change external advantageous game state (the probability change function and the time saving function are all activated). That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, different high expectation loss variation pattern tables (not shown) are prepared for each gaming state, and normally the external disadvantageous gaming state (probability changing function, time saving function will be either When it is determined that the high expectation loss change pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 103 is selected.

  Then, as described above, when the normal high expectation error fluctuation pattern table T3 is selected in this way, the main control MPU 4100a refers to the selected table T3 and performs the process of step S303 (see FIG. 94). The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the acquired variation display pattern random number (step S410). Here, the stop (lighting) mode of the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 (LED) is also determined.

  Here, assuming that values from "0" to "99" can be acquired as the variable display pattern random number of the special symbol, in the high expectation loss change pattern table T3 at the normal time, these "0" to "99" Among the values of 40, 40 specific values are assigned to fluctuation number 3 (variation time Ta3) (selectivity 40% at the time of high expectation loss), and 17 specific values are fluctuation number 4 (variation time) It is allocated to Ta 4) (selectivity 17% at high expected loss), and 25 specific values are allocated to fluctuation number 7 (variation time Tb 3) (selectivity 25% at high expected loss) Thirteen specific values are assigned to variation number 8 (variation time Tb4) (selectivity 13% at high expectation loss), and three particular values are assigned to variation number 11 (variation time Tc3) The selection rate at the time of high expectation loss %), Selectivity of 2% during the two specific values are assigned to the change number 14 (variable time Td3) (High disappointing). As described above, as the variation number increases, the number to which a specific value (loss value) is allocated tends to decrease.

  Although it will be described later, when the variation number 3 (variation time Ta3) is selected, it is dropped as a big hit in the liquid crystal display device 1400 with the effect content “a, no development (or a ′)” appearing. Is displayed, and when variation number 4 (variation time Ta4) is selected, the liquid crystal display device 1400 is rejected as a jackpot under the appearance of the presentation content "a, with development" Is displayed, or displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 where display content "c '" appears and it is displayed that the player has been rejected as a big hit, and the variation number 7 (variation time Tb3) is selected. When the display content “b, no development (or b ′)” appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400, it is indicated that the jackpot has been dropped. When the variation number 8 (variation time Tb4) is selected, a display effect or liquid crystal is displayed indicating that the liquid crystal display device 1400 has been selected as a big hit while the effect content “b, with development” has appeared. When a display effect is shown on the display device 1400 showing that the game content has been dropped as a big hit while the effect content "d '" appears, and the change number 11 (the change time Tc3) is selected, the liquid crystal display device 1400 A display effect is shown where it is shown that the jackpot was dropped while the effect content "c (or c ')" appears in the display, and when the change number 14 (the change time Td3) is selected, the liquid crystal display In the apparatus 1400, a display effect is performed which indicates that the jackpot has been dropped while the effect content "d (or d ')" appears. By the way, although it will be described later, in the case of the fluctuation numbers 4 and 8, it appears as a lost effect pattern with different effect contents according to the control mode on the peripheral control board 4140 side, Since the variation number of the big hit rendering pattern which is a pair of variation numbers 4 and 8 is changed between variation numbers 1 and 5 and variation numbers 9 and 12, the control mode on the peripheral control board 4140 side Accordingly, it becomes possible to make the presentation pattern different in the jackpot expectation degree appear.

  Also, although this will be described later, as the length of the fluctuation time, the fluctuation time Ta3 is set as a time (the same or approximate time) having a length matched to the fluctuation time Ta1 as a reference. When time Ta1 (variation number 1), fluctuation time Ta2 (variation number 2), fluctuation time Ta3 (variation number 3) is selected, any of the contents of the presentation "a" appears, as a big hit lottery A couple of effects appear as to whether the result was obtained. However, when the fluctuation time Ta1 (variation number 1) or the fluctuation time Ta2 (variation number 2) is selected, the effect content “a” is displayed until the opening period before the lower large winning opening 2003 is opened and closed by the opening and closing member. Since such effects may be extended, a fluctuation time Ta4 (fluctuation number 4) longer than fluctuation time Ta3 (fluctuation number 3) is prepared as a loss effect pattern that becomes a pair when such extension effects are performed. ing. The fluctuation time Ta4 (variation number 4) is also set as a time (identical or approximate time) having a length matched to the fluctuation time Tc3 (variation number 11). Depending on the control on the control substrate 4140 side, it can also be used as an effect pattern of the fluctuation time Tc3 (variation number 11). As described above, the variation number of the big hit rendering pattern, which is a pair of the variation number 4 of the lost effect pattern, is changed between the variation number 1 and the variation number 9 as described above.

  Furthermore, the fluctuation time Tb3 is set as a time (identical or approximate time) having a length matched to the fluctuation time Tb1 as a reference, and the fluctuation time Tb1 (variation number 5), the fluctuation time Tb2 When variation number 6) and variation time Tb3 (variation number 7) are selected, a pair effect of what kind of result is obtained as a big hit lottery appears, with presentation content "b" appearing. However, when variation time Tb1 (variation number 5) or variation time Tb2 (variation number 6) is selected, the effect content “b” is displayed until the opening period before the lower large winning opening 2003 is opened and closed by the opening and closing member. Since such effects may be extended, a fluctuation time Tb4 (fluctuation number 8) longer than fluctuation time Tb3 (fluctuation number 7) is prepared as a loss effect pattern that becomes a pair when such extension effects are performed. ing. Further, this fluctuation time Tb4 (fluctuation number 8) is also set as a time (identical or approximate time) having a length matched to this with the fluctuation time Td3 (fluctuation number 14) as a reference. Depending on the control on the control substrate 4140 side, it can also be used as an effect pattern of the fluctuation time Td3 (variation number 14). As described above, the variation number of the big hit rendering pattern, which is a pair of the variation number 8 of the lost effect pattern, is changed between the variation number 5 and the variation number 12 as described above.

  Then, as described above, in such a high expectation loss variation pattern table T3 at such a normal time, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the variation display pattern random number acquired in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 94). Then, the effect command associated with the determined fluctuation pattern (for example, the command "03H" in the case of the fluctuation number 3), and the winning information And a command indicating a species are set (step S411). Furthermore, the value of fluctuation time associated with the determined fluctuation pattern (for example, fluctuation time Ta3 for fluctuation number 3) is set in the timer (step S412), and the special view LED operation flag is turned ON The setting is made (step S413), and the processing flag is updated to "2" (step S414).

  On the other hand, when performing the big hit variation pattern table setting process, when it is determined that it is another gaming state different from the normal external disadvantage gaming state, the high expectation variation pattern table associated with the determined gaming state A variation pattern is selected based on the selected table, and various commands according to the determined variation pattern are set, but this description will be omitted.

  According to such a big hit variation pattern table T1 at normal time, a small hit variation pattern table T2 at normal time, and a high expectation loss variation pattern table T3 at normal time, the big hit expectation is a display effect b rather than a display effect a The display effect c is higher than the display effect b, the display effect d is higher than the display effect c, and the display effect e is higher than the display effect d. In particular, since the display effect e can appear only when the big hit is won, it is determined that the big hit is won when the same effect e appears.

  Next, the during-variation process (step S180) executed when the process flag is "2" will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart of an example of the process during variation.

  As shown in the figure, in the process during variation (step S180), the main control MPU 4100a first sets the variation time set in the timer in the process of step S412 (see FIG. 95) as the process of step S501. Determine if the time is up. If the fluctuation time set in the timer has not timed up (NO in step S501), the fluctuation processing is ended.

  If the fluctuation time set in the timer has timed up (YES in step S501), the special view LED operation flag set to ON in the process of step S413 is set to OFF (step S502). When the special view LED operation flag is set to OFF, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display is based on the value of the special symbol variation flag set in the process of step S305 or step S309. The variation display (variation of the special symbol) applied to the lighting patterns of the plurality of LEDs as the device is ended. Further, when the display effect for the big hit lottery is performed in the liquid crystal display device 1400, a determination stop command indicating that the effect result in the display effect is to be determined and displayed on the peripheral control board 4140 in order to end this. Is set (step S503). The decision stop command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the rendering result in the same display effect is determined and displayed through the control described later by the peripheral control board 4140 side. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, depending on the control mode of the peripheral control board 4140, the display presentation on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is not terminated despite the reception of the confirmation stop command, and the opening period thereafter is performed. As described above, control may be performed so as to extend the display effect.

  Next, it is determined whether the big hit flag is ON (step S504). If the jackpot flag is ON (YES in step S504), the processing flag is updated to "3" as it is in the processing stage in which the special symbol has been fluctuatingly stopped as it is indicated that the jackpot has been won (step S505) , End the processing during the change.

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not ON but is lost due to big hit (NO in step S504), it is then determined as the process of step S506 whether the small hit flag is ON. If the small hit flag is ON (YES in step S506), the processing flag is updated to “4” as it is in the processing stage in which the special symbol has been variably stopped so as to indicate that the small hit has been won (step S507), the processing during the variation ends.

  On the other hand, when the small hit flag is not ON and it is a pure loss (a specific condition is not satisfied) (NO in step S506), it is indicated that the big hit and the small hit are both selected. The processing flag is updated to “0” (step S508) on the assumption that the symbol is in the processing stage in which the fluctuation is stopped (step S508), and the fluctuation processing is ended. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next change concerning the special symbol is performed on the condition that the processing is carried out in the step S130 for the reserve digest.

  Next, the big hit game start processing (step S200) executed when the processing flag is "3" will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game start process.

  As shown in the figure, in the big hit game start process (step S200), the main control MPU 4100a first operates the condition device as the process of step S601. Next, as the processing of step S2602, a function (probability fluctuation function) to increase the winning probability of hitting with a condition device (big hit) than when being in the normal external disadvantage gaming state or the normal external advantageous gaming state is active (probability fluctuation function) It is determined whether or not it is a probability fluctuation state). As a result, when it is determined that the probability variation function is in operation (YES in step S602), it is in the probability variation external disadvantageous gaming state, or the probability variation external advantage gaming state, and it is determined that the probability variation function is in operation. The operation is stopped (step S603).

  Then, next, as the processing of step S604, while the operation of the probability variation function is stopped in this way, the function (short time function) to make it easy for the game ball to enter the second starting port 2008 is operating (time saving gaming state) It is determined whether or not If it is not determined in the process of step S602 that the probability variation function is in operation, the process proceeds to step S604 without executing the process of step S603. As a result, when it is determined that the game mode is either the normal external advantageous gaming state or the certainty external advantageous gaming state, and it is determined that the time saving function is in operation (YES in step S604), the operation of the time shortening function is It is stopped (step S605).

  Then, in order to perform the big hit game while the operation of the probability variation function and the time saving function is stopped in this way, the lower big winning port 2003 or the right big winning port 7000 in the same big hit game as the processing of step S606. The maximum number of round games in which the game is repeatedly released, the upper limit number (predetermined large number) at which gaming balls can enter these big winning openings in each round game, the opening and closing of big winning openings in each round game The opening mode in the big hit game is set such as the opening / closing operation time limit of the member (predetermined long time of opening / closing pattern). That is, in the process of step S606, first, the type of the big hit is determined based on the big hit flag set in the process of step S317 (see FIG. 94). And the information concerning the "opening mode in the big hit game" prepared corresponding to each big hit type judged in this way is read from the ROM etc. of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a), and the read The set information will be set. As a result, the jackpot game can be executed with the above-described opening mode corresponding to the type of the jackpot. When it is not determined in the process of step S604 that the time saving function is in operation, the process of step S606 is performed without performing the process of step S605.

  After that, prior to the jackpot game being performed, an interval effect (for example, an opening effect such as “Congratulations” or a challenge bonus effect such as “a chance of winning out balls”) before the big hit game is performed is executed. As made possible, a big hit interval rendering command is set in which the time from when the special symbol is stopped to when the special bonus game (big hit game) is started is indicated (step S607). However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a jackpot is won, an effect in which the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is extended to a period after stopping the special symbol (as described above Since the extension effect can be executed, it is prepared as an interval effect command set in this way, based on this. That is, due to the relationship with the time required for the extension effect that also appears at the time of small hit winning, only the interval effect command indicating a specific fixed time (for example, eight seconds) is set regardless of the type of the big hit. Then, the interval effect command set in this way is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 91, so that in a specific fixed time (for example, 8 seconds) indicated by the command. In this case, either the interval effect as described above or the extension effect as described above is selectively performed in the liquid crystal display device 1400 through the control described later by the peripheral control substrate 4140 side.

  Next, the interval effect timer (for example, 8 seconds) associated with the interval effect command set in the process of step S607 is set (step S608), and the processing flag is updated to "5" (step S609) , End the big hit game start processing.

  Next, the small hit game start process (step S220) executed when the process flag is "4" will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing an example of the small hit game start process.

  As shown in the same, in the small hit game start process (step S220), the main control MPU 4100a first, in order to be played a small open hit game (small hit game), as the process of step S701, to the same small hit game The number of times the lower large winning opening 2003 or the right large winning opening 7000 is repeatedly opened (two times in this embodiment), or the upper limit number of game balls allowed to enter the large winning opening when opened (predetermined number The opening mode in the small opening hit game (small hitting game) is set such as the small number) and the opening / closing operation time limit (small time opening / closing pattern) of the big winning opening opening / closing member at the opening time.

  After that, prior to the small open hit game (small hit game) being performed, it is possible that an interval effect before the small game is played (for example, a challenge bonus effect such as “dropout chance!”) Can be executed. As shown, an interval effect command at the time of a small hit is set, which indicates the time from when the special symbol is stopped to when the small bonus game (small hit game) is started (step S702). However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a small hit is won, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is extended to a period after stopping the special symbol (as described above Since the extension effect of can be executed, it is prepared as an interval effect command set in this way, based on this. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the specific fixed time (for example, the random number for the big hit symbol) is small regardless of the symbol random number (big hit symbol random number) at the time of the small hit. Only the interval rendering command in which 8 seconds is shown is set. Such time setting when the extension effect appears suppresses that the existence of the small hit is inferred from being set, and as a result, the decrease in the game interest due to the opening and closing member operating in response to the winning of the small hit It will be possible to suppress.

  Next, an interval effect timer (for example, 8 seconds) associated with the interval effect command set in the process of step S702 is set (step S703), and the processing flag is updated to "6" (step S704) , The small hit game start processing ends.

  Although described later, the interval effect command set in this way is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 91, whereby the liquid crystal display device 1400 has the peripheral control board 4140 side. The interval effect is performed only for the time indicated by the above-described interval effect command through the control described later.

  Next, the big hit game process (step S240) executed when the process flag is "5" will be described. FIG. 99 is a flow chart showing an example of the big hit game process.

  As shown in the figure, in the big hit game process (step S240), the main control MPU 4100a first turns on a big hit game flag indicating that the big hit game is already being performed as the process of step S801. It is determined whether it is in the state (set).

  Here, the big hit in-game flag is operated to be in the OFF state when it is in the processing status immediately after shifting to the big hit game processing (step S240). Therefore, when it is in the processing status immediately after shifting to the big hit game processing (step S240), it is determined that the big hit gaming flag is not in the ON state (set) (NO in step S801), and then the processing of step S802. I do.

  In the process of step S802, the above-described interval effect (opening effect for big hit determination, challenge bonus effect for opening determination of lower large winning opening 2003 or right large winning opening 7000 (final execution of bonus game), or extension effect) ends. It is determined whether or not the interval effect timer (8 seconds in this case) set in the process of step S 607 (see FIG. 97) has timed out. The interval effect timer (8 seconds here) has not timed up, the above-mentioned interval effect (opening effect of big hit decision, challenge bonus effect of the opening decision of lower large winning a prize opening 2003 or right large winning a prize opening 7000, or extension effect If the) is still being executed (NO in step S802), the big-hit game processing is temporarily ended, and the interval effect timer (here 8 seconds) waits through the processing in step S801 and step S802. (It repeats interrupt processing).

  However, in main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment, as a result of performing such processing, even if the interval effect timer (here 8 seconds) has timed out (YES in step S802), it is a big hit with only this. Whether the game ball has passed the valid gate (special gate) 6010n (specific receiving port) after the interval effect timer (here 8 seconds) is timed up so that the game will not be started It is judged whether or not it is not (step S803). As a result, when it is not determined that the game ball has passed through the valid gate 6010n, the big hit game processing is temporarily ended, and it waits until it is determined that the game ball has passed through the valid gate 6010n in the process of step S803 ( By repeating the interruption process, the opening / closing means of the special winning opening is operated until the game ball is accepted by the effective gate 6010 n after the time (8 seconds in this case) predetermined by the interval effect timer is up It is made to extend and control this in the closed state without causing it.

  According to the extension control for such a big winning opening closing control period, the closing control period (the opening and closing member is closed after the special symbol is stopped after the big hit is won and the big hit game is started). The period from the time the special symbol is stopped to the time the interval effect timer (here 8 seconds) is timed up is "predetermined since the special symbol is stopped and displayed. When the first closed control period having a length is set (step S802), after the first closed control period has elapsed, the second closed control period having an indefinite length is used. The control period comes to appear further (step S803). Therefore, it is possible to realize novel effects that mutually utilize the attribute as the closed control period having a predetermined length and the attribute as the closed control period having an indefinite length. .

  More specifically, for the first closed control period (here, 8 seconds), for example, as described above, this addition time is used as an addition time with the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol set as described above, and this addition time is used As one unit, display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is extended with respect to the fluctuation display of the special symbol, and the effect using an attribute as a closed control period having a predetermined length is realized. become able to. The second closed control period (in this case, effective gate 6010n, as opposed to the case where the display effect relating to the big hit lottery is executed with the effect content for the time obtained by adding the variation time of the special symbol and the first closed control period. Time for the game ball to pass, for example, closing control with an indefinite length such as flowing a long film movie on the liquid crystal display device 1400 until the opening and closing member operates using the synchronization period It is possible to realize an effect using an attribute as a period. That is, for the second closing control period (here, the time until the gaming ball passes the valid gate 6010n), it is possible for the player to end the synchronization period appropriately, so that the feature film etc. Even when redundant rendition is realized, extension of the rendition does not cause negative effects such as a decrease in the interest of the game, and the width of the rendition can be expanded.

  When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the effective gate 6010n in the process of step S803 as a result of such processing being performed, the jackpot continuous operation device operates to make a big hit (with the operation of the condition device It moves to the state where the operation (big hit game) of the opening and closing member according to the winning of) is made possible. That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a first sets a big hit start command indicating that the big hit game is to be started as the process of step S804, and the above big hit game shows that the big hit game is already being performed. The middle flag is operated (set) to the ON state, and then the process proceeds to step S805.

  The big hit start command thus set is transmitted to peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 91, whereby in liquid crystal display device 1400, the control by peripheral control board 4140 side described later is performed. The display effect during the big hit game will be performed. In addition, when the big hit game processing (step S240) is started by the interruption control after the next because the big hit game flag is operated (set) to ON state, such step S801-step S804 It does from processing of step S805 below in order to do processing concerning execution of the big hit game without processing of. Note that, in the form of a gaming machine in which a valid gate is not provided, these steps 802 and 803 are not set.

  In the process of step S805, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening (2003 or 7000) is open. If it is opening (YES in step S805), then the opening time of the special winning opening (the elapsed time after opening) is set in the processing of step S606 (see FIG. 90) as the processing of step S806. It is determined whether or not the open / close operation limit time (predetermined long time or predetermined middle time) has been reached. As a result, when it is determined that the opening / closing operation time limit has elapsed (YES in step S806), the opening / closing member 2006 is closed to close the special winning opening (step S808).

  However, even if it is determined that the set open / close operation restriction time has not yet elapsed in the process of step S806 (NO in step S806), the same winning area is opened after the special winning opening is opened. If the number of game balls entering the winning opening is equal to or more than the upper limit number (for example, 10) set in the process of step S606 (YES in step S807), the process of step S808 is performed. Switch to and close the big winning opening. On the other hand, if the set open / close operation restriction time has not yet passed (NO in step S806), and the number of gaming balls entering the special winning opening has not yet reached the upper limit number ( In step S807, the big hit gaming process is ended while maintaining the big winning opening in the open state.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special winning opening is not open in the process of step S805, the number of opening of the special winning opening by the opening / closing member 2006 (the number of round games) is the above-mentioned step S606 (refer to FIG. It is determined whether or not the maximum number of times set in the process of has been reached (step S809). Then, if it has not reached (NO in step S809), the opening and closing member is operated to open the big winning opening (step S810), and the big hit game processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S809 that the round game has already been performed a maximum number of times, the operation of the bonus product continuous operation device is stopped and a big hit (a hit with the operation of the condition device) It moves to the state where the operation (big hit game) of the opening and closing member according to being won is made impossible. That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a executes the processing of step S811 to step S817, for example, the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) separately from the big hit flag in the processing of step S317 (see FIG. 94). The big hit game processing is ended after setting the gaming state after the big hit game on the basis of the big hit winning class which is the execution trigger of the big hit game stored in. In addition, the winning species here is about whether or not it is a winning species to operate the probability variation function and the time saving function, for example, when the big hit made the execution timing of the big hit game is the big hit C. The contents of the information on whether or not to activate the time saving function according to the gaming state when it is determined that the jackpot is determined to be the jackpot will be different.

  That is, first, the big hit flag and the big hit gaming flag are operated to the OFF state (step S811), and the winning type of the big hit made the execution trigger of the big hit game is determined (step S812, step S814). Here, in the process of step S812, it is determined whether or not the gaming ball has passed through the above-described random variation area 6970. As a result, if the result is negative, the process proceeds to step S814 without activating the probability variation function. On the other hand, if the process of step S812 is affirmed, the probability fluctuation function is activated (step S813), and then the process proceeds to the process of step S814.

  Further, in the processing of step S 814, it is determined whether or not it is a winning type for operating the time saving function. As a result, when it is determined that it is not the winning type for activating the time saving function, the operation of the condition device is stopped without activating the time saving function (step S816) and the processing flag is set to "0" ( Step S817), the big hit game processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S 814 that it is the winning type for activating the time saving function, after activating the time saving function (step S 815), the operation of the condition device is stopped (step S 816). ), When the processing flag is set to “0” (step S 817), the big hit game processing is ended.

  According to such a big hit game start processing, until it is determined that the round game has reached the maximum number of times in the processing of step S807, the big winning opening is an opening mode according to the type of the big hit (step S806, After step S 807, step S 809), the game is repeatedly opened, so that the player can obtain a prize ball according to the type of the big hit.

  Next, the small hit game process (step S250) executed when the process flag is "6" will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing an example of the small hit game process.

  As shown in the figure, also in the small hit game processing (step S250), the main control MPU 4100a first, a small hit game indicating that the small hit game is already being performed as the processing of step S901. It is determined whether the middle flag is in the ON state (set).

  Here, the small hitting game in progress flag is operated to be in the OFF state when it is in the processing state immediately after shifting to the small hitting game processing (step S250). Therefore, when it is in the processing status immediately after shifting to the small hit game processing (step S250), it is determined that the small hit gaming flag is not in the ON state (set) (NO in step S901), and then step S902. Perform the processing of

  In the process of step S902, whether or not the above-described interval effect (challenge bonus effect or extension effect) has ended, that is, predetermined by the interval effect timer set in the process of step 703 (see FIG. 98). A determination is made as to whether or not the time (8 seconds in this case) is up. If the interval effect timer (8 seconds here) has not timed up and the above-mentioned interval effect (challenge bonus effect or extension effect) is still being executed (NO in step S902), the small hit game The process is temporarily ended, and the process of steps S901 and S902 waits until the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) has timed out.

  However, in the small hit game processing (step S250) according to this embodiment, unlike the big hit game processing (step 240), as a result of such processing being performed, the interval effect timer (here 8 seconds) has timed up. In the case (YES in step S902), a small hit start command indicating that the small hit game is to be started is set as the process of step S903 to set the small hit game to start with only this. The small hit in-game flag indicating that the game is already being performed is set to be turned on. That is, in this case, if the player only confirms that the above-mentioned second closing control period does not appear (no extended control from the first closing control period having a certain length), the condition device Completely eliminate the sense of expectation that a bonus game may be played according to a hit (big hit) involving the operation of the game (not a notification by an effect with a lot of false information, etc., but control of the game progress It is possible to play the game after removing the sense of expectation depending on the presence or absence.

  As will be described later, the small hit start command set in the process of step S903 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 91, whereby the liquid crystal display device 1400 is obtained. In the above, the display effect in the small hit game is performed through the control described later by the peripheral control board 4140 side. In addition, when the small hitting game processing flag is turned on (set), when the small hitting game processing (step S250) is started in the next and subsequent interrupt processing, such step S902 Then, without performing the process of step S903, the process of the following step S904 for performing the process related to the execution of the small hit game will be performed.

  In the process of step S904, it is determined whether the special winning opening is open. If it is open (YES in step S904), then the opening time of the special winning opening (the elapsed time after opening) is set in the process of step S701 (see FIG. 98) as the process of step S905. It is determined whether or not the open / close operation limit time (the predetermined short time of the open / close pattern for a short time) has been reached. As a result, when it is determined that the opening / closing operation time limit has elapsed (YES in step S 905), the winning opening is closed by closing the opening / closing member 2006 (step S 907).

  However, even if it is determined that the set open / close operation restriction time has not yet elapsed in the process of step S 905 (NO in step S 905), the same winning area is opened after the big winning opening is opened. If the number of game balls entering the winning opening is equal to or more than the upper limit number set in the process of step S701 (YES in step S906), the process proceeds to step S907 and the process proceeds to large. Close the winning opening. On the other hand, if the set open / close operation restriction time has not yet passed (NO in step S905), and the number of gaming balls entering the special winning opening has not yet reached the upper limit number ( In step S905, the small hit game process is ended while maintaining the large winning opening in the open state.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S904 that the special winning opening is not open, the number of times the lower special winning opening is opened by the opening and closing member is set in the process of step S701 (see FIG. 98). It is determined whether the maximum number of times has been reached (step S908). Then, if it has not reached (NO in step S 908), the open / close member 2006 is operated to open the big winning opening (step S 909), and the small hit gaming process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S 908 that the opening number of the big winning opening by the opening and closing member has already been performed the maximum number of times, the small hit flag and the small hit game flag are respectively turned OFF. The small hit game processing is ended when the operation is performed (step S910) and the processing flag is set to "0" (step S911).

  According to such a small hit game processing, until it is determined that the opening of the large winning opening by the opening and closing member has reached the maximum number of times in the process of step S906, the large winning opening is an opening mode according to the big hit Although the entry of the game ball into the big winning opening is a difficult opening mode compared to the above, it is possible for the player to be able to obtain a winning ball according to such an opening mode.

  Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4150 a mounted on the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing an example of the sub main process, and FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing an example of the 16 ms steady process. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing an example of the command analysis process (step S1100). FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process (step S1200). FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210). FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing an example of the determination process of the stop symbol (step S1225a) in the first effect mode, and FIG. 110 shows an example of the determination process of the stop symbol (step S1225b) in the second effect mode. It is a flowchart.

  In the sub main process, as shown in FIG. 104, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a performs an initial setting process (step S1001). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the peripheral control RAM 4140 e mounted on the peripheral control board 4140 is performed. Note that interrupts are disabled during this initialization process, and interrupts are enabled after the initialization process. When the initial setting process (step S1001) is completed, a loop process is started to monitor whether a 16 ms elapsed flag T has been set (step S1002).

  Here, the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment is configured to execute a 2 ms steady process as an interrupt process each time 2 ms elapses. That is, in this 2 ms steady process, the counter value of the 16 ms lapse monitor counter is incremented ("1" is added to the counter value). Then, as a result of the count-up being repeatedly performed each time 2 ms elapses, when the same counter value becomes 8 (when 16 ms elapses), the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set and the 16 ms elapsed monitoring is performed. The counter value of the counter is reset.

  In this regard, in the process of step 1002, the process is monitored until such a 16 ms elapsed flag T is set in the 2 ms steady process (loop process). As a result, when it is determined that the 16 ms elapsed flag is set (Yes in step 1002), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S1003), and the 16 ms steady process described later is performed (step S1004). The 16 ms steady process is performed every 16 ms.

  In this 16 ms steady process, the LEDs of the decorative boards provided on the liquid crystal display device 1400, the door frame 5 and the game board 4 based on various effect commands received from the main control board 4100, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 A process of controlling the speaker is performed. When the 16 ms steady process ends, the process returns to the process of step S1002, and this is monitored again until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set in the 2 ms steady process (loop process).

  As shown in FIG. 105, in the 16 ms steady process, the peripheral control MPU 4150a first analyzes various effect commands received from the main control board 4100 (command analysis process) as the process of step S1100. Next, based on the analyzed rendering command, control (rendering control processing) related to rendering display on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is executed (step S1200). More specifically, the setting of the notice effect that can appear in the effect display of the liquid crystal display device 1400, the determination of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol that can appear in the effect display of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the like are performed.

  Then, next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a sound control process applied to the sound output of the speaker to generate a sound effect (for example, BGM) for promoting the rendering effect (step S1300). Furthermore, the light emission decoration control processing concerning the light emission decoration by each decoration board provided in the door frame 5 or the game board 4 is executed (step S1400).

  After that, information output to the lamp drive substrate and the liquid crystal control substrate and to which the commands (sound output command, light emission decoration command, etc. in addition to display commands described later) set in the above steps S1200 to S1400 are transmitted. A process is performed (step S1500). As a result, an effect corresponding to the set command is performed through the liquid crystal display device 1400, the speakers 121 and 391, the door frame, the decoration boards provided on the game board, and the like.

  After the information output process (step S1500) is performed, the random number update process in which random numbers used for various settings are updated in the effect control process (step S1200) is executed (step S1600). End the process.

  Although the process (16 ms steady process) from step S1100 to step S1600 is set as the processing amount to be terminated within 16 ms, temporarily, the step is performed when 16 ms has elapsed since the start of the 16 ms steady process. Even if the execution up to the process of S1600 is not completed, the process in the middle of execution is continued as it is without returning to the process of step S1100 (from the command analysis process). Up to the processing of That is, when 16 ms has elapsed during execution of the 16 ms steady processing, only the 16 ms elapsed flag is set, and when it is determined in step S1002 that the 16 ms elapsed flag is set after the 16 ms steady processing is completed, the 16 ms steady processing To start.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment is configured to execute the random number updating process (step S1600) in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) of updating various random numbers Is not limited to this. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop processing and the 16 ms stationary processing in the sub main processing.

  Next, command analysis processing (processing of step S1100) will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 106, in the command analysis process, the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) first performs the process of step S1101 that the rendering command from the main control board 4100 is a reception command of the peripheral control board 4140 It is determined whether it is stored in the storage area (RAM) (step S1101).

  That is, when the peripheral control board 4140 according to this embodiment receives the rendering command from the main control board 4100, it interrupts other processes such as the 16 ms steady process to generate a command reception interrupt process, and this command reception interrupt process is generated. In the loading process, the rendering command from the main control board 4100 is stored in the reception command storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140. In the reception command storage area, a plurality of areas are provided corresponding to the order of reception of effect commands from the main control board 4100, and in the command reception interrupt process, those effect commands are associated in the order of reception. Each of these multiple areas is stored separately.

  In this regard, in the process of step S1101 described above, the content of the received command storage area is confirmed, and if the rendering command is stored, the rendering command with the earliest reception order from the main control board 4100 is read out from the received command storage area. (Step S1102).

  Next, whether or not the read rendering command is a pattern command (a command indicating a fluctuation pattern) among the rendering commands set on the main control board 4100 side in the process of step S411 (see FIG. 104). Is determined (step S1103). As a result, when it is determined that the effect command is the same (YES in step S1103), the fluctuation pattern command is stored in the fluctuation display pattern storage area (RAM) of peripheral control board 4140, and the fluctuation pattern reception flag is When set (step S1104), the command analysis process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the read rendering command is not a pattern command (the command shown in FIG. 103) (NO in step S1103), the readout rendering command is processed in the process of step S411 (see FIG. 102). It is determined whether or not it is a winning information command (a winning information command indicating a winning type including a win or a small hit according to a hit) among the effect commands set on the main control board 4100 side. Step S1105). As a result, when it is determined that the effect command is the same (YES in step S1105), the win information command is stored in the win information storage area (RAM) of peripheral control board 4140 (step S1106), Terminates command analysis processing.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the read rendering command is not the winning information command (NO in step S1105), a flag corresponding to the rendering command received by the corresponding storage area (RAM) of peripheral control board 4140 is selected. When set (step S1107), the command analysis process is ended. As such effect commands, for example, a confirmation stop command set on the main control board 4100 side in the process of step S503 (see FIG. 96), step S606 (see FIG. 97), and step S702. An interval effect command set on the main control board 4100 side in the process (see FIG. 98) or a big hit start set on the main control board 4100 in the process of step S 803 (see FIG. 99) There are a command, a small hit start command set on the main control board 4100 side in the process of the step S 903 (see FIG. 100), and the like.

  Next, the effect control process (the process of step S1200) will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in the figure, this effect control process is based on the value of the process selection flag indicating the progress of the game, decoration symbol variation start processing (step S1210), decoration symbol variation processing (step S1220), big hit display One of the processing (step S1230) and the small hit display processing (step S1240) is selectively performed.

  That is, although described later, in the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) executed when the process selection flag is "0", the variation pattern reception flag that can be operated in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 106) is set. On the condition that it has been done, processing is performed to start display effects in the liquid crystal display device 1400, including variable display of a decorative symbol. For example, based on the pattern command or the win information command, the display effect pattern (the stop symbol of the decoration symbol, the presence or absence of the above-mentioned extension effect, etc.) is determined, and the determined display effect pattern is The display command is set, in addition to setting for taking notice effects, etc.

  Also, in the decorative symbol variation process (step S1220) executed when the process selection flag is "1", basically, it corresponds to a confirmation stop command that can be operated in the process of step S1107 (see FIG. 106). On the condition that the flag is set, as shown in the result of the big hit lottery, the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is ended including the variation display of the decorative symbol (for the liquid crystal control substrate 4150 And so on. Also, at the end of the process, the flag corresponding to the fixed stop command is reset.

  In the big hit display process (step S1230) executed when the process selection flag is "2", a flag corresponding to a big hit interval effect command that can be operated in the process of step S1107 (see FIG. 106), On the condition that the flag corresponding to the big hit start command is set, a display showing that the big winning opening is opened on the liquid crystal display device 1400 or a display (for example, a round display etc.) in the big hit gaming state Control each one. Further, at the end of the processing, a flag corresponding to the interval presentation command at the time of big hit, and a flag corresponding to the big hit start command are reset.

  In the small hit display process (step S1240) executed when the process selection flag is "3", a flag corresponding to an interval effect command at the time of a small hit, which can be operated in the process of step S1107 (see FIG. 106). Or, on the condition that the flag corresponding to the small hit start command is set, the control to cause the liquid crystal display device 1400 to display that the big winning opening is opened or to display the effect during the small hit gaming state Do each one. Further, at the end of the processing, a flag corresponding to the interval effect command at the time of small hit, and a flag corresponding to the small hit start command are reset.

  However, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment, the display effects at the time of a big hit or a small hit in the liquid crystal display device 1400 are not ended within the fluctuation time indicated by the received pattern command. After being extended to the period (interval period) after the stop of the variable display concerning the lighting pattern of a plurality of LEDs as the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display, in the display effect after this extension It is made to have the case where the result of the big hit lottery can be shown.

  That is, in this case, although described later, in the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210), the time required for the extension effect in the interval period longer than the variation time indicated by the pattern command received from the main control board 4100 is also included. A display effect pattern is determined, and a display command (with respect to the liquid crystal control board 4150) corresponding to the determined display effect pattern is set. Further, in the decorative symbol variation process (step S1220), although the flag corresponding to the decision stop command is set, a halfway effect stage in which the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is not finished appears Will end the process.

  The display effect thus extended in the big hit display process (step S1230) or the small hit display process (step S1240) is indicated by the display command set in the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210). It is necessary to carry out processing to be continuously performed according to the contents of the Therefore, in the process at the time of extension, even when the flag corresponding to the interval effect command is set, effect control (display control indicating that the big winning opening is opened, etc.) according to the command is performed. There is nothing to do.

  As described above, the command set in the process of steps S1210 to 1230 in the effect control process is transmitted to the liquid crystal control substrate 4150 by the information output process (step S1500) shown in FIG. As a result, the display effect of the content (display effect pattern or the like) indicated by the above-mentioned command appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400 through the control by the liquid crystal control substrate side.

  The effect control processing also performs touch panel processing. In this touch panel process, the effect control process detects the contact state on the touch surface of the touch panel 246 based on the detection signal received from the touch panel 246. The effect control process acquires coordinate values of the touch surface of the touch panel 246 indicating the center of the contact portion based on the contact state, specifies the position represented by the coordinate values as a detection point, and performs an operation including the initial position Get information. In this effect control process, not only such coordinate values but also the range of the contact surface may be acquired. Details of the touch panel processing will be described later.

  Next, the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) executed when the process selection flag is "0" will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation start process.

  As shown in FIG. 108, in the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210), the peripheral control MPU 4150a first operates a variation pattern that can be operated in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 106) as the process of step S1221. It is determined whether the reception flag is in the ON state (set). That is, in the process of step S1221, based on the fact that a predetermined start condition (YES in step S301) is satisfied on the main control board 4100 side, the fluctuation pattern is determined in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 106). It waits for the reception flag to be turned on.

  Then, until the fluctuation pattern reception flag is operated to the ON state, the peripheral control MPU 4150a performs control relating to the demonstration effect and the effect mode by the processing of the following steps S1232 to S1237.

  That is, first, it is determined whether or not the demonstration effect is being performed in the liquid crystal display device 1400 (step S1232), and when it is determined that it is not in the same state, the display effect such as the previous symbol variation ends After that, it is determined whether a predetermined time has elapsed (step S1236). As a result, when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the liquid crystal display device 1400 sets a display command (for the liquid crystal control substrate 4150) to start the demonstration effect. Then, the display command set in this way is transmitted to the liquid crystal control substrate 4150 by the information output process (step S1500) shown in FIG. Will be executed.

  If it is not determined in the process of step S1236 that the predetermined time has elapsed, the decorative symbol change start process is temporarily ended, and a change pattern reception flag is set (YES in step S1221), or the predetermined time Will wait until either condition elapses (YES in step S 1236).

  Further, as a result of performing such processing (step S1236 and step S1237), if it is determined that the liquid crystal display device 1400 is in the state of performing demonstration effects in the processing of the above-mentioned step S1232 (step S1232) In step S1233, it is determined whether or not the player's operation on the effect mode is permitted (step S1233).

  That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the result of the big hit lottery is a hit (small hit) without the operation of the condition device or a hit with the operation of the condition device (big hit), About the display effect in the display device 1400, a plurality of LEDs as a first special symbol display or a second special symbol display without ending within the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern set on the main control substrate 4100 side. In addition to extending to the period after the stop of the fluctuation display which depends on the lighting pattern of, the display effect pattern (the extension effect pattern may show the display effect as to whether or not it is elected with the operation of the condition device (big hit) And a second effect mode in which a challenge bonus effect pattern can be selected.

  Here, an outline of an extension effect pattern that can be selected when in the first effect mode and a challenge bonus effect pattern that can be selected when in the second effect mode will be described. FIG. 111 (a) is a diagram for explaining an extension effect pattern at the time of a big hit, and FIG. 111 (b) is a diagram for explaining an extension effect pattern at the time of a small hit, and FIG. 111 (c) These are figures for demonstrating the challenge bonus production pattern at the time of a big hit, and FIG.111 (d) is a figure for demonstrating the challenge bonus presentation pattern at the time of a small hit.

  In the first effect mode, when the result that the opportunity to obtain a winning ball (bonus game) is provided by the operation of the opening and closing member 2006 is obtained, the effect extended to the period after the variation stop of the special symbol An extension display effect pattern (extension effect pattern) having contents can be selected.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 111 (a), when the display effect pattern (extension effect pattern) at the time of extension is selected based on the big hit being won, the peripheral control MPU 4150a first changes the special symbol. The display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is started to match the start (based on the fluctuation pattern reception flag being set). However, after that, even if the flag corresponding to the fixed stop command (at the end of variation of the special symbol) or the flag corresponding to the interval effect command (entry to the opening period) is set, the display on the liquid crystal display device 1400 The effect will be continued without ending this.

  That is, as described above, in the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment, the special symbol is stopped for the closed control period until the special hit is started after the special symbol is stopped based on the big hit being won. The time until the time (in this case, 8 seconds) determined in advance by the interval effect timer is up (first closed control period having a predetermined length), and the interval effect timer The time from when the predetermined time (8 seconds in this case) is up to when the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010 n is controlled as a second closed control period with an indefinite length ing.

  In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 111A, when the display effect pattern (extension effect pattern) at the time of extension is selected based on that the big hit is won. The time until the interval effect timer (here 8 seconds) is up after the special symbol is stopped (the first closed control period with a fixed length), for the variation time of the special symbol In the form of extension, it is intended to perform the display effect that requires a big hit lottery. Note that such a display effect can be realized, for example, as an effect in which a situation in which a specific character challenges a battle with an enemy character is shown.

  Then, when the first closing control period having a predetermined length has elapsed and control is performed as the second closing control period having an indefinite length, the contents of the effect appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400 In the present invention, it is made to switch to the hit explicit rendition in which the hit information about whether the result of the big hit lottery is the hit (big hit) with the operation of the condition device. In addition, here, with regard to the hit explicit rendition, it is performed as a big hit rendition where it is clearly indicated that the result of the big hit lottery is a hit (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the condition device, for example, a specific character with the enemy character It can be realized as an effect in which the appearance of winning the battle is shown. Also, in view of the fact that one display effect pattern consists of a display effect for a big hit lottery and a hit explicit effect for which the result of the effect appears, an extended effect pattern for a big hit according to this embodiment is It can be said that it is an effect pattern in which the contents of the effect are extended within the second closed control period having an indefinite length after the first closed control period is ended after the variation of the special symbol is stopped. .

  Then, after that, on the condition that the second closing control period having an indefinite length is still continued, by striking out the gaming ball relatively as an effect in the second closing control period. Control is performed such that an opening effect before a big hit game appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400 which urges that the big hit game should be started by performing a right hitting game in which the game ball is made to flow down the right playing area 605 of the center character 2300. Do. As a result, when the player plays a right-handed game, the game ball thrown into the right play area 605 of the center character 2300 will pass through the effective gate 6010 n, and thus the jackpot start command is set. It becomes. As a result, by the end of the second closing control period, the big hit game in which the big winning opening is opened is started (see FIG. 106). At this time, the round indicator 648 lights to indicate the number of rounds.

  In addition, when the second closing control period having an indefinite length is ended and the big hit game in which the lower large winning opening 2003 is opened is started (a flag corresponding to the big hit start command is set), for example, A big hit game showing that the first round of the round game has been started even if the content of the effect is on the halfway stage, even if the content of the effect is on the halfway stage. It is executed in the form of forced switching to the middle effect. However, on the other hand, unless the gaming ball passes the valid gate 6010n after the end of the first closed control period having a predetermined length, the second closed control period having an indefinite length is ended. Since there is nothing to do (the flag corresponding to the big hit start command is not set), it is not forced to be switched to the big hit game effect indicating that the round game of the first round is started.

  According to such an extension effect pattern at the time of big hit, at least the operation handle portion 410 is not operated after the first closed control period having a certain length has elapsed from the stop time of the special symbol, the effective gate Since the game ball does not pass 6010 n, the progression of the production continues to be stagnated in the effect before the start of the big hit game (the effect during the second closing control period). That is, in this case, the player does not operate the operation handle portion until the player understands the meaning of the effect (the effect during the second closing control period) before the start of the big hit game. It will be possible to keep the production progress stagnant in the previous production. Also, on the other hand, when the game ball passes the effective gate 6010n by the operation of the operation handle portion, the effect before the start of the big hit game is ended and the next effect (during the big hit game) will be progressed, It will be possible to realize my own paced production matched to each player's pace, in other words, to be able to realize the sense of speed concerning the progress of the production as a production matched to a wide customer base regardless of age or sex Become.

  Furthermore, in such an extended effect pattern at the time of big hit, as long as the situation is not progressed in this way from the effect before the start of the big hit game (control of stagnation of the effect by peripheral control MPU 4150a), main control MPU 4100a is undefined By controlling so that the second closing control period with the length of is not ended, it is possible that the game progresses and a big hit game (a bonus game in which winning balls can be obtained) is executed. I try to avoid it. Therefore, from the player's side, just by adjusting the speed of progress of the rendering to match the pace of the player, it will appear that the game proceeds to match the adjusted rendering speed, As a result, it is possible to enjoy the personal pace effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 without worrying about the progress speed of the game.

  As described above, in the case of the jackpot extension effect pattern, after the end of the first closed control period having a certain length, the second closed control period appearing in the form of extending such closed control period is It is a rendering pattern on the premise of continuing only for the time of the second, and within the second closing control period, a part of the rendering content (a winning explicit representation) in the rendering pattern and the opening rendering before the big hit game ( It is possible to carry out a right hit game effect to perform an action to start the big hit game. Then, it is possible to end the second close control period at an appropriate timing according to the understanding speed of each player for these effects, and to start the big hit game at an appropriate timing. A timer may be provided to the main control board so that the second closing control period is not extended more than necessary. The main control board can forcibly set the big hit start command when the specified time has elapsed after the end of the first closed control period. The main control board may determine whether or not to set the timer by lottery.

  However, on the other hand, such a second closed control period is, for example, a period which is ended based on at least the operation of the operation handle portion 410 (a period having an indefinite length). If the game ball passes the effective gate 6010n by the operation of the operation handle portion 410 immediately after the end of the first closing control period having a certain length, the falling explicit effect is in the middle of that effect It may also be possible to advance quickly to the next effect (during a big hit game) without making a cut or substantially causing the effect itself to appear (playing effect). Further, as described above, when the effect is advanced earlier, the game control itself also advances earlier, and the big hit game will be started earlier. Therefore, while realizing the personal pace effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400, for a player such as a veteran, to accelerate the game earlier by skipping effects or the like to enjoy efficient and stress-free rapid game / rendering performance efficiently. To be able to

  In particular, the time (game time) required for the opening effect in which the game explanation for prompting a right-on game is performed after the hit explicit effect (big hit effect) is performed is useless for the player in the second and subsequent games. It is often only time. However, according to the extension effect pattern at the time of the big hit, while preparing the time (game time) required for such opening effect, when it only functions as a useless time for the player, this is appropriately used. To make it possible to advance the effects and the game faster. As a result, it is possible to provide each player with an effect and a game suited to each player.

  By the way, the presentation time (time for the explicit demonstration effect) is also cut by showing the information on whether or not the result of the big hit lottery is the hit (big hit) with or without the operation of the condition device. In the case of advancing earlier, the final presentation result (for example, whether the character wins the battle, etc.) in the extension presentation pattern at the time of the big hit does not sufficiently appear, and even the opening presentation In the big hit game production (round production etc.) will appear suddenly without appearing. That is, in this case, the extension presentation pattern at the time of the big hit will be ended in the middle stage before the presentation result sufficiently appears, and even the opening presentation can be omitted so that the big hit game can be started early. Become.

  By the way, in the effect within the second closed control period having an indefinite length, first, a hit explicit effect is performed in which it is clearly indicated that the result of the big hit lottery is the hit (big hit) with the operation of the condition device. After that, by performing the right-handed game, an opening effect is performed that urges that the big hit game should be started. However, after the opening effect is performed for a predetermined time (or while performing the opening effect), a feature film dedicated to the big hit may be played. According to the second closing control period having an indefinite length, even when such redundant effects are realized, there is no adverse effect such as a decrease in game interest due to the extension of the effects, and the effects Will be able to broaden the range of

  In addition, in this second closing control period, operation acceptance for a predetermined operation means (operation button unit etc.) is permitted, and an expectation for the result of the game lottery is indicated based on the button being operated. You may be made to perform the operation system production (For example, the production | presentation which shows the expectation degree about the number of rounds of a big hit game, the game state after a big hit game, etc.). That is, in this case, the player can realize an operation-based effect that can be operated at his own pace without worrying about the operation-enabled expiration date (period in which the operation acceptance is permitted). It will be.

  Further, main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment is at the time of winning a big hit, and lights up at round indicator 648 when the first closed control period having a certain length from the stop time of the special symbol is finished. Is controlled so that it does not take place. The round indicator is turned on by canceling the control after the first closed control period has ended and the game ball has passed through the effective gate 6010n. As a result, in the second closing control period, it is possible to perform a striking effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 while the round display is turned off. Further, it is avoided that the number of rounds in the big hit game can be easily grasped by the player regardless of how much effect stagnation has occurred in the second close control period.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 111 (b), even when the display effect pattern at the time of extension (the extension effect pattern at the time of the small hit) is selected based on that the small hit is won, the special symbol The time until the interval effect timer (in this case 8 seconds) is up after the time is stopped (the first closed control period with a fixed length), the form is extended with respect to the fluctuation time of the special symbol And, it is made to perform the display effect which requires a big hit lottery. Note that such a display effect can be realized, for example, as an effect in which a situation in which a specific character challenges a battle with an enemy character is shown.

  However, as described above, in the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment, closing control from when the special symbol is stopped based on the small hit being won to when the small open hit game (small hit game) is started. About period (opening period), it consists only of time (the first closed control period with a certain length) until the interval effect timer (here 8 seconds) is up after the special symbol is stopped Control. Therefore, in the extension effect pattern at the time of such a small hit, the first closing control period (8 seconds in this case) having a certain length has passed, and the small open hit game (small hit game) When it is started, the effect content appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is displayed as a win-win indication that indicates information on whether or not the result of the big hit lottery is a hit (big hit) with operation of the condition device. To switch to. In addition, here, with regard to the explicit demonstration effect, it will be performed as a loss effect in which it is clearly indicated that the result of the big hit lottery is a lose that was dropped in the hit (big hit) involving the operation of the condition device. This can be realized as an effect in which a state of defeat in a battle with an enemy character is shown. In addition, in view of the fact that one display effect pattern consists of a display effect for a big hit lottery and a hit explicit effect for which the effect results appear, an extended effect pattern for a small hit according to this embodiment and Is an effect pattern in which the contents of the effect are extended within a period during which a small open hit game (small hit game) is performed after the first closing control period ends after the variation of the special symbol is stopped. It can be said.

  According to the extension effect pattern at the time of such a small hit, it can be made to shift to the display effect according to the next fluctuation (the special game of the reserve processing of the special symbol) relatively quickly after being shown that it is a lost for the big hit become. Furthermore, since the effect content is extended within the period during which the small opening game is being played (small hitting game), the liquid crystal is generated during the small opening game (small hitting game) period. The movement of the opening and closing member is less likely to be noticed as much attention is directed to the display device 1400. That is, in this case, the contents of the presentation progress in the same manner as in the case of a so-called high-expected loss presentation (the disconnection presentation does not operate the opening / closing member). It becomes difficult to notice that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a hit (small hit) that does not accompany the operation of the condition device.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation mode of the opening / closing member is similar to or the same as when the small open hit game (small hit game) is performed according to such small hit wins. There is not prepared a big hit game in which the opening and closing member is operated with the operation mode, and a latent effect state (a latent effect state using a so-called small hit) based on this. That is, the extension effect pattern (see FIG. 111 (a)) at the time of the big hit when in the first effect mode and the extension effect pattern at the time of the small hit (see FIG. 111 (b)) It is made based on the technical idea (the technical idea opposite to the conventional one) to make it hard to grasp that it is the pachinko machine 1 being used, and based on such a technical idea, the special symbol In view of the fact that a series of behaviors at the time of a small hit such as fluctuation and stop, the first closed control period, and the opening of the big winning opening appear in the big hit as well, the rendering contents in each rendering pattern are respectively extended .

  In addition, in the extension effect pattern at the time of the big hit according to this embodiment and the extension effect pattern at the time of the small hit, as shown in FIGS. 111 (a) and (b), after the special symbol is stopped, the interval effect Whether the result of the big hit lottery is a hit (big hit) with the operation of the condition device only after the time (first closed control period) before the timer (8 seconds in this case) has timed out has passed The information on the is to be shown. However, with regard to these extended effect patterns, if the display effect according to the big hit lottery is performed in the form of being extended within the first closed control period, within the first closed control period of the same display effect In the effect portion that appears, it may be possible to indicate crash information as to whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery is a hit (big hit) involving the operation of the condition device. Even in such a case, it is possible to shift to the display effect relating to the next fluctuation (the special symbol withholding and detention) relatively quickly after it is indicated that the loss is at least a big hit. In this case, in the case of a big hit at the time of the big hit, a special hit at the time of the big hit to encourage the character to win the battle while already knowing that the big hit has already been won, or urge to hit the right A presentation for the game explanation appears, and in the explicit demonstration at the time of a small hit, the appearance that the character loses the battle and regrets that it has already been recognized that it is the lost who lost the big hit. A special effect at the time of a small hit will appear.

  As compared with the extension effect pattern in the first effect mode, in the second effect mode, the operation of the opening / closing member 2006 provides an opportunity (bonus game) to obtain a prize ball. In the case where it is determined, in the liquid crystal display device 1400, a challenge bonus effect pattern may be selected, which indicates that it has been won when it is possible to obtain a winning ball. The challenge bonus effect pattern is a display effect pattern in which not only a big hit but also a small hit is treated as one type (a type of hit) as a hit for which winning balls can be obtained by opening the big winning opening.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 111 (c), when the challenge bonus effect pattern is selected based on the big hit being won in the second effect mode, the peripheral control MPU 4150a starts changing the special symbol. In order to match (based on the fluctuation pattern reception flag being set), the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is started. Then, the display effect started in this way is ended (based on the fact that the flag corresponding to the confirmation stop command is set) to match the end of the variation of the special symbol.

  However, this display effect does not show the lottery result for the hit of the big hit, but the winning prize winning opportunity is given (big hit or small hit) by opening the lower large winning opening 2003 It is indicated whether or not it has been won (draft effect for the challenge bonus). More specifically, it is shown that when the jackpot or jackpot is won, the opportunity to win a prize ball is provided by opening the big winning opening within the fluctuation period of the special symbol. A specific display image will appear. In this case, although the player can not know how many prize balls the player is able to obtain by opening the big winning opening, it can be obtained by opening the big winning opening. What will be done will be made comprehensible.

  As described above, after the specific display image appears in the drop effect concerning the challenge bonus, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the flag corresponding to the interval effect command (at the time of the big hit), the big winning opening Performs pre-start presentation to start the challenge bonus presentation on how many prize balls the player is able to obtain by opening. As will be described later, in the challenge bonus effect, a time (a first closed control period having a predetermined length) from the stop of the special symbol to the time-up of the interval effect timer (here 8 seconds) elapses. After that, it is started on condition that the game ball passes the effective gate 6010n.

  Here, in the pre-start effect for starting the challenge bonus effect, the operation amount of the operation handle portion (right) using the first closed control period until the interval effect timer (here 8 seconds) is timed up. A description will be given of aiming at the effective gate 6010 n by the hit game and the operation timing.

  In the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment, as such pre-start effect, a countdown effect may be performed in which the operation timing of the operation handle portion is indicated by the countdown display on the liquid crystal display device 1400. In this countdown effect, for example, a countdown display of, for example, about 3 to 5 seconds is performed while explaining aiming at the effective gate 6010n by a right-handed game, and this countdown display changes to "0". When the operation handle portion 410 is operated with an appropriate amount of operation, the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010 n as soon as the first closing control period ends.

  Therefore, according to such a countdown effect, when the operation handle portion 410 is operated according to the instruction of the effect, the big hit start command is set relatively quickly after the interval effect timer (here 8 seconds) has timed out. The second closed control period is ended by the game, and the challenge bonus effect and the big hit game (special bonus game) on how much the number of prize balls that the player is able to obtain is eventually started early. Become so. At this time, the round indicator lights up to indicate the number of rounds.

  That is, according to such an advance of the effect in the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of the big hit, the time from when the interval effect timer (here 8 seconds) is up until the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010 n (indeterminate length Even if the second closed control period (which has a short duration) is compared with the case of the later-described challenge bonus effect pattern (see FIG. 111 (d)) in which the time does not exist, this is disregarded in terms of effect It can be made as short as possible. That is, the above-described countdown effect is intended for this purpose, and is completed by terminating the second closed control period having an indefinite length at an early stage and cutting it, which will be described later. As in the case of the small bonus hit pattern (see FIG. 111 (d)), only the first closed control period having a certain length appears as an interval period before the big hit game (before the challenge bonus effect). It is made to promote the game progress (progression progress) in the form. As a result, it becomes possible to treat the small hit as well as the big hit as a hit that enables winning a winning ball by opening the big winning opening, and the small hit is also treated as one type (type of hit). In addition to the game and the middle opening game, it is possible to perform an effect display on which game mode appears, including the small opening game.

  Further, main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment is at the time of winning a big hit, and lights up at round indicator 648 when the first closed control period having a certain length from the stop time of the special symbol is finished. Is controlled so that it does not take place. The round indicator 648 is turned on by canceling the control after the first closed control period ends and the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n. As a result, prior to the challenge bonus effect being performed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, the player is awarded the jackpot winning by turning on the round indicator 648 or the number of rounds in the big hit game (special bonus game). It becomes possible to avoid being easily grasped.

  Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment, after the countdown display changes to "0", the following leading effects (not shown) from the launch of the gaming ball to the passage through the effective gate 6010n. The time required for the game ball to pass through the effective gate 6010 n after the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) has timed out (the second closing with an indefinite length). Control period) can be further concealed in a dramatic manner.

  Although illustration is omitted, in the countdown effect according to this embodiment, the timing when the countdown display changes to “0” is slightly earlier than when the interval effect timer (here 8 seconds) is timed up ( It is set in the closed control period 1). According to such a countdown effect, at least a part of the time from when the game ball is fired by the operation of the operation handle portion 410 to when the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010 n is the first closing control period and the first closing control period. Of the two closed control periods, it becomes possible to play the game so that it can be included as a time on the first closed control period side, and as a result, the second closed control period having an indefinite length is It can be shortened by (a part included as the time on the first closed control period side). In this case, with regard to the leading effect, the second closing control period is also started prior to the second closing control period, and there is a possibility that the first closing control period and the second closing control period may be crossed. It will be positioned.

  Here, as a series of effects contents leading from such a countdown effect to an advance effect and then to a challenge bonus effect, for example, in the countdown effect, "countdown display is" in combination with the countdown display on the liquid crystal display device 1400. Attack the enemy character by starting the right-handed game at the timing when it becomes 0 "! And the like, and based on the game ball passing through the effective gate 2500 (the flag corresponding to the big hit start command is set), the challenge bonus effect is started in which the result of the mounted attack is shown, etc. , Can be realized.

  In addition, as a bonus bonus effect, for example, when an attack on an enemy character is avoided, it indicates that it is a small opening hit game as a result of a mounted attack, and although an attack on an enemy character was hit, it could not be defeated. Sometimes it can be realized by showing that it is a middle open hit game and indicating that it is a long open hit game when an enemy character falls down due to an attack. Alternatively, when the attack against the enemy character is hit but can not be defeated, it indicates that it is either a middle open hit game or a long open hit game, and in the subsequent round effect, the middle open hit game and long open It may be made clear whether it is a hit game. According to such a challenge bonus effect, as long as the attack against the enemy character is hit, not only the winning amount that can be obtained but also the possibility of a small hit is advantageous to the player. It is possible to dramatically increase this with regard to the expectation of transition to a good gaming state.

  However, in such a big hit challenge bonus effect pattern, it may be assumed that the operation handle portion 410 is not operated for a long time even after the countdown display in the countdown effect changes to “0”. That is, in this case, the second closed control period having an indefinite length is continued for a long time, but in the second closed control period, the countdown display is “0” in the liquid crystal display device 1400. It is more desirable in order to weaken the player's interest which causes such a situation, to prevent new appearances from appearing, such as being displayed as “”.

  However, in the situation where the challenge bonus effect pattern appears, such a situation that the progress of the effect is stagnant is limited to the case where the jackpot is won, and the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of the small hit described later ( This can not occur in the case of FIG. 111 (d)). That is, in this case, the amount of award balls that can be obtained by the amount that the possibility of playing a game per small opening is eliminated while being in a state of stagnation (no stage) in which no effect is newly performed. In addition to this, this will be dramatically enhanced with regard to the expectation of transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player.

  Although the countdown effect is realized by the countdown display, it does not necessarily count as long as it is performed so that the specific timing at which the operation handle portion should be operated can be grasped. Good.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 111 (d), even when the challenge bonus effect pattern is selected based on the fact that the small hit is won in the second effect mode, the peripheral control MPU 4150a also performs special processing. The display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is started to match the start of the fluctuation of the symbol (based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern reception flag is set). Then, the display effect started in this way is ended (based on the fact that the flag corresponding to the confirmation stop command is set) to match the end of the variation of the special symbol.

  Also in the same way, in the case of a small bonus challenge bonus effect pattern, the prize ball is obtained by opening the special winning opening in such an effect (draft effect for a challenge bonus) which is performed in the fluctuation period of the special symbol. A specific display image appears, which is shown to be given the opportunity of As a result, although the player can not know how many prize balls the player is able to obtain by opening the big winning opening, it is possible to obtain the winning balls by opening the big winning opening. Will be understood.

  In addition, after the specific display image appears in the falling effect concerning the challenge bonus in this way, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines that the flag corresponding to the interval effect command (at the time of the small hit) is set, Performs pre-start presentation to start the challenge bonus presentation on how much the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player by opening the big winning opening is.

  However, as mentioned above, at the time of winning the small hit, the special symbol is stopped for the closing control period (opening period) from when the special symbol is stopped until the small opening hit game (small hit game) is started. It consists only of the time until the interval effect timer (8 seconds in this case) is timed up (the first closed control period with a fixed length), and when the timed up of the timer, the effective gate 6010n A small open hit game (small bonus game) is started regardless of the presence or absence of the game ball passing to (see FIG. 98).

  In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment, in the small bonus bonus bonus presentation pattern, originally, the operation of the operation handle (passage of the game ball to the effective gate 6010n) advances the game and the effect. Even though it is not necessary, as a pre-start effect to start the challenge bonus effect, as in the case of the above-mentioned challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of the big hit, the interval effect timer (here 8 seconds) until the time-up A countdown effect may be performed in which the operation timing of the operation handle portion 410 is indicated by the countdown display on the liquid crystal display device 1400 using the first close control period.

  According to the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of small hit, when the operation handle portion is operated according to the instruction of the effect, when the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of big hit that leads from the countdown effect to the advance effect and then to the challenge bonus effect The challenge bonus effect will be started by the same series of effect contents. As a result, it becomes possible to treat the small hit as well as the big hit as a hit that enables winning a winning ball by opening the big winning opening, and the small hit is also treated as one type (type of hit). From the game and the middle opening game, it is possible to perform the effect display on which game mode appears, including the small opening hit game as well as the game.

  In the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of the small hit, the countdown display in the countdown effect is “despite the small open hit game (small hit game) being started immediately after the end of the first closed control period. It is also assumed that a situation may occur in which the operation handle portion is not operated for a long time even after changing to "0". In this respect, the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment causes the liquid crystal display device 1400 to falsely start the leading effect at the time when the countdown display changes to "0", and also causes the predetermined effect to be false When the provisional rolling time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the challenge bonus effect is also controlled to be falsely started.

  In the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a small hit, regardless of whether or not an operation system effect requiring an operation to the operation handle portion is performed, in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the challenge bonus effect is produced through countdown effect and preceding effect. A series of presentation contents linked to it will appear falsely (false presentation). Therefore, the player precedes the surrounding field guard who tries to confirm the liquid crystal display device 1400 by confirming the presence or absence of the operation to the operation handle portion, the presence or absence of the passage of the gaming ball to the effective gate 6010 n, etc. It is made possible to grasp that a game is played per small opening, and this makes it possible to show off intellectual acts such as interrupting the game immediately.

  Thus, the extension effect pattern in the first effect mode is, as described above, the presence of a small hit itself by continuing the second closed control period having an indefinite length for a certain amount of time. It is an effect pattern aimed at concealing, and after extending the effect contents to within a first closed control period with a certain length which is also present in the effect pattern at the time of small hit, In the second closing control period that can not exist in the effect pattern, an opening effect before the big hit game (a effect that urges the player to start the big hit game by performing a right-handed game) is performed. On the other hand, the challenge bonus effect pattern in the second effect mode aims to treat a small hit as one of the hits by making the second closed control period with an indefinite length appear as little as possible. The opening pattern before the big hit game (a play that urges that the big hit game should be started by playing a right-handed game), and also has a certain length which is also present in the small hit game pattern It is carried out so that it can be completed within the first closed control period.

  Such an effect based on the premise that there is a second closed control period having an indefinite length by the extended effect pattern in the first effect mode and the challenge bonus effect pattern in the second effect mode. According to the structure (the effect structure which makes the timing for promoting the right-handed game different in the second closing control period different), even if the display effect pattern (the variation time of the special symbol is the same) based on one effect command, It is possible to make the length of the rendering time required from the start of the variation of the special symbol (decorative symbol) in the first effect mode and the second effect mode to the start of the big hit game largely different As a result, it is possible to realize a wide variety of effects with greatly different effect contents without changing the logic on the side of the main control MPU 4100a one by one.

  By the way, according to such a challenge bonus effect pattern for big hit (refer to FIG. 111 (c)) and a challenge bonus effect pattern for small hit (refer to FIG. 111 (d)), a display effect for hit (specific) When the display image appears, at least a specific number (for example, a small number of balls (about 40 to 50 in the present embodiment)) of balls can be provided so that the balls can be obtained. The game will be played as a challenge bonus effect with elements of a round lottery, such as how many prize balls can be added as a bonus after the player knows that the game will be played .

  Furthermore, when there is an increase in the number of winning balls, there is a possibility that a change to a game state (a game state in which the probability variation function or the time reduction function is activated) advantageous to the player may be made. Therefore, in such a challenge bonus effect, a higher probability that the winning probability with operation of the conditional device (1/400) is added to the winning probability without operating the conditional device (3/400) Not only that a prize ball can be paid out to the player with (1/100) (in other words, the opening and closing member operates), but also it can be shifted to a gaming state advantageous to the player. You will be able to make them conscious. As a result, it is avoided that only a monotonous loss effect is repeatedly displayed by the winning probability of the big hit (special hit) set low, and the decline in the game entertainment will be suppressed. .

  In addition, according to such a challenge bonus effect, even when the player wins the big hit, when the specific condition is satisfied, the hit display effect (specific display image) appears in the liquid crystal display device 1400. In spite of the fact that the player can control the game to be able to pay out the winning balls and make the player aware of the change to the gaming state advantageous to the player, the jackpot wins the jackpot when operating the big winning opening The liquid crystal display device 1400 can display a specific image that does not appear when being displayed (such as an image that appears when a false effect such as an advance effect or a challenge bonus effect is performed even though there is no operation on the operation handle portion) I have to. That is, in this case, it can also function as a waiting effect period whether or not a specific image (false effect) appears until the big winning opening is opened in response to the winning of the big hit. In particular, when a specific image (false effect) appears, not only there is no change to the gaming state advantageous to the player, but also as the number of winning balls that can be acquired by the player, the same specific image (false effect) It will be shown that the big hit has been won, combined with the size of such a gap in the profit that the player can get, as it will only be possible to obtain a much smaller number of balls than when it does not appear It becomes possible to further enhance the game interest when the effect (the stagnation effect from the first close control period) appears.

  Then, according to the configuration in which two such effect modes are adopted, in the first effect mode in which the extension effect pattern can be selected, the player is asked to perform the small opening hit game (small hit game) in the first effect mode. While effects can be made that do not cause the player to be aware that the winning balls can be paid out (in other words, that the opening and closing member operates), in the second effect mode where the challenge bonus effect pattern can be selected, the small opening At the time of execution of the hit game (small hit game), it is possible to perform an effect to make the player aware that the prize balls can be paid out (in other words, the opening and closing member operates). As a result, in the second effect mode in which the challenge bonus effect pattern can be selected, the probability (small win probability of “big hit” “1/400”) is higher than that in the first effect mode in which the extended effect pattern can be selected. With such a probability that the winning ball can be paid out to the player comes to appear with a higher probability "1/100)" plus the winning probability of "3/400", and such a rendering mode The probability of executing a bonus game (the opening of the big winning opening 2 by the opening and closing member) can be issued to the player without changing the gaming state accompanied by the operation of the condition device by properly using It is possible to realize a deeper effect as if it changes each time. In addition, after making it difficult for a player to notice that such a pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a small hit in the first effect mode, it is possible to realize such effects in the second effect mode, It is because it is made to perform the display effect by which small hit as well as big hit is treated as one kind as a hit by which winning balls can be obtained by opening the big winning opening.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) according to this embodiment, the first effect mode in which such an extended effect pattern can be selected and the second effect mode in which the challenge bonus effect pattern can be selected A forced mode control means is provided for creating a forced mode period in which any effect mode is forcibly determined and change by the player's operation from the forcibly determined effect mode is not permitted.

  For example, a first predetermined period (for example, a period until a predetermined date such as one month elapses) after the pachinko machine 1 is delivered to the hall is forcibly determined to be the first effect mode. To forcibly determine a second predetermined period (for example, a period until a predetermined date such as the next one month has elapsed) after the first predetermined period has elapsed as the second effect mode If the control to create the above-mentioned mode forced period is performed, for the first one month, the effect is performed so as to hide that the small hit is mounted as described above. The pachinko machine 1 operates as a pachinko machine 1 capable of delivering a winning ball to the player based on the probability of winning. On the other hand, for the next one month, it is higher than the jackpot probability of being a jackpot by performing the effect that a small hit is treated as one type of the winning balls that can be obtained by opening the big prize opening. It will operate as a pachinko machine 1 to which a winning ball can be paid out to the player under the probability, and it is a pachinko machine 1 equipped with only one game specification, but the first first predetermined period In addition to the fact that the presence of a small hit was made difficult to be noticed in the stage, it seems as if another pachinko machine that is different from the presentation contents on the liquid crystal display device 1400 and different from the game specifications for taking out balls is newly operated. The impression can be given to the player. In addition, after the second predetermined period has elapsed, the effect mode can be set according to the operation of the player on the operation means during the demonstration effect.

  In this regard, as shown in FIG. 108, in the process of step S1233, the peripheral control MPU 4150a first performs the first effect mode and the second effect mode based on time information such as calendar information and time information of the built-in RTC 4140aa. It is determined whether or not it is in the mode compulsory period forcibly determined in any of the effect modes with the effect mode. As a result, when it is determined that the first effect mode is forcibly determined (for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is in a first predetermined period after being delivered to the hall, etc.), the second effect When it is determined that the mode is forcibly determined (for example, in the second predetermined period after the first predetermined period has elapsed), the change of the effect mode by the operation of the player is not permitted. (NO in step S1233), the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) is once ended. That is, in this case, while the demonstration effect is being executed (YES in step S1232), the variation pattern reception flag is set (YES in step S1221).

  On the other hand, based on time information such as calendar information and time information of the built-in RTC 4140 aa, it is determined that the above-described mode forced period, which is forcibly determined to any one of the first rendering mode and the second rendering mode If it is determined that the player is allowed to change the effect mode (for example, if the second predetermined period has already elapsed) (YES in step S1233), then step S1234 is performed. Perform the processing of

  In the process of step S1234, it is determined whether or not the player has operated to change the effect mode. Here, the operation by the player is, for example, an operation on the operation button unit or the sub button, and when the main button or the sub button is operated while the demonstration effect is being performed, the liquid crystal display device 1400 It is conceivable to perform display control for causing the selection screen of the effect mode to appear. In this case, when such a selection screen appears, when a specific effect mode is selected by the operation on the sub button 372 and the selected specific effect mode is determined by the operation on the main button, the effect mode It is determined that there has been an operation by the player to change the character (YES in step S1234), and the setting process according to the effect mode is performed to change the determined effect mode (step S1235).

  Note that the means to be operated by the player may not be the main button or the sub button of the operation button unit, and it is possible that the predetermined operation by the player is possible, including the proximity operation by the touch panel, etc. Just do it. In addition to the control for causing a change in the display on the liquid crystal display device 1400 (display of selection screen, display upon selection, display upon determination, etc.) as processing when a player performs an operation, for example, transparency The player is notified that the effect mode has been switched by changing the effect mode of a predetermined decorative member, such as changing the color of light emitted from the back of the game panel 600 having the character (such as changing from blue to red). You may make it show against.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S1221 that the fluctuation pattern reception flag that can be operated in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 99) is in the ON state (set), the main control board 4100 side Assuming that the predetermined start condition (NO in step S301) is satisfied, the following processing of step S1222 to step S1227 is performed to start display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400.

  That is, the peripheral control MPU 4150a first operates (resets) the fluctuation pattern reception flag to the OFF state (step S1222). Then, it is determined whether or not the game state flag indicates that the player is in the normal external disadvantage game state (step S1223). The gaming state flag is operated to indicate the type of gaming state to be controlled after the big hit game, for example, at the end of the big hit game (for example, the big hit display process (step S1230)).

  When the gaming state flag indicates that the game is in the normal external disadvantageous gaming state (YES in step S1223), the setting mode of the effect mode in the process of step S1235 or the built-in RTC 4140aa is next processed as the process of step S1224. It is determined whether or not the first effect mode is set based on time information such as calendar information and time information. As a result, when it is in a period when the first effect mode is forcibly determined, or when the first effect mode is set in a period in which a change of the effect mode by the operation of the player is permitted. It is determined that the first effect mode is set (YES in step S 1224), and the process of step S 1225 a is performed.

  In the process of step S1225a, the variable display pattern storage area of the RAM of the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) is stored while referring to the effect pattern table when the first effect mode is set. Based on the information on the fluctuation pattern and the win information stored in the win information storage area of the RAM of the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4150a), the effect pattern and the stop symbol on the liquid crystal display device 1400 are determined.

  Next, a notice selection process is performed in which it is determined whether to perform the notice effect based on the notice determination random number (step S1226a). That is, between the time of the first effect mode and the time of the second effect mode, not only the effect pattern in the liquid crystal display device 1400 but also the execution frequency of the advance effect and the contents of the effect change. In the selection process, in the notice effect table when the first effect mode is set, an effect mode (notice effect pattern) for the notice effect is determined based on an appropriate notice determination random number.

  Then, a display command (notice command) associated with each of the effect pattern, stop symbol, and notice effect pattern determined in the first effect mode thus set is set (step S 1227), and the process selection flag is set to “1”. (Step S1228), the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) is ended. That is, in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the liquid crystal and sound control is performed by transmitting the display command and the notice command set in this way to the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 by the information output process (step S1500) shown in FIG. Through the control by the unit 4160, a display effect of the content (such as an extension effect pattern) indicated by the display command appears, and a notice effect of the content indicated by the advance command appears.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S1224, the second effect mode is set in a period in which the second effect mode is forcibly determined, or in a period in which the player is allowed to change the effect mode. When it is in the state, it is determined that the first effect mode is not set (NO in step S1224), and the process of step S1225b is performed next. In the process of step S1225b, the variable display pattern storage area of the RAM of the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) is stored while referring to the effect pattern table when the second effect mode is set. Based on the information on the fluctuation pattern and the win information stored in the win information storage area of the RAM of the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4150a), the effect pattern and the stop symbol on the liquid crystal display device 1400 are determined. Subsequently, in the notice effect table in the setting state of the second effect mode, an effect mode (notice effect according to the notice effect according to an appropriate notice determination random number, including a determination as to whether or not to execute the advance effect). A notice selection process in which a pattern is determined is executed (step S1226b).

  Then, a display command (notice command) associated with each of the effect pattern, stop symbol and notice effect pattern determined in the second effect mode thus set is set (step S 1227), and the process selection flag is set to “1”. (Step S1228), the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) is ended. That is, in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the liquid crystal and sound control is performed by transmitting the display command and the notice command set in this way to the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 by the information output process (step S1500) shown in FIG. Through the control by the unit 4160, the display effect of the content indicated by the display command appears, and the advance effect of the content indicated by the advance command appears.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S1223 that the gaming state flag does not indicate that the gaming state flag is normally in the external disadvantageous gaming state (NO in step S1223), detailed description is omitted, but in the current gaming state While determining the effect pattern and the stop pattern based on the corresponding effect table (step S1229), in the advance effect table according to the current gaming state, including the determination of whether to perform the advance effect, appropriate advance notice An advance notice selection process is performed in which an effect mode (notice effect effect pattern) for the advance notice effect is determined based on the judgment random number (step S1230).

  Then, a display command (notice command) associated with each of the effect pattern, stop symbol, and notice effect pattern determined according to the current gaming state thus determined is set (step S 1227), and the process selection flag is set to “1 (Step S1228), the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) is ended. That is, in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the liquid crystal and sound control is performed by transmitting the display command and the notice command set in this way to the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 by the information output process (step S1500) shown in FIG. Through the control by the unit 4160, the display effect of the content indicated by the display command appears, and the advance effect of the content indicated by the advance command appears.

  FIG. 109 is a flow chart showing an example of the process of determining the effect pattern and the stop symbol (step S1225a) in the first effect mode.

  As shown in the figure, in the process of step S1225a, first, the variation pattern command stored in the variation display pattern storage area in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 106) is read, and the variation pattern command is handled. The effect pattern attached is determined (step S1301). Here, in the effect pattern determination table in the first effect mode, a plurality of effect patterns may be associated with one variation pattern command (see FIGS. 115 and 106), 1 Only one effect pattern may be associated (see FIGS. 112 and 113). In addition, when a plurality of effect patterns are associated, one of the effect patterns is determined based on the result of the effect drawing using a predetermined effect random number, or any effect based on the type of the big hit It will determine the pattern.

  After the specific effect pattern is determined in this way, a stop symbol (symbol combination at stop) appearing when the decorative symbol is stopped is determined. That is, as described later, the decoration symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is adjusted to the variation stop of the special symbol including the case where the above-mentioned extension effect pattern whose display effect is not finished when the special symbol is stopped is adopted. It is supposed to stop based on the stop command being set.

  In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment, when determining the stop symbol, it may be prepared as a combination effect of the “extension effect pattern” and the “extension effect pattern although not being an extension effect pattern”. A determination is made as to whether any effect pattern with the "lose effect pattern" has been determined in the process of step S1301 (step S1302). As a result, when one of the effect patterns is determined, when the predetermined stop symbol (such as a specific reach loss symbol) is determined (step S1303), the step S1225a (FIG. 108) is determined. End processing). That is, in this case, in the opening period, the content of the display effect centering on the story of the character or the like is extended (developed) in a state where the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed with the stopping symbol at the time of extension. It will continue to appear, after which the results will be made clear as to whether or not the jackpot was won.

  On the other hand, a normal effect pattern (see FIG. 11) different from any effect pattern of "an extension effect pattern" and "a loss effect pattern which is not an extension effect pattern but can be prepared as a pair effect of the extension effect pattern". When 112 (c) (see FIG. 115) is determined, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the big hit lottery indicated by the win information command will be determined through the processing of steps S1304 to S1310.

  That is, first, based on the win information command stored in the win information storage area in the process of step S1106 (FIG. 106), it is determined whether the result of the big hit lottery is a big hit (step S1304). As a result, when the result of the big hit lottery is a big hit, when the stop symbol dedicated to big hit is determined (step S1305), the processing of step S1225a (see FIG. 108) is ended.

  If the result of the big hit lottery is not a big hit (NO in step S1304), a determination is made as to whether or not the result is a small hit (step S1306), and if the result of the big hit lottery is a small hit A stop symbol dedicated to small hits will be determined (step S1307). However, when in the first effect mode, for the small hit, the effect commands are all associated with the extension effect pattern so that the presence is concealed, so in the process of step S1306 Then, it is judged that the result of the big hit lottery is not a small hit, and next, in the processing of step S1308, a judgment is made as to whether or not it is a display effect (a high expectation loss effect) in which a reach is formed.

  And as a result, when it is the display production in which reach is formed, when the stop symbol of reach loss is decided (step S1309), while the processing of the said step S1225a (refer to figure 108) is ended, reach is formed. When it is not a display effect to be performed, when the irregular stop symbol with no reach formed is determined (step S1310), the process of step S1225a (see FIG. 108) is ended.

  FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect pattern and the stop symbol determination process (step S1225 b) in the second effect mode.

  As shown in FIG. 110, in the process of step S1225b, first, the fluctuation pattern command stored in the fluctuation display pattern storage area in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 106) is read out, and The effect pattern associated with is determined (step S1321). Here, even in the effect pattern determination table in the second effect mode, a plurality of effect patterns may be associated with one variation pattern command, or only one effect pattern is associated. It may be In addition, when a plurality of effect patterns are associated, one of the effect patterns is determined based on the result of the effect drawing using a predetermined effect random number, or any effect based on the type of the big hit It will determine the pattern.

  After the specific effect pattern is determined in this way, a stop symbol (symbol combination at stop) appearing when the decorative symbol is stopped is determined. That is, as described above, in the second effect mode, the decorative symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is adjusted to the stop of the variation of the special symbol when the lottery result in which the winning ball can be obtained is obtained ( Based on the fact that the fixed stop command is set, the stop symbol (specific display image) at the time of hitting is to be stopped.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment, when determining the stop symbol, a big hit is made based on the win information command stored in the win information storage area in the process of step S1106 (see FIG. 105). A determination is made as to whether the result of the lottery is a hit (a big hit or a small hit) at which winning balls can be obtained (step S1322, step S1324). As a result, when the result of the big hit lottery is a hit (big hit or small hit) where winning balls can be obtained (YES in step S1322 or YES in step S1324), it is determined that the big winning opening has been opened. When the bonus challenge stop symbol which can be grasped is determined (step S1323), the process of step S1225b (see FIG. 108) is ended. In addition, as a bonus challenge stop symbol, for example, a special symbol that is not a component of a big hit symbol combination is made to appear in its variation, and the symbol combination at the time of stop includes the same special symbol, etc. can do.

  In this case, for example, at least a specific number (for example, a small number of award balls (about 40 to 50 in the present embodiment)) of award balls can be obtained in the opening period after the bonus challenge stop symbol appears. The player is provided with an opportunity to obtain a winning ball as it is played, and the other is a round lottery element such as how many winning balls can be added as a bonus. The challenge bonus effect will be performed.

  On the other hand, when the result of the big hit lottery is not the hit (big hit or small hit) for which the winning ball can be obtained (NO in any processing of step S1322 and step S1324), the processing of step S1325 is performed next. A determination is made as to whether or not the reach is a display effect to be formed.

  And as a result, when it is the display production in which reach is formed, when the stop symbol of reach loss is decided (step S1326), while the processing of the said step S1225b (refer to Drawing 108) is ended, reach is formed. When it is not the display effect to be performed, when the irregular stop symbol with no reach formed is determined (step S1327), the process of step S1225b (see FIG. 108) is ended.

  Hereinafter, an example of the display effect appearing when such various processing (steps S1210 to S1240) by the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment is advanced will be described. FIG. 112 is a time chart showing an example of display effect appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when any of the effect commands “01H” to “04H” shown in FIG. 103 is received from the main control MPU 4100 a side.

  As shown in FIG. 112 (a), when the first effect mode is set, the fluctuation time shown in FIG. 103 is based on the fact that the main control MPU 4100a has won a big hit. Assuming that the fluctuation related to the special symbol having Ta1 is started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the display effect a at the time of big hit corresponding to the effect command "01H" (for example, a specific mission a The dynamic presentation of the extended rendering pattern is started with the content of whether or not the character A can succeed (whether or not the character A can defeat the enemy). And the extended effect pattern (effect command “01H”) having the contents of the display effect a started in this way is in a situation where the timing t1 when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped by the passage of the fluctuation time Ta1 This is continued without ending the display effect a (without making the specific mission a success or failure).

  Further, at the time of the dynamic display of the extension effect pattern at the time of the effect command "01H", the variation of the decorative symbol is also started. However, as described above, the variation of the decorative symbol is decided and stopped at the timing t1 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped with the lost stop mode at the time of extension.

  In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment, when the decorative symbol is determined and stopped, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the losing stop mode during extension within the fluctuation time Ta1. Then, while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the lost stop mode at the time of extension, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is performed until the decorative symbol is determined and stopped by the passage of the fluctuation time Ta1. For example, continued expectation effects (for example, whether or not the character A which has fallen due to an attack from the enemy can stand up) whether or not this is continued are performed.

  That is, in this case, the display effect a (not developed, lost) corresponding to the command “03H” shown in FIG. 103 is prepared, so that the display effect a is obtained even after the timing t1. When this is continued, this will function as “display effect after development a (representation in which the chance for the specific mission a to be successful is left)”. Therefore, when the "display effect after development a" appears, the special symbol is displayed from the player's side despite the first closed control period after the variation of the special symbol is stopped. It can be understood as something that is still fluctuating. Further, the decorative symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1400 can also be understood as being in the state of temporary stop, although it is in the situation after being decided and stopped, and thus, at the time of the above-mentioned extension It is possible to show that the chance to be shown that the jackpot is won in the form of being overturned is still left.

  However, at this time, the extended rendering pattern (rendering command “01H”) having the content of the display rendering a is performed in the large display region (the center or the entire display region) of the liquid crystal display device 1400. Above, with regard to the variable display of the decorative symbol, such display effect a should be performed only in a small display area (an inconspicuous place such as an end portion of the display area) of the liquid crystal display device 1400. But let the player know the result of the big hit lottery by whether or not the specific mission a in the display effect a can be made successful without letting the player pay attention to the movement of the decorative symbol (display the result by the character) More desirable for doing.

  That is, in the extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a (big hit) associated with the effect command "01H", in the first closed control period after the change of the special symbol is stopped, the actual effect Even though the decorative symbol has been fixedly stopped, it succeeds in the continuation expectation production at the time of temporary stop (for example, the character A which has been attacked by the enemy and fallen) has such a sense of expectation While being held, "display effect after development a" will appear. In this “display effect after development a”, the time until the end timing t2 of the first closed control period on the main control MPU 4100a side is used to display, for example, a situation in which the character A faces the enemy again, and so on. An instruction is made as to whether the mission a can be made successful.

  However, although this will be described later, such “display effect a after development (effect as to whether or not the specific mission a can be made successful)” in the first closed control period on the main control MPU 4100 a side is shown in FIG. It is performed also in the extension effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (small hit) associated with the command "02H". And as described above, in the display effect a (small hit), it is a big hit in the display effect a (small hit) so that it is difficult to notice that the small hit is the pachinko machine 1 equipped with the small hit when in the first effect mode. It is more desirable to shift to the next change (reserve digestion of special symbols) relatively quickly after

  Therefore, in the extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a (big hit) associated with the effect command "01H", the specific effect is given until the end timing t2 of the first closed control period arrives. An indication as to whether or not a specific mission a can be made successful (a character A mounts an attack on the enemy and this succeeds) without showing how the mission a succeeded (the character A defeats the enemy) is not shown Only the effect (such as whether or not to appear). As a result, a big hit explicit rendition a can be appeared in a form showing that a specific mission a succeeds after the end timing t2 of the first closed control period, and is associated with the rendition command "01H" The display effect pattern that is being played comes to function as "a hit effect pattern among the effect patterns having the effect content a".

  However, as described above, in the extension effect pattern at the time of a big hit, after the first closed control period having a fixed length is finished, the closed control period is extended in a form of having an indefinite length. The closed control period of 2 is to appear further. Then, within the second closing control period, a part of the effect contents (big hit explicit effect a) in the extended effect pattern at the big hit and the opening effect before the big hit game (starting the big hit game by performing the right hitting game) It is designed to be able to be performed) Then, when the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010 n as a result of the operation handle portion 410 being operated at an appropriate timing according to the understanding speed of each player for these effects (timing tx), the second closed control period Ends, and consequently, the big hit game and the big hit game in-progress will be started. The details of the effects during the big hit game will be described later.

  Further, this is also as described above with reference to FIG. 111 (a), but the second closing control period from timing t2 to timing tx is ended based on the operation handle portion 410 being operated. (The period having a fixed length), for example, immediately after the end of the first closed control period having a fixed length, the effective gate 6010n is operated by operating the operation handle portion 410. If you play a game to pass, the jackpot explicit production a or the opening production etc is cut at that point, or it is forced to the next production (during a big hit game) without making the production itself appear (play production) It will be advanced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 111 (b), when the first effect mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a side is selected based on the fact that the small hit is won, as shown in FIG. Assuming that the variation related to the special symbol having the variation time Ta2 (here, described as being set to the same time as the variation time Ta1) is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1400 And display effect a at the time of a small hit corresponding to the effect command “02H” (for example, whether or not a specific mission a can be made successful (a character A can defeat an enemy, etc.) Dynamic display of the extension effect pattern having contents is started. Then, the extended effect pattern (effect command “02H”) having the contents of the display effect a started in this way is also the extended effect pattern (see FIG. 112A) that is associated with the effect command “01H”. Similarly, even in the situation where the timing t1 at which the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped by the passage of the fluctuation time Ta2 comes, without ending the display effect a (without making the specific mission a success or failure) ) Let this continue.

  In addition, also at the time of the dynamic display of the extension effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a (small hit) associated with the effect command "02H", the variation of the decorative symbol is started. In addition, an extension effect pattern associated with the effect command “01H” (see FIG. 112) also for the point at which the change of the decorative symbol is decided and stopped at the timing t1 at which the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. It is the same as the case of (a) reference). In addition, although the lost stop mode at the time of extension is different from the case of the big hit and the case of the small hit, the single display mode is adopted although the lottery result of the big hit is different, and the display modes are distinguished. It has not been done.

  Furthermore, while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the lost stop mode at the time of extension in this way, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is performed until the decorative symbol is determined and stopped by the passage of the fluctuation time Ta2. As for a, as to the continuation expectation effect as to whether or not this is continued (for example, whether or not the character A that has fallen due to an attack from the enemy can stand up) The same as in the case of the extended effect pattern (see FIG. 112A) associated with the effect command “01H”.

  That is, even in the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (small hit) associated with the effect command "02H", in the first closed control period after the change of the special symbol is stopped, In fact, although the decorative symbol has been fixedly stopped, it succeeds in the continuation expectation production at the time of temporary stop (for example, character A which has been attacked by an enemy and has fallen) such expectation Under a sense of feeling, "a display effect after development a" will appear. Then, in this “display effect after development a”, for example, the situation in which the character A confronts the enemy again is displayed using the time until the end timing t2 of the first closed control period on the main control MPU 4100a side, etc. An indication is made as to whether or not the specific mission a can be made successful.

  Furthermore, in the same way, until the end timing t2 of the first closed control period arrives, the situation in which the specific mission a succeeds (the character A defeats the enemy) is not shown, and the specific An effect on whether or not the mission a can be made successful (an effect such as whether the character A attacks the enemy and this succeeds) appears. However, as described above with reference to FIG. 111 (b), the extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a (small hit) associated with the effect command "02H" has a fixed length. After the end of the first closing control period, the second closing control period having an indefinite length does not appear in such a manner that the closing control period is extended. Therefore, after the end timing t2 of the first closing control period, a specific opening is performed until the end timing t3 of the control for opening the big winning opening in the small opening game (small hitting game) at the effect command "02H". The loss explicit presentation a will appear in a form showing that the mission a has failed. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “02H” functions as “a loss effect pattern among effect patterns having effect content a”.

  In this loss explicit production a, for example, the attack by the character A is diverted and the enemy escapes, and then, a scene that the character A regrets is projected, etc., and it is performed as a hit effect of a big hit.

  According to the extension effect pattern associated with such effect commands "01H" and "02H", the opening end timing t3 of the special winning opening from the start timing t0 of the special symbol (or within the second closing control period Because the time until the jackpot explicit presentation a ends in) functions as one presentation that requires a big hit, it is possible to direct the player's gaze to such a presentation, and lose It becomes possible to make it hard to notice the opening of the special winning opening when the explicit effect a is being performed and, consequently, the pachinko machine 1 on which the small hit is mounted.

  In addition, in order to obtain such effects, even if the player confirms that the special winning opening is open, no information can be obtained (an event that may be a reason to confirm the opening) It is important to keep the configuration excluded). For example, in a pachinko machine 1 where a big hit game can be executed that opens the big winning opening in the same or similar opening mode as a small opening game (small hit game), then confirming the opening, then It becomes possible to recognize that the gaming state may be changed on condition of activation of the condition device. In addition, since the player can obtain information that can be an opportunity to quit the game, that the player has won the big hit with a small number of games that do not meet the low winning probability of the big hit, he pays attention to the opening of the big winning opening It may be a factor that makes them turn.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 112 (c), when the first effect mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a does not win either a big hit or a small hit (a pure loss Based on the fact that the special symbol having the fluctuation time Ta3 shown in FIG. 103 (here, described as being set at the same time as the timing t0 to t1) is If it is started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the display effect a at the time of the loss corresponding to the effect command "03H" (for example, whether a specific mission a can be made successful (character A The dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern with the content of whether or not the player can defeat the enemy is started. However, the display effect pattern (effect command “03H”) having the contents of the display effect a started in this way is displayed when the timing t1 at which the change of the special symbol is stopped by the elapse of the change time Ta3 This is ended without extending the effect a (in the form of failing a specific mission a).

  More specifically, the variation of the decorative symbol is also started at the time of the dynamic display of the display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a (without development) at the time of the loss corresponding to the effect command "03H". In addition, in this variation of the decorative symbol, when the final symbol is stopped at the extension at the timing t1 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the missing period at the extension. ing. In addition, as for the lost stop mode at the time of extension, a single display mode is made to appear at the time of the big hit, the case of the small hit, and the time of the lost.

  In addition, while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the lost stop mode at the time of extension, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is performed until the decorative symbol is determined and stopped by the passage of the fluctuation time Ta3. As for the point that it is made to perform continued expectation rendering (for example, whether or not the character A that has fallen due to an attack from the enemy can rise and stand, etc.) as to whether or not this is continued. This is the same as in the case of the extension effect pattern (see FIGS. 112A and 112B) associated with the commands “01H” and “02H”.

  However, in the display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a (no development) at the time of the loss associated with the effect command "03H", the continuation expectation effect at the time of temporary stop fails (for example, from the enemy It is shown that the fallen character A does not stand up in response to an attack), and the player is made to know that a specific mission has failed. By preparing such an effect pattern, an effect pattern continued even after timing t1 shown in FIGS. 112 (a), (b) and (d) can be made to function as an effect pattern with development become.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 112 (d), when the first effect mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a does not win either a big hit or a small hit (pure Based on the fact that a loss) has been obtained, the variation applied to the special symbol having the variation time Ta4 shown in FIG. 103 (here, described as being set to the same time as the timing t0 to t3) Is started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the display effect a (for example, whether a specific mission a can be made successful (character The dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having the content of whether or not A can defeat the enemy is started. However, in the case of the effect commands “01H” to “03H”, although the display effect pattern (effect command “03H”) having the contents of the display effect a started in this way is a non-extended display effect pattern Even when the timing t1 has arrived by the passage of the fluctuation time ta1 to ta3 of the special symbol, the display effect a is not ended (without the success or failure of the specific mission a) being continued. . Furthermore, in the dynamic display of the display effect pattern (render command “04H”), although the variation of the decorative symbol is started, the variation of the decorative symbol is also continued without ending at the timing t1. It has become.

  That is, in the case of a loss (pure loss), unlike the case of a big hit or a small hit, the time required for the opening control of the big winning opening is of course the first to maintain this in the closed state prior to the opening of the big winning opening. It is difficult to extend the time required for the display effect a with respect to the fluctuation time of the special symbol since the closing control period of is also immediately prepared for transition to the next fluctuation without being prepared.

  In this respect, for the display effect pattern (display effect a) associated with the effect command "04H", in the main control MPU 4100a, the time from the fluctuation start timing t0 at the small hit to the open end timing t3 of the big winning opening It prepares as what is adopted when fluctuation time Ta4 of the length according to this is selected on the basis of. Therefore, in this display effect pattern (display effect a), as in the case of the display effect pattern (display effect a) corresponding to the effect commands "01H" to "03H", the display effect a in the liquid crystal display device 1400 Although the effect with the content of appears, the special symbol is not stopped at the timing t1, and it is a display effect having a longer time in the first place.

  That is, in this case, with regard to any of the special symbol and the decorative symbol, although any of these variations is not decided to stop with the lost stop mode at the extension at the timing t1, among the symbols, the decorative symbol is As in the case of the display effect pattern associated with the effect commands "01H" to "03H", the fluctuation time Ta4 is extended before the timing t1, which is only a halfway stage, for the fluctuation time Ta4. Temporarily stop in the lost stop mode. Then, whether or not the display effect a on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is continued until the timing t1 arrives while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the lost stop mode at the time of extension in this way. For example, whether or not the character A that has fallen due to an attack from the enemy can rise can be performed. In addition, the lost stop mode at the time of extension is a single display even though the result of the big hit and the variation time are different between the big hit, the small hit and the loss (pure loss). An aspect is adopted, and the display aspect is not distinguished.

  And, in this way, while the decorative design is temporarily stopped, it succeeds in the continuation expectation production (for example, the character A which has fallen due to the attack from the enemy has risen up) such a sense of expectation By this, “display effect a after development” will appear. However, after this, the temporarily stopped decorative symbol is not returned to the fluctuation state again, and similarly to the display effect pattern associated with the effect commands “01H” to “03H”, for the display effect a Stop in a small display area (an end portion of the display area, etc.) in the small display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (determination stop in the case of “01H” to “03H”; Stop) is maintained until the timing t2.

  In this "display effect a after development", there is an effect as to whether or not the specific mission a can be made successful, for example, a situation in which the character A confronts the enemy again is projected within the fluctuation time Ta4. To be done. However, as in the case of the display effect pattern associated with the effect commands “01H” to “03H”, the situation in which the specific mission a succeeds (the character A is an enemy until the timing t2 comes) Not to be shown, but to make only a rendition as to whether or not the specific mission a can be made successful (a rendition such as whether the character A attacks the enemy and this will be successful) ing.

  Then, after timing t2, a situation is shown that a specific mission a failed until the end timing t3 of the control for opening the big winning opening in the small opening hit game (small hit game) for the effect command "02H". There will be a loss explicit rendition a in the form of In this lost explicit effect a, as in the case of the effect command "02H", for example, the attack by the character A is diverted and the enemy escapes, and then the character A shows a state of regret, etc. It is performed as a disappointing effect. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “04H” functions as “a loss effect pattern among effect patterns having effect content a”.

  As described above, in the first effect mode, based on the fact that the result of the big hit lottery is a loss, in the liquid crystal display device 1400, a specific loss effect pattern (rendering command “display effect a (display effect a)) appears When performing display control according to “04H”), when a specific variation time (variation time Ta4) is determined on the main control MPU 4100a side, within the determined particular variation time (variation time Ta4) Display control according to a specific loss effect pattern is performed in a form in which a specific effect content (display effect a) appears. Nevertheless, based on the fact that the result of the big hit lottery is a hit, a specific effect content (display effect a) appears in the liquid crystal display device 1400 with respect to the specific lost effect pattern (rendering command “04H”) When performing display control according to the hit effect pattern (render command “01H”), the main control MPU 4100a determines a fluctuation time (variation time Ta1) shorter than the above-mentioned specific fluctuation time (variation time Ta4). Not only the determined short variation time (variation time Ta1) but also a longer time including at least a predetermined interval period (first closed control period, second closed control period) as the presentation time To perform display control concerning a specific hit presentation pattern in the form that a specific presentation content (display presentation a) appears within this presentation time It was.

  According to such an effect method, the falling effect as to whether or not the hit is won and the opening effect are performed in the liquid crystal display device 1400 even in the predetermined interval period after the stop of the special symbol. Become. In addition, these effects can be appropriately cut to advance effects and games, and it is possible to realize a good tempo progression (game progress). In addition, when the display effect pattern of such specific effect contents (display effect a) appears, a noteworthy effect element will be added also in terms of whether or not the special symbol is stopped in the middle stage, When it is confirmed that the stop is confirmed, it is possible to grasp that the opportunity to obtain a winning ball by the opening of the big winning opening can be grasped, so that it becomes possible to improve the game interest.

  In addition, for the extended rendering pattern for the rendering command "01H" and "02H", the "display rendering a after development" is made by preparing the display rendering pattern for the rendering command "04H". It becomes possible to avoid having to set the big hit expectation at the time of appearing within the range restricted by the appearance ratio of big hit and small hit, it is avoided that the small hit is installed Even under such a rendering system that makes it difficult to recognize things, it is possible to perform rendering design with a higher degree of freedom as shown in FIG.

  Further, in the display effect pattern for the effect command "04H", since the special symbol is also changing after the timing t1, there is no problem even if the fluctuation state of the special symbol is confirmed by the player. Absent. Then, by preparing such non-extension effect patterns in combination with the extension effect patterns, it is possible for the player, even when the stop state of the special symbol in the extension effect patterns is confirmed. It will be possible to encourage awareness that may be a mistake.

  Also, in the display effect pattern for the effect command "04H", the lower large winning opening 2003 is not opened when the lost explicit effect a is being performed, so the lower large winning opening 2003 was confirmed by the player. There is no problem even in this case. And, by preparing such a non-open loss explicit presentation a in a form to be mixed with the loss explicit presentation a at the time of the above-mentioned effect command “02H”, the lower large winning opening 2003 in the loss explicit presentation a Even if the opening is confirmed, it is possible to urge the player to be aware that it may be a mistake.

  In the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment, in the display effect pattern for the effect commands "01H", "02H", and "04H", a specific mission a is required until the timing t2 arrives. Whether or not the character has succeeded (if the character A defeats the enemy) is not indicated, but whether or not the specific mission a is succeeded prior to the arrival of the timing t2 (the character A is It may be shown whether or not to defeat the enemy. That is, in this case, after the same result display appears, a big hit explicit rendition or a loss explicit rendition will be performed. In addition to the fact that most of the first closed control period of is used for the display effect a, after that, the appearance of the big hit such as showing the appearance that the character A regrets appears, the lost selection effect of the big hit It can be made to shift to the next change (reserve digestion of special symbols) relatively quickly after being sent.

  By the way, as described above, such a display effect appears when one of the effect commands “01H” to “04H” shown in FIG. 103 is received from the main control MPU 4100a in the first effect mode. It is. And, the player is not aware of the existence of a small hit which is not particularly required to realize such game characteristics (representation) in the first effect mode, and the big hit is won with the winning probability of the big hit. You will enjoy the game about whether or not you

  However, even if one of the effect commands “01H” to “04H” shown in FIG. 103 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side, when the second effect mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a The effect command from the side "01H" ~ "04H" The contents of this itself, of course, despite the fact that there is no change in that it is usually an external disadvantaged gaming state, but the big winning opening of the small winning winning Reversing and actively adopting the display effect pattern of the effect contents assuming opening the opportunity frequency of winning balls winning prize by opening the big winning opening is significantly compared to when it is in the first effect mode It is intended to realize the playability (rendering performance) as if it were increased.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 112 (a), it is shown in FIG. 103 based on the fact that the main control MPU 4100a has won a big hit when the second effect mode is set. Assuming that the fluctuation related to the special symbol having fluctuation time Ta1 is started (timing t0), liquid crystal display device 1400 has the contents of display effect a 'at the time of big hit corresponding to effect command "01H". The dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern and the variation of the decorative symbol are respectively started.

  However, the content of the display effect a ′ in the second effect mode is different from that of the display effect a in the first effect mode, and for example, can a specific mission a ′ be successful (this implementation? In the form of, the display effect pattern (challenge bonus) with contents such as whether or not the decorative symbol can be stopped and displayed with the bonus challenge stop symbol which makes it possible to grasp that the special winning opening is open and determined. It is prepared as an effect pattern). Therefore, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also performed over the entire display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (at least at a central portion of the display area or the like, which is easily noticed). As described above, in the second effect mode, the movement of the decorative symbol is focused on, and the bonus challenge stop symbol appears on the predetermined symbol line, depending on whether or not the decorative symbol can be stopped and displayed. The player is made to grasp the result of the lottery.

  In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment, the display pattern of the decorative symbol is made different between the first effect mode and the second effect mode. For example, the decorative symbol in the first effect mode is a relatively small symbol image mainly composed of numbers, while the decorative symbol in the second effect mode is displayed as a relatively large symbol image mainly consisting of characters In the second effect mode, etc., the decorative symbol is set as a display form that is more easily noticed.

  Then, in the non-extended display effect pattern for the effect command "01H", such a decorative symbol is stopped, for example, with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears in the fluctuation time Ta1 until the timing t1 arrives. A display effect a 'having contents such as an appropriate character struggles to appear is displayed, and at the timing t1 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped, the winning ball can be obtained by opening the special winning opening. The decorative symbol is fixedly stopped with the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears on the predetermined symbol line so that the player can grasp the game. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “01H” functions as “a hit effect pattern among the effect patterns having effect contents a ′”.

  In addition, when the decorative symbol is decided and stopped with the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears, the liquid crystal display device 1400 utilizes the first closed control period, and the player receives the game by opening the big winning opening. As an effect before the start of the challenge bonus effect about how much the number of award balls to be made is possible, the countdown effect a 'in which the operation timing of the operation handle portion 410 is indicated by the countdown display on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is performed It is like that.

  Here, as described above, the countdown effect a ′ is, for example, about 3 to 5 seconds of countdown display while explaining aiming at the effective gate 6010n by right-handed game, for example, the countdown When the operation handle portion 410 is operated with an appropriate amount of operation when the display changes to "0", the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n immediately after the first closing control period ends. .

  Therefore, according to such a countdown effect a ', when the operation handle portion 410 is operated as instructed by the same effect, as shown in FIG. 105 (a), the end timing t2 of the first closed control period is When the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n immediately after the arrival of the second closing control period end timing tx of the second closed control period comes earlier than in the case of the first effect mode. As a result, the challenge bonus effect regarding how much the number of winning balls that can be obtained by the player is started relatively early after the end timing t2 of the first closed control period comes. In the effect, it will be shown which opening mode (game for long opening, game for medium opening, game for small opening), etc. That is, in this case, the player will launch the game ball to the big winning opening also in the small opening hit game (small hit game) as well as the big hit game, and thereby, when in the first effect mode In comparison, the game effect (rendering effect) will be realized as if the frequency of chances of winning a winning ball by the opening of the big winning opening is significantly increased. The details of the effects during the big hit game will be described later.

  By the way, although this is also described above with reference to FIG. 111 (c), in such a big hit challenge bonus effect pattern, the operation is performed for a long time even after the countdown display in the countdown effect a 'changes to "0". It is also assumed that a situation may occur in which the handle portion is not operated. That is, in this case, the second closed control period having an indefinite length is continued for a long time, but in the second closed control period, the countdown display is “0” in the liquid crystal display device 1400. It is more desirable in order to weaken the player's interest which causes such a situation, to prevent new appearances from appearing, such as being displayed as “”.

  However, in the situation where the challenge bonus effect pattern appears, such a situation that the progress of the effect is stagnant is limited to the case where the jackpot is won, and the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of the small hit described later ( This can not occur in the case of FIGS. 111 (d) and 112 (b). That is, in this case, the amount of award balls that can be obtained by the amount that the possibility of playing a game per small opening is eliminated while being in a state of stagnation (no stage) in which no effect is newly performed. In addition to this, this will be dramatically enhanced with regard to the expectation of transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 112 (b), when the second effect mode is set, as shown in FIG. 112 (b), based on the fact that the small hit is won on the main control MPU 4100a side, FIG. Assuming that the fluctuation corresponding to the special symbol having the fluctuation time Ta2 (described here as being set to the same time as the timing t0 to t1) is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device In 1400, the dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having the content of the display effect a 'at the time of the small hit corresponding to the effect command "02H" and the fluctuation of the decorative symbol are respectively started.

  Then, the non-extended display effect pattern (effect command “02H”) having the contents of the display effect a ′ started in this way is also, for example, such a decorative pattern in the fluctuation time Ta2 until the timing t1 comes. A display effect a 'with contents such as an appropriate character struggling to make a stop display with a stop display mode in which a bonus challenge stop pattern appears is displayed, and at a timing t1 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped, The decorative symbol is fixedly stopped with the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears on the predetermined symbol line so that the player can recognize that the winning ball can be obtained by opening the winning opening. Become. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “02H” functions as “a hit effect pattern among the effect patterns having the effect content a ′”.

  However, as mentioned above, at the time of winning the small hit, the special symbol is stopped for the closing control period (opening period) from when the special symbol is stopped until the small opening hit game (small hit game) is started. It consists only of the time until the interval effect timer (8 seconds in this case) is timed up (the first closed control period with a fixed length), and when the timed up of the timer, the effective gate 6010n A small open hit game (small hit game) is to be started regardless of the presence or absence of passing of the game ball to (see FIG. 100).

  In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment, even in the case of the display effect pattern in the case of the effect command "02H", as in the case of the display effect pattern in the case of the effect command "01H", the decorative symbol When the game is decided and stopped with the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears, the first closed control period is used, and the number of winning balls that can be obtained by the player by opening the big winning opening is what As an effect before the start of the challenge bonus effect as to whether or not, the countdown effect a ′ indicated by the countdown display on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is performed as the operation timing of the operation handle portion.

  That is, in the display effect pattern in the second effect mode, the big hit and the small hit are both treated as opening for the big winning opening in the same manner, and the timing at which the variation of the decorative symbol is started It is not distinguished in the contents of the presentation from the time t0 to the time the challenge bonus effect is performed, and when the operation handle portion is operated as instructed by the effect, the bonus bonus effect is produced through the leading effect (not shown) from the countdown effect a '. The challenge bonus effect is started by the same series of effect contents as in the case of the jackpot challenge bonus effect pattern (render command “01H”), which is linked to the above. Therefore, not only the big hit but also the small hit will be treated as one type (type of hit) as a hit that enables the winning ball to be obtained by opening the big winning opening, and in the challenge bonus production, the long opening game is played In addition to the middle opening game, it is possible to perform an effect display on which game mode appears, including a small opening hit game. As a result, as compared with the case in the first effect mode, the game characteristic (rendering ability) can be realized as if the opportunity frequency of winning a prize ball by opening the big winning opening is greatly increased. In addition, among the big hit A to E etc. and the small hit, in view of the fact that the small open per game will end in a relatively short time among the long open per play, middle open per play, small open per play games. As to whether or not the small hit is won, the player may be made comprehensible by displaying a specific image which does not appear at the time of the big hit in the effect in the first closing control period.

  Thus, although the display effect pattern for the effect command "02H" is a display effect pattern based on one effect command, the small hit is given as a loss of a no chance that an opportunity for winning balls is not given ( An extension effect pattern in the first effect mode to be treated in the same way as the effect pattern (in the case of the effect command “04H”) at the time of a pure loss, and It is selectively executed as one of the non-extended display effect patterns (challenge bonus effect patterns) in the second effect mode treated in the same manner as the jackpot effect pattern (similar to the effect command "01H") . That is, in this case, the effect information relating to the hit is appropriately reversed on the peripheral control MPU 4150a side, and thereby, various effects that greatly differ in the content of the effect without changing the logic on the main control MPU 4100a side It can be realized.

  Furthermore, speaking further, small open games (small hit games) are not only the fact that only a small number of winning balls (about 40 to 50 in this embodiment) can be substantially acquired by the player as a bonus. Since the game state is not shifted to a game state more advantageous to the player than before the small opening game (small hit game) is performed, the game interest is lowered despite the opening and closing member 2006 being operated. It can be said that the handling on the game setting needs attention at a point that is important. Therefore, in the prior art, when loading a small hit, a small opening per play (small hit game) and a big hit game is performed with the same behavior as a game (small hit game), and a specific function functioning to shift to an advantageous gaming state thereafter First, prepare a winning type, and in a situation where a small opening game (small hitting game) is performed, make the player aware of the possibility of being a big hit game according to the winning of the specific winning type. Therefore, it was supposed that the main purpose was to maintain the fun of the game when a small open game was played (small hit game). However, even if it is such a conventional gaming machine, when it is elected to a specific winning type, it is finally decided to be a big hit at the probability of winning the big hit which is set extremely low in the normal gaming state Nevertheless, the decline in game interest (the decrease in game interest due to the gap between the jackpot probability and the jackpot real probability) due to the fact that the prize balls commensurate with this low probability can not be obtained is becoming inevitable The

  In this respect, with the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when carrying a small hit, a big hit game is performed with a behavior similar to a small open hit game (small hit game) and an advantageous game state thereafter In order to suppress the decline in the fun of gaming when a small opening game is played (small hitting game) in that a specific winning species that functions to shift to a small opening is not prepared, the technical idea is originally a conventional gaming machine It is very different.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when mounting a small hit, a jackpot winning type is prepared so that a plurality of types of big hit games different in the amount of winning balls obtainable by the player can be executed. It is supposed to be done. And, on the occasion of opening the big winning opening, first, the lottery result where the opening of the big winning opening is decided in the big hit drawing (a big hit where a large number of withdrawals are expected to be obtained, a big hit that is not so, a small amount of delivery is obtained A display effect is made as to whether or not the expected small hit has been obtained (a challenge bonus effect pattern is made to appear regardless of the type of hit). As a result, when it is indicated that the lottery result is obtained, it is possible for the player to be able to grasp that at least a small amount of balls can be obtained. After that, there will be more challenge bonus effects on how much extra balls can be piled up (can be piled up from getting a small amount of balls out to medium or large amounts of balls out) It is like that.

  Furthermore, when there is an increase in the number of winning balls, there is a possibility that a change to a game state (a game state in which the probability variation function or the time reduction function is activated) advantageous to the player may be made. In this respect, in this embodiment, depending on how many balls are piled up (a big hit that is expected to obtain a large amount of balls) or a big hit that is expected to obtain a medium amount of balls) The degree of expectation for operation (probability of transition to the game state in which the probability variation function operates) is made different. That is, in this case, a challenge bonus as to which of a plurality of types of operation modes appear so that the probability that the change to the gaming state in which the probability fluctuation function operates is different after opening the special winning opening is different. It will function as an effect. Therefore, in such a challenge bonus presentation, a higher probability that the winning probability "3/400" without the activation of the conditional device is added to the winning probability "1/400" with the activation of the conditional device Not only that a winning ball can be paid out to the player with "1/100" (in other words, that the opening and closing member 2006 operates), it can be shifted to a gaming state advantageous to the player. You will also be able to make them aware.

  Moreover, according to such a challenge bonus effect, since it is positioned as a default effect state that a small amount of balls can be obtained, it is possible to obtain a large amount of balls according to the jackpot winning. Unlike a conventional gaming machine in which whether or not a basic game (basic effect) is made, even when a small opening game (small hit game) is performed in which a small amount of balls can be obtained, Since only the big winning opening has been opened in a form in line with the default rendering state, the decline in gaming entertainment will be suppressed. Furthermore, when it is in the second effect mode, the probability of appearance of a hit effect (probability of entering into a challenge bonus) is determined by the fact that it is positioned as a default effect state that a small amount of withdrawal balls can be obtained. ) Is also set to a higher probability (the probability of winning a big hit to the probability of winning a big hit plus the probability of winning a small hit), and this makes it possible to play the game by not being able to obtain a prize ball for a low probability. Deterioration of interest is also avoided.

  And, in order to be provided with a challenge bonus effect pattern that realizes such game and effect in the second effect mode, a lottery for a small hit is performed also in the first effect mode, as a matter of course, At the time of the small hit, the variation time Ta2 to Td2 having a length matched to the variation time Ta1 to Td1 of the special symbol at the time of the big hit can be selected. However, in the first effect mode, essentially no small hit is necessary, and a display effect as to whether or not a big hit has been won is basically performed based on the big hit probability. Therefore, in the first effect mode, it is convenient to realize a display effect that makes it difficult for the player to notice that the player is a pachinko machine equipped with a small hit, but the variation of the special symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1400 In the case of simply adopting a presentation method in which the result of the big hit lottery appears at the time of stop, after the stop of the special symbol, the opening period at the time of execution of the small opening hit game (small hit game) The presence may be noticeable, and the game interest may be reduced.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, in the first effect mode, there is a timing t1 at which the flag corresponding to the fixed stop command is set (at the end of the variation of the special symbol) Also, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is not ended but is continued. In addition, when entering the first closed control period, a flag corresponding to the interval effect command is set at timing t1, but the peripheral control MPU 4150a indicates that the special winning opening is to be opened. The setting of the command is ignored without switching to the effect, and the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is continued. Then, when it is at timing t2 when the first close control period ends and the second close control period starts, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400, the result of the big hit lottery is the hit with the operation of the condition device It is executed in the form of switching to an explicit presentation where the information on whether or not it is (big hit) is shown, and further an opening presentation.

  That is, in this case, the above-mentioned small hit production is positioned as one production that appears at the time of the big hit, but also after the stop of the special symbol, the first closing for the small open hit game (small hit game) By performing over the control period and the opening period of the big winning opening after that, it is indicated that it is a big hit after showing that it is a big hit, and it is a display effect concerning the next change (the special character's reserve digestion) You will be able to migrate. As a result, the presentation proceeds in the same manner as in the so-called high expectation lost presentation, so the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a hit (small hit) that does not accompany the operation of the condition device. As a result, it becomes difficult to notice that, in turn, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game interest due to the operation of the opening / closing member 2006 in response to the small hit.

  And, in the pachinko machine 1 in which such a first rendering mode and a second rendering mode are prepared, in particular, as described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment is the first rendering mode. And a second effect mode, and the mode forcible control means is provided for creating a mode forcible period in which a change by the player's operation from the forcibly determined effect mode is not permitted. ing. Then, on this, the first predetermined period (for example, one month) after the pachinko machine 1 is delivered to the hole is forcibly determined to be the first effect mode, and the first predetermined period has elapsed. The control according to creation of the mode forcible period is performed so as to forcibly determine the second predetermined period (for example, for the next one month) after that to the second effect mode.

  According to such a mode compulsory period, the hole side conceals the player against the small hit even though the small hit is loaded by the appearance of the extension effect pattern as described above during the first predetermined period. The player is presented with the winning ball to the player under the jackpot probability of "1/400" by performing the hit display in the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 based on the jackpot probability of "1/400" while making the jackpot. It is possible to start the operation of the first gaming specification pachinko machine that can be paid out (the first renewal opening store). Also, in this way, in the second predetermined period after the first predetermined period has elapsed, not only the big hit but also the small hit is treated as one type of hit that enables the winning ball to be obtained by opening the big winning opening. By making the above-mentioned challenge bonus effect pattern appear, combined with the fact that the presence of the small hit is made difficult to notice in the first predetermined period, the probability of being higher than the winning probability “1/400” of the big hit On the basis of “1/100”, hit display is performed in the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400.

  That is, in this case, the winning balls can be paid out to the player under the higher probability "1/100" obtained by adding the small hit probability "3/400" to the jackpot probability "1/400" It will be possible to start the operation of a new second game specification pachinko machine (second new store opening). Thereby, although it is the pachinko machine 1 which is originally equipped with only one game specification, another pachinko machine having a different game specification for taking out balls as well as the contents of presentation on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is newly operated. It will be possible to give the player an impression like a vibes.

  Furthermore, according to such a forced mode period, it is determined that the predetermined month and day (first predetermined period) has not elapsed and it is determined that the specified date and time (second predetermined period) are present. Not only the change control from the first effect mode is not permitted, but also the effect control with some of the effect modes (second effect mode) of the plurality of effect modes still hidden without appearing Will be done. That is, in this case, as the date passes since the pachinko machine 1 is delivered to the hall, the rendering function which has been hidden until then becomes gradually exposed, and finally it becomes Since it becomes possible to selectively use the rendered function by the operation of the player, it is possible to maintain the game interest over a long day.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 112 (c), when the second effect mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a does not win either a big hit or a small hit (a pure loss Based on the fact that the special symbol having the fluctuation time Ta3 shown in FIG. 103 (here, described as being set at the same time as the timing t0 to t1) is If it is started (timing t0), in liquid crystal display device 1400, dynamic display of a non-extended display effect pattern having the contents of display effect a 'at the time of loss associated with effect command "03H" , And start the variation of the decoration pattern.

  Then, the non-extended display effect pattern (effect command “03H”) having the contents of the display effect a ′ started in this way is also, for example, such a decorative pattern in the fluctuation time Ta3 until the timing t1 comes. A display effect a 'appears with content such as an appropriate character struggling to stop display with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears. However, at timing t1 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol is decidedly stopped with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on the predetermined symbol line without any effort by the appropriate character. It becomes (a challenge bonus presentation pattern). As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command "03H" functions as "a loss effect pattern among effect patterns having effect content a '".

  As described above, the display effect pattern for the effect command “03H” is set to “non-extended display effect pattern” regardless of the effect mode. Therefore, when the display effect pattern is in the first effect mode, it is between the effect pattern (effect command “01H”) having the contents of the display effect a at the time of the big hit when the “extension effect pattern” is adopted. Because there is a gap in the rendering time at the event, it can not function as a rendering pattern at the time of losing to the rendering pattern with the content of the display rendering a at the time of the big hit, and the content of the display rendering a develops As described above, it will function only as a halfway effect pattern that ends in the middle stage.

  On the other hand, when in the second effect mode, the display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a 'at the time of the big hit when the effect command "01H" is "non-extended display effect pattern (challenge bonus effect pattern Since it appears as “), there is no shift in the rendering time with the same rendering pattern (rendering command“ 01H ”), and a rendering pattern (rendering command“ with rendering a 'at the time of a big hit ” 01H ′ ′) functions as an effect pattern (a bonus challenge stop pattern does not appear on a predetermined symbol line) at the time of losing. Also, as described above, when in the second effect mode, the "non-extended display effect pattern" having the contents of the display effect a 'at the time of the small hit when the effect command "02H" is also the effect at the time of the hit Since it appears as a pattern (a bonus challenge stop symbol appears on a predetermined symbol line), a effect pattern (a bonus challenge stop symbol is a predetermined one) at the time of losing also for this effect pattern (render command “02H”) It will function as an effect pattern that does not appear on the symbol line.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 112 (d), when the second effect mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a does not win either the big hit or the small hit (pure Based on the fact that a loss) has been obtained, the variation applied to the special symbol having the variation time Ta4 shown in FIG. 96 (here, described as being set to the same time as the timing t0 to t3) Is started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect c 'at the time of loss associated with the effect command "04H" Is started.

  That is, for the display effect pattern for the effect command "04H", when the display effect pattern for the effect command "03H" is in the first effect mode, it has the contents of the display effect a at the time of the big hit. In view of the fact that it can not function as a rendering pattern at the time of loss with respect to the rendering pattern (rendering command “01H”), in order to compensate this (the rendering pattern at the time of losing in the first rendering mode) It is prepared. Therefore, the display effect pattern for the effect command "04H" adopts the "non-extended effect pattern" when in the second effect mode, contrary to the display effect pattern for the effect command "03H". There will be a gap in the rendering time between the rendering pattern (rendering command "01H") with the content of the display effect a 'at the time of the big hit being performed, and the rendering with the content of the display effect a' at the big hit It can not function as an effect pattern at the time of losing the pattern.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the variation time Tc1 for the variation number "9" shown in FIG. 103 and the variation time Tc2 for the variation number "10" are represented by the variation number "4". Is prepared as a fluctuation time having the same length as the fluctuation time Ta4 at the time of. That is, in this case, when it is in the second effect mode, the display effect pattern (see FIG. 106A) described later having the contents of the display effect c 'at the time of the big hit in the case of the effect command "09H" Since it appears as an extended display effect pattern, there is no occurrence of a gap in the effect time with the same effect pattern (render command “09H”). Therefore, with regard to the display effect pattern in the case of the effect command "04H", when it is in the second effect mode, it is not having the contents of the display effect c 'at the time of the loss associated with the effect command "04H" By starting it as a dynamic display of the extended display effect pattern, the effect pattern (bonus at the time of losing) to the effect pattern (rendering command “09H”) having the contents of the display effect c ′ at the time of the big hit The challenge stop symbol is made to function as an effect pattern) which does not appear on a predetermined symbol line.

  In the non-extended display effect pattern (render command “04H”) having the contents of the display effect c ′ started in this way, such a decorative pattern is displayed, for example, in the fluctuation time Ta4 until the timing t3 comes. A display effect c 'appears with contents such as an appropriate character struggling to make a stop display with a stop display mode in which a bonus challenge stop symbol appears. However, at timing t3 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol is decidedly stopped with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on the predetermined symbol line without any effort by the appropriate character. Become.

  As described above, the display effect pattern for the effect command "04H" appears when the specific lost change time Ta4 is selected, but the effect command (change time) from the main control MPU 4100a is different. It becomes a thing that can function as each missing display effect pattern for the big hit display effect pattern of two types of effect contents a and c ', and functions as a missing display effect pattern for any of those big hit display effect patterns The selection is selectively made based on which of the first effect mode and the second effect mode is set. Thus, with regard to the two big hit presentation commands "01H" and "09H", the big hit presentation commands "01H" in the first production mode and in the second production mode. The appearance probability of the lost display effect pattern prepared for the big hit display effect pattern of “09H” can be changed.

  More specifically, with regard to the jackpot effect pattern of the effect command "01H", in the first effect mode, although the effect command "04H" at the time of losing is adopted as the loss effect pattern, the second In the effect mode, the effect command "04H" at the time of the loss is not adopted as the loss effect pattern. Therefore, with regard to the jackpot effect pattern of the effect command "01H", the appearance probability for the lost effect pattern of the effect command "04H" is higher in the second effect mode than in the first effect mode. Also, with regard to the jackpot effect pattern of the effect command "09H", in the first effect mode, the effect command "04H" at the time of losing is not adopted as the loss effect pattern although it is not adopted. In the effect mode, the effect command "04H" at the time of losing is adopted as the missing effect pattern. Therefore, with regard to the jackpot effect pattern of the effect command "09H", the appearance probability for the loss effect pattern of the effect command "04H" is higher in the first effect mode than in the second effect mode. As a result, without changing the logic on the side of the main control MPU 4100a one by one, it is possible to make a variety of display effect patterns having different degrees of expectation depending on the effect mode (see FIG. 114).

  In addition, as a reason that such special effects can be realized, a production command in which the lengths of the respective effects are adjusted by using up to the stop timing t3 of the special symbol for one lost fluctuation time Ta4 as the production time Even with the jackpot effect pattern of "09H" and a fluctuation time Ta1 shorter than the relevant loss fluctuation time Ta4, by using at least the first closed control period after stopping the symbol as an effect time, each other's effects The big hit rendering pattern (first rendering mode) of the rendering command “01H” whose length has been adjusted is prepared. That is, by preparing the big hit presentation pattern adjusted in this way, the big hit presentation patterns of the presentation commands “01H” and “09H” having different fluctuation times Ta1 and Tc1 are associated with one lost fluctuation time Ta4. When this lost fluctuation time Ta4 is selected, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can determine which of the effect contents a and c 'appear. Furthermore, even in such a first closed control period to be added as a rendering time, when it is elected to open the big winning opening (big hit or small hit), a certain length regardless of its type It is important to set it as a time (for example, 8 seconds) which has a time, and particularly to realize such a special effect including an effect pattern at the time of a small hit.

  FIG. 113 is a time chart showing an example of display effect appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when any of the effect commands “09H” to “11H” shown in FIG. 103 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side.

  As shown in FIG. 113 (a), the variation time shown in FIG. 103 is based on the fact that the main control MPU 4100a has won a big hit when it is currently set to the first effect mode. Assuming that the variation related to the special symbol having Tc1 is started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the display effect c at the time of big hit corresponding to the effect command "09H" (for example, a specific mission c The dynamic display of the extension effect pattern having the content of whether or not the character C can succeed (such as whether or not the character C can defeat the enemy) is started. And the extended effect pattern (effect command “09H”) having the contents of the display effect c started in this way is in a situation where the timing t3 when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped by the passage of the fluctuation time Tc1 This is continued without ending the display effect c (without making the specific mission c succeed or fail).

  That is, as described above, the fluctuation time Tc1 at the fluctuation number "9" shown in FIG. 103 is prepared as the fluctuation time having the same length as the fluctuation time Ta4 at the fluctuation number "4". Since there is such an “extended effect pattern” when it is set to the first effect mode, there is a gap in the effect time with the same effect pattern (effect command “04H”). Is supposed to occur. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when it is in the first effect mode, the relativistic relationship (big hit effect pattern, lost effect effect) with the display effect pattern at the time of the change number "4" Pattern is not given.

  Further, at the time of the dynamic display of the extension effect pattern at the time of the effect command "09H", the variation of the decorative symbol is also started. However, with regard to the variation of the decorative symbol, at the timing t3 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped, the determination is made to stop with the lost stop mode at the time of extension.

  In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment, when the decorative symbol is determined and stopped, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the losing stop mode at the extension time within the fluctuation time Tc1. Then, while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the lost stop mode at the time of extension, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is performed until the decorative symbol is determined and stopped by the passage of the fluctuation time Tc1. For example, continuous expectation rendering (for example, whether or not the character C falling down due to an attack from the enemy can rise) is performed as to whether or not this is continued.

  That is, in this case, since the display effect c (no development, missing) described later associated with the command “11H” shown in FIG. 103 is prepared, the display effect c is also performed at the time when the timing t3 has passed. When this is continued, this will function as “display effect after development c (representation in which the chance for the specific mission c to be successful is left)”. Therefore, when the "display effect after development c" appears, the special symbol is displayed from the player's side, even though it is in the first closed control period after the variation of the special symbol is stopped. It can be understood as something that is still fluctuating. Further, the decorative symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1400 can also be understood as being in the state of temporary stop, although it is in the situation after being decided and stopped, and thus, at the time of the above-mentioned extension It is possible to show that the chance to be shown that the jackpot is won in the form of being overturned is still left.

  However, at this time, the extended rendering pattern (rendering command “09H”) having the content of the display rendering c is performed in the large display region (the center or the entire display region) of the liquid crystal display device 1400. Above, with regard to the variable display of the decorative symbol, such display effect c should be performed only in a small display area (an inconspicuous place such as an end portion of the display area) of the liquid crystal display device 1400. However, it is more desirable in order to make the player grasp the result of the big hit lottery depending on whether or not the specific mission c in the display effect c can be made successful without letting the player pay attention to the movement of the decorative symbol.

  That is, in the extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect c (big hit) associated with the effect command "09H", in the first closed control period after the change of the special symbol is stopped, the actual effect Even though the decorative symbol has been fixedly stopped, it succeeds in the continuation expectation production at the time of temporary stop (for example, the character C that has fallen due to the attack from the enemy has risen up) such a sense of expectation While being held, "demonstration effect after development c" will appear. In this “display effect c after development”, the time until the end timing t4 of the first closed control period on the main control MPU 4100a side is used to display, for example, a situation in which the character C faces the enemy again, and so on. A presentation is made as to whether the mission c can be made successful.

  However, although it will be described later, such “display effect c after development (representation as to whether or not the specific mission c can be made successful)” in the first closed control period on the main control MPU 4100 a side is shown in FIG. It is performed also in the extension effect pattern having the contents of the display effect c (small hit) associated with the command "10H". And, as described above, in order to make it difficult to notice that the small hit is the pachinko machine 1 equipped with the small hit when in the first effect mode, the display effect c (small hit) is a big hit It is more desirable to shift to the next change (reserve digestion of special symbols) relatively quickly after

  Therefore, in the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (big hit) associated with the effect command "09H", the specific effect is given until the end timing t4 of the first closed control period arrives. An indication as to whether or not a specific mission c can be made successful (a character C makes an attack on the enemy, and this succeeds) without showing how the mission c succeeded (the character C defeats the enemy). To make it appear. As a result, the jackpot explicit effect c can appear in a form showing that the specific mission c succeeds after the end timing t4 of the opening effect, and the display effect pattern associated with the effect command "09H" Is to function as "a hit presentation pattern of the presentation pattern having presentation content c".

  However, as described above, in the extension effect pattern at the time of a big hit, after the first closed control period having a fixed length is finished, the closed control period is extended in a form of having an indefinite length. The closed control period of 2 is to appear further. Then, within the second closing control period, a part of the effect contents (big hit explicit effect c) in the extended effect pattern at the big hit and the opening effect before the big hit game (starting the big hit game by performing the right-handed game) It is designed to be able to be performed) Then, when the game ball passes the effective gate 6010 n as a result of operating the operation handle portion 410 at an appropriate timing according to the understanding speed of each player for these effects, the second closing control period Ends, and consequently, the big hit game and the big hit game in-progress will be started. The details of the effects during the big hit game will be described later.

  Further, this is also as described above with reference to FIG. 104 (a), but the second closed control period from the timing t4 to the timing ty is ended based on the operation handle portion 410 being operated. (The period having a fixed length), for example, immediately after the end of the first closed control period having a fixed length, the effective gate 6010n is operated by operating the operation handle portion 410. If you play a game to pass, the jackpot explicit production c and the opening production, etc. are cut at that point, or the production itself is almost not made to appear (play production), and forced to the next production (production in the big hit game) It will be advanced.

  On the other hand, the fluctuation time Tc2 (here, fluctuation time shown in FIG. 103) shown in FIG. 103 based on the fact that the small control is won on the main control MPU 4100a side when the first effect mode is set. Assuming that the variation related to the special symbol having the same time as Tc1 is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1400 is associated with the rendering command “10H”. Dynamic display of the extended rendering pattern with the contents of small-hit display effect c (for example, whether or not the specific mission c can be successful (can the character C defeat the enemy), etc.) It is started. Then, in the case of the extended effect pattern (see FIG. 106 (a)), the extended effect pattern (the effect command "10H") having the contents of the display effect c started in this way is also associated with the effect command "09H" Similarly, even in the situation where the timing t3 at which the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped by the passage of the fluctuation time Tc2 comes, without ending the display effect c (without making the specific mission c succeed or fail) ) Let this continue.

  In addition, also at the time of the dynamic display of the extension effect pattern having the contents of the display effect c (small hit) associated with the effect command "10H", the variation of the decorative symbol is started. In addition, an extension effect pattern associated with the effect command “09H” (see FIG. 106) also for the point at which the change of the decorative symbol is decided and stopped at the timing t3 at which the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. It is the same as the case of (a) reference). In addition, although the lost stop mode at the time of extension is different from the case of the big hit and the case of the small hit, the single display mode is adopted even though the lottery result is different between the big hit and the small hit. As described above, it is not done.

  Furthermore, while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the lost stop mode at the time of extension, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is performed until the decorative symbol is determined and stopped by the passage of the fluctuation time Tc2. As to c, as to the continuation expectation effect as to whether or not this is continued (for example, whether or not the character C which has fallen due to an attack from the enemy can rise), etc. This is the same as in the case of the extended effect pattern (see FIG. 113A) associated with the effect command “09H”.

  That is, even in the extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect c (small hit) associated with the effect command "10H", in the first closed control period after the change of the special symbol is stopped, In fact, although the decorative symbol has been fixedly stopped, it succeeds in the continuation expectation production at the time of the temporary stop (for example, the character C which has been attacked by the enemy and has fallen) such expectation Under a sense of feeling, "development display effect c" will appear. Then, in this “display effect c after development”, for example, the situation in which the character C confronts the enemy again is displayed using the time until the end timing t4 of the first close control period on the main control MPU 4100a side, etc. An indication is made as to whether or not the particular mission c can be made successful.

  Furthermore, in the same way, the situation in which the specific mission c succeeds (the character C defeats the enemy) is not shown until the end timing t4 of the first closed control period comes, and the specific An effect on whether or not the mission c can be made successful (an effect such as whether the character C attacks the enemy and whether this succeeds) appears. However, as described above with reference to FIG. 111 (b), the extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect c (small hit) associated with the effect command "10H" has a fixed length. After the end of the first closing control period, the second closing control period having an indefinite length does not appear in such a manner that the closing control period is extended. Therefore, after the end timing t4 of the first closing control period, until the end timing t5 of the control for opening the lower large winning opening 2003 in the small opening game (small hit game) when the rendering command is "10H", The loss explicit presentation c will appear in a form showing that the specific mission c has failed. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “10H” functions as “a loss effect pattern among effect patterns having effect content c”.

  In this loss explicit production c, for example, the attack by the character C is diverted and the enemy escapes, and then, a picture showing that the character C regrets is displayed, etc. To be done.

  According to the extension effect pattern associated with such effect commands "09H" and "10H", the opening end timing t5 of the special winning opening from the start timing t0 of the special symbol (or within the second closing control period Because the time until the jackpot explicit effect c ends in) functions as one effect that takes a big hit in the hit, it becomes possible to direct the player's gaze to such a effect, and lose It becomes possible to make it hard to notice the opening of the special winning opening when the explicit effect c is being performed and, consequently, the pachinko machine 1 on which the small hit is mounted.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 113 (c), when the first effect mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a does not win either a big hit or a small hit (a pure loss Based on the fact that the special symbol having the fluctuation time Tc3 shown in FIG. 103 (here, described as being set at the same time as the timing t0 to t3) is If it is started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the display effect c at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “11H” (for example, can a specific mission c be made successful (character C The dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern with the content of whether or not the player can defeat the enemy is started. However, the display effect pattern (effect command “11H”) having the contents of the display effect c started in this way is displayed when the timing t3 at which the change of the special symbol is stopped by the elapse of the change time Tc3 This is ended (in the form of failing a specific mission c) without extending the effect c.

  More specifically, the variation of the decorative symbol is also started at the time of the dynamic display of the display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect c (without development) at the time of the loss associated with the effect command "11H". In addition, in this variation of the decorative symbol, when the final symbol is stopped at the extension at the timing t3 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the missing period at the extension. ing.

  In addition, while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the lost stop mode at the time of extension, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is performed until the decorative symbol is determined and stopped by the passage of the fluctuation time Tc3. As for the point that it is made to perform the continuous expectation expectation effect (for example, whether or not the character C which has fallen due to the attack from the enemy can rise and stand etc.) about whether or not this is continued. This is the same as the extension effect pattern (see FIGS. 113A and 113B) associated with the commands “09H” and “10H”.

  However, in the display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect c (without development) at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “11H”, the continuation expectation effect at the time of temporary stop fails (for example It is shown that the character C falling down due to an attack does not stand up) and the player is made to know that a specific mission has failed. By preparing such an effect pattern, an effect pattern that continues even after timing t3 shown in FIGS. 113A and 113B can function as an effect pattern with development.

  In the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment, in the display effect pattern for the effect commands "09H" and "10H" as well, whether or not the specific mission c succeeds until the timing t4 arrives. Whether (character C defeats the enemy or not) is not shown, but it is determined whether or not the specific mission c is successful prior to the arrival of timing t 4 (character C defeats the enemy Or not may be indicated. That is, in this case, after the same result display appears, a big hit explicit rendition or a loss explicit rendition will be performed. In addition to the fact that most of the first closed control period of is used for the display effect c, after that, the appearance of the big hit such as showing the appearance that the character C regrets appears, the lost selection effect of the big hit It can be made to shift to the next change (reserve digestion of special symbols) relatively quickly after being sent.

  By the way, as described above, such a display effect appears when one of the effect commands “09H” to “11H” shown in FIG. 103 is received from the main control MPU 4100a in the first effect mode. It is. And, the player is not aware of the existence of a small hit which is not particularly required to realize such game characteristics (representation) in the first effect mode, and the big hit is won with the winning probability of the big hit. You will enjoy the game about whether or not you

  However, even when one of the rendering commands “09H” to “11H” shown in FIG. 103 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side, when the second rendering mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a The effect command from the side "09H"-"11H" itself itself, of course, despite the fact that there is no change in that it is usually an external disadvantaged gaming state, but the big winning opening by the small win Reversing and actively adopting the display effect pattern of the effect contents assuming opening the opportunity frequency of winning balls winning prize by opening the big winning opening is significantly compared to when it is in the first effect mode It is intended to realize the playability (rendering performance) as if it were increased.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 113 (a), it is shown in FIG. 103 based on the fact that the main control MPU 4100a has won a big hit when the second effect mode is set. Assuming that the change related to the special symbol having the change time Tc1 is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1400 has the contents of the display effect c 'at the time of big hit corresponding to the effect command "09H". The dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern and the variation of the decorative symbol are respectively started.

  However, the content of the display effect c 'in the second effect mode is different from that of the display effect c in the first effect mode. For example, whether a specific mission c' can be made successful In the form of, the display effect pattern (challenge bonus) with contents such as whether or not the decorative symbol can be stopped and displayed with the bonus challenge stop symbol which makes it possible to grasp that the special winning opening is open and determined. It is prepared as an effect pattern). Therefore, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also performed over the entire display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (at least at a central portion of the display area or the like, which is easily noticed). As described above, in the second effect mode, the movement of the decorative symbol is focused on, and the bonus challenge stop symbol appears on the predetermined symbol line, depending on whether or not the decorative symbol can be stopped and displayed. The player is made to grasp the result of the lottery.

  Then, in the non-extended display effect pattern (challenge bonus effect pattern) for the effect command "09H", for example, such a decorative symbol is a bonus challenge stop symbol in the fluctuation time Tc1 until the timing t3 comes. A display effect c 'having contents such as an appropriate character struggling to make a stop display with a stop display mode appearing appears, and at the timing t3 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped, the prize ball is opened by opening the special winning opening. In order to make it possible for the player to know that the opportunity for acquisition is given, the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped with the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears on the predetermined symbol line. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “09H” functions as “a hit effect pattern among the effect patterns having the effect content c ′”.

  In addition, when the decorative symbol is decided and stopped in the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears, the liquid crystal display device 1400 can obtain the player by opening the big winning opening using the first closed control period. As an effect before the start of the challenge bonus effect c 'on how much the number of award balls is considered to be, the countdown effect c' is performed in which the operation timing of the operation handle portion is indicated by the countdown display on the liquid crystal display device 1400 It is like that.

  Here, with the countdown effect c ', as described above, for example, while aiming at the effective gate 6010n by right-handed game, a countdown display of, for example, about 3 to 5 seconds is performed, and this countdown When the operation handle portion 410 is operated with an appropriate amount of operation when the display changes to "0", the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n immediately after the first closing control period ends. . However, although this countdown effect c 'is different from the countdown effect a' described above, the countdown effect c 'will be performed as different effect contents (for example, different background colors, etc.) since the degree of expectation is different. I have to.

  Therefore, according to such a countdown effect c ', when the operation handle is operated as instructed by the effect, as shown in FIG. 113 (a), the end timing t4 of the first closed control period comes. Immediately after that, since the game ball passes the effective gate 6010n, the end timing ty of the second close control period comes earlier than in the case of the first effect mode. As a result, the challenge bonus effect regarding how much the number of winning balls that can be obtained by the player is started relatively early after the end timing t4 of the first closed control period comes. In the effect, it will be shown which opening mode (game for long opening, game for medium opening, game for small opening), etc. That is, in this case, the player will launch the game ball to the big winning opening also in the small opening hit game (small hit game) as well as the big hit game, and thereby, when in the first effect mode In comparison, the game effect (rendering effect) will be realized as if the frequency of chances of winning a winning ball by the opening of the big winning opening is significantly increased. The details of the effects during the big hit game will be described later.

  By the way, this is also described above with reference to FIG. 111 (c), but in such a big hit challenge bonus effect pattern, the operation is performed for a long time even after the countdown display in the countdown effect c 'changes to "0". It is also assumed that a situation may occur in which the handle portion 410 is not operated. That is, in this case, the second closed control period having an indefinite length is continued for a long time, but in the second closed control period, the countdown display is “0” in the liquid crystal display device 1400. It is more desirable in order to weaken the player's interest which causes such a situation, to prevent new appearances from appearing, such as being displayed as “”.

  However, in the situation where the challenge bonus effect pattern appears, such a situation that the progress of the effect is stagnant is limited to the case where the jackpot is won, and the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of the small hit described later ( This can not occur in the case of FIGS. 111 (d) and 113 (b)). That is, in this case, the amount of award balls that can be obtained by the amount that the possibility of playing a game per small opening is eliminated while being in a state of stagnation (no stage) in which no effect is newly performed. In addition to this, this will be dramatically enhanced with regard to the expectation of transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 113 (b), when the second effect mode is set, as shown in FIG. 113 (b), based on the fact that the main control MPU 4100a has won a small hit, FIG. Assuming that the fluctuation corresponding to the special symbol having the fluctuation time Tc2 (here, described as being set to the same time as the timing t0 to t3) is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device In 1400, the dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having the content of the display effect c 'at the time of the small hit corresponding to the effect command "10H" and the fluctuation of the decorative symbol are respectively started.

  Then, the non-extended display effect pattern (effect command “10H”) having the contents of the display effect c ′ started in this way is also, for example, such a decorative pattern in the fluctuation time Tc2 until the timing t3 comes. In addition, a display effect c 'having contents such as an appropriate character struggling to make a stop display with a stop display mode in which a bonus challenge stop pattern appears is displayed, and at a timing t3 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped The decorative symbol is fixedly stopped with the stop display mode in which the challenge stop symbol appears on the predetermined symbol line. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command "10H" functions as "a hit effect pattern among the effect patterns having the effect content c '".

  However, as mentioned above, at the time of winning the small hit, the special symbol is stopped for the closing control period (opening period) from when the special symbol is stopped until the small opening hit game (small hit game) is started. It consists only of the time until the interval effect timer (8 seconds in this case) is timed up (the first closed control period with a fixed length), and when the timed up of the timer, the effective gate 6010n A small open hit game (small hit game) is to be started regardless of the presence or absence of passing of the game ball to (see FIG. 100).

  In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment, even in the case of the display effect pattern in the case of the effect command "10H", as in the case of the display effect pattern in the case of the effect command "09H", the decorative symbol When the game is decided and stopped with the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears, the first closed control period is used, and the number of winning balls that can be obtained by the player by opening the big winning opening is what As an effect before the start of the challenge bonus effect as to whether or not, the countdown effect c ′ is performed in which the operation timing of the operation handle portion is indicated by the countdown display on the liquid crystal display device 1400.

  That is, in the display effect pattern in the second effect mode, the big hit and the small hit are both treated as opening for the big winning opening in the same manner, and the timing at which the variation of the decorative symbol is started It is not distinguished in the contents of the presentation from the time t0 until the challenge bonus effect is performed, and when the operation handle section 410 is operated as instructed by the effect, the countdown effect c 'is preceded by a leading effect (not shown) to challenge bonus The challenge bonus effect is started by the same series of effect contents as in the case of the big hit challenge bonus effect pattern (render command “09H”), which leads to the effect. Therefore, not only the big hit but also the small hit will be treated as one type (type of hit) as a hit that enables the winning ball to be obtained by opening the big winning opening, and in the challenge bonus production, the long opening game is played In addition to the middle opening game, it is possible to perform an effect display on which game mode appears, including a small opening hit game. As a result, as compared with the case in the first effect mode, the game characteristic (rendering ability) can be realized as if the opportunity frequency of winning a prize ball by opening the big winning opening is greatly increased. In addition, among the big hit A to E etc. and the small hit, in view of the fact that the small open per game will end in a relatively short time among the long open per play, middle open per play, small open per play games. As to whether or not the small hit is won, the player may be made comprehensible by displaying a specific image which does not appear at the time of the big hit in the effect in the first closing control period.

  As described above, the display effect pattern for the effect command "10H" is treated as a loss of the no chance that the small hit is not given the opportunity to obtain the ball even though the display effect pattern is based on one effect command. The extension effect pattern in the first effect mode and the small hit are treated as high hit chances for winning the prize ball award (similar to the effect pattern for big hit (render command “09H”) It is selectively executed as one of the non-extended display effect patterns in the second effect mode. That is, in this case, the effect information relating to the hit is appropriately reversed on the peripheral control MPU 4150a side, and thereby, various effects that greatly differ in the content of the effect without changing the logic on the main control MPU 4100a side It can be realized.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 113 (c), when the second effect mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a does not win either a big hit or a small hit (a pure loss Based on the fact that the special symbol having the fluctuation time Tc3 shown in FIG. 103 (here, described as being set at the same time as the timing t0 to t3) is If it is started (timing t0), in liquid crystal display device 1400, dynamic display of a non-extended display effect pattern having the contents of display effect c 'at the time of loss associated with effect command "11H" , And start the variation of the decoration pattern.

  Then, the non-extended display effect pattern (effect command “11H”) having the contents of the display effect c ′ started in this way is also, for example, such a decorative pattern in the fluctuation time Tc3 until the timing t3 comes. A display effect c 'appears with contents such as an appropriate character struggling to make a stop display with a stop display mode in which a bonus challenge stop symbol appears. However, at timing t3 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol is decidedly stopped with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on the predetermined symbol line without any effort by the appropriate character. It becomes (a challenge bonus presentation pattern). As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “11H” functions as “a loss effect pattern among effect patterns having effect content c ′”.

  As described above, the display effect pattern in the case of the effect command “11H” is set to “non-extended display effect pattern” regardless of the effect mode. Therefore, when the display effect pattern is in the first effect mode, it is between the effect pattern (effect command “09H”) having the contents of the display effect c at the time of the big hit when the “extension effect pattern” is adopted. Because there is a gap in the rendering time in the game, it can not function as a rendering pattern at the time of losing to the rendering pattern with the content of the display rendering c at the big hit, and the content of the display rendering c develops As described above, it will function only as a halfway effect pattern that ends in the middle stage.

  On the other hand, when it is in the second effect mode, the display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect c 'at the time of the big hit when the effect command "09H" appears as "non-extension display effect pattern" There is no difference in the rendering time between the same rendering pattern (rendering command “09H”), and for the rendering pattern (rendering command “09H”) having the contents of the display rendering c ′ at the time of the big hit It will function as a presentation pattern (a presentation pattern in which the bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on a predetermined symbol line) when the player loses the game. As described above, when in the second effect mode, the "non-extended display effect pattern" having the contents of the display effect c 'at the time of a small hit when the effect command "10H" is also the effect at the time of the hit Since it appears as a pattern (a bonus challenge stop symbol appears on a predetermined symbol line), a effect pattern (a bonus challenge stop symbol is a predetermined pattern) at the time of losing also for this effect pattern (render command “10H”) It will function as an effect pattern that does not appear on the symbol line.

  Thus, the display effect pattern in the case of the effect command "09H" corresponds to the display effect pattern in the case of the effect command "01H" shown in FIG. 112A, and in the case of the effect command "10H" The display effect pattern corresponds to the display effect pattern for the effect command "02H" shown in FIG. 112 (b), and the display effect pattern for the effect command "11H" is shown in FIG. 112 (c) It corresponds to the display effect pattern for the effect command "03H", and among the corresponding effect patterns, although the effect contents differ from each other, the effect series addressed to itself (effect content a series, effect contents In the case of the c series), it functions as a rendering pattern having almost the same role as each other.

  However, in the effect content c series (effect command “09H” to “11H”), a display effect pattern corresponding to effect command “04H” in effect content a series (effect command “01H” to “04H”) is prepared Not. That is, even in the effect content c series, when the display effect pattern corresponding to the effect command "04H" is prepared, in the first effect pattern, for the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command "09H" Although this can be made to function effectively as a loss display effect pattern, in the second effect pattern, it can not be functioned as a loss display effect pattern for the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command "09H" Therefore, despite the relatively long time being given, the jackpot symbol combination would exist as a display effect pattern dedicated to the loss without appearance, and I was concerned that the game interest might be reduced by this. It is a thing.

  Therefore, when it is in the first effect mode, for the hit effect pattern for the effect command "09H", the effect pattern at the time of loss (pure loss) in which a specific condition is not satisfied is adopted as the loss effect pattern. Being removed, and only the effect pattern (display effect pattern when effect command "10H") when a specific condition is satisfied functions as the only existence in place of the effect pattern at the time of the loss (pure loss) You will come to That is, in this case, in the effect content c series (rendering commands “09H” to “11H”), “rendering display effect c after development” appears, unlike the effect content a series (rendering commands “01H” to “04H”) There is no choice but to set the expected level of big hit when the number of hits is limited by the ratio of occurrence of big hit and small hit. However, for the effect content c of the effect content c series (rendering command “09H” to “11H”), a longer time than the effect content a of the effect content a series (rendering command “01H” to “04H”) is held Even if the jackpot expectation is, it is executed as a rendition having a higher expectation than the rendition content a. Therefore, with regard to the jackpot expectation when “display effect after development c” appears, this is required as an appropriate value described later even within the range restricted by the appearance ratio between the jackpot and the jackpot. Setting is relatively easy.

  Also, for the display effect pattern associated with the effect command "04H" of the effect contents a series (effect command "01H" to "04H"), the effect content a when in the second effect mode By acting as a missing effect pattern for the hit effect pattern (rendering command “09H”, “10H”) of the effect content c series, not for the hit effect pattern of the series (rendering command “01H”, “02H”) As described above, the jackpot symbol combination is prevented from being present as a display effect pattern exclusively for the loss that does not appear. Therefore, in the effect content c series (rendering commands “09H” to “11H”), when in the second effect mode, the game is prepared for the hit rendering pattern (rendering commands “09H”, “10H”) The loss effect pattern appears with a higher probability than the ratio of the loss effect pattern (render command “11H”) by the addition of the selection probability of the display effect pattern of the effect command “04H”.

  Also, although details will be omitted, each display effect pattern corresponding to the effect commands “05H”, “06H”, “07H” and “08H” of the effect content b series shown in FIG. 103 is effect content Display having the same form as each of the display effect patterns (see FIGS. 112 (a) to (d)) corresponding to the a series of the presentation commands "01H", "02H", "03H", and "04H" It is set as an effect pattern. Furthermore, each display effect pattern corresponding to the effect commands "12H", "13H" and "14H" of the effect content d series shown in FIG. 103 is the effect command "09H" for effect content c series, It is set as a display effect pattern having the same mode as each of the display effect patterns (see FIGS. 113 (a) to (c)) respectively associated with "10H" and "11H". That is, each of the display effect patterns corresponding to the effect commands “05H”, “06H”, “07H”, and “08H” of the effect content b series shown in FIG. 103, and the effect content d shown in FIG. The relation between the effects of the series and the display effects patterns respectively associated with the effect commands "12H", "13H" and "14H" is the effect commands "01H" and "02H" of the a series of effect contents. Display effects patterns (see FIGS. 112A to 112D) respectively associated with "03H" and "04H" and effect commands "09H", "10H" and "11H" of the effect contents c series It is set so that it may become the above-mentioned presentation relation with each display production pattern (refer to Drawing 113 (a)-(c)) matched with each.

  FIG. 113 (a) is a table showing the jackpot expectation degree etc. in the first effect mode separately for each effect content series, and FIG. 113 (b) is a challenge in the second effect mode. It is a table which shows bonus rush expectation degree etc. separately for each production content series. In addition, about the numerical value which shows probability, rounding off the 2nd decimal place and showing as a numerical value to the 1st decimal place, the probability total value of each element may not be 100%.

  According to the setting mode according to such a display effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 113 (a), the jackpot expected degree, which is the expected degree at which the hit effect appears in the first effect mode, The big hit expectation when the display effect pattern appears is "0.5%", and the big hit expectation when the display effect pattern of the effect content b appears is "1.5%". The big hit expectation when the display effect pattern appears is “13.7%”, and the big hit expectation when the display effect pattern of the effect content d appears is “33.1%”. In addition, since the big hit expectation will be "100%" when the display effect pattern of the effect content e appears, this is omitted in the table. In the display effect pattern of the effect content e, a determined effect of having been won by the big hit appears regardless of the effect mode.

  In addition, with regard to the jackpot expectation degree (the expectation degree for which a hit effect appears) when each display effect pattern that can appear when in the first effect mode is developed, when the effect content a after development appears Big hit expectation degree of “1.3%”, Big hit expectation degree when the production content b after development appears is “3.7%”, Big hit when the production content c after development appears The degree of expectation is “25%”, and the degree of expectation for a big hit when the effect content d after development appears is “72.7%”.

  On the other hand, with regard to the challenge bonus entry expectation degree, which is the expectation degree at which the hit effect appears in the second effect mode, as shown in FIG. 113 (b), when the display effect pattern of the effect content a 'appears. The challenge bonus rush expectation of is “7.9%”, and the challenge bonus rush expectation when the display effect pattern of the effect content b ′ appears is “11.8%”, and the effect content c ′ is displayed The challenge bonus entry expectation degree when the effect pattern appears is “15.4%”, and the challenge bonus entry expectation degree when the display effect pattern of the effect content d ′ appears is “10%”.

  That is, as described above, the jackpot effect pattern (effect command "01H" and effect command "05H" set as the extension effect pattern is limited to the display effect patterns of the effect contents a and b among the effect contents a to d. In contrast to this, the non-extended display effect pattern (rendering command “04H”, effect command “08H”) can be prepared which can function as a losing effect pattern only in the first effect mode. Then, on this, the non-extended display effect pattern (render command “04H”, effect command “08H”) prepared in this way is generated, and in the second effect mode, a hit effect pattern (render command “render 09H ′ ′, the presentation command “10H”, and the hit presentation pattern (streaming command “12H”, presentation command “13H”) of the presentation content d ′ are diverted as each lost presentation pattern.

  According to the display effect patterns associated with such effect commands "04H" and "08H", when in the first effect mode, it is expected that a hit effect will appear, including the contents of effects a and b after development Although the degree (big hit expectation degree) is lowered, the appearance probability of each display effect pattern of the effect contents a and b is enhanced (with respect to each display effect pattern of effect contents c and d), and thereby the against big hit It can be made to avoid that only an unexpected display effect pattern is repeatedly performed. Furthermore, for each display effect pattern of the effect contents c and d, although the appearance probability is low including the effect contents c and d after development, a hit effect appears in each display effect pattern of the effect contents c and d The degree of expectation (big hit expectation) is enhanced (with respect to each display effect pattern of the contents a, b), whereby the game entertainment when a specific display effect pattern (display contents c, d) appears Can be improved.

  Also, conversely, the display effect patterns associated with such effect commands "04H" and "08H" are used in reverse as display effect patterns of the effect contents c and d series when in the second effect mode. As a result, the appearance probability of the effect contents c and d series can be increased by that amount (operation on the appearance probability). This makes it possible to reduce the probability of occurrence between the presentation contents a to d and the difference in the degree of expectation in which the hit presentation appears compared to when in the first presentation mode, and the logic on the main control MPU 4100a side Even if it does not change one by one, it will be possible to realize a wide variety of effects that are largely different in the contents of the effect.

  Moreover, when in the second effect mode, the display effects associated with the effect commands "04H" and "08H" are for the disparities among the effect contents regarding the degree of expectation (the challenge bonus entry expected degree) at which the hit effect appears. The pattern is used as a display effect pattern of the effect contents c and d series. In addition to being used as a hit for which winning balls can be obtained by opening the big winning opening, not only a big hit but also a small hit as its kind It is made to reduce it further by being treated (an operation to reduce the difference in the degree of expectation that the hit presentation appears).

  According to the effect mode when in the second effect mode, display effect patterns of effect contents a 'to d' are relatively easy to appear regardless of the types of effect contents a 'to d' Become. In addition, with regard to the entry probability (the execution probability of the hit effect) of the challenge bonus effect in which the awarding of the winning ball acquisition opportunity is decided, it will be equalized as compared with the case in the first effect mode (here, the contents of the effect game, even if any of the effect contents a 'to d' appear, combined with the fact that the above difference in appearance probability is filled in the range of ± 10% between the types of a 'to d' People are more likely to expect to be given the opportunity to win a prize ball.

  In this respect, when in the second effect mode, when the player enters (executes) the challenge bonus effect, “the big winning opening is opened with any mode (long open play, middle open play, small open play) Because it is characterized by the effect such as “R”, it is better to make it relatively easy to appear as any of the display effect patterns of the effect contents a ′ to d ′, rather than the case of making them appear biased It is more desirable to suppress the decline in interest.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 113 (b), in the display effect pattern of the effect contents a 'to d' according to this embodiment, the effect content a 'is the most for the appearance probability of the game per opening in the middle and middle open in the effect contents a' to d 'according to this embodiment. It becomes smaller and becomes larger in the order of the rendering contents b ', c' and d '. Further, with regard to the appearance probability of the small opening per game, the effect content a 'is the largest, and the effect content b', c 'and d' are gradually smaller in the order. Therefore, when the display effect pattern of the effect content a 'appears, the possibility of the large winning opening being opened by the small opening per game is certainly high, but at least a small amount of prize balls as a bonus (in this embodiment, 40 ~ 50) is determined to be obtainable, as long-opened per play and as per the open per play as a play of the color with the expectation that the big winning opening will be opened by the game You will be able to enjoy it. In addition, when the display effect pattern of the effect contents d 'appears, the probability that the big winning opening is opened by long open per hit game or middle open game, the probability that the big winning opening is opened by small open per game Because it is higher than that, it is decided that at least a small amount of prize balls can be obtained as a bonus as a bonus, but rather the winning opening is opened by long play per open game and per open play per game It will function as an effect of the color tone. And, the display effect pattern of the effect contents b 'and c' respectively functions as the effect of the color shade between the display effect pattern of such effect contents a 'and the display effect pattern of effect contents d'. The color of the effect of the display effect pattern of the effect content a 'is darker, and the direction of the display effect pattern of the effect content c' is the color of the effect of the display effect pattern of the effect content d ' Is dark. Therefore, it is possible for the player to enjoy the effects of various colors by making the display effect patterns of such effect contents a ′ to d ′ relatively easy to appear.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, for the above-mentioned operation for reducing the difference in the degree of expectation of occurrence of a hit presentation among the contents of the presentation than in the first presentation mode It is assumed that the magnitude relationship of the degree is reversed according to the rendering mode. More specifically, as shown in the figures 106 (a) and (b), when in the first effect mode, the expectation levels of the effect contents b and c are “1.5%” and “13, respectively. .7%, which is smaller than the expectation "33.1%" of the effect content d, but in the second effect mode, the expectation of the effect content b 'and c' They are “11.8%” and “15.4%” respectively, which are larger than the expectation “10%” of the effect content d ′. Also according to such a setting mode, it is possible to realize a wide variety of effects with largely different effect contents without changing the logic on the main control MPU 4100a one by one.

  However, when the effect pattern of the effect content d 'appears, the degree of expectation (probability) that the hit effect (challenge bonus effect) is executed is certainly higher than when the effect pattern of the effect contents b' and c 'appears. Although it is low, as long as the challenge bonus effect is entered, the big winning opening is opened by the game with a long, middle opening game with a higher probability than in the effect pattern of the effect contents b 'and c'. It is easy to get a lot of balls out. Therefore, with regard to the effect patterns of the effect content b 'and c' and the effect pattern of the effect content d ', the preferences are divided according to the player, and such various color tones are given according to the display effect pattern. In this way, a decrease in game entertainment will be suppressed.

  Next, an effect example appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when the control for opening the big winning opening is being performed will be described based on the result of the big hit lottery when in the normal external disadvantage game state.

  As shown in FIG. 103, FIG. 112 (a) and FIG. 113 (a), according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in the first effect mode, the effect content is in accordance with the type of the big hit. The control for opening the big winning opening (in this case, the control for playing the big hit game) is started without being different and the type being concealed. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the first effect mode, the type of the big hit and the corresponding period end using the period when the control for opening the big winning opening is being performed. The effect is that the game state etc. after being played can be shown.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 103, FIG. 112 (a) and FIG. 113 (a), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the second effect mode, an opportunity to open the lower large winning opening 2003. Control content does not differ according to the type of hit, and the type is not shown and the control concerning the opening of the big winning opening remains hidden (here a big hit game or a small hit game Control) will be started. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the second effect mode, the type of hit (big hit, small hit) is performed using the period when the control for opening the big winning opening is being performed. The above-mentioned challenge bonus effect can be provided, which can indicate the type of jackpot, the game state after the period has ended, and the like.

  That is, in the in-opening effect (challenge bonus effect) in the second effect mode, first, in what kind of mode (a game is played per long opening, a game is played during opening, a game is played per small opening) An effect is presented in which information (such as a big bonus, a regular bonus, or a small bonus) related to the amount of dispensed balls is displayed. And as a result, when it is indicated that the long winning opening is opened by the long opening per game (big bonus), it is controlled to the advantageous gaming state that the expectation of the definite change can have based on the winning of the big hit A It will be shown naturally. In addition, when it is indicated that the small opening winning opening 2003 is opened by small opening per game (small bonus), it is the small hitting winning, it is shown naturally that the game state is not changed It will be.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the predetermined latent effect state is limited to a period until the special symbol of a specific number of times (for example, 10 times) changes. For example, when it does not encounter a specific enemy character until the end of the same period, while indicating that it is in a probability variation external disadvantage game state, when a specific enemy character is encountered during the same period, a predetermined battle effect is performed It is like that. Then, when the character wins in this battle effect, it indicates that the jackpot has been won, and when the character is defeated, it indicates that the player is normally in the external disadvantageous gaming state, and waits for the end of the same period. It is made to end the said latent presentation state without.

  As described above, according to the latent effect method in which the current gaming state is indicated at the latest until the period until the special symbol changes at a specific number of times (for example, 10 times) ends at the latest, as a player It becomes easy to enjoy purely whether it is in the gaming state, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the amusement due to the gaming state being concealed for a long period even though the time saving function is not activated.

  By the way, in the example described above with reference to FIG. 112A, the effect command “01H” shown in FIG. 103 in the first effect mode has the contents of the display effect a. Although only “is associated,” as shown in FIG. 115, “non-extended display effect pattern” having the contents of display effect a is also associated in addition to the “extended effect pattern” You may

  That is, in this case, when the effect command “01H” shown in FIG. 103 is received in the first effect mode, the peripheral control MPU 4150a displays the “extended effect pattern” having the contents of the display effect a, and the display effect a One of “non-extended display effect pattern” having the contents of “1” is selected, and dynamic display of the selected display effect pattern is started on the liquid crystal display device 1400.

  Here, for example, (a) random numbers may be used as a method for selecting the “extended effect pattern” having the content of the display effect a and the “non-extended display effect pattern” having the content of the display effect a. A method of selecting one of the “extended effect pattern” having the content of the display effect a and the “non-extended display effect pattern” having the content of the display effect a based on the result of the predetermined effect drawing based on (B) Based on the type of the jackpot winning in the jackpot lottery, "an extension effect pattern" having the content of the display effect a and "a non-extension display effect pattern having the content of the display effect a Other than the method etc. which choose one of "," the method etc. which combined (i) and (ii) are employable.

  Among these, when adopting the method of (i), any value of the values of the random numbers that can be acquired is associated with the “extended effect pattern” and the “non-extended display effect pattern” respectively. The “extension effect” having the contents of the display effect a when the effect command “01H” shown in FIG. 103 is received in the first effect mode by the ratio of the random number values associated beforehand such as The appearance probabilities of the “pattern” and the “non-extended display effect pattern” having the contents of the display effect a are determined. With regard to setting of the appearance probability, it is possible that the jackpot expectation degree is higher when the “extended effect pattern” appears than the “non-extended display effect pattern”. It is more desirable to enjoy the production.

  In addition, in the case of adopting the method of (b), when a specific winning kind (for example, the big hit A) is won, the dynamic of the “non-extended display effect pattern” having the contents of the display effect a The display is started on the liquid crystal display device 1400. According to such an effect method, at timing t1, a hit result for at least a specific winning kind (for example, the big hit A) is shown.

  For example, when a big hit symbol (a big hit explicit effect that is clearly indicated to be a big hit) appears at the stop timing t1 of the special symbol by the "non-extended display effect pattern", the "big hit A" which is the highest for the player. In the first closing control period, an opening effect to congratulate the player such as "Congratulations!" Is performed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. Then, for example, at time t2 when the first close control period ends and the second close control period starts, switching to an effect display indicating that a big hit game should be started by right-handed game is effective. The timing tx when the game ball passes through the gate 6010n is likely to arrive relatively sooner than in the case of the display effect pattern at the time of extension, and in the subsequent big hit game, the big hit effect dedicated to the "big hit A" is performed and Become. However, if there is no hit rendition (a big hit explicit rendition that clearly indicates a big hit) by the “non-extended display rendition pattern” at the stop timing t1 of the special symbol, the “big hit A with the highest advantage for the player” On the contrary, it is possible to grasp that it has not been won. And in this case, after the above-mentioned continuation expectation production by "the extension production pattern", when the big hit explicit production appears, it becomes possible to grasp that one or the other is won.

  Also, when adopting a method combining (i) and (ii), a presentation lottery table is prepared for each big hit type, and based on the acquired random value while referring to this presentation lottery table Therefore, one of the "extended effect pattern" having the content of the display effect a and the "non-extended display effect pattern" having the content of the display effect a is selected. That is, by preparing the effect lottery table for each big hit type, it becomes possible to make the selection rate of the “extended effect pattern” and the “non-extended display effect pattern” in each table different. Thereby, for example, the degree of expectation of the type of jackpot which is won is different depending on which of the “extended effect pattern” and the “non-extended display effect pattern” is clearly indicated that the jackpot is won. In addition to being able to do that, when the “non-extendive production pattern” is clearly shown to be a big hit, although the big hit is lower, the highest gain “big hit A” is more likely. Big "Expected effect pattern" is a big hit expectation, but when it is clearly stated that it is a big hit, the expected level of "big hit A" with the highest degree of advantage is low, etc. Is also possible.

  In addition to the display effect pattern of the above-mentioned effect command "01H", the effect command "05H" shown in FIG. 103, concerning the method of selecting the "extended effect pattern" and the "non-extended display effect pattern", The display effect patterns "09H" and "12H" can be similarly adopted. However, when adopted as the display effect pattern of the effect commands "01H" and "05H", the display effect pattern of the effect commands "03H" and "07H" is lost with respect to the display effect pattern as the hit effect pattern. It will be able to function as a pattern.

  Further, in the example described above with reference to FIG. 113 (a), the “extension effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a in the effect command“ 02H ”shown in FIG. 103 when in the first effect mode Although only the symbol “is associated, as shown in FIG. 106, even if the“ extension effect pattern ”having the contents of the display effect c is also associated in addition to the“ extension effect pattern ”. Good.

  That is, although "the extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect c" associated with the effect command "02H" in this manner, the stop effect t1 of the special symbol is extended and the display effect is performed. The effect content is only the display effect pattern (see FIG. 113 (c)) of the effect command "11H" when in the first effect mode (see FIG. 113 (c)), and the display effect after development becomes higher in the jackpot expectation It will be taken as the effect contents which do not appear. Therefore, in the first effect mode, when the effect command "02H" shown in FIG. 103 is received, a part of the effect command "02H" is allocated to effect contents in which such a display effect after development does not appear. While holding the appearance probability of the display effect after development when in the first effect mode low, it is possible to set the winning probability of the small hit higher. In this case, when in the second effect mode, the entry probability to the challenge bonus effect (the expectation for the hit effect to appear) can be enhanced by the portion where the winning probability of the small hit is set higher. It becomes possible to give the chance of winning a winning ball by opening the lower large winning opening 2003 with a higher probability.

  In this case, when the effect command "02H" shown in FIG. 103 is received in the first effect mode, the peripheral control MPU 4150a selects "the extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a" and "the display effect One of the extension effect patterns having the contents of c is selected, and the dynamic display of the selected display effect pattern is started on the liquid crystal display device 1400. Further, as a method for selecting "the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a" and "the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c", for example, the result of a predetermined effect lottery based on random numbers Based on the above, it is possible to adopt a method of selecting one of “an extension effect pattern having contents of display effect a” and “an extension effect pattern having contents of display effect c”. When this method is adopted, the value of the random number that can be acquired is "the extension effect pattern having the content of the display effect a" and "the extension effect pattern having the content of the display effect c" In the first effect mode, the content of “display effect a in the case where the effect command“ 02H ”shown in FIG. The appearance probability of each of the extension effect pattern having the symbol “and the extension effect pattern having the content of the display effect c” is determined.

  Moreover, about the method concerning the selection of "the extended production pattern with the content of the display production a" and the "extended production pattern with the content of the display production c", the display production pattern of the above-mentioned production command "02H" Besides, the display effect pattern of the effect command “06H” shown in FIG. 103 can be adopted in the same manner. When adopted for the display effect pattern of this effect command "06H", the selection between "the extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect b" and "the extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect d" should be performed It becomes.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the variation pattern (variation number “15”, effect command “15H”) shown in FIG. 103 for determining the big hit is prepared. You may omit it. That is, in this case, when opening the special winning opening in the second effect mode, the challenge bonus effect pattern can always be made to appear.

  By the way, in the case where the game processing pattern at the time of the big hit is triggered by the game ball passing through the effective gate 6010 n as the start of the bonus continuous operation device (in the case of the above-mentioned challenge bonus), the small hit When the player is won, there is a problem that the player can easily grasp that it is not a big hit. That is, in the case of a big hit with the operation of the condition device, the right-handed gaming ball is supplied to the gaming ball guiding path unit 6050, and the gaming ball is guided to the effective gate 6010n and passes through it to continue the game. The actuating device is activated and the big winning opening is opened. As described above, in the big hit with the operation of the condition device, the operation of the continuous product operating device is left to the timing of the player, while in the case of the small hit without the operation of the condition device, the game ball Does not pass through the effective gate 6010n, that is, even if the character continuous operation device does not operate, the big winning opening is opened after the first closed control period having a certain length has elapsed. It will be done. Therefore, even if a player is instructed to hit the right by the liquid crystal display device 1400 (upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244), the player does not hit the right regardless of the intention of the player or the player does not hit the right It is easy for the player who is trying to play a game to determine whether the lottery result is a big hit or a small hit.

  Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the right-handed game ball passes the effect gate 6011 before passing through the effective gate 6010 n, and the preceding effect precedes the game ball passing through the effective gate 6010 n (notice The production was made to be performed. Therefore, regardless of whether the lottery result is a big hit or a small hit, the player immediately strikes the right based on the teaching of the liquid crystal display device, even if the game state is a small hit. During the first closing control period, the gaming ball passes through the effective gate 6010 n. As a result, even if the lottery result is a small hit, since the right-handed game ball passes the effective gate 6010n and then the big winning opening is opened (opened for a short time), the player has the lottery result. It becomes difficult to distinguish whether it is a big hit or a small hit.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the gaming ball guiding path unit 6050 is provided on the right side of the gaming area 5a so that all gaming balls hit to the right are supplied to the gaming ball guiding path unit 6050. Since the entrance end of the game ball guide path unit 6050 is opened at the upper right of the game area 5a, the game ball which is hit to the right and reaches the right side of the game area 5a enters the instant game ball guide path unit 6050 . After that, after the game ball passes the effect gate 6011 just below the opening of the game ball guide path unit 6050, it always passes the effective gate 6010n. Therefore, although the gaming ball has not passed through the effective gate 6010 n at the stage when the gaming ball has passed through the effect gate 6011, the precedent effect for the game ball passing through the effective gate may be performed by the gaming machine Become.

  As described above, since the falling speed of the gaming ball is mitigated by the gaming ball guiding path unit, the gaming ball spends a predetermined time, passes through the gaming ball guiding path unit 6050 and is an effective gate of the lower portion of the gaming ball guiding path unit It reaches 6010n. Thus, the gaming machine earns this time because it can earn time compared to the case where the game ball falls freely between the time the game ball passes the effect gate 6011 and the time it passes the effective gate 6010 n. Improve the quality of presentation by taking a sufficiently long processing time for various presentation processes such as leading presentation, suggestion presentation, and notice selection etc. generated when the game ball passes the presentation gate 6011 using time can do.

  Next, the types of jackpots of gaming machines described above will be described in detail. When the jackpot lottery is won, the form of the jackpot may differ depending on the symbols displayed as the first special symbol (special figure 1 in FIG. 111) and the second special symbol (special figure 2 in FIG. 117). Moreover, it is supposed that the first special symbol and the second special symbol also differ in the distribution of the aspect. For example, as shown in FIG. 117, when the time saving symbol 1 is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, “specific region non-passing_out ball existent 10R time minor 20 times” is determined. As the first special symbol, when the short time symbol symbol 2 is stopped and displayed, “specific area passage_outside ball 12R1 short time 100 times” is determined. As the first special symbol, when the short time symbol symbol 3 is stopped and displayed, “specific area passage_outside ball 12R 2 hour short 100 times” is determined.

  Furthermore, when the short time special symbol 4 is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, “specific region passage_outside ball 12R 3 hour short 100 times” is determined. As the second special symbol, when the short time symbol symbol 5 is stopped and displayed, “specific area passage_outside ball 12R 4 hour short 100 times” is determined. As the second special symbol, when the short time symbol symbol 6 is stopped and displayed, “specific area passage_outside ball 12R 5 hour short 100 times” is determined.

  For example, the probability that the time special symbol 1 in the first special symbol is stopped is 110/200, the probability that the time minor icon 2 is stopped is 86/200, the probability that the time minor 3 is stopped 4 / It is assumed to be 200. On the other hand, the probability that the time special symbol 4 in the second special symbol is stopped and displayed is 180/200, the probability that the time minor symbol 4 is stopped and displayed is 18/200, the time short symbol 4 in the second special symbol is stopped and displayed Probability is 2/200.

  After the end of the big hit gaming state, “specific area non-passing-out ball existence 10 R time 20 times” transitions to the normal gaming state without shifting to the so-called probability fluctuation gaming state, and the number of time saving gaming states ends in 20 times It can be a big hit that is less desirable for the player. On the other hand, “specific area passage_out ball existence 12R1 (5) time short 100 times” is a big hit that shifts to a so-called probability fluctuation gaming state after the big hit gaming state ends and the number of time saving gaming states continues 100 times It can be a good big hit for the player. Here, in the lottery due to the first special symbol being stopped and displayed, the ratio of “specific area non-passing out ball having 10 R time minor 20 times” which may be unpreferable for the player is “specific area passing_out ball having 12 R 1 (2 The ratio is considered to be higher than the mixing ratio of 100 times per hour). On the other hand, in the lottery due to the second special symbol being stopped and displayed, it becomes “specified area passing_outgoing ball 12R3 (̃5) hour-short 100 times” which can always be preferable for the player.

  In the gaming machine 1A, during the short time gaming state, compared with not being in the short time gaming state (in the non short time gaming state), the hit by the normal symbol performed when passing the normal gate 2005a (normal lottery) The control is performed such that the variation time of the normal symbol becomes short as the winning probability increases. For this reason, during the time-saving game state, a big hit lottery is often executed in a short time. In addition, during the time saving game, the hit by the normal symbol occurs frequently, and the movable pieces 2008a and 2008b of the second starting opening 2008 open frequently, so the number of times of variation of the second special symbol is greater than the number of variations of the first special symbol There may be more.

  Subsequently, an opening mode of the big winning opening when shifting to the big hit gaming state will be described. In the gaming machine 1A, where there are the lower large winning opening 2003 and the right large winning opening 7000 as the large winning opening, it will be described which large winning opening is opened at which big hit. Even when any of the hour-time limited symbols 1 to 6 is displayed on the opening of the special winning opening, the number of opening rounds of the special winning opening is, for example, 12 rounds. Hereinafter, the release of the nth round will be described as Rn.

  As shown in FIG. 118, first, a start interval is set until the first opening of the special winning opening is performed. The start interval time is “pattern a” when the short time symbol 1, 4, 5 is displayed, “pattern b” when the short time symbol 3 is displayed, and the time short symbol 5, 6 is displayed. If it is done, it becomes "pattern c".

  Among them, as shown in FIG. 119 (a), “pattern a” is a high probability state (probability state) of 12336 (m seconds) when the low probability state (normal state) and the short time non-operation state. It is 4000 (m second) in the case of the short time operation and 4000 (m second) in the case of the low time operation with low probability. “Pattern b” is 9100 (m seconds) in the low probability state with time short non-operation, 4000 (m second) in the high probability state with short time operation, and 4000 (m s with low probability with time short operation m seconds). In addition, “pattern c” is 9100 (m seconds) in the low probability state and short time non-operation, 8 (m second) in the high probability state and short time operation, and 8 (m seconds) with low probability m seconds).

  When the start interval time has elapsed, opening of the special winning opening of R1 (first round) is performed. The opening pattern of the special winning opening will first be described in the case where the time-short symbol 1 is displayed. In the opening of R1 (first round) when the time saving symbol 1 is displayed, the lower lower large winning opening 2003 opens with "pattern A". As shown in FIG. 119 (b), the opening in “pattern A” is closed for 2 seconds after the opening for 29 seconds is performed. The total release time at this time is 29 seconds. The opening of "pattern A" is, so to speak, the lower winning prize opening 2003 long opening.

  Thereafter, from R2 (the second round) to R10 (the tenth round), the lower large winning opening 2003 opens with "pattern A". Then, in R11 (the eleventh round), the right large winning opening 7000 is opened with "pattern D". In the opening of "pattern D", as shown in FIG. 119 (b), after opening for 0.08 seconds is performed, closing for 1.9 seconds is performed. The total release time at this time is 0.08 seconds. The opening of “pattern D” is, so to speak, the right big winning opening shortening opening. Opening of the right large winning a prize opening 7000 is performed only with R11 among R1-R12.

  In the subsequent R12 (the 12th round), the lower lower large winning opening 2003 opens with "pattern B". In the opening of “pattern B”, as shown in FIG. 119 (b), a closing for 6 seconds is performed after an opening for 0.08 seconds is performed. The total release time at this time is 0.08 seconds. The opening of "pattern B" is, so to speak, the lower winning prize opening shortening opening. Opening of the special winning opening when the time saving symbol 1 is displayed continues in this manner.

  Also, when the time saving symbol 2 is displayed, first, the lower prize winning opening 2003 opens with “pattern A” as opening of R1 (first round). Subsequently, from R2 (the second round) to R10 (the tenth round), the lower large winning opening 2003 opens with “pattern A”. Up to this point, the opening of the big winning opening is performed in the same pattern as when the time saving symbol 1 is displayed.

  In the subsequent R11 (the eleventh round), the right large winning opening 7000 is opened with "pattern C". In the opening of "pattern C", as shown in FIG. 119 (b), the right large winning opening 7000 is opened twice. At the first time, an opening of 0.08 seconds takes place, followed by a closing of 2 seconds. Subsequently, for the second time, a 25 second opening is performed, followed by a 2 second closing. As described above, the opening time of the right large winning opening 7000 in R11 (the eleventh round) is 25.1 seconds (25.08 seconds) in total. The opening of "pattern C" is, so to speak, the right big winning opening. And in R12 (the 12th round), lower lower large winning a prize mouth 2003 opens with “pattern A”. The opening of the special winning opening when the time saving symbol 2 is displayed continues in this manner.

  Further, when the time saving symbol 3 to 6 is displayed, the big winning opening is opened in the same pattern as the case where the time saving symbol 2 is displayed.

  As described above, when the time saving symbol 1 is displayed, the opening is performed in "pattern A" which is long opening from R1 (first round) to R10 (10th round), but R11 (11th round And R12 (12th round), “pattern D” and “pattern B” are shortened and opened. In the short opening, the opening time of the lower large winning opening 2003, 7000 is only 0.08 seconds, and it is rare that the game ball enters the large winning opening. For this reason, when the time saving symbol 1 is displayed, opening of the winning opening of 10 rounds is substantially performed in the sense that a winning ball can be obtained.

  On the other hand, when the time saving symbol 2 to 6 is displayed, the opening is performed in "pattern A" and "pattern C" which are long open from R1 (first round) to R12 (tenth round). For this reason, since the opening of the special winning opening of 12 rounds is substantially performed, there is a high possibility that more game balls will be paid out than when the time saving symbol 1 is displayed.

  About the role of these short time stock symbols 1-6, the outline is shown in Drawing 118 and Drawing 119 (c). The time saving symbol 1 is a time saving symbol when displaying the basic effect as a big hit start effect, and is a symbol displayed when shifting to the normal gaming state instead of the probability changing gaming state after the big hit gaming state ends. .

  Also, the time saving symbol 2, 4 is a time saving symbol when displaying a basic effect as a big hit start effect, and is a symbol displayed when shifting to the probability variation gaming state after the big hit gaming state is over. Furthermore, the time saving symbol 3, 5 is a time saving symbol when displaying the premier effect as a big hit start effect, and is a symbol displayed when shifting to the probability variation gaming state after the big hit gaming state is over. In addition, the time saving symbol 6 is dummy data for replacement, which has the same configuration as the time saving symbol 5.

  When it is determined that the special symbol stopped and displayed is a big hit symbol, the gaming machine 1A determines which of the time-saving symbol 1 to 6 is displayed and the displayed large symbol is stopped. The symbol is referred to the big winning opening opening mode determination table shown in FIG. 118, and information (big winning opening opening mode including start interval etc.) corresponding to the stop-displayed big hit symbol is set. FIG. 120 is a flowchart for describing the features of this process. When the big hit game is started, the main control board 4100 (main control MPU) determines whether or not the round end flag is ON (S2101). The round end flag is turned ON when a predetermined number of gaming balls, for example, nine, are won in the special winning opening, or when a predetermined opening time shown in FIG. 118 (b) has elapsed. Here, when it is determined that the round end flag is not turned on, the process of step S2101 is repeated until the round end flag is turned on.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the round end flag is ON, it is determined whether there is an opening of the next round (S2102). This determination is made based on whether or not the current round is the final round, and if it is not the final round, it is determined that there is the next round.

  Here, if it is determined that there is a next round, in the next round, it is determined whether or not the right large winning opening 7000 is to be opened (S2103). As shown in FIG. 118, when the next round is the eleventh round, it is determined that the right large winning opening 7000 is opened, and in the other rounds, the lower large winning opening 2003 is opened, the right large winning combination It is determined that the mouth 7000 will not be opened.

  As a result, when it is determined that the right special winning opening 7000 is to be opened, the probability change area effective flag is set to ON (S2104). When the probability variation area effective flag is set to ON, and the probability variation area sensor 6992 detects a game ball, the probability variation flag for setting the probability variation state to the specified variation frequency is set to ON for the gaming state after the big hit. Further, when the probability variation area valid flag is not ON, the probability variation flag is not turned ON even if the probability variation area sensor 6992 detects a game ball.

  When the probability variation area effective flag is turned ON, the right big winning opening 7000 is opened (S2105). Then, the probability variation area sensor 6992 detects the gaming ball, and determines whether the detection is the first detection (S2106). Here, if the probability variation area sensor 6992 has not detected the gaming ball, or if the number of times of detection is the second or later, the process proceeds to step S2110.

  If the probability variation area sensor 6992 detects the game ball and determines that the detection is the first detection, the probability variation flag is turned ON (S2107).

  Then, it is determined whether the round end flag is ON (S2110). Here, when a predetermined number of gaming balls enter the right large winning opening 7000, or the opening time of the right large winning opening 7000 reaches a specified time, the round end flag is turned ON and the round end flag Is judged to be ON. Otherwise, it is determined that the round end flag is not ON, and the process returns to step S2106 to repeat the same processing.

  Furthermore, when it is determined that the round end flag is turned on, the probability change area validity flag is turned off after a predetermined time has elapsed (S2111). Then, the process returns to step S2102 to repeat the same process. If it is determined in step S2103 that the right special winning opening 7000 is not opened, the lower large winning opening 2003 is opened (S2112). Then, it is determined whether the round end flag is ON (S2113). Here, when a predetermined number of game balls enter the lower large winning opening 2003, or when the opening time of the right large winning opening 7000 reaches a prescribed time, the round end flag is turned ON and the round end flag Is determined to be ON, and the process returns to step S2102 to repeat the same processing. Otherwise, it is determined that the round end flag is not ON, and the process of step S2113 is repeated.

  If it is determined in step S2102 that there is no opening of the next round, ending data is set (S2114). As ending data, the time which displays an ending production is set. The time for displaying the ending effect is set at a predetermined time. Also, an ending data command corresponding to the ending data is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140.

  Then, it is determined whether the ending time has elapsed (S2115). Here, if the ending time has not elapsed, the process of step S2115 is repeated until the ending time has elapsed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, it is determined whether the probability change flag is ON (S2116). Here, when it is determined that the probability change flag is ON, the gaming state is set to the probability change gaming state (S2117). Then, the probability change flag is turned off (S2118), and the fluctuation pattern table is reset (S2119). Subsequently, the time saving state is set (S2120), and the process ends. If it is determined in step S2116 that the probability change flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S2119, the fluctuation pattern table is reset (S2119), the time saving state is set (S2120), and the process is ended. Do. When setting the time saving state, set the time saving count to 20 times when the displayed symbol is the time saving proprietary design 1 and set the time saving count to 150 times in the case of the time saving plot 2 to 6, for example. set.

Here, in setting the time saving state, the following setting is performed as the registration number of the transition destination of the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state.
Registration number 0: State not passing through the definite variation area 6970 (100 times saving time)
Registration number 1: State of passing through the definite variation area 6970 (150 times per hour)

  Then, the registration number 0 is set and set when shifting to the jackpot gaming state, and when the gaming ball passes the probability variation area 6970, the registration number is incremented (+1) and the registration number 1 is set. With such a setting, for example, when using a program with another pachinko machine, even if the number of time-savings changes, the change can be easily coped with.

  In addition, during the big hit game state, when the game ball which entered the right big winning opening 7000 is guided to the probability change area 6970, the game state after the big hit game state ends becomes the probability game state. On the other hand, when all the game balls entered in the right large winning opening 7000 are guided to the normal area 6960 without being guided to the probability change area 6970, the gaming state after the big hit gaming state ends becomes the normal gaming state . However, in any case, it shifts to the time saving game state.

  Furthermore, the operation mode of the sorting member 6923 in the taxiway sorting unit 6920 changes according to the type of the special symbol displayed, and the gaming ball having entered the right large winning hole 7000 is divided into the normal region 6960 and the definite variation region 6970 It controls which one to distribute. During the jackpot gaming state, the right big winning opening 7000 is opened only in the 11th round, and during this 11th round, it enters the right big winning opening 7000 by the right attachment unit 6900 or the taxiway sorting unit 6920. Induction of the ball is made. Entry to the right large winning opening 7000 and guidance to the normal area 6960 or the probability variation area 6970 are performed by opening / closing control of the right large winning opening opening / closing member 6933 and tilting control of the guide path distribution member 6923.

  Specifically, the game ball can enter the right large winning opening 7000 when the right large winning opening opening / closing member 6933 is opened. The gaming ball having entered the right large winning opening 7000 is guided to the sorting guiding path 6980 on the back side of the guiding path sorting unit 6920 through the gaming ball introduction port 6950. Here, when the guideway distribution member 6923 is in the state shown in FIG. 67 (b), the game balls introduced from the game ball introduction port 6950 are distributed to the normal area 6960. In addition, when the leading end of the induction track distribution member 6923 swings to the left from the state shown in FIG. 67 (b) and the normal area 6960 is closed, the game ball introduced from the game ball introduction port 6950 Is distributed to the probability change area 6970. Among them, the right large winning opening opening and closing member 6933 is opened and closed by the right large winning opening solenoid 6932, and the guideway distributing member 6923 is inclined by the guideway distributing solenoid 6922.

  Below, the opening / closing operation of the right large winning opening and the lower large winning opening in each round during the big hit gaming state and the lower large winning opening solenoid, the right large winning opening solenoid 6932, and the induction path distribution solenoid 6922 ON-OFF state Will be explained. FIG. 121 is a time chart in the vicinity of the eleventh round when any one of the time saving symbol 2 to 6 is displayed, and FIG. 122 is a time chart in the vicinity near the eleventh round when the time saving symbol 1 is displayed. .

  As shown in FIG. 121, when one of the hour-short symbol 2 to 6 is displayed, when the eleventh round starts, the special symbol is stopped, and the condition device and the gift continuous operation device are activated. There is. In addition, the special motorized symbol 1 is in the tenth round before the special motorized symbol 1 that operates when the eleventh round is started is operating, and the eleventh round is started from the time when the special motorized symbol 1 is activated. Start. In addition, after the operation of the special motorized symbol 1 is finished and stopped, the twelfth round is performed until the next special motorized symbol 2 is operated. The special motorized symbol 1 is a special motorized symbol corresponding to the right big winning opening 7000, and the special motorized symbol 2 is a special electric winning symbol corresponding to the lower large winning opening 2003. Further, when the operation of the special motorized symbol 1 starts, the probability variation region effective flag is turned ON, and when the operation of the special symbol combination 1 is finished, the probability variable region valid flag is turned OFF. However, even during the operation of the special motor-operated part 1, it is also possible to set a time for turning off the probability change region effective flag. For example, while induction track distribution solenoid 6922 is ON, or while induction track distribution solenoid 6922 is ON, and after induction track distribution solenoid 6922 is turned OFF, a definite change area is generated within several seconds, for example, 2 seconds. It is also possible to turn on the flag.

  During the operation of the special motorized symbol 1, the right large winning opening 7000 performs an opening operation twice. The first opening operation is released at the same time as the special electric accessory 1 starts to operate, and is opened for 0.08 seconds (Y2). After that, the closed state continues for 2 seconds, and the second opening operation is performed when 2 seconds have elapsed (Z). The second opening operation continues for 25 seconds (Y3). After 25 seconds have passed since the right large winning opening 7000 was opened, the right large winning opening 7000 is closed. After that, the second round ends and the eleventh round ends. In addition, when a predetermined number, for example, nine game balls enter the right large winning opening 7000 in the first opening and the second opening of the right large winning opening 7000, the game is performed without waiting for the opening time to elapse. When the ball enters the ball, the right big winning hole 7000 is closed. Then, after the lapse of 2 seconds, the eleventh round ends. However, since the first opening time of the right large winning opening 7000 is a very short time of 0.08 seconds, it is extremely rare that the game ball enters the right large winning opening 7000 here.

  Also, the opening of the right large winning opening 7000 is opened by turning on the right large winning opening solenoid 6932 and is closed by turning off. Therefore, the timing of turning on / off the right large winning opening solenoid 6932 is synchronized with the timing at which the right large winning opening 7000 is opened.

  Further, at the same time that the eleventh round starts, the induction passage distribution solenoid (distribution device solenoid) 6922 is turned on at the same time as the right large winning opening solenoid 6932 turns on and the right large winning opening 7000 opens. It becomes. When the guide path distribution solenoid 6922 is turned on, the guide path distribution member 6923 in the upright state is inclined, and the game ball entered in the right large winning hole 7000 can be guided to the probability change area 6970.

  The right large winning opening solenoid 6932, which is turned on here, is turned off when 0.06 seconds (Y4) elapses, and the guideway distribution member 6923 returns to the standing state. Therefore, the guideway distribution member 6923 returns to the upright state in the middle of the first opening of the right large winning opening 7000. In addition, considering the time lag until the game ball entered the right large winning opening 7000 reaches the position of the guiding path distribution member 6923, the gaming ball temporarily becomes right large winning at the first opening of the right large winning opening 7000. Even if the player enters the mouth 7000, the gaming ball is hardly induced to the probability change area 6970 by the guide path distribution member 6923 in the inclined state.

  Furthermore, when the second opening of the right large winning opening 7000 is performed after 0.02 seconds have passed and the right large winning opening 7000 is closed, the taxiway distribution solenoid 6922 is simultaneously turned ON, and the right large The game ball having entered the winning opening 7000 can be guided to the probability variation area 6970. Then, when 25.9 seconds (Y5) have elapsed, in other words, 0.9 seconds (the hatched portion of Y5) after the right large winning opening 7000 is closed, the taxiway distribution solenoid is turned off, The guideway distribution member 6923 returns to the standing state.

  Here, if the guideway distribution solenoid 6922 operates in synchronization with the right large winning opening solenoid 6932 and the right large winning opening 7000 closes and the guideway distribution member 6923 returns to the upright state at the same time, the right large When the game ball entering the right large winning hole 7000 near the closing of the winning hole 7000 reaches the position of the guiding path distributing member 6923, the guiding path distributing member 6923 has already returned to the standing state, and the probability change In some cases, guidance to the region 6970 can not be performed. In this respect, the guideway distribution solenoid 6922 is turned OFF after 0.9 seconds have elapsed since the right large winning opening 7000 is closed. If the time taken to reach the taxiway distribution solenoid 6922 from the big winning opening 7000, it is considered that 0.9 seconds is sufficient. Therefore, even if the game ball has entered the ball at the last moment when the special winning opening 7000 is closed, it can reach the taxiway distribution member 6923 before the taxiway distribution member 6923 returns to the standing state. , Will be induced to the probability variation region 6970. It should be noted that the induction path distribution solenoid 6922 is turned OFF after the right large winning opening 7000 is closed in order to guide the gaming ball that has entered the right large winning opening 7000 just before the closing of the right large winning opening 7000. The time to 0.9 seconds is used, but it is also possible to set the time around 0.9 seconds as long as the game ball can be guided to the probability change area 6970.

  In addition, the special motorized character 2 does not operate during the eleventh round. At the same time, the lower prize winning opening 2003 remains closed without opening during the eleventh round. Furthermore, the lower large winning opening solenoid does not maintain the OFF state and is not turned ON.

  Subsequently, the case where the time-short symbol 1 is displayed will be described. As shown in FIG. 122, when the hour-short symbol 1 is displayed, the special symbol is stopped when the eleventh round starts, as in the case where any of the time-short symbol 2 to 6 is displayed, and the condition is satisfied. The device and the character continuous operating device are operating. In addition, the special motorized character 1 operates when the eleventh round is started. The tenth round is in progress before the special electric symbol 1 operates, and the eleventh round starts from the time the special electric symbol 1 operates. In addition, after the operation of the special motorized symbol 1 is finished and stopped, the twelfth round is performed until the next special motorized symbol 2 is operated.

  Unlike the case where the time saving symbol 2 to 6 is displayed, the right special winning opening 7000 performs the opening operation once during the operation of the special electric symbol 1. The opening operation of the right large winning opening 7000 is opened at the same time as the special electric character 1 starts to operate, and is opened for 0.08 seconds (Y5). Thereafter, the closed state continues for 1.9 seconds. The eleventh round ends when 1.9 seconds pass after the right big winning opening 7000 is closed. In addition, when a predetermined number, for example, nine game balls enter due to the opening of the right large winning opening 7000, the right large winning opening 7000 is detected when the entering of the game ball is detected without waiting for the opening time to elapse. Close. However, since the open time of the right large winning opening 7000 is as short as 0.08 seconds, the game ball hardly enters the right large winning opening 7000 here. Further, the timing at which the right large winning opening solenoid 6932 is turned on and off is synchronized with the timing at which the right large winning opening 7000 is opened.

  Furthermore, the 11th round is started, and the right large winning opening solenoid 6932 is turned on and the right large winning opening 7000 is turned on at the same time as the right large winning opening 7000 is opened The dividing member 6923 is inclined, and the gaming ball having entered the right large winning opening 7000 can be guided to the probability variation area 6970. Then, when 0.06 seconds elapses, the guideway distribution solenoid 6922 is turned OFF, and the guideway distribution member 6923 returns to the standing state. Also in this case, as in the case where the time saving symbol 2 to 6 is displayed, the gaming ball is hardly guided to the probability variation area 6970 by the guide path distribution member 6923 in the inclined state. Therefore, when the time saving symbol 1 is displayed, although the guideway distribution member 6923 may be inclined so as to be able to be guided to the probability variation area 6970, the guideway distribution member 6923 is inclined and Since the game ball hardly enters the right large winning hole 7000 when it is turned on, the game ball is induced to the probability change area 6970 substantially when the time saving symbol 1 is displayed. It will never happen.

  As described above, when the time saving symbol 2 to 6 is displayed, the gaming ball entered in the right large winning opening 7000 in the eleventh round is almost certainly guided to the probability variation area 6970. On the other hand, when the time saving symbol 1 is displayed, the game ball hardly enters the right large winning opening 7000 in all rounds including the 11th round, and furthermore, the right large winning combination Even if the game ball enters the mouth 7000, the game ball is hardly induced to the probability change area 6970. Therefore, depending on which one of the time saving symbols 1 to 6 is displayed, it is determined whether to shift to the probability change gaming state or to shift to the normal gaming state after the big hit gaming state ends. For this reason, for example, it is possible to make it unnecessary to perform lottery of whether to shift to the probability variation gaming state or detection by various sensors for that purpose. However, it is also possible to adopt an aspect in which such a lottery or the like is performed.

  In addition, there is a possibility that fraudulent acts will be made when this kind of lottery is performed about the transition to the probability variation gaming state, and in order to prevent loss due to this fraudulent action, matching with false detection or lottery results by various sensors In some cases, it is possible to suppress fraud without performing this kind of confirmation. Temporarily, if the game ball is entered into the probability change area 6970 when the time saving symbol 1 is displayed, the possibility that fraudulent acts are performed is rich, but the game ball is induced to the probability change area 6970 It does not prohibit things themselves, so it can not be decided that they are cheating. Therefore, when it is detected that the gaming ball is induced in the probability variation area 6970 when the time saving symbol 1 is displayed, the cheating occurrence occurs by outputting a signal different from the signal when the cheating is detected. Can inform you of the possibility of However, the signal at this time can be made to have a smaller degree of notification than when a fraud occurs.

  In the gaming machine according to this aspect having the above configuration, the probability variation area 6970 is disposed on the back side of the attacker unit base 6910, and further on the back side of the space 6602 in the attacker unit accommodation area 6600. For this reason, when viewed from the glass plate 564 (see FIG. 12), it is disposed behind the predetermined region, and a predetermined distance is maintained between the glass plate 564 and the probability variation region 6970.

  Therefore, even if it attempts to cheat the probability change area sensor 6992 that detects passage of the game ball to the probability change area 6970 using the magnet from the front side of the gaming machine, the magnetic force of the magnet does not reach or it becomes difficult to reach. You can suppress the act. In addition, even if an illegal act is attempted using a piano wire or the like, since the operation from the piano wire or the like becomes complicated because the distance from the surface side of the gaming machine to the probability change area 6970 is long, suppressing the illegal act. Can.

  It should be noted that although the guiding path distribution member 6923 for sorting the gaming balls having entered the right large winning opening 7000 into the normal area 6960 or the probability changing area 6970 is visible to the player through the glass plate 564, the guiding path The distributing member 6923 is visually recognized through the surface plate 6601. For this reason, while it becomes possible to visually identify that the gaming ball is distributed to the probability variation region 6970 via the glass plate 564, the probability variation region sensor 6992 that detects the passage of the gaming ball to the probability variation region 6970 is made invisible or invisible There is. Further, the guide path distribution member 6923 and the probability variation area 6970 are disposed at the lower right corner of the gaming machine, and are disposed at a position where it is difficult for the player's eyes to reach. The arrangement of the probability change area 6970 or the like at such a position contributes to the suppression of fraud.

  Furthermore, since it is possible to suppress the fraudulent action of causing the false recognition of the passage of the gaming ball to the definite change area 6970, it is possible to suppress the transition to the incorrect positive change gaming state. As a result, it is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of a great deal of damage in the game arcade due to the transition to the probability change gaming state.

  Further, in order to suppress fraud, a fraud detecting sensor can be provided in the vicinity of the probability variation area 6970, for example, inside the right attachment unit 6900, or the distribution guiding path 6980, and further, the guiding path distribution member 6923 or the like. Provision of such a fraud sensor can further contribute to the suppression of fraud. As the fraud detecting sensor, for example, when it is assumed that a magnet is used fraudulently, a magnet sensor may be used as appropriate, and a sensor corresponding to a conceivable form of fraud can be appropriately determined.

  Furthermore, the game ball having passed through the right large winning opening 7000 is made to be difficult to view once by moving it back, and while the game ball moves from the big winning opening 7000 to the probability change area 6980, the game ball is visually recognized Means for preventing the By providing such a blocking means, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the timing at which the game ball reaches the probability variation area 6970. As a result, it can further contribute to the suppression of fraud.

  In addition, when the guideway distribution member 6923 is in the upright state, the guideway distribution member 6923 in the upright state stands up in a region out of the area from the distribution guideway 6980 to the normal region 6960. Is disposed at a position where the game ball which passes through the distribution guide path 6980 and reaches the normal area 6960 can not be touched. Therefore, when the game ball is distributed from the distribution guide path 6980 to the normal region 6960 when the guide path distribution member 6923 is in the standing state and not in the inclined state, the game is performed to the guide path distribution member 6923 It can be in a state where the ball does not touch or is hard to touch.

  Therefore, when the induction track distribution member 6923 is in the upright state, the gaming ball touches the induction track distribution member 6923 and inclines, and it is possible to suppress a situation where the gaming ball is induced to the probability change area 6950. Furthermore, it is supposed that the induction track distribution member 6923 is in the inclined state only during a short time such as the eleventh round when the hour-short symbol symbols 2 to 6 are displayed. For this reason, since the time when the game ball contacts the guideway distribution member 6923 becomes short, it is possible to suppress the consumption of the guideway distribution member 6923 by that amount.

  Furthermore, it is possible to suppress game ball passage to the unscheduled odd change area 6970. As a result, the transition to the probability change gaming state in an unscheduled state can effectively suppress the occurrence of a great deal of damage that may occur in the game arcade.

  In the above example, when guiding the gaming ball having entered the right large winning opening 7000 to the normal area 6960, the area from the guide path distributing member 6923 from the distribution guiding path 6980 to the normal area 6960 The contact with the game ball is suppressed as a standing state in the area out of the area, but in the case of guiding the game ball to the normal area 6960 according to another aspect, the game ball to the guide path distribution member 6923 in the normal area 6960 It is also possible to eradicate the contact of For example, when guiding the gaming ball having entered the right large winning opening 7000 to the normal area 6960, the guide path distributing member 6923 is out of the area from the distribution guiding path 6980 to the normal area 6960 And, when guiding the gaming ball to the probability variation area 6970, by placing the guiding path distributing member 6923 at a position higher than the position where the guiding path distributing member 6923 is arranged, the contact of the gaming ball to the guiding path distributing member 6923 is It can be an aspect to eradicate.

On the other hand, the width of the right large winning opening 7000 is slightly wider than the diameter of the gaming ball, at least narrower than twice the diameter of the gaming ball, and is a width that suppresses the passage of a plurality of gaming balls arranged in parallel ing. For this reason, it is possible to suppress the winning of the right large winning opening 7000 of the game balls more than the specified number, it is possible to suppress the excessive payout of the game balls.
As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is determined based on the game ball passing through the specific area (probable change area 6970) when the right large winning opening 7000 is opened during a special game (big hit). It is comprised so that the game profit (big hit, the probability fluctuation | variation with respect to a fixed fluctuation | variation number) may be provided. When the right large winning opening / closing member 6933 is opened, and the sorting device solenoid 6923 is operated to open the specific area for a sufficient period of time (long open state), the game ball rolling on the gently inclined portion 6504 is a fall guiding path It can enter 6506 and then pass through the specific area 6970 (see FIG. 121).

  On the other hand, although the right big winning opening opening and closing member 6933 opens, the operating period of the sorting device solenoid 6923 is short, and the game area rolls the gently inclined portion 6504 if the specific area is opened only for a very short time (short open state). Even if the player enters the fall guiding path 6506, since it can pass not the specific area 6970 but the normal area 6960, the game profit (probability fluctuation) described above is not generated in the game after the big hit end.

  The combination of the operation pattern of the right large winning opening opening and closing member 6933 and the operation pattern of the distribution device 6923, depending on how to set the ratio of the long open state to the short open state as described above, after the big hit game described The expectation for the probability fluctuation game of can be changed to a predetermined one. In the gaming machine described above, as shown in FIG. 117, in the big hit based on the special symbol 1, the cooperative behavior of the right large winning opening / closing member 6933 and the sorting device solenoid 692 is in a short open state While being controlled, in the big hit based on the special symbol 2, the cooperative behavior of the right large winning opening / closing member 6933 and the distribution device 6923 is controlled to the long open state at all ratios. Therefore, the game of the big hit based on the special symbol 2 is more advantageous to the player than the big hit based on the special symbol 1.

  As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment has the property that it can receive predetermined gaming profits by passing the gaming ball through the specific area, and thus there are the following problems. First, when the gaming ball does not pass the specific area 6970 while the gaming machine is in the long open state as described above, no probability fluctuation state occurs after the big hit end, and it is merely in the normal gaming state. It becomes time saving state. This is probably attributed to the player's circumstances, such as the game ball's firing being interrupted despite the fact that the right big winning opening is long-opened, but in rare cases, the ball is clogged, There may be a problem with the launcher. The second is a case where the game ball passes through the specific area 6970 while the right large winning opening is only the short opening described above. This is likely due to fraud. However, in the conventional gaming machine, although there was an abnormality such as an obstacle or an irregularity, it was not possible to find, judge, discriminate, etc. the abnormality in the big hit after the game. Therefore, misconception that the player side did not obtain the game profit originally expected to be obtained is stagnant, while the game arcade operator also stagnates the suspicion of the wrongdoing, and both sides play the game. There was a problem in advancing the

  Therefore, the gaming machine of the present embodiment discovers the degree and attribute of the big hit game each time a big hit game, checks the judgment, evaluation, analysis etc., and reports the result as history information, thereby the player and the game arcade. It has been made possible to give both operating companies the opportunity to confirm, evaluate and judge abnormalities such as the aforementioned obstacles and irregularities. A game machine defines a plurality of types of parameters related to game attributes, sets values of each parameter from an actual big hit game, extracts them, prepares them, etc. and records them, and based on the recorded information, a notification form After determination, creation, etc., history information is notified.

  As parameters, for example, Parameters related to a special symbol such as a big hit based on the special symbol 1 or a big hit based on the special symbol 2 (parameter a), Parameters relating to the big hit type (parameter b), ie, a big hit with the long open state described above (time short owned symbol 2-6 in FIG. 119) or a big hit with the short open state (time short present symbol 1); A first parameter (parameter c) relating to a game result, such as whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area 6970 while being a big hit in the short open state; There is a second parameter (parameter d) relating to the game result such as whether or not the game ball could or could not pass through the specific area 6770 while being a big hit in the long open state.

The identification flag of each parameter is, for example, managed as follows by 2-bit information.
Parameter a: (0, 1) Big hit based on special symbol 1
(1,0) Big hit based on special symbol 2 Parameter b: (0,1) Big hit in long open condition
(1,0) Big open condition in short open state Parameter c: (0,1) No passage of specific area at short open time
(1,0) Passing of specific area at short opening Parameter d: Passing of specific area at opening long
(1,0) No passage of specific area at long opening

  The peripheral control board of the gaming machine (peripheral control MPU 4150b) sets these parameters based on the command from the main control board 4110 each time a big hit, and this is set as a table in the RAM area (peripheral control RAM 4150c). Cumulatively record. FIG. 123 is a management table of parameters recorded in the peripheral control RAM 4150 c. Records (# 1 to #n: #n are the latest records) are added in the order of the big hit, and the values of the parameters (a1, b1, c1, d1 to an, bn, cn, dn) created for each record are recorded Do. RTC1 to RTCn are date and time data of the RTC created by the RTC control unit 4165 when each parameter is set. The upper limit number of records in the management table is preferably at least sufficient for one day operation of the game console, and may be 99, for example. If a record exceeding this number is to be recorded, the oldest record may be deleted and subsequent records may be sequentially shifted to record the latest record. Further, the gaming machine determines the notification form of the history information based on the parameter management table, and notifies (outputs) the history information.

  Next, parameter setting processing will be described based on FIG. When the peripheral control board (peripheral control MPU 4150b) of the gaming machine recognizes the processing flag "3" (FIG. 92) based on a command from the main control board 4100, the flowchart of FIG. 124 is started. First, the peripheral control board 4140 (4150a) determines whether or not the big hit is based on the first special symbol based on the command (S12400), and in the case of denying this, the big hit is the second special symbol On the basis of this, "1" is set to the first bit of the parameter a (S12440). If the above determination is affirmed, “1” is set to the second bit of the parameter a (S12420).

  Next, the peripheral control board 4140 determines the type of the big hit (S12460). Since the type of the big hit is included in a part of the command from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control board 4140 has the big hit type including the long open state described above or the big hit including the short open state To determine If it is determined that the latter is the case, "1" is set to the first bit of the parameter b (S12480). On the other hand, when the big hit type determines a big hit including a long open state (S12460), "1" is set to the second bit of the parameter b (S12500).

  When the peripheral control board 4140 sets “1” to the first bit of the parameter b, information of a flag (V flag) related to the passing state of the gaming ball in the specific area 6970 based on the command from the main control board 4100 Is checked (S12520). When the main control MPU 4100a receives an on signal accompanying passage of the specific area 6770 of passage to the gaming ball from the probability variation area sensor 6992, it sets "1" in the V flag area of the RAM. When the peripheral control board 4140 does not detect the V flag “1”, it determines whether or not the big hit game is over (whether or not the final round of opening the big winning opening is accommodated) (S 12560), If so, the second bit of the parameter c is set to “1” (S12580). If it is determined that the big hit game is continuing, the check of the V flag is repeated. When the peripheral control board 4140 determines that the V flag is "1", it sets "1" to the first bit of the parameter c (S12540). When setting of the parameter c is completed, the peripheral control board 4140 registers the values of the parameters a, b, c, d together with the RTC information at that time in the management table (FIG. 123) described above (S12680), and then the parameters Each of a, b, c and d is reset to (0, 0) (S12700).

  When the periphery control board 4140 determines that the jackpot type is a big hit in the long open state in S12460, it sets “1” to the second bit of the parameter b (S12500). Next, the V flag data is checked (S12600), and if it is determined that "1" is set to the V flag, "1" is set to the second bit of the parameter d (S12620). On the other hand, when it is determined in S12600 that "1" is not set in the V flag, it is determined whether or not the big hit game has ended (S12640). If it is determined that the big hit game is ongoing, the check of the V flag is continued, and if it is determined that the big hit game is ended, "1" is set to the first bit of the parameter d (S12660). When setting of the parameter d is completed, the peripheral control board 4140 registers the values of the parameters a, b, c, d together with the RTC information at that time in the table described above (S12680), and then the parameters a, b, c, Each of d is reset to (0, 0) (S12700). Thus, the peripheral control board 4140 ends the parameter setting process. When the value of parameter c is set, the value of parameter d is not set.

According to the parameter setting flowchart described above, if the game ball is a big hit based on the special symbol 1 and the big hit type is a big hit in the short open state and the game ball enters the specific area 6970, the parameter is Is set as
Parameter a: (0, 1)
Parameter b: (1, 0)
Parameter c: (0, 1)
Parameter d: (0, 0)

On the other hand, when it is a big hit based on the special symbol 1 and the big hit type is a big hit in the short open state and the game ball enters the specific area 6770, the parameters are set as follows.
Parameter a: (0, 1)
Parameter b: (1, 0)
Parameter c: (1, 0)
Parameter d: (0, 0)

  The peripheral control board 4140 is a big hit based on the special symbol 1 from the combination of these parameters, and the big hit type is a big hit of the short open state, and the game history in which the game ball entered the specific area 6970 is determined later be able to. There is a suspicion that this condition may be caused by any illegal game.

Next, when it is a big hit based on the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 and the big hit type is a long hit big hit and the gaming ball enters the specific area 6970, the parameters are as follows.
Parameter a: (0, 1) or (1, 0)
Parameter b: (0, 1)
Parameter c: (0, 0)
Parameter d: (0, 1)

On the other hand, when it is a big hit based on the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 and the big hit type is a long hit big hit and the game ball does not enter the specific area 6770, the parameter is set as follows Be done.
Parameter a: (0, 1) or (1, 0)
Parameter b: (0, 1)
Parameter c: (0, 0)
Parameter d: (1, 0)

  From the combination of these parameters, the peripheral control board 4140 is a big hit based on the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 and the game ball can not enter the specific area 6970 while the big hit type is a big hit of long open state The gaming history can be determined later. This state occurs due to reasons other than fraud, such as the interruption of the game ball launch.

  Next, the gaming machine sets (selects) the notification form of the history information based on the parameter management table (FIG. 123). As the notification of the history information, for example, the output by the display on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, the output by the display on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, the output by the sound from the various speakers mentioned above, various kinds mentioned above Output by light through the lamp, output by display on the information display device 1400A managed by the peripheral control board 4140 and shared among a plurality of types of game boards, or output using prizes, or a combination of these Can be illustrated. If the main control board 4100 executes various processing of the peripheral control board 4140, history information can also be output from the main control board 4100 to the hall computer via the external terminal board. In the present embodiment, notification by display on the information display device 1400A is exemplified.

  A series of processes leading to the output of the history information, as described later, the game history information notification form setting process (FIG. 125), the game history information notification execution process (FIG. 126), and the game history information list notification process (FIG. 132) And in this embodiment, it is executed at the end of the jackpot game. First, the game history information notification form setting process will be described based on the flowchart shown in FIG. When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the peripheral control board 4140 starts the game history information notification form setting process. In the present embodiment, “end of the big hit game” is set as one of the “start conditions”, and when the big hit game is ended, the game is performed based on the parameters a to d set for the ended big hit game. The history information notification form setting process is started. First, the peripheral control board 4140 reads all the records of the parameter management table (FIG. 123) (S13000). Next, a standard notification form setting process is executed (S13020). The standard notification form setting process is a process for setting and selecting a notification form of history information on the latest jackpot based on the parameters (an, bn, cn, dn) related to the latest record. In the standard notification form selection process, each parameter is processed as follows.

Parameter a
(0, 1): big hit ← pattern 1 based on the first special symbol set (1, 0): big hit パ タ ー ン pattern 2 based on the second special symbol parameter b
(0, 1): Large open condition big hit 設定 Set pattern I (1, 0): Short open condition big hit 設定 Set pattern II Parameter c
(1, 0): When a big hit in the short open release state is entered into a specific area 特定 pattern a is set (0, 1): no entry into a specific area in a short hit release state ← pattern b is set Parameter d
(1, 0): No entry into a specific area at the big hit in long release release パ タ ー ン Pattern A is set (0, 1): There is an entry in a specific area at big hit in the long release release ← Pattern B is set

  The peripheral control board 4140 stores data of the selected and set pattern in a predetermined area of the RAM (peripheral control SRAM 4150 d). Next, the peripheral control board 4140 analyzes all the records in the parameter management table, and determines whether an abnormality notification form is necessary as a notification form of the history information (S13040). As described above, “There is a ball entering a specific area when a big hit in a short release state,” “No ball enters a specific area at a big hit in a long open state” ends a constant fluctuation after the big hit It is a result that there is some abnormal state in the process of the game ball entering the specific area 6970 for the generation of the game profit to make the winning probability of the big hit the high probability state. And, when such an abnormality occurs continuously, there is a high possibility that the game is progressing while the injustice and the defect occur. Therefore, does the peripheral control board 4140 analyze all records in the parameter management table, analyze the frequency of parameters related to "abnormality", the ratio to all recorded data, etc., and add an abnormality notification form to the standard notification form? It is determined whether or not. The peripheral control board 4140 is different from each other in the abnormality relating to the parameter c (at the big hit in the short open state) and the abnormality relating to the parameter d (at the big hit in the long open state) as described above. In order to distinguish between the parameter c and the parameter d, the determination is usually made, but it is not enough to intentionally prevent the determination of the two together.

  For example, if the record (cn) of the parameter c related to the latest big hit and the record (cn-1) related to the previous big hit are both (1, 0) Although there are two consecutive ball entry into the specific area, there is a high possibility that the game is progressing with some injustice or malfunction occurring. Similarly, when the record (dn) of the parameter d related to the latest big hit and the record (dn-1) related to the previous big hit are both (1, 0), the big hit in the long open release state Since it was twice in a while that it was not possible to enter the specific area, it was assumed that the launch of the game ball was interrupted because the player did not understand the game content. Ru. As described above, when the same type of abnormality continues, the peripheral control board 4140 determines that notification of history information in a mode representing "continuous abnormality" is necessary. The cumulative number of occurrences or the occurrence frequency or the like of the parameter value indicating the abnormality may be compared with a predetermined prescribed value to determine whether or not the abnormality is comparable to the continuous abnormality.

  If the determination of S13040 is affirmed, the peripheral control board 4140 executes an abnormality notification form setting process (S13060). In this process, it is selected and set in what form the notification of the history information in the form of "continuous abnormality" is performed. The peripheral control board 4140 records the set form in a predetermined area of the RAM, performs history information list creation processing S13080 (described later), and ends the game history information notification form setting processing.

・ Parameter a
(1, 0): Big hit based on the first special symbol (pattern 1): Blue background is displayed on the symbol display (0, 1): Big hit based on the second special symbol (pattern 2): Blue background on the symbol display Display the parameter b
(1, 0): Long open big hit (pattern I): Display gold background on the symbol display (0, 1): Short open big hit (pattern II): Display silver background on the symbol display ・ Parameter c
(1,0): Entry to a specific area at the time of a big hit in the short open release state (pattern a): An abnormal identification symbol (u) is displayed superimposed on the color background (0, 1): Big open hit in the short open release state Sometimes no entry into a specific area (pattern b): nothing in particular (no indication of abnormal identification symbol (u) (m))
・ Parameter d
(1,0): No entry into a specific area at the time of a big hit in the long open release state (pattern A): An abnormal identification symbol (m) is displayed superimposed on the color background (0, 1): Big hit in the long open release state Sometimes entering a specific area (Pattern B): None (No indication of abnormal identification symbol (u) (m))
FIG. 127 shows an example of a form in which the abnormality identification symbol (u) or (m) is displayed superimposed on the color background on the screen of the symbol display device 1400A.

  Next, the peripheral control board 4140 refers to the corresponding area of the RAM to check whether there is setup data in the abnormal notification form (S14040). When the setting data of the abnormality notification form is confirmed, an additional notification form to be set as history information of an aspect representing “continuous abnormality” is created based on the abnormality notification form data, and integration is made by combining the addition notification form and the standard notification form. Create a notification form. When there is no data of the abnormality notification form, the integrated notification form combining the additional notification form and the standard notification form is not created. With the integrated notification form thus created, it is possible to notify the history information of the aspect representing "continuous abnormality". The peripheral control board 4140 executes, for example, an emphasizing process on the standard notification form and an addition process such as a decoration process based on the addition notification form to create an integrated notification form. As an example, when the addition notification form is "flashing display of image", the integrated notification form not having the addition notification form is "always displayed (lit display) of standard notification form" and has an addition notification form. The integrated notification form is “flashing display of the standard notification form”. As the additional notification form, it is conceivable to change the shape of the standard notification form or to add another form to the standard notification form. In addition, an additional notification form may be provided according to the degree of occurrence of abnormality such as the cumulative number of abnormal data and the frequency. For example, as an additional notification form, "flashing display of images with long blink intervals (for example, blink every 1 second)" and "flash display of images with short blink intervals (for example, blink every 0.5 seconds)" are provided. When the cumulative number of data is one, the additional notification form is not added, and when the cumulative number of abnormal data is two, “flashing display of image with long flashing interval (for example, flashing every second) Is added as an additional notification form, and when the cumulative number of abnormal data is three or more, “blink display of an image with a short blink interval (for example, blink every 0.5 seconds)” is added as an additional notification form Etc. can be illustrated.

  Then, the peripheral control board 4140 executes notification in the created form (S14060) and ends the flowchart. In the present embodiment, the termination condition of the notification of the history information is "the next big hit game is started". That is, in the present embodiment, the notification period of the history information is "all game period from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit game (in other words, the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) During the display and stop display, during the waiting period until the passage of the valid gate 6010n, and during the demonstration period, and all the periods including the error period)) until the jackpot game is executed next time, The same history information can be displayed continuously regardless of the progress of the game. With this history information, it is possible to check and determine at any time from the outside without interrupting the progress of the game, whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the progress of the big hit that has ended most recently, and it is also possible to leave the evidence. . As a result, it is possible to detect the possibility of fraud early, to detect abnormalities such as firing early, or to cope with the disadvantage received by the player, etc. It becomes possible to suppress giving a sense of disadvantage or mistrust to both companies (to give a sense of security).

  Further, the notification period of the history information may be as follows. For example, the notification period of the history information is "from the end of the short time game after the big hit to the next big hit starts" or "When the gaming state after the big hit is low probability state, after the big hit end From the next to the beginning of the big hit "," if the gaming state after the big hit is high probability state, until the next big hit is started after changing to the normal gaming state "," the game arcade After a predetermined display start operation (such as an operation on a display start switch (not shown) provided on the back of the gaming machine) is performed by the operator, a predetermined period (10 minutes after the display start operation is performed), the first special symbol, the first (2) Notification may be executed by, for example, until the end of the 10 times of the variable display of the special symbol).

  The notification mode of the game history information in the information display device 1400A or the like is different from the display manner of the fourth symbol displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400. The fourth symbol is displayed smaller than the above-described decorative symbol, and is a symbol variably displayed based on the lottery based on the first starting opening and the lottery based on the second starting opening, and the lottery result "O", "X", etc. are displayed on the hit or off of the mark. On the other hand, even if the lottery based on the first starting opening and the lottery based on the second starting opening are performed after the end of the jackpot game, the history information described above is not substantially affected by these, The output (history information) regarding the operation mode of the gaming ball with respect to the specific area is maintained and continued. If the history information is executed on the information display device 1400A which is a member different from the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, it is possible to clearly communicate the history information with the fourth symbol and transmit it to the outside.

  Also, the notification period of the history information may be changed according to the type of parameter. For example, notification of history information regarding parameters c and d is to be executed regardless of the progress of the game in the entire game period from the end of the big hit to the start of the next big hit, while the parameter Notification of the history information about a and b is a predetermined period after the big hit is finished (10 minutes after the display start operation is made, the end of 10 times of the variable display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, etc. And the like can be exemplified. The peripheral control board 4140 updates the history information each time a big hit, so the player and the game arcade operator can check the latest history information. Therefore, the game arcade operator, based on the history information, even though the big hit is in the short open state, the game ball enters the specific area 6770, and the game profit is based on the abnormal state that there is a possibility of fraud. The game profit is based on an abnormal state caused by an incorrect operation on the player side, for example, the game ball could not be entered into the specific area 6770 even though the jackpot was obtained or the big hit was in the long open state. It can be determined easily and reliably whether it can not be obtained.

  In addition, if the game ball passes the specific area 6970, the game ball enters the first starting opening 2003 if the game ball continues to hit the right until it reaches the specified change frequency after the big hit end. Although there is no, when the game ball enters the first starting opening by hitting the left side of the game ball and wins a big hit in the short open state, the gaming state after the big hit is in a low probability state. Even if the player misunderstands that the high probability state of the obtained bribe has been lost, the game arcade operator can carefully explain the misunderstanding to the player based on the history information.

  Next, the above-described history information list creation process (S13080) will be described. The standard notification form and the abnormality notification form described above are performed for the latest big hit game history, but the history information list is created as detailed history information including the game history pertaining to a plurality of big hits in the past Be done. The form of the history information list includes a form including history information related to all the big hit in the past, and a form including only history information on the big hit related to the above-mentioned abnormal game. FIG. 129 shows the former form, and FIGS. 130 and 131 show the latter form. In the history information list, the game ball has passed through the specific area 6970, which distinguishes whether the big hit (per special 1) based on the first special symbol or the big hit (per special 2) based on the second special symbol (V with prize Items to distinguish whether the game ball did not pass through the specific area 6970 (no V winning), items to distinguish whether it is a big hit in the short open state (V short open) or a long open big hit (V long open) And real-time data of RTC is included, for example.

  The peripheral control board 4140 determines the form of the list of history information in accordance with a predetermined policy, creates a history information list based on the parameter management table (FIG. 1283), and records this in a predetermined area of the RAM. In FIG. 131, when the gaming ball passes through the specific area 6770 while being a big hit in the short open state, one or more big hits based on the second special symbol following it are illegal as described above. These jackpots are treated as anomalous because they are likely to be attributable.

  The peripheral control board 4140 executes notification processing of the history information list in accordance with the flowchart of FIG. This flowchart is started, for example, based on timer interrupt processing. The peripheral control board 4140 determines whether or not there is history information list data in the RAM (S15000), and if it is affirmed, the demonstration period (waiting for a customer and the demonstration by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is performed) (S15020)). When the determination is affirmed, notification of the history information list is executed (S15060). The history information list notification is executed by being displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device or the upper dish side liquid crystal display device. When the demonstration period is not in progress, it is determined whether or not there is a notification request (S15040), and even when this is affirmed, notification of the history information list is executed (S15060). A notification request can be set by executing a predetermined operation on a menu displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device or the upper tray side liquid crystal display device. The peripheral control board 4140 can continue the notification of the history information list until the demonstration screen display ends or the notification request of the history information list ends. By the notification of the history information list, the player and the game arcade operator can easily check the history of the big hit game. This makes it possible to easily confirm and determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the progression of a plurality of jackpots executed in the past, and it is also possible to leave the evidence thereof. As a result, it is possible to detect the possibility of fraud, detect abnormalities such as firing, or cope with the disadvantage received by the player, so that both the player and the game arcade operator can It is possible to suppress (provide a sense of security) giving

  Further, instead of the notification of the history information in the information display device 1400A, it is also possible to notify the history information using a rotatable combination as shown in FIG. 128, for example, as described above. In this form, three rotary roles (1) to (3) aligned in the left-right direction are provided in a predetermined area of the game board so as to be visible from the outside. The first series of rotary characters (1) located at the leftmost side is associated with the parameter a, and has “a part of red background” and “a part of blue background” on the outer peripheral surface, and is rotated It is possible to switch between the "red background part" and the "blue background part", and by stopping it, one of the "red background part" and the "blue background part" can be viewed from the outside Display to be In addition, the second series rotary character (2) located in the middle is related to the parameter b, and has “a part with a gold background” and “a part with a silver background” on the outer peripheral surface and rotates It is possible to switch between "the site of gold background" and "the site of silver background", and by stopping, one of "the site of gold background" and "the site of silver background" can be viewed from the outside Display to be In addition, the third rotary character (3) located at the rightmost position relates to the parameters c and d, and has “a part of red background” and a “part of blue background” on the outer peripheral surface, By rotating, it is possible to switch between "the part where the identification symbol u is described" and "the part where the identification symbol m is described", and by stopping, "the part where the identification symbol u is described" One of "the part where the identification symbol m is described" is displayed so as to be visible from the outside. The peripheral control board 4140 controls the rotation and stop of the three rotary roles based on the above-mentioned parameters, and reports the history information concerning the previous big hit by combining the stop modes of the three rotary roles. To be possible. Furthermore, even if there is a power-off, RAM clear, etc. in the notification form using such a rotating combination, the initialization operation to return each rotating combination to the initial position is not performed. Good. In this way, even if there is no backup or the like mounted on the peripheral control board 4140, it is possible to reliably maintain the notification of the history information pertaining to the previous big hit even if there is a power off, RAM clear, etc. .

  Further, in place of the notification of the history information in the information display device 1400A, the history information may be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400. In this case, in order to clarify the distinction from the fourth symbol described above, it is different from the display region in which the fourth symbol is displayed (for example, the display region at the upper right corner of the game board liquid crystal display device 1400). It is preferable to display history information in a display area (for example, a display area in the lower left corner of the game board liquid crystal display device 1400). In addition, instead of the notification of the history information in the information display device 1400A, a predetermined LED lamp or the like is made to emit light in an aspect according to the progress of the game (e.g. different emission colors according to the combination of the parameters a to d mentioned above) The history information may be notified by.

  The present invention is applied to a type of gaming machine in which the gaming state is set to the high probability state until the specified fluctuation number is reached after the big hit game is over when the gaming ball passes through the specific area 6970. Although the present invention has been described, the present invention may be applied to a type of gaming machine in which the gaming state is set to the high probability state until the next big hit is won after the end of the big hit game. In this type of gaming machine, the expected gaming profit may be balanced by making the proportion of the short opening state occupying in the large hitting greater than that of the former gaming machine.

  Furthermore, in the gaming machine described above, the termination trigger of the high probability state after the end of the big hit game is the fluctuation of the specified number of times, but in order to make the high probability state fall to the low probability state each time the big hit lottery The present invention may be applied to a gaming machine of a type in which the high probability state is ended when a lottery is performed and a fall lottery is won. In the case of such a type of gaming machine, the history information may be displayed continuously until the next big hit is started even after winning the fall lottery. .

  In the lottery based on the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the present invention is also applied to a gaming machine of a type that establishes a jackpot gaming condition device when a gaming ball passes a specific area, where a jackpot lottery is executed. The history information of the operation form of the gaming ball for the specific area may be notified by applying. In this gaming machine, based on the entry of the game ball to the first starting opening and the second starting opening, the drawing of the small hitting mentioned above is performed, and when the small hitting is won, the big winning opening is opened by the low round number During this time, it is known as a so-called single-type two-mixer that generates a big hit when the game ball enters the specific area.

  In the above embodiment, the pachinko machine is the same as an insertion medium such as a game ball, which is a medium that the player inserts into the game machine, and a game medium which is a medium used for a substantial game played by the player. It is a kind of gaming machine of the type in which a game is performed using a medium such as a gaming ball inserted therein. Specifically, “The launcher that launches the game ball in response to the operation of the operation handle, and a suitable device such as a large number of obstacle nails, a center role, a display means, etc. are incorporated, a start winning opening, a big prize A game area provided with a proper ball entry port where game balls such as a mouth, a passing port, and an arrival port enter, a rail for guiding the game ball from the launch device to the game area, and a game ball led to the game area According to entering the ball into the ball entrance, according to the ball entering aspect of the game ball into the plurality of ball entrance, it is something which is equipped with the payment means which pays out the specified number of game balls as the winning balls.

  In addition, there are various types of pachinko machines, and a ball entry state detection means (i.e., a gaming state for detecting the ball entry state to the ball entry port) represented by a commonly called "digi pachi" Detection means), lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when the ball entry is detected by the ball entry state detection means, special symbol display means for varying the special symbol according to the lottery result of the lottery means and stopping the variation "In addition to the above," is further provided with effect image display means for causing a character or the like to appear at a predetermined timing while fluctuating display of a decorative symbol row consisting of a plurality of decorative symbols during fluctuation of a special symbol " In general, represented by what is referred to as a "multi-function machine" "also provided with a lottery means for performing a lottery by the distribution of gaming balls in the character and a lottery means for performing a lottery by winning in the starting opening Generally, it is represented by what is referred to as "arepachi" "For example, one game is played with a predetermined number of game balls such as 16 pieces, and the ball entering mode of the game balls to a plurality of ball entrances in one game" In accordance with this, it is possible to exemplify “a game player who pays out a predetermined number of game balls” and the like.

  Further, the effect display device in the above embodiment is preferably a liquid crystal display device, but is not necessarily limited to the liquid crystal display device. It may be a display device such as an EL display device, a plasma display device, and a CRT.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame
3 door frame 4 body frame 5 game board 5a game area 200 dish unit 201 upper dish (storage part)
210 Plate unit base 212 Upper plate body (storage section)
212a Inductive passage section 220 rendering operation unit 220A mounting base unit 220B touch unit 220C button unit 244 upper dish liquid crystal display device (image display device)
246 Touch panel 257 Upper dish effect button (press button)
260 Plate unit cover (expansion member)
261 Lower plate opening 262 Upper plate lower cover

Claims (1)

A lottery is performed based on the passage of game media through the start area provided in the gaming area, and if the result of the lottery is a predetermined result, control is made to a special gaming state more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. A gaming machine capable of providing predetermined gaming benefits when gaming media pass through a specific area in the special gaming state,
Special game state control means capable of controlling the special game state in a plurality of modes in which game media may pass through the specific area;
Peripheral control means for performing predetermined effect control;
Equipped with
The special game state control means has a high probability of passing game media through the specific area when controlling the special game state in a difficult-to-pass mode in which game media is unlikely to pass through the specific area. Controlling the special game state in an aspect,
When a lottery based on the game media having passed the first startup area of the startup areas is performed, the lottery based on the game media having passed the second startup area of the startup areas It is more likely that the special gaming state can be controlled in the difficult-to-pass mode by the special gaming state control means than in the case where the special game state is controlled, and the special gaming state can be controlled in the easy passing mode. Is low,
The peripheral control means
When a game medium passes the specific area in the special game state controlled in the difficult passage mode, when a game medium passes the specific area in the special game state controlled in the easy passage mode Abnormal alarm control for notifying passage of the specific area in a predetermined mode that is not performed is started based on satisfaction of a condition for starting notification,
When the lottery based on the game medium having passed through the first start area while performing the abnormality notification control, or the lottery based on the game medium having passed through the second start area is performed It is possible to continue to carry out the anomaly notification control under execution,
Furthermore, even if the special gaming state is newly controlled in the difficult passage mode or the easy passage mode while performing the abnormality notification control, the abnormality notification control in progress may be continuously performed. It is possible, even if the newly controlled special game state is the difficult-to-pass mode and game media passes through the specific area in the newly controlled special game state, it is still being executed. A game machine characterized by being left without clearing the abnormality notification control.